VOLUME 2 OF 3 Divisions 2-14 BP 74 ORAN M. …...DALLAS INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT 2008 BOND PROGRAM Project Manual VOLUME 2 OF 3 Divisions 2-14 BP 74 ORAN M. ROBERTS E.S. (Org. 202)

DALLAS INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT 2008 BOND PROGRAM

Project Manual VOLUME 2 OF 3 Divisions 2-14

BP 74

ORAN M. ROBERTS E.S. (Org. 202)

100% Construction Documents

PROGRAM MANAGER JACOBS

A/E FIRM

NR2 Architects, Inc.

Civil: Pacheco Koch Structural: TMBP+Click

MEP Engineers: Meza Engineering, Inc. IT/Security: ATG Group

Landscape: CFZ Group Roof Consultants: DryTec Kitchen: Ackerman Barnes

Estimating: Altwein

12/30/2011

View this project and many more for free at http://bids.ContractorsPlanRoom.com


SECTION 00 01 10 – TABLE OF CONTENTS

Dallas ISD 2008 Bond Program BP 74 00 01 10 Page 1 of 7 12/30/11

Org. 202 - Oran M. Roberts Elementary School - 3 Volumes

VOLUME 1 - Divisions 0-1 DIVISION 0

00 01 00 Project Manual Cover 00 01 01 Project Title Page 00 01 07 Seals Page 00 01 10 Table of Contents 00 01 15 List of Drawing Sheets 00 11 13 Advertisement for CSP Proposal Requirements 00 11 17 Intention to Propose Form 00 21 13 Instructions to Proposers Project Information 00 31 00 Available Project Information Geotechnical Exploration (Alpha Report No. G110346 Dated 6/15/11) Supplemental Geotechnical Exploration (Alpha Report No. G110346-A dated 8/29/11) Supplemental Geotechnical Exploration (Alpha Report No. G110346-B dated 10/6/11) Formation Thermal Conductivity Test and Data Analysis Report (IEG dated 7/19/11) 00 31 18 School Operation Parameters Statement Proposal Documents 00 41 10 Overall Proposal Packaging Checklist 00 41 11 Proposal Form – Base Bid (Part 1-A of the CSP) 00 41 12 Proposal Form – Alternates and Unit Pricing (Part 1-A of the CSP) 00 41 13 Technical Proposal (Part 1-B of the CSP) 00 43 13 Proposal Guarantee Bond (Part 1-A of the CSP) 00 43 43 Prevailing Wage Rates Schedule 00 45 20 Certificate of Non-Discrimination (Part 1-A of the CSP) 00 45 21 Felony Conviction Notification (Part 1-A of the CSP) 00 45 22 Notification of Hazardous Materials Affidavit (Part 1-A of the CSP) 00 45 23 Family Conflict of Interest Questionnaire (Part 1-A of the CSP) 00 45 24 Conflict of Interest Questionnaire for vendor or other person doing business with local

governmental entity (Part 1-A of the CSP) 00 45 25 Non-Collusion Offer Form (Part 1-A of the CSP) 00 45 26 Vendor Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility & Voluntary Exclusion and Felony Conviction

Notification & Criminal Background Check (Part 1-A of the CSP) 00 45 39 MWBE Compliance Guidelines and Forms (Part 2 of the CSP) Contract Forms 00 52 10 Standard form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor 00 52 11 General & Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for Construction 00 55 00 Notice to Proceed Forms 00 61 13 13 Performance Bond Form 00 61 13 16 Payment Bond Form 00 73 19 Dallas ISD Safety Manual DIVISION 01 General Requirements 01 10 00 Summary of Work 01 21 00 Allowances 01 22 00 Unit Prices 01 23 00 Alternates




01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 29 00 Payment Procedures 01 29 73 Schedule of Values 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 35 43 EPA Lead-Based Paint Renovation, Repair, and Painting Program

01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 42 00 References 01 45 23 01 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC (FOR INFORMATION ONLY – BY OWNER) 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 52 14 Temporary Facilities for Students 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 73 00 Execution 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures Closeout Checklist Attic Stock Checklist 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training

VOLUME 2 - Divisions 2-14 DIVISION 02 Existing Conditions 02 41 13 Selective Demolition

DIVISION 03 Concrete 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 41 13 Precast Concrete Hollow Core Planks 03 52 16.13 Cellular Concrete Insulating Fill

DIVISION 04 Masonry 04 05 13 Masonry Mortaring and Grout 04 20 00 Masonry Unit 04 72 00 Cast Stone Masonry

DIVISION 05 Metals 05 12 00 Structural Steel 05 21 00 Steel Joists 05 31 00 Steel Deck 05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing 05 50 00 Miscellaneous Metal Fabrication 05 51 13 Metal Pan Stairs 05 51 30 Ladder 05 52 00 Handrails & Railings




DIVISION 06 Wood, Plastics, and Composites 06 10 00 Carpentry 06 41 00 Custom Millwork

DIVISION 07 Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 11 13 Bituminous Damproofing 07 13 54 Thermoplastic Sheet Waterproofing 07 21 16 Batt Insulation 07 25 00 Weather Resistant Barrier 07 26 00 Vapor Retarders 07 41 13 Metal Roof Panels 07 52 00 Modified Bitumen Membrane Roofing 07 60 00 Sheet Metal Work 07 71 00 Roof Specialties 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 92 00 Joint Sealers & Caulking 07 95 13 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies

DIVISION 08 Openings

08 11 13 Metal Doors and Frames 08 14 00 Wood Doors 08 31 00 Access Doors and Frames 08 33 33 Security Grilles 08 41 13 Aluminum Frames Entrances (Doors) 08 43 13 Aluminum Framed Storefronts 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows 08 56 56 Security Window Screens 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing 08 91 19 Fixed Louvers

DIVISION 09 Finishes 09 26 00 Gyp Board Assemblies 09 30 13 Tiling 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings 09 51 13 Cementitious Wood Fiber Ceilings (Tectum) 09 51 14 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 54 36 Suspended Decorative Grid 09 64 01 Wood Stage Flooring 09 64 66 Wood Athletic Flooring System 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring and Base 09 66 23 Epoxy Resin Terrazzo 09 68 00 Carpeting 09 84 13 Fixed Sound Absorptive Panels 09 84 14 Sound Absorptive Canopies 09 84 39 Acoustical Ceiling Clouds 09 91 00 Painting




DIVISION 10 Specialties 10 11 00 Visual Display Surfaces 10 14 00 Plastic Interior Signage 10 14 19 Dimensional Letters 10 14 23 Post and Panel Signage 10 21 13 Toilet Partitions 10 21 23.13 Cubicle Curtains 10 22 13 Wire Mesh Partitions 10 26 00 Corner Guards 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories 10 28 13.13 Electric Hand Dryers 10 43 13 Defribulator Cabinets 10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers & Cabinets 10 51 13 Metal Lockers 10 56 13 Metal Shelving 10 56 26 Manual/Mechanical Assist Mobile Storage Shelving 10 71 13 Exterior Sun Control Devices 10 73 33 Marquee 10 75 00 Flagpoles DIVISION 11 Equipment 11 13 13 Loading Dock Bumpers 11 16 16 Floor Safe 11 31 13 Residential Appliances 11 40 00 Food Service Equipment 11 51 19 Book Theft Protection Equipment 11 52 13 Motorized Screen 11 61 53 Stage Curtains 11 66 00 Athletic Equipment 11 68 13 Playground Equipment (2-5) 11 68 13.13 Playground Equipment (5-12) 11 95 05 Kiln

DIVISION 12 Furnishings 12 21 00 Louver Blinds 12 24 00 Motorized Black-out Shades 12 56 51 Library Furniture 12 93 13 Bike Racks DIVISION 13 Special Construction Not Used DIVISION 14 Conveying Equipment 14 20 00 Elevators




VOLUME 3 - Divisions 21-42 Facility Services Subgroup DIVISION 21 Fire Suppression 21 13 13 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems

DIVISION 22 Plumbing 22 05 00 Common Work Results For Plumbing 22 05 16 Expansion Fittings And Loops For Plumbing Piping 22 05 19 Meters And Gages For Plumbing Piping 22 05 23 General-Duty Valves For Plumbing Piping 22 05 29 Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping And Equipment 22 05 33 Heat Trace For Plumbing Piping 22 05 53 Identification For Plumbing Piping And Equipment 22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping 22 11 19 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 22 13 16 Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping 22 13 19 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 22 13 23 Sanitary Waste Interceptors 22 14 13 Facility Storm Drainage Piping 22 14 23 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties 22 14 29 Sump Pumps 22 33 00 Electric Domestic Water Heaters 22 34 00 Fuel Fired Domestic Water Heaters 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures 22 47 00 Drinking Fountains And Water Coolers DIVISION 23 Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning

23 00 10 General Provisions - HVAC 23 05 00 Common Work Results For HVAC 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements For HVAC Equipment 23 05 19 Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping 23 05 29 Hangers And Supports For HVAC Piping And Equipment 23 05 48 Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 53 Identification For HVAC Piping And Equipment 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation 23 09 24 Building Management Control System LON 23 11 23 Facility Natural-Gas Piping 23 21 14 Ground-Loop Heat-Pump Piping 23 31 13 Metal Ducts 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators 23 37 13 Diffussers, Registers And Grilles 23 72 00 Air and Air Energy Recovery Equipment 23 81 46 Water-Source Unitary Heat Pumps 23 82 39 Unit Heaters




DIVISION 25 Integrated Automation Not Used

DIVISION 26 Electrical 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems 26 09 43 Network Lighting Controls 26 22 13 Low Voltage Distribution Transformers 26 24 13 Switchboards 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 13 Fuses 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 29 13 Enclosed Controllers 26 33 53 Static Uninterruptible Power Supply 26 41 13 Facility Lightening Protection 26 43 13 Transient Voltage Suppression 26 51 13 Lighting Fixtures, Lamps, and Ballasts 26 55 61 Theatrical Lighting

DIVISION 27 Communications 27 05 00 Common Work Results For Communications 27 05 28 Cable Trays for Communication Systems 27 11 00 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling 27 41 00 Audio Visual Systems 27 51 23 Intercommunications And Program System

DIVISION 28 Electrical Safety and Security 28 16 00 Security Monitoring System 28 25 00 Security Door Access Control Infrastructure 28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm System




Site and Infrastructure Subgroup DIVISION 31 Earthwork 31 00 00 Earthwork 31 10 00 Site Clearing 31 23 00 Excavation & Fill 31 25 00 Erosion & Sedimentation Controls 31 31 16 Termite Control 31 32 13.19 Lime Treated Base Courses 31 63 29 Drilled Concrete Piers

DIVISION 32 Exterior Improvements 32 13 13 Portland Cement Concrete Paving 32 14 13.13 Interlocking Concrete Unit Paving 32 17 13 Parking Bumpers 32 17 23 Pavement Markings 32 31 13 Chain Link Fences and Gates 32 31 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates 32 84 00 Landscape Irrigation 32 90 00 Planting 32 92 00 Turf and Grasses DIVISION 33 Utilities 33 10 00 Water Utilities 33 30 00 Sanitary Sewerage Utilities 33 40 00 Storm Drainage Utilities 33 46 13.13 Foundation & Drainage 33 51 00 Natural Gas Distribution DIVISION 34 Transportation Not Used DIVISION 35 Waterway and Marine Not Used

Process Equipment Subgroup DIVISION 42 42 15 00 Industrial Ovens (Kiln) - See 11 95 05 Divisions 40-49 – Subgroup Not Used

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS



SECTION 02 41 13

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 02 41 13 Page 1 Selective Demolition Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to work in this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Required demolition of designated existing elements B. Salvage of designated items

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Comply with NFPA 1 – Chapter 29 and NFPA 241 Standard for Safeguarding Construction Alteration and Demolition Operation 2000 Edition

B. International Building Code - IBC 1.4 NOTIFICATION OF OWNERS OF UTILITY LINES AND EQUIPMENT

A. Notify the Owner or local authority owning any conduits, wires, pipes, or equipment affected by demolition work.

B. Arrange for removal or relocation of affected items and pay fees or costs in conjunction with removal or relocation, except as otherwise noted.

1.5 PROTECTION

A. Prior to starting any work on site, provide a safety plan as outlined in Section 423 FBC to the Building Department for approval.

B. Coordinate the implementation of the safety plan with the Building Department, Campus Police, School Representative, and Program Management.

C. Prior to starting demolition operations, provide necessary protection of existing spaces and items to remain.

D. Owner may be continuously occupying areas of the building immediately adjacent to areas of selective demolition. If Owner continues to occupy the facility comply with the following: 1. Conduct demolition work in a manner that will minimize need for disruption of the Owners normal

operations. 2. Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of Owner's personnel and

public to and from occupied portions of the facilities. 3. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner of demolition activities that will impact

Owners normal operations. a. Obtain specific approval from Owner for impact.

E. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items to be demolished. 1. Owner will maintain conditions at time of commencement of contract insofar as practical.

F. Protect any exposed existing finish work that is to remain during demolition operations. G. Erect and maintain dust proof partitions, closures, and ventilator system as required preventing the

spread of dust or fumes to occupied portions of the building. 1. Take whatever precautions necessary to minimize impact on occupied areas.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable codes for demolition of structures, safety of adjacent structures, dust control, runoff, and erosion control, and disposal of demolished materials.

B. Obtain required permits from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. D. Do not close or obstruct roadways, sidewalks, and hydrants, without permits. E. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when discovering hazardous or contaminated materials.

1. Contact the Architect and Owner immediately. F. Test soils around buried tanks for contamination. G. No demolition will occur during school hours without the written permission of the Owner.

1.7 EXPLOSIVES

A. The use of explosives is strictly prohibited. PART 2 PRODUCTS - (Not applicable)


SECTION 02 41 13

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 02 41 13 Page 2 Selective Demolition Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify the proper disconnection and capping of all abandoned utilities. B. Verify that required barricades and other protective measures are in place. C. Provide necessary shoring, bracing, and other precautions required for proper support of existing

structure during cutting and demolition operations. D. Photograph existing conditions of structure, surfaces, equipment and surrounding spaces that could be

misconstrued as damage resulting from selective demolition work; submit photographs and written report of existing damage to Architect prior to starting work. 1. Contractor shall repair damage caused to existing facilities at no cost to Owner unless they can

provide documentation is indicating pre-existing damage. 3.2 DEMOLITION OPERATIONS

A. Comply with alteration precautions and procedures specified in Section 01 35 16. B. Cut and remove elements and equipment as designated on Drawings.

1. Remove elements in their entirety unless otherwise indicated. C. Execute demolition in a careful and orderly manner with least possible disturbance or damage to adjoining

surfaces and structure. D. Exercise extreme caution in cutting and demolition of portions of existing structure.

1. Obtain approval of Architect prior to cutting or removing structural members for any reason. E. Avoid excessive vibrations in demolition procedures that may transmit through existing structure and

finish materials. F. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations,

laws, and ordinances concerning assessment, removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution and immediately contact the District’s ECO.

3.3 DISPOSAL

A. Materials, equipment, and debris resulting from demolition operations shall become property of Contractor. 1. Remove demolition debris at least once each day in accordance with applicable City, State, and

Federal Laws. B. Cover debris in trucks with approved netting to prevent spillage during transportation. C. Do not store except in approved containers or burn materials on site.

1. Remove combustible waste materials in a manner approved by local Fire Department. 2. Remove, handle, and dispose of any hazardous waste and debris in accordance with applicable

City, State, and Federal Laws. D. Transport demolition debris to off-site disposal area and legally dispose of debris. E. Use street routes specifically designated by City for hauling debris. F. When possible dispose of material to recycling centers.

3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR

A. Leave building broom clean and free of debris, ready to receive new work. B. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required.

1. Return structures and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to commencement of selective demolition.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 03 10 00

CONCRETE FORMWORK

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 03 10 00 Page - 1 Concrete Formwork Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 1.2 FORMWORK FOR CONCRETE

A. Related accessories 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete Buildings B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete C. ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete D. ACI SP-4: Formwork for Concrete E. ANSI/ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators F. ASTM E1643 - -Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or

Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs G. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill

under Concrete Slabs H. ASTM 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and

Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Concrete Formwork: For surfaces of cast-in-place concrete to be unexposed or to receive rubbed finish. B. Form footings and slabs on grade, earth forming is not allowed.

C. Design/Performance Requirements: Design, engineering and construction of formwork and shoring is the

responsibility of the Contractor. 1. Design formwork with sufficient strength to withstand forces due to placement and vibration and

sufficient rigidity to maintain specified tolerances. 2. Design loads, lateral pressure, and allowable stresses in accordance with ACI 347.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Proprietary materials and items, including forming accessories, water stops, joint systems,

and others PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS

A. Concrete Forms for Beams, Columns, and Slabs: 1. New or properly reconditioned material designed to conform to requirements of ACI SP-4 and to

support wet concrete without deflection. 2. Plywood Panels: PS-1 B-B plywood, Class 1, EXT-APA, sanded, mill oiled, and edge sealed.

B. Cylindrical Column Forms: 1. Metal, fiberglass reinforced plastic, or paper or fiber tubes. 2. Construct paper or fiber tubes of laminated plies using water-resistant adhesive with wax-

impregnated exterior for weather and moisture protection. a. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist loads imposed by wet concrete without

deformation. C. Carton Forms:

1. Suretops, Sureround PierVoid, WallVoid, Slabvoid Products by SureVoid Products, Inc. or approved equal.

2. SureCover Board Protection board by SureVoid Products, Inc. or approved equal.


SECTION 03 10 00

CONCRETE FORMWORK


3. SureRetainer by Motzblock soil retainer.

2.2 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Vapor Retarder: Related section 07 26 00. B. Form Coatings: Colorless commercial formulation form release and sealer compounds that will not bond

with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

C. Form Ties: Adjustable length, removable or snap off metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete upon removal, 1½" break back, and maximum hole left 1¼" diameter.

D. Bevels and Rustications: Wood strips milled to shapes indicated or formed rigid plastic strips. E. Dovetail Anchor Slots: 24-ga. galvanized steel with release tape sealed slots and bent tab anchors. F. Flashing Reglets shall be 16-oz. copper with release tape sealed slots and alignment splines at end joints. G. Construction Joints shall be 24-ga. galvanized steel keyway form type with knockout holes spaced 6" o. c.

to receive doweling. H. Carton Forms: Fiberboard void boxes capable of supporting wet concrete. I. Form Joint System for Architectural Concrete Forms:

1. Gaskets shall be closed cell foam tape - Source Product/Mfg. - No. 4016 by 3M. 2. Caulk: Rubberized, non-staining silicone compound GE Product/Mfg. - No. 1201. 3. Tape: 1 or 2 mil Mylar - source Product/Mfg. - No. 371 by 3M.

J. Mastic Water stop: Preformed plastic or butyl resin strips. Source Products/Mfg: 1. Synko-Flex/Synko-Flex Products Co. 2. ConSeal CS-102/Concrete Sealants

K. Joint Fillers: Pre-molded mastic strips, asphalt impregnated, ASTM D1751. L. Fasteners and Anchorages: Nails, spikes, bolts, lag bolts, and other types sized as required to maintain

formwork in place. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify lines, levels, and measurements required before proceeding with formwork. B. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, reinforcing steel, and vapor retarders with placement of forms.

3.2 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Allowable tolerances for Structural Concrete Forms shall comply with ACI 301 and 347. B. Allowable tolerances for camber in slabs and beams shall comply with ACI 301.

C. Allowable tolerances for plumbness in elevator shafts shall comply with requirements of ANSI/ASME

A17.1. 3.3 ERECTION

A. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral, static, and dynamic loads that may occur before permanent bracing can support such loads.

B. Construction: 1. Construct formwork so finished concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape,

alignment, elevation, and position. 2. Build formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock, or damage to cast-in-place concrete

surfaces and adjacent materials. 3. Provide openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers,

blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required. 4. Solidly butt joints and provide back-up at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste.


SECTION 03 10 00

CONCRETE FORMWORK


5. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal.

6. Provide temporary openings at bottoms of forms to facilitate cleanout and inspection. a. Close openings with tight fitting panels and neat joints so that joints will not be apparent in

exposed concrete surfaces. C. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, or if not indicated, provide ¾" x ¾". D. Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades.

1. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. 2. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.

E. Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. 1. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. 2. Retighten forms and bracing after concrete placement to eliminate mortar leaks and maintain proper

alignment. F. Construction Joints:

1. Locate and install formed construction joints at rustications or, if not indicated, locate so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, and as approved by the A/E.

2. Provide keyways at least 1½" deep in construction joints in walls, slabs, and between walls and footings; accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs.

3. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. a. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, except as otherwise indicated.

G. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Construct continuous joint filler at points of contact between slabs-on-ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundations walls, grade beams, and elsewhere as indicated.

H. Water stops: Provide mastic water stops in construction joints of below grade walls and in joints between below grade slabs and walls, where shown on drawings. 1. Install water stops to form continuous diaphragm in each joint. 2. Fabricate field joints in water stops in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

I. Form Coatings: Apply after erecting forms and sealing the joints but prior to placing reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. 1. Seal surfaces of wood rustications with two coats of form sealer. 2. Spray-apply one coat of release agent to formwork faces except concrete surfaces scheduled to

receive special finishes or special coatings. 3. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust- preventative form oil to protect against rusting.

a. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable. J. Embedded Items: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other

work attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. K. Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E1643 and

manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 RE-USE OF FORMS

A. Clean re-used forms of concrete matrix residue, repair, and patch as required returning forms to acceptable surface condition.

B. Recoat contact surfaces of forms with a form-coating compound as specified. 3.5 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SHORING

A. Remove formwork and shoring progressively and in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 347. B. In the event the Contractor wishes to remove formwork at an earlier time than specified, the Contractor

shall pay for and have testing laboratory obtain two additional concrete test cylinders to confirm strength requirement for early form removal.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 03 20 00

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 03 20 00 Page - 1 Concrete Reinforcement Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Reinforcing steel bars, wire fabric and accessories for cast-in-place concrete 1.2 REFERENCES

A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements For Reinforced Concrete C. ACI SP-66 - American Concrete Institute - Detailing Manual D. ASTM A82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement E. ASTM A184 - Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement F. ASTM A185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete G. ASTM A496 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire Deformed for Concrete Reinforcement H. ASTM A497 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement Deformed for Concrete I. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement J. ASTM A706/A706M - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement K. ASTM A767 /A767M- Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement L. ASTM A775 /A775M- Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars M. ASTM D3963/D3963M - Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing

Bars N. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel O. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute - Manual of Standard Practice P. CRSI - Placing Reinforcing Bars Q. IBC 1704.4 - Requirements for Concrete Construction

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals Procedures B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacing, locations, splicing and laps, and quantities of reinforcing steel and

wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing devices. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals Procedures B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis.

1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Design shall comply with ACI 318. B. Do not weld reinforcing steel, unless noted on Drawings. Weldable rebar shall comply with ASTM A706.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301. Maintain one copy of document on site. B. Design reinforcement under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this

work and licensed in the State of Texas. C. Submit under provisions of Section 01 40 00 Manufacturer's Certificates, certifying welders employed on the work,

verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, Grade 60; deformed carbon steel bars, unfinished B. Stirrup and Tie Steel: ASTM A615, 60; deformed carbon steel bars, unfinished C. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 Plain Type; in flat sheets and rolls; unfinished D. Steel Wire: ASTM A82, plain, cold drawn, steel


SECTION 03 20 00

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 03 20 00 Page - 2 Concrete Reinforcement Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type or patented system. B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Size and shape for strength and reinforcement support during concrete

placement, include load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor barrier puncture. C. Special Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, and Spacers Adjacent to Exposed Concrete Surfaces: Galvanized or

Plastic coated steel type; size and shape as required. 2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with ACI 318. B. Weld reinforcement in accordance with AWS D1.4. C. Locate reinforcing splices not shown on plans, at point of minimum stress and review with A/E.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PLACEMENT

A. Place support and secure reinforcement against displacement, without deviating from the required position. B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier. C. Accommodate placement of formed openings. D. Conform to applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Architect, Owner, or Building Department may request field inspections per Section 01 40 00 1.7 Inspection Services.

B. Comply with IBC requirements 1704.4 for Concrete Construction.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 03 30 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 03 30 00 Page - 1 Cast-in-Place Concrete Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011


A. Cast-in-place concrete building frame members, floors, shear walls, elevator shaft walls, foundation walls, footings, and supported slabs.

B. Floors and slabs on grade. C. Control, expansion, and contraction joint devices associated with concrete work, including joint sealants. D. Equipment pads, light pole base, flagpole base, thrust blocks, and manholes. E. Liquid Floor Hardener and Sealer

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete B. ACI 211.2 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete C. ACI 301 – Specifications Structural Concrete for Buildings D. ACI 302 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. E. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete F. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting. G. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting. H. ACI 308 - Standard Specification for Curing Concrete I. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete J. ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete K. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,

Profiles, and Tubes L. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates M. ASTM C39C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens N. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete O. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification Portland Cement P. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete Q. ASTM C330 - Standard Specification Light Weight Aggregates for Structural Concrete R. ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete S. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcinated Natural Pozzolan for Use in

Concrete T. ASTM C948 – Standard Test Method for Dry and Wet Bulk Density, Water Absorption and Apparent

Porosity of Thin Sections of Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Concrete U. ASTM C1017/C1017M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing

Concrete V. ASTM D994 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type) W. ASTM D1190 - Standard Specification for Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot-Applied Elastic Type X. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and

Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) Y. ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion

Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. Z. IBC 1704.4 - Requirements for Concrete Construction

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. 31 00 00 Earthwork B. 31 31 16 Termite Control C. 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork D. 07 26 00 Vapor Retarders E. 07 92 00 Sealants

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW and INFORMATION

A. Section 01 33 00 Submittals Procedures B. Product Data: Provide data on joint devices, attachment accessories, admixtures, curing compound,

sealers, and integral coloring.


SECTION 03 30 00



C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent Work.

D. Samples: Submit two 12" long samples of expansion/contraction joint and control joint. E. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit drawings indicating the locations of all joints in the concrete; construction joints, expansion joints, and contraction joints.

2. Include concrete placement schedule, method, sequence, quantities, location, and boundaries. 1.5 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Section 01 77 00 Contract Closeout: Procedures for submittals B. Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components concealed from view.


A. Design in conformance with ACI 318, and ACI 301. B. Provide expansion joints, control joints, construction joints, and isolation joints to prevent uncontrolled

stress cracks in the structure and according to the latest engineering standards. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Mix and deliver ready mixed concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. D. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work. E. Conform to ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. F. Conform to ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal, Portland type B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33 with size No. 57, unless otherwise approved in mix design. C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete

2.2 ADMIXTURES

A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260 B. Chemical: ASTM C494

1. Water Reducing - Type A 2. Retarding - Type B 3. Accelerating - Type C 4. Water Reducing and Retarding - Type D 5. Water Reducing and Accelerating - Type E 6. Water Reducing, High Range - Type F 7. Water Reducing, High Range and Retarding - Type G 8. Flowing Concrete - ASTM C1017/C1017M

C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618 2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Bonding Agent: Polymer resin emulsion, Polyvinyl Acetate, Latex emulsion, 2-component-modified epoxy resin, Non-solvent two-component polysulfide epoxy, Mineral filled polysulfide polymer epoxy, Mineral filled polysulfide polymer epoxy-resin, and Versamid cured epoxy.

B. Vapor Barrier: Refer to 07 26 00 C. Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and

plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days.


SECTION 03 30 00



2.4 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS

A. Joint Filler: ASTM D1751; Asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt B. Joint Filler: ASTM D1752; Closed cell polyvinyl chloride foam, resiliency recovery of 95% if not

compressed more than 50% of original thickness C. Construction Joint Devices: Integral galvanized steel; formed to tongue and groove profile, with removable

top strip exposing sealant trough, ribbed steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge. D. Expansion and Contraction Joint Devices: ASTM B221 alloy, extruded aluminum; resilient elastomeric

filler strip with a Shore A hardness of 35 to permit plus or minus 25% joint movement with full recovery; extruded aluminum cover plate, of longest manufactured length at each location, flush mounted; color as selected.

E. Hardener and Sealer: At spaces noted as Sealed Concrete for Finish Floor, Sumbit product data for approval.

1. Apply hardener and sealer for all finished concrete floors that will be left exposed, not receiving additional finish.

2. Apply hardener and sealer in separate coats in accordance with manufacturer's directions and using the maximum quantity recommended. Surface to be treated must be clean and dry, with all work above the floor completed before the hardener and sealer is applied. Upon completion, concrete surfaces shall be clean, without discrepancies, discoloration, or traces of excess hardener left on the surface.

F. Sealant: Cold applied

2.5 CONCRETE MIX

A. Mix concrete in accordance with ACI 304. Deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M B. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301. C. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by A/E

1. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. D. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by A/E E. Add air-entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to exterior F. Maximum water cement ratio: 0.50 to 0.55 G. Slump Limits:

1. Drilled Piers: 5-7 inch 2. Grade Beams: 3-5 inch 3. Slab on Grade: 3-6 inch 4. Other Items: 3-5 inch

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement. C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately

placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. In locations where doweling new concrete to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete; epoxy steel dowels per manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories.

D. Remove all foreign matter and water from forms or structural excavations. 3.3 FORMWORK

A. Conform to ACI 347 B. Form foundations, earth forms not allowed.


SECTION 03 30 00



3.4 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301. B. Notify A/E minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of operations C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed expansion, and contraction joints are not disturbed

during concrete placement. D. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on carton forms over protection board, lap joints minimum 6", and

seal watertight by taping edges and ends, per manufacturer’s recommendations. E. Repair vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing.

1. Repair with vapor retarder material; lay over damaged areas minimum 6" and seal watertight. F. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler. G. Place joint filler in floor slab pattern placement sequence.

1. Set top to required elevations. 2. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.

H. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within ¼" of finished slab surface. 1. Conform to Section 07 92 00 for finish joint sealer requirements.

I. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. J. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence.

1. Set top to required elevations. 2. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.

K. Install joint device anchors. 1. Maintain correct position to allow joint cover to be flush with floor and wall finish.

L. Install joint covers in one-piece length, when adjacent construction activity is complete. M. Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with Section 07 92 00. N. Maintain records of concrete placement.

1. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. O. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. P. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. Q. Place floor slabs in checkerboard or saw cut pattern indicated. R. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing.

1. Use 3/16" thick blade, cut into ¼ depth of slab thickness. S. Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum ⅛" in 10'.

3.5 SEPARATE FLOOR TOPPINGS

A. Prior to placing floor topping, roughen substrate concrete surface, and remove deleterious material, broom and vacuum clean.

B. Place dividers, edge strips, reinforcing, and other items being cast in the pour as required. C. Apply bonding agent to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Place concrete floor toppings to required lines and levels. E. Place topping in checkerboard panels with dimensions not exceeding 20'. F. Screen toppings level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1:1000. G. Floor flatness and levelness to comply with ACI 302.

3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Provide formed concrete surfaces with exposed, concrete walls, columns, beams, joists, with smooth rubbed finish.

B. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301. C. Wood-float the surfaces that receive quarry tile, ceramic tile, and terrazzo with full bed setting system. D. Steel trowel surfaces that receive carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin-set quarry tile, and

thin set ceramic tile. E. Steel trowel surfaces scheduled to be exposed. F. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1:50

nominal. 3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.


SECTION 03 30 00



B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.

C. Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308. D. Ponding: Maintain 100% coverage of water over floor slab areas continuously for 4 days. E. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet for 7 days.


A. Architect, Owner, or Building Department may request field inspections per Section 01 40 00 1.7 Inspection Services

B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to

commencement of Work. D. The Owner may perform tests of cement and aggregates to ensure conformance with specified

requirements. E. Take three concrete test cylinders for every 50 cu yards or less of each class of concrete placed. F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions

as concrete it represents. G. Take one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken. H. Comply with IBC 1704.4 for Concrete Construction

3.9 PATCHING

A. Contractor shall allow A/E to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable; notify A/E upon discovery. C. Patch imperfections in accordance with ACI 301.

3.10 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

A. Defective concrete is concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements.

B. A/E shall determine the repair or replacement of defective concrete. C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair or replace-exposed concrete except upon express direction of A/E for

each individual area.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 03 41 13

PRECAST, PRESTRESSED HOLLOW-CORE SLABS

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 03 41 13 Page - 1 Precast, Prestressed Hollow-Core Slabs Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011


A. Floor planks with prepared openings B. Grouting plank joint keys

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) B. ACI 318: Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete C. American Society for Testing & Materials (ASTM) D. A 416: Stress-Relieved Strand for Prestressed Concrete E. C 33: Concrete Aggregate F. C 150: Portland Cement G. C 330: Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete H. Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI) I. MNL 120: PCI Design Handbook for Precast / Prestressed Concrete J. MNL 116: PCI Manual for Quality Control: Precast / Prestressed Concrete K. MNL 126: PCI Manual for the Design of Hollow-Core Slabs (2nd Edition) l. Underwriters Laboratory M. Fire Resistance Directory

1.3 DESCRIPTION

A. Work Included:

1. These specifications cover manufacture, transportation, and erection of precast, prestressed concrete hollow-core slabs; Including the grouting of joints between adjacent slab units.

2. Furnish all labor and materials for the manufacture, delivery, and installation of hollow-core slabs as specified herein and shown on drawings.


A. Manufacture

1. Manufacturer shall be a firm specializing in providing prestressed concrete products and service of the types specified herein; Also, shall have a proven background of experience and record of performance in fabrication of prestressed hollow-core slabs (minimum 5 years), for projects of this size and scope.

2. Manufacturer shall be a PCI Certified Plant (certified during the previous 12 months) and must have a record of maintaining an active membership with Prestressed Concrete Institute.

3. Where prestressed concrete units are shown or scheduled as requiring a fire resistance classification, provide units that are designed by the PCI Rational Method of Design, as specified in the Standard Building Code or be listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory.

4. Where required, possess a Certificate of Licensing from the State in which the project is to be bid and constructed. Also, if required by any municipality, county, or parish, possess a Certificate of Approval, issued by the Building Inspection Division of that locale.


SECTION 03 41 13



B. Erection

1. Precast, prestressed hollow-core slabs shall be erected into final position under the supervision of the manufacturer's representative. All work performed, will follow the guidelines set forth by PCI, standard building practices, and also as directed by the manufacturer's plant engineer.

2. Material hauled by and / or erected by others without manufacturer's representative present, will become the sole responsibility of the party performing the specified work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be shall be performed under the guidance of a registered engineer and shall include: the layout of the area to be covered; schedule of material required showing identifying marks of each unit; openings that will require steel hangers supplied by the manufacturer; and anchorage details.

B. Design Calculations

1. Design calculations shall be performed by an engineer licensed in the state of the project, and shall be signed and sealed prior to the manufacture of the required material.

2. Specific design calculations shall be performed for areas with special loads and / or penetrations.

C. Support Information

1. Mix design with specific literature for cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, and admixtures used.

2. Material Certification and test reports from the manufacturer of the intended reinforcing strand.

3. Random sampling of a day's casting with a verifiable test report of cylinder break. 4. PCI Plant Certification Audit letter, dated within the last 12 months. If plant is not PCI

certified, an independent testing agency must be employed to conduct 120-point plant audit. 5. If required by the project, the following must also be supplied: UL listing, bearing pad

specification, and State licensing certifications.

D. Erection Information 1. Erection instructions, with installation specification and guidelines. 2. Recommended procedure for cutting openings in slabs and / or installation instructions for

hangered openings. 3. Safety program and fall protection plan, if manufacturer is performing installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or III B. Aggregates: ASTM C33 0r C330 C. Admixtures: Water reducing, retarding, accelerating, high range water reducing - ASTM C494 D. Water: Potable or free from foreign materials in amounts harmful to concrete. E. Prestressing Strand: Uncoated, 3-wire or 7-wire, stress-relieved strand, graded 250K or 270K -

ASTM A416 F. Grout: Cement grout shall be a mixture of not less than one (1) part portland cement and three (3)

parts fine sand with approximately a 6" slump. G. Bearing Pads: Korolath plastic bearing strips (1/8" x 3") shall be non-leaching and support

construction loads with no visible overall expansion. H. Core Hole End Plugs: Cardboard insert and concrete fill; foamed-in-place insulation; glass fiber

insulation, or manufacturers recommended materials.


SECTION 03 41 13



2.2 CONCRETE MIXES

A. Computerized Central Batch Plant 1. Concrete shall be batched to a zero slump consistency without the use of calcium chloride,

chloride ions, or other salts. The minimum compressive strength prior to release of strand shall be 3000 psi with the 28-day compressive strength of the concrete to be a minimum of 5000 psi.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General 1. Precast, prestressed concrete hollow-core slabs shall be machine extruded in one single

operation at a nominal width of 4'-0", nominal thickness as shown on drawings. The top and bottom surface shall be smooth with a chamfered edge located on the bottom of the slab, parallel with the cores / strand. Slabs shall be free of honeycombing. Maximum weight as shown on drawings.

B. Manufacturing Tolerances (PCI Manual for Quality Control MNL-116)

1. Width: Full width unit +/- 1/4" Saw cut unit +/- 1/2" Field split unit +/- 1 1/2" 2. Length: Full unit +/- 1" 3. Thickness: Full unit +/- 1/4" 4. Deviation from square: Full unit +/- 1" 5. Camber: Differential, side-to-side +/- 1/2" Differential, side-to-end +/- 1/2"

from estimated total camber of cross member *Camber is an inherent condition in all prestressed flexural members and the general contractor shall make allowances for the estimated camber shown in design calculations plus or minus a tolerance of 1/2 inch.

C. Openings, Inserts, Embeds

1. All penetrations through precast slabs must be a part of the design and submittal process. An itemized drawing and schedule shall be submitted to the plank engineer prior to fabrication of this material.

2. Openings requiring hanger-type supplementary steel members shall be designed and supplied by the precast manufacturer. In general, most openings running 4'0" perpendicular to cores / strand will require this type of support.

3. Openings that will not require a hanger-type steel member, will be engineered by the plank manufacturer but will be cut or cored by the trade requiring the penetration.

4. Inserts / Embeds will not be provided in extruded precast, prestressed concrete material. Top side embeds may be placed during field erection with the manufacturer's engineering guidance.

5. In no case shall any cut be made to the precast material without consulting the precast manufacturer for approval.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery and Handling 1. Hollow Core slab units shall be lifted and supported during manufacturing, stockpiling,

transporting, and erection operations only at the lifting or supporting point, or both, as shown on the shop drawings, and with approved lifting devices.

2. Transportation, site handling, and erection shall be performed with acceptable equipment and methods, and by qualified personnel.


SECTION 03 41 13



B. Storage 1. Store all units off ground. 2. Place stored units so that identification marks are discernible. 3. Separate stacked members by battens across full width of each slab unit. 4. Stack material so that lifting devices are accessible and undamaged. 5. Do not use upper member of stacked tier as storage area for shorter member or heavy

equipment.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Site Access 1. Suitable access to the building site with proper drainage and a firm, level bearing shall be

provided by the general contractor, for the hauling and erection equipment to operate under their own power.

B. Preparation

1. True, level bearing surfaces shall be provided to the precast slab erector. 2. A minimum cure-time of 36 hours will apply to CMU bond beams and a 72 hour cure time

will be required for concrete bearing surfaces. 3. Plumbing, mechanical - piping, conduit, duct, etc. shall be left below the bearing plane of the

underside of plank material. All cuts for these items will take place after the grouting of the keyed joints.

C. Installation

1. Installation of hollow-core slab units shall be performed by a manufacturer approved erector. 2. Bearing pads shall be placed where required. 3. Members shall be lifted by means of suitable lifting devices at points provided by the

manufacturer. 4. Temporary shoring and bracing, if necessary, shall comply with manufacturers

recommendations. 5. Members shall be properly aligned and leveled as required. Variations between adjacent

members shall be reasonably leveled by means of jacking or loading as per manufacturers recommendation.

6. Grout keys shall be filled with excess removed and disposed. 7. Where applicable, underside chamfer joints and other irregularities shall be grinded to an

industry standard finish.

D. Miscellaneous Work by other trades 1. Top-side grinding, floating, and / or finishing. 2. Topping slabs. 3. Coring or hole cutting. 4. Caulking and joint sealants. 5. Filling or floating of underside chamfered joints. 6. Texture and paint.

3.3 ATTACHMENTS

A. All items that must be attached to hollow-core slabs by mechanical means (i.e.. drilling, shot, etc.), shall be approved by the manufacturer. Should spalling of concrete occur, patching shall be performed by the trade performing the attachment.


SECTION 03 41 13



3.4 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Top of grout shall be adequately smooth to prevent any unevenness that might interfere with the placing of pad, carpet, or roofing. Transitions due to differential levels should not be steeper than 1:12. When installing tile or linoleum, slabs should have a leveling course before applying finished floor covering.

B. When a structural topping is to be applied, slabs are to be thoroughly cleaned and saturated with water prior to the placement of the topping slab, to insure an adequate bond. Structural topping shall have a minimum strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. The overall thickness of the topping slab will vary due to the camber. The minimum thickness of the the topping slab is dictated by the highest camber point plus the Architect / Engineer required minimum slab thickness.

C. Protection of hollow-core slabs from damage, debris, weather (waterproofing), etc. shall become the responsibility of the general contractor once the erector has completed their final clean-up.

END OF SECTION



Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 03 52 16.13 Page - 1 Cellular Concrete Insulating Fill Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 03 52 16.13

CELLULAR CONCRETE INSULATING FILL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Cellular concrete insulating fill roof deck over vented metal decking.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Roof Deck: Corrugated steel decking for cellular concrete roof deck system.

B. Section 07 52 00 - Modified Bitumen Sheet Roofing.

1.03 REFERENCES:

A. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.

B. ASTM C495 - Compressive Strength of Lightweight Insulating Concrete.

C. ASTM C578 - Preformed Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Procedures for Submittals: Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets and mix design. 1. Include proportions of materials and recommended slump in mix design data. 2. Include published thermal performance of ventboard.

C. Samples: One full size sample of insulation board.

D. Quality Control Submittals: For information only. 1. Manufacturer's Instructions: Recommended cold weather installation procedures. 2. Certification: Manufacturer's certification that materials comply with referenced UL

Design.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Applicator: Approved in writing by manufacturer of cellular concrete system.

B. Pre-Installation Conference: Cellular concrete applicator shall attend pre-installation conference specified in Section 07 52 00

C. Thermal Resistance: Install the cellular insulating concrete system to provide for an average thermal value of R-20.

D. Slope: Install cellular insulating concrete system to provide for a minimum positive roof slope of 1/4 inch per foot. Refer to Structural Drawings for slope provided by the roof framing system.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original undamaged packages or bulk containers acceptable to manufacturer.

B. Store materials to protect them from weather and physical damage.

C. Do not use cement which shows indications of moisture damage, caking or other signs of deterioration.



1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Do not place cellular concrete insulating fill on surfaces with standing water present.

B. Cold Weather Procedures: Install cellular concrete insulating fill in compliance with manufacturer's written cold weather procedures when either of the following conditions occurs: 1. Air temperature at time of placement is below 40 degrees F. 2. Air temperature below 40 degrees F is predicted within the first 72 hours after placement.

1.08 COORDINATION:

A. Coordinate with installation schedule of modified bitumen sheet roofing system to facilitate complete installation of roofing system no sooner than 3 days nor later than 7 days after cellular concrete placement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CELLULAR CONCRETE INSULATING FILL SYSTEM:

A. Qualities: Lightweight cellular concrete insulating system incorporating pre-generated foam, and with expanded polystyrene boards embedded within the insulating fill, furnished by a single manufacturer.

B. Source: Insulcel Roof Insulation System by Siplast, Inc. 1. Insulcel Roof Insulation System by Siplast, Inc., is basis of design. 2. Elastizell Insulating Concrete, Range IIB by Elastizell Corporation of America. 3. The Mearl Corp.

2.02 MATERIALS:

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, II, or III.

B. Foam Concentrate: Protein based foam, ASTM C869 and ASTM C796. Insulcel PB Foam Concentrate by Siplast, Inc.

C. Water: Potable.

2.03 RELATED MATERIALS:

A. Expanded Polystyrene Insulation Board: 1. Qualities: Expanded polystyrene insulation board, minimum of 1 lb. nominal density, 24

inch x 48 inch size, thickness required to obtain specified R-value unless otherwise shown on Drawings, with slots and circular hole openings to allow for embedding in cellular concrete slurry.

2. Standard: ASTM C578. 3. Source: Insulperm Insulation Board by Siplast, Inc.

B. Expansion Joint Filler Material: One inch thick fiberglass board.

2.04 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING:

A. Mix Design: Cellular concrete slurry of Portland cement, water and pre-generated foam made from foam concentrate. Mix in proportions as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Mix Physical Properties: 1. Oven Dry Density: 30 pcf. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength: 200 psi, ASTM C495. 3. Density at Placement (Wet): 38-48 pcf.

C. Mixing: Mix required amounts of water, cement and pre-generated foam in mechanical mixer, to produce a workable slurry with a slump as recommended by manufacturer. Check wet density and discharge immediately.



D. Admixtures: Do not use admixtures unless specifically approved in writing by cellular concrete system manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine metal decking and adjacent concrete substrate for suitability to receive cellular concrete fill.

B. Do not place concrete insulating fill on defective decking.

3.02 INSTALLATION:

A. Expanded Polystyrene Insulation Board: Fill corrugation of metal deck with cellular concrete slurry to a minimum of 1/8 inch over top of corrugations. Within 1/2 hour of placing slurry, install insulation board with joints staggered in a brick-like pattern continuously over deck with tight butt joints between boards. Stair-step thickness of insulation board to achieve overall cellular concrete system thicknesses and slopes as scheduled on Drawings.

B. Concrete Insulating Fill: Place 2 inch minimum thickness over insulation board in accordance with approved procedures and screed to a uniform surface and to thickness and slopes detailed. Do not steel trowel, rod, or vibrate.

C. Expansion Joint Filler: Provide joint material continuously at expansion joints in structural deck system and at other detailed locations.

3.03 CURING AND PROTECTION:

A. Curing: Allow cellular concrete insulating system to air dry and cure for 3 days.

B. Protection: Protect cellular concrete insulating fill from traffic until it has reached required strength to withstand loads.

3.04 CLEANING AND PATCHING:

A. Cleaning: Upon completion of roof deck, sweep roof deck clean of debris and foreign matter. Remove concrete stains from other building members.

B. Patching: Perform patching and repairing of insulating concrete using Zono-Patch or other materials approved by cellular insulating concrete manufacturer.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Compressive Strength Testing: Testing as specified in Section 01 40 00.

B. Application Monitoring: Monitor thickness and wet density of cellular insulating concrete at time of placement to determine conformance to specification requirements. Monitor placement of proper thickness of polystyrene insulation board in accordance with Drawings.

C. Fastener Withdrawal Resistance Tests: After cellular concrete insulating system has cured, perform fastener withdrawal resistance tests conducted by an independent testing laboratory or by system manufacturer to determine if a minimum of 40-lb. withdrawal has been achieved. 1. For each roof level of 20,000 sq. ft. or less conduct a minimum of 10 pullouts. 2. For each roof level greater than 20,000 sq. ft. and less than 50,000 sq. ft. conduct a

minimum of 15 pullouts.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 04 05 13

MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 04 05 13 Page - 1 Masonry Mortar and Grout Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011


A. Mortar for Masonry B. Grout for Unit Masonry

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures B. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specifications for Masonry Structures C. ASTM C91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement D. ASTM C94/C94M- Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete E. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar F. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement G. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes H. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry I. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout J. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry K. ASTM C595 - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cement L. ASTM C780 – Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain

and Reinforced Unit Masonry M. ASTM C1019 – Standard Test Method of Sampling and Testing Grout N. IBC - International Building Code

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit mix design for mortar indicating whether to use the proportion or the property specification of ASTM C270.

B. Submit mix design for grout indication conformance of grout to requirements of ASTM C476. C. Submit test reports indicating conformance of mortar materials to property specifications of ASTM C270. D. Submit test reports of pre-construction tests of mortar for consistency, mortar aggregate ratio, water content,

air content, compressive strength, and splitting tensile strength in conformance with ASTM C780. E. Submit test reports of grout tests in conformance to ASTM C1019. F. Submit manufacturer's certificate for products indicating conformance with specified requirements. G. Submit two samples representative of mortar color.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original unopened containers and store in dry weather-tight enclosures.

B. Stockpile and handle aggregates to prevent segregation and contamination. C. Maintain sand for volume proportioning of mortar and grout in a damp loose condition.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Follow requirements of ACI530.1/ASCE6/TMS 602 for cold and hot weather construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Materials: 1. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type M or S, gray color 2. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, gray color 3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S

B. Sand: ASTM C144


SECTION 04 05 13



C. Water: Provide water suitable for drinking, clean, and free of harmful amounts of acid, alkalies, salts, or organic materials.

D. Admixtures: 1. When required use only non-chloride based accelerators as approved by specifier. 2. Do not add antifreeze substances to the mortar.

E. Pigments: When required used mineral oxide pigments not to exceed 5% of the weight of masonry cement or 10% of the weight of Portland Cement in the mortar.

2.2 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S C. Aggregates: ASTM C404 D. Water: Provide water suitable for drinking, clean, and free of harmful amounts of acid, alkalies, salts, or

organic materials. 2.3 MORTAR MIXES

A. Mortar: Provide ASTM C270, type ‘M’ or type ‘S’ in conformance with proportion specifications, provide type 'S' unless noted otherwise on drawings.

2.4 GROUT MIXES

A. Grout: ASTM C476, coarse grout meeting proportion requirements 2.5 MORTAR MIXING

A. Measure sand by volume or equivalent weight; do not measure by shovel. B. In clean mortar mixer, mix ingredients for 3 to 5 minutes with maximum amount of water to produce proper

workability. C. Re-temper mortar as needed within 2½-hours after initial mixing. D. Discard unused mortar 2½-hours after initial mixing.

2.6 GROUT MIXING

A. Control batching procedure to ensure proper volume proportions of grout materials and achieve grout slump between 8" and 11".

B. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94. C. Measure grout materials mixed at job site by volume and mix all ingredients in mechanical mixer for minimum

of five minutes. 2.7 MIX TESTS

A. Testing of Mortar: In accordance with ASTM C270 B. Testing of Grout: In accordance with ASTM C1019

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install mortar and grout in accordance with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Architect, Owner, or Building Department may request field inspections per Section 01 40 00 1.7 Quality Control.

B. Test Mortar in accordance with ASTM C780 for consistency, mortar aggregate ratio, water content, air content, compressive strength, and splitting tensile strength.

C. Test Grout in accordance with ASTM C1019


SECTION 04 05 13



END OF SECTION



SECTION 04 20 00

MASONRY UNIT

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 04 20 00 Page - 1 Masonry Unit Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART I GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Concrete masonry and brick B. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASCE 7 – American Society of Civil Engineers – Wind Loads B. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 – Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures C. ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602 – Specifications for Masonry Structures D. ASTM A82 – Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement E. ASTM A123/A123M – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products F. ASTM A167- Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet,

and Strip G. ASTM A525 – General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process H. ASTM A580/A580M – Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Wire I. ASTM A615/A615M – Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement J. ASTM A641/A641M – Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire K. ASTM B370 - Standard Specification for Cooper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction L. ASTM C34 – Standard Specification for Structural Clay Load-Bearing Wall Tile M. ASTM C55 – Standard Specification for Concrete Building Brick N. ASTM C56 – Standard Specification for Structural Clay Non-Load Bearing Tile O. ASTM C62 – Standard Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale) P. ASTM C73 – Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Face Brick (Sand-Line Brick) Q. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Including Sound Absorption) Concrete Masonry

Units R. ASTM C126 – Standard Specification for Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing Brick and

Solid Masonry Units S. ASTM C129 – Standard Specification for Non-Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units T. ASTM C212 – Standard Specification for Structural Clay Facing Tile U. ASTM C216 – Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale) V. ASTM C315 – Standard Specification for Clay Flue Linings W. ASTM C530 – Standard Specification for Structural Clay Non-Load Bearing Screen Tile X. ASTM C652 – Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale) Y. ASTM C744 – Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units Z. IMIAC – International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide

Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Units AA. IMIAC – International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide

Specification for Hot Weather Masonry Construction BB. UL – Fire Resistance Directory CC. IBC - International Building Code

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units and fabricated wire reinforcement. C. Samples: Submit four samples of decorative block, face brick, pre-faced, units to illustrate color, texture

and extremes of color range. D. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.


SECTION 04 20 00

MASONRY UNIT



A. Design and construction shall comply with ASEC 7 Wind Loads, IBC, ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402, and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602

B. Conform to applicable code for UL Assembly requirements for fire-rated masonry construction. C. Provide lateral support for block walls, both vertical and horizontal.

1. The vertical heights of masonry between horizontal supports shall be in accordance with the wall lateral support requirements, IBC

1.6 MOCK-UP

A. Provide mock-up of composite masonry under provisions of Section 01 40 00. B. Construct a masonry wall into a panel sized 5' long by 4' high, which includes a corner, mortar, and

accessories, structural backup, wall openings, flashings, wall insulation, air barrier, vapor barrier and parging.

C. Locate where directed. D. Mock-up to remain intact and protected until the Punch List is completed or until Owner agrees in writing to

removal. E. Mock-up may remain as part of the work with the Owner's approval.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Meet one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section 01 31 00. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC – Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction

B. Hot Weather Requirements: IMIAC – Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Hot Weather Masonry Construction

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Coordinate the masonry work with installation of window anchors.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): ASTM C90, Type II – Non-Moisture Controlled B. Hollow Non-Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C129, Type II – Non-Moisture Controlled C. Sound Absorbing Concrete Masonry Units: Type IV - 4" (Min. NRC .80) (Sim. To Trenwyth) D. Provide special units for 90° corners, bond beams, lintels, coved bases, bull nosed corners and angle

corners. E. All block installed if fire-rated walls and partitions shall be classified units or certified for the intended use in

accordance with IBC. 2.2 BRICK UNITS (Landscape Brick Located In Division 32)

A. Face Brick (Solid Brick): ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade MW; colors/types as indicated on plans B. Building Brick: ASTM C62, Grade NW; solid units, color/types as selected C. Hollow Facing and Building Brick: ASTM C652, Grade SW, Type HBS; colors/types as indicated on plans D. Thin Brick; colors/types as indicated on plans E. Size and Shape: Provide special units for 90° corners, lintels, bull nosed corners and angle corners.


SECTION 04 20 00

MASONRY UNIT


F. Special Brick Shape: Shaped to profile indicated; surface texture on exposed sides and ends. 2.3 BRICK SCHEDULE (Partial for Specific Items Expected on Project/Coordinate all brick and block with

Documents) A. Exterior Brick Type 1 - Artic White (Interstate) B. Exterior Brick Type 2 - Dark Ironspot Artisan Modular (Endicott) C. Exterior Brick Type 3 - Manganese Ironspot Artisan Modular (Endicott) D. Glazed Brick Type 1 - Burnt Sienna 4002 - Elgin Butler E. Glazed Brick Type 2 - Indigo 4506 - Elgin Butler F. Glazed Brick Type 3 - Winter White 1200 - Elgin Butler G. Glazed Brick Type 4 - Colbalt 2204 - Elgin Butler H. Glazed Brick Type 5 - Pumpkin Orange 4550 - Elgin Butler I. Glazed Brick Type 6 - Rustic Orange 4546 - Elgin Butler J. Thin Brick Type 1 - Artic White Smooth (Interstate Brick) K. Thin Brick Type 2 - Dark Ironspot Smooth Modular (Endicott) L. Thin Brick Type 3 - Manganese Ironspot Smooth Modular (Endicott)

2.4 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A641/A641M Class 3 after fabrication, 3/16" side rods with 9-gauge crossties

B. Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Ladder type; with moisture drip; adjustable type, steel wire, hot dip galvanized ASTM A641/A641M Class 3 fabrication, 3/16" side rods with 9-gauge crossties.

C. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M/ Grade 40 and 60, deformed carbon bars, unfinished 1. Strap Anchors: Bent steel shape, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M, B2 finish.

D. Wall Ties: Formed steel wire, gage thick, adjustable, eye and pintle type, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M B2 steel finish.

E. Dovetail Anchors: Bent steel strap, galvanized to ASTM A123/ASTM 123M B2 finish. F. For Thin Brick - Utilize Laticrete Product 254 Platinum or approved substitute for adhesion to substrate.

2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT

A. Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04 05 13. 2.6 FLASHINGS

A. Copper: ASTM 370.03, Copper fabric thru-wall flashing, 5oz width as required to work brick ledge, similar to HB, C FAB

B. Provide dovetail, saw tooth, or other design to develop all direction bonding C. Lap Sealant: Butyl type as specified in Section 07 92 00

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Performed Control Joints: Neoprene material with corner and tee accessories, cement fused joints B. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50% to joint width; self-expanding. C. Cavity Wall Drainage System: High-density polyethylene to support mortar droppings and debris within

the cavity. D. Building Paper: See Division 7 – 07 25 00 Weather Resistant Barrier E. Weep: Rectangular weeps, PVC clear w/stainless steel screen and wick, 3/8" x 1-1/2" x 3-1/2". F. Cavity Vents: Molded polyvinyl chloride grilles, insect resistant. G. Cleaning Solutions: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials

2.7 FINISH A. All CMU & Brick Unit locations to receive graffiti resistive coating as specified in Division 9. PART 3 EXECUTION


SECTION 04 20 00

MASONRY UNIT


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure

provides permanent bracing. 3.3 COURSING

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. 1. Protect from displacement.

B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. 1. Provide vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness.

C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8" 2. Mortar Joints: Concave

D. Brick Units: 1. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8" 2. Mortar Joints: Concave

3.4 PLACING AND BONDING

A. At interior thin brick application - use 'Laticrete Product 254 Platinum' or approved substitute for adhesion to substrate.

B. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. C. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. D. Do not butter corners of joints or excessively furrow mortar joints. E. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. F. Interlock intersections and external corners. G. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set.

1. To make an adjustment, remove mortar and replace. H. To prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges perform jobsite cutting of masonry units with proper

tools to provide straight, clean, un-chipped edges. I. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled, cement parging is required, resilient base is scheduled,

cavity insulation vapor barrier adhesive or bitumen damp proofing is applied. J. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint. K. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with

compressible joint filler. 3.5 WEEPS

A. Install weeps in veneer at intervals recommended by the Brick Institute of America. 3.6 CAVITY WALL

A. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weeps. Provide a system of high-density polyethylene strands woven to a mesh to collect mortar dropping and permanently suspend them above the weeps.

B. Build inner wythe ahead of outer wythe to receive cavity insulation air/vapor barrier adhesive. 3.7 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES – SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY

A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16" o.c. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in 1st and 2nd joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16"

each side of opening.


SECTION 04 20 00

MASONRY UNIT


C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6". E. Reinforce stack-bonded unit, joint corners, and intersections with strap anchors 16" o.c. F. All masonry below grade is to be grouted solid.

1. Provide footing/wall dowels. 2. Measure the splice length from the finish floor.

3.8 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES – VENEER MASONRY

A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16" o.c. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in 1st and 2nd horizontal joints above and below openings.

1. Extend minimum 16" each side of opening. C. Place joint reinforcement ends minimum 6". D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6". E. Embed wall ties in masonry back up for bonding veneer at maximum 16" o.c. vertically and 36" o.c.

horizontally. 1. Place maximum 3" o.c. each way around perimeter of openings, within 12" of openings.

F. Secure wall ties, rods, strap, anchors to back-up and embed into masonry veneer at maximum 16" o.c. vertically, and 36" o.c. horizontally.

G. Place at maximum 3" o.c. each way around perimeter of openings, within 12" of openings. H. Provide length to extend a minimum of 1½" into the exterior wythe.

3.9 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES – CAVITY WALL MASONRY


1. Extend minimum 16" each side of opening. C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6". E. Embed anchors in concrete or attached to structural steel members.

1. Embed anchorages in every second block or sixth brick joint. 2. Provide length to extend a minimum 1½" into the exterior wythe.

F. Reinforce stack bonded unit joint corners and intersection with strap anchors 16" o.c. 3.10 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES – MULTIPLE WYTHE UNIT MASONRY


1. Extend minimum 16" each side of opening. C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6". E. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement.

1. Maintain position within ½" of dimensioned position. F. Embed anchors embedded in concrete or attach to structural steel members.

1. Embed anchorages in every second block or sixth brick joint. G. Provide length to extend a minimum 1½" into the exterior wythe. H. Reinforce stack bonded unit joint corners and intersection with strap anchors 16" o.c.

3.11 MASONRY FLASHINGS

A. Provide through wall flashing under parapet copings, for counter-flashing in masonry walls, where roofs abut, at lintels of exterior wall openings, ledge or shelf angles, under windowsills and band courses, at spandrel beams, foundation walls and where shown on drawings.

B. Turn flashing up minimum 8" and bed into mortar joint of masonry, seal to concrete, and seal to sheathing over framed back up.

C. Lap end joints minimum 6" and seal watertight. D. Turn flashing, fold and seal at corners, bends and interruptions to form dams.

3.12 SILLS


SECTION 04 20 00

MASONRY UNIT


A. See specification section 08 51 13 – 3.1 B Sill & Buck for windowsill requirements. 3.13 LINTELS

A. Install lintels over openings. B. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or pre-cast concrete lintels area not

scheduled. C. Openings up to 42" Wide: Place two, No. 4 reinforcing bars 1" from bottom web D. Openings from 42": Up to 78" wide:

1. Place two, No. 5 reinforcing bars 1" from bottom web. E. Opening over 78": Reinforce openings as detailed. F. Do not splice reinforcing bars. G. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement.

2. Maintain position within ½" of dimensioned position. H. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. I. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports. J. Maintain bearing on each side of opening. Minimum bearing of 4" on concrete, 3" on steel and 8" on

masonry 3.14 ENGINEERED MASONRY

A. Lay masonry units with core cells vertically aligned and cavities between wythes clear of mortar and unobstructed.

B. Place mortar in masonry unit bed-joints back ¼" from edge of unit grout spaces, bevel back and upward. 1. Permit mortar to cure seven days before placing grout.

C. Reinforce masonry unit cores and cavities with reinforcement bars and grout as indicated. D. Retain vertical reinforcement in position at top and bottom of cells and at intervals not exceeding 192 bar

diameters. E. Grout space dimension is the clear dimension between any masonry protrusions and increases by

diameters of the horizontal bars within the cross-section of the grout space. F. Wet masonry unit surfaces in contact with grout just prior to grout placement. G. The minimum grouted spaces in both horizontal dimensions shall be as follows:

1. Low-Lift Grouted Construction a. Fine aggregate: Grout spaces may be less then 2". b. Fine or coarse aggregate: Grout spaces shall be 2" or more.

2. High-Lift Grouted Construction: a. Fine or coarse aggregate: Grout space shall not be less than 2" wide.

H. The area of vertical reinforcement shall not exceed 6% of the area of the grout space. I. When grouting is stopped for more than one hour, terminate grout 1½" below top of upper masonry unit to

form a positive key for subsequent grout placement. J. Low Lift Grouting – Place first lift of grout to a height of 16" and rod for grout consolidation.

1. Place subsequent lifts in 8" increments and rod for grout consolidation 3.15 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Provide expansion joints and control joints to prevent uncontrolled stress cracks in the structure and as indicated on the drawings, do not exceed 25' between control joints.

B. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. C. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions. D. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07 92 00 for sealant performance.

3.16 BUILT-IN WORK

A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door and glazed frames, fabricated metal frames, window frames, wood nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other items to be built-in the work and furnished by other sections.

B. Install built-in items plumb and level. C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints.


SECTION 04 20 00

MASONRY UNIT


1. Fill frame voids solid with grout. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12" from framed openings.

D. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration. 3.17 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns: Pilasters: ¼" B. Maximum Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32" C. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: ¼" in 10' and ½" in 20' or more D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: ¼" per story non-cumulative and ½" in two stories or more E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: ⅛" in 3', ¼" in 10'; and ½" in 30' F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: ⅛" in 3' G. Maximum Variation from Cross-Section Thickness of Walls: ¼"

3.18 CUTTING AND FITTING

A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds. 1. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.

B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.

3.19 PARGING

A. Dampen masonry walls prior to parging. B. Scarify each parging coat to ensure full bond to subsequent coat. C. Parge masonry walls in two uniform coats of mortar to a total thickness of ¾" minimum. D. Steel trowel surface smooth and flat with a maximum surface variation of ⅛" per foot. E. Strike top edge of parging at 45°


A. Architect, Owner, or Building Department may request field inspections per Section 01 40 00 1.7 Quality Control.

B. Comply with IBC requirements 1704.5.2 for 'non-essential' facilities for engineered masonry. 3.21 CLEANING

A. Clean work under provisions of 01 77 00, and comply with ASTM, BIA, and ACI 530. B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.

1. Mortar streaks and/or stains that cannot be removed by light cleaning shall be replaced. 2. Do not use abrasives for rubbing or scraping off mortar stains.

C. Replace defective mortar and match adjacent work. D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

1. Use only cleaning products approved by the Architect and applied in direct conformance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

2. DO NOT USE Muratic acid to clean masonry. E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

3.22 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01 50 00. B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners, only at those

corners subject to damage due to construction activities.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 04 72 00

CAST STONE MASONRY

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 04 72 00 Page - 1 Cast Stone Masonry Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Summary

A. Section Includes - Cast Stone

1. Scope - All labor, materials and equipment to provide the Cast Stone shown on

Architectural drawings and as described in this specification.

2. Manufacturer shall furnish Cast Stone covered by this specification.

3. Installing contractor shall unload, store, furnish all anchors, set, patch, clean and seal (optional) the Cast Stone as required.

1.2 Related Sections A. Section – 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures

B. Section – 04 05 16 – Masonry Mortaring

C. Section – 04 20 00 & 04 20 10 – For Masonry Accessories

E. Section – 07 92 00 – Joint Sealers

1.3 References A. ASTM C 33 – Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

B. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

C. ASTM C 173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volume Method.

D. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. D. ASTM C 426 – Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage of Concrete Masonry Units

E. ASTM C 494/C 494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

F. ASTM C 1194 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Architectural Cast Stone.

G. ASTM C 1195 - Standard Test Method for Absorption of Architectural Cast Stone.

H. ASTM C 1364 - Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone.

I. Cast Stone Institute® Technical Manual (Current Edition)

1.4 Definitions A. Cast Stone - a refined architectural concrete building unit manufactured to simulate the color and

texture of natural cut stone, used in masonry applications.

1. Dry Cast Concrete Products – manufactured from zero slump concrete. 2.Vibrant Dry Tamp (VDT) casting method: Vibratory ramming of earth moist, zero- slump concrete against a rigid mold until it is densely compacted.


SECTION 04 72 00

CAST STONE MASONRY


1.5 Submittal Procedures A. Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Samples: Submit two small pieces of the Cast Stone that are representative of the general

range of finish and color proposed to be furnished for the project.

1.6 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer shall have sufficient plant facilities to produce the shapes, quantities, size and

quality of Cast Stone required in accordance with the project schedule.

2. Manufacturer shall be a current producer member of the Cast Stone Institute

3. Products previously produced by the plant and exposed to weather shall exhibit satisfactory

appearance

B. Standards: Comply with the requirements of the Cast Stone Institute® Technical Manual, ASTM C 1364 and the project specifications. Where a conflict may occur, the contract documents shall prevail.

C. Mock-up: Not Necessary

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturer

A. Superior Precast Products

B. Advanced Cast Stone

C. American Masonry

D. Texas Cast Stone

2.1 Architectural Cast Stone

A. Comply with ASTM C 1364

B. Physical properties: The Cast Stone produced must meet the following:

1. Compressive Strength - ASTM C 1194: 6,500 psi minimum for products at 28 days.

2. Absorption - ASTM C 1195: 6% maximum by the cold water method

3. Freeze-thaw – ASTM C 1364: The CPWL shall be less than 5% after 300 cycles of freezing and thawing.

4. Linear Shrinkage – ASTM C 426: Shrinkage shall not exceed 0.065%.

2.3. Raw Materials

A. Portland cement: ASTM C 150 – Type I or Type III, white and/or grey according to what is required to match specified color.

B. Coarse aggregates: ASTM C 33 – Limestone

C. Fine aggregates: ASTM C 33 - Manufactured or natural sands


SECTION 04 72 00

CAST STONE MASONRY


D. Colors: As selected by Architects from manufacturer's available colors.

E. Admixtures: ASTM C 1364

F. Water: Must be potable

G. Reinforcing: Galvanized or epoxy coated used when required by ASTM C 1364.

2.4. Color and Finish

A. Color: As indicated on drawings.

1. Permissible Variation in Color: ASTM C 1364 – Between units of comparable age subjected to similar weathering exposure.

a. Total Color Difference: Not greater than 6 units.

b. Total Hue Difference: Not greater than 2 units.

2.5. Reinforcing

A. Reinforce the units as required by the drawings and for safe handling and structural stress. B. Minimum reinforcing shall be 0.25 percent of the cross section area.

C. Reinforcement shall be noncorrosive where faces exposed to weather are covered with less than 1.5 in

of concrete material. All reinforcement shall have minimum coverage of twice the diameter of the bars.

D. Panels, soffits and similar stones greater than 24 in. (600 mm) in one direction shall be reinforced in that direction. Units less than 24 in. (600 mm) in both their length and width dimension shall be non-reinforced unless otherwise specified.

E. Welded wire fabric reinforcing shall not be used in dry cast products.

2.6. Accessories: All anchors, dowels and other anchoring devices and shims shall be standard building stone

anchors commercially available in a non-corrosive material such as galvanized steel, brass or stainless steel Type 302 or 304 sized appropriately for the conditions.

2.7. Curing and Finishing:

A. Cure units in a warm, moist curing chamber approximately 100ºF (37.8ºC) at 95 percent relative humidity for approximately 24 hours. Additional yard curing at 95 percent relative humidity shall be 350 degree-days (i.e. 7 days @ 50°F (10°C) or 5 days @ 70°F (21°C)) prior to shipping. Form cured units shall be protected from moisture evaporation with curing blankets or curing compounds after casting. B. Acid –etch exposed surfaces to remove cement film prior to packaging. Suitable washing shall be provided for all exposed surfaces unless otherwise noted.

2.8. Manufacturing Tolerances

A. Cross section dimensions shall not deviate by more than ±1/8 in. (3 mm) from approved dimensions.

B. Length of units shall not deviate by more than length/ 360 or ±1/8 in. (3 mm), whichever is greater, not to exceed ±1/4 in. (6 mm). Maximum length of any unit shall not exceed 15 times the average thickness of such unit unless otherwise agreed by the manufacturer.

C. Warp, bow or twist of units shall not exceed length/ 360 or ±1/8 in. (3 mm), whichever is greater.


SECTION 04 72 00

CAST STONE MASONRY


D. Location of dowel holes, anchor slots, flashing grooves, false joints and similar features – On formed sides of unit, 1/8 in. (3 mm), on unformed sides of unit, 3/8 in. (9 mm) maximum deviation.

2.9. Production Quality Control

A. Testing.

1. Test compressive strength and absorption from specimens selected at random from plant production.

2. Samples shall be taken and tested from every 500 (14 m3) cubic feet of product produced.

3. Perform tests in accordance ASTM C 1364 4. New and existing mix designs shall be tested for strength and absorption compliance prior to producing units.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1. Plant Packaging

A. Mark production units with the identification marks as shown on the shop drawings.

B. Package units and protect them from staining or damage during shipping and storage.

C. Provide an itemized list of products.

3.2 Shipment A. Delivery

1. Cast Stone units shall be delivered secured to shipping pallets and protected from damage

and discoloration.

2. Each piece will be individually numbered to match shop drawings.

B. Storage

1. Store cast stone units in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions

2. Store cast stone units on pallets with waterproof covers.

3. Prevent contact with dirt.

C. Handling:

1. Protect cast stone units during handling and installation to prevent chipping, cracking and other damage.

D. Scheduling: Schedule and coordinate production and delivery of cast stone to optimize on-site inventory and to avoid delay of work.

3.3. Examination

A. Installing contractor shall visual inspect Cast Stone materials for fit and finish prior to installation. Do not

set unacceptable units.

3.4. Setting Tolerances


SECTION 04 72 00

CAST STONE MASONRY


A. Comply with Cast Stone Institute® Technical Manual.

B. Set stones 1/8 in. (3 mm) or less, within the plane of adjacent units.

C. Joints, plus - 1/16 in. (1.5 mm), minus - 1/8 in. (3 mm).

3.5 Joint Protection A. Comply with requirements of Section 07 92 00.

B. Prime ends of units, insert properly sized backing rod and install required sealant.

C. Provide sealant at all head joints or as indicated on drawings.

3.8. Repair and Cleaning

A. Repair: Repair chips or other surface damage with touchup materials furnished by manufacturer and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Cleaning:

1. Clean exposed cast stone after mortar is thoroughly set and cured

3. Saturate units to be cleaned with water prior to applying an approved masonry cleaner.

4. Consult with manufacturer for appropriate cleaners and for cleaning instructions.

5. Remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 05 12 00

STRUCTURAL STEEL

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 05 12 00 Page - 1 Structural Steel Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011


A. Structural steel framing members, support members, sag-rods, and struts B. Base plates, shear stud connectors, and expansion joint plates C. Grouting under base plates

1.2 REFERENCES

A. AISC - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges B. AISC - LRFD Manual of Steel Construction C. AISC – ASD/LRFD Steel Construction Manual D. AISC - Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings E. ASTM A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel F. ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and

Seamless G. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, and Alloy, Cold-Finished H. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products I. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware J. ASTM A242/A242M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel. K. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength L. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum

Tensile Strength M. ASTM A449 - Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts, and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi

Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use N. ASTM A490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum

Tensile Strength O. ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural

Tubing in Round and Shapes P. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural

Tubing. Q. ASTM A514/A514M - Standard Specification for High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy

Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding R. ASTM A529/A529M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural

Quality S. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts T. ASTM A568/A568M - Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon, Structural, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy,

Hot-Rolled Sheet and Cold-Rolled Sheet, General Requirements for U. ASTM A992/A992M – Standard Specification for Structural Steel Building V. ANSI/AWS A2.4 - Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination W. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code X. FM - Roof Assembly Classifications Y. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Paint Manual Z. IBC - International Building Code.


A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals Procedures B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners.

2. Connections 3. Cambers and loads 4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols, along with net weld lengths. 5. Indicate grade of steel. 6. State of Texas Professional Engineer shall date, sign, and seal the required Shop Drawings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals Procedures


SECTION 05 12 00

STRUCTURAL STEEL


B. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Mill Test Reports: Submit indicating structural strength, destructive and non-destructive test analysis. D. Welders' Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualifications within the

previous 12-months. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC Code of Standard Practice. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. C. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years

documented experience. D. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5-years documented

experience. E. State of Texas Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of connection details shall design

all connections not detailed on the plans from the Architect/Engineer of record. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural steel design and construction shall comply with the American Institute of Steel Construction, AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, 13th Edition."

B. Conform to FM. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Section 01 60 00 - Materials Equipment and approved equals: Transport, handle, store and protect product

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36 for plates and misc. steel and A992/A992M, Grade 50 for wide flange shapes.

B. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. C. Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B D. Shear Stud Connectors: ASTM A108, Grade 1015, headed, uncoated E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307, A325 and A490 galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M for galvanized

members F. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307 and A36 G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded H. Grout: Use non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water

reducing, and plasticizing additives, capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days.

I. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, provide a uniform dry film thickness of 1.5 mils J. Touch-up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC 20 Type I Inorganic K. Structural steel shall be minimum 85% recycled steel.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Continuously seal joined members by intermittent welds and plastic filler. 1. Grind exposed welds smooth.

B. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors. C. Develop required camber of members.

2.3 FINISH

A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-2. B. Shop prime structural steel members

1. Do not prime surfaces receiving fireproofing or field welds. 2. Do not prime surfaces in contact with concrete.


SECTION 05 12 00

STRUCTURAL STEEL


C. Galvanize structural steel members to ASTM A123/A123M; provide minimum 1.25 oz/sq ft galvanized coating.

D. All structural or miscellaneous steel exposed to earth or weather shall be hot dipped galvanized (G90). 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS

A. Provide shop testing of structural steel sections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination: Verification of existing conditions prior to beginning work

3.2 ERECTION

A. Allow for erection loads, and sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

B. Field-weld components and shear studs indicated on shop drawings. 1. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. a. Comply with AISC specifications referenced in this Section for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. b. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without warp. c. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface bleeding of back-side welding on exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet welds 1/2 inch and larger. Grind flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds.

C. Field-connect members with threaded fasteners; torque to required resistance. 1. Install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A 490 bolts." a. Bolts: ASTM A 325 high-strength bolts, unless otherwise indicated. b. Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip-critical, direct tension, or tensioned shear/bearing connections.

D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of A/E. E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be

in contact with concrete. F. Grout under base plates. Trowel grouted surface smooth, splay neatly to 45°. G. Provide nuts and lock washers for the connection of the kitchen hood hangers. H. Do not hang ceilings, pipes, etc. from metal deck.

1. Attach anchors to the top chord of steel truss/joist. 2. Loads approved by structural engineer of record as shown on the structural drawings may be

attached to the bottom cord of the truss or joist. I. Provide protection of structural steel from corrosion – base plates, anchor angles embedded in concrete

or soil. J. Attach structural steel trusses to supports with either welds or bolts.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: ¼" per story, non-cumulative B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: ¼"


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Control: The District may require field inspection, testing of bolt torque, welds and torque of fasteners.

B. Comply with IBC Requirements 1704.3 for Steel Construction.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 05 21 00

STEEL JOISTS

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 05 21 00 Page - 1 Steel Joists Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011


A. Open web steel joists with bridging, attached seats, anchors, and related items necessary to complete work indicated on the plans and this section.

B. Loose bearing plates and anchor bolts for site placement C. Framed roof openings greater than 18"

1.2 REFERENCES

A. AISC - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges B. AISI - Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel D. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, and Alloy, Cold-Finished E. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products F. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware G. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength H. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum

Tensile Strength I. ANSI/AWS A2.4 - Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination J. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code K. FM - Roof Assembly Classifications L. SJI (Steel Joist Institute) - Specifications, Load tables, and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist

Girders M. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Paint Manual



1. Indicate standard designations, configuration, sizes, spacing, locations of joists and joist leg extensions.

2. Joist coding, bridging, connections and attachments. 3. Cambers and Loads 4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.0 welding symbols, with the net weld lengths. 5. Texas PE specializing in steel joist and girders shall prepare, sign, and seal. Structural calculations

for special steel joists marked ‘SP’ on the drawings, and submit together with the shop drawings for the review of the Structural Engineer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals Procedures B. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Mill Test Reports: Submit indicating structural strength, destructive and non-destructive test analysis. D. Welders' Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualifications within the

previous 12-months. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with SJI Load Tables and Weight Tables for steel joists and girders, including headers and other supplementary framing.

B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. C. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5-years

documented experience. D. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5-years documented

experience. E. State of Texas Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of connection details shall design

all connections not detailed on the plans from the Architect/Engineer of record.


SECTION 05 21 00

STEEL JOISTS



A. Structural steel design and construction shall comply with SJI "Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."

B. Properly certified Welders shall perform all work in accordance with AWS standards. C. Conform to FM.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Section 01 60 00 - Materials Equipment and approve equals: Transport, handle, store and protect product.

B. Follow the requirements and recommendations of SJI and AISC for delivery, storage, and protection of materials.

C. Bent joists members or broken welds are a cause for joist rejection, and require immediate replacement. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Steel joist fabrication materials shall comply with SJI and AISC standard specifications. B. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307, A325, and A490 galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M for galvanized

members. C. Structural Steel for Supplementary Framing and Joist Leg Extensions: ASTM A36/A36M D. Welding Materials: Use appropriate type per AWS D1.1 for materials E. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 to 3.5

mils. 1. Properly prepare the surface, and immediately apply the primer. 2. Do not apply primer to joist receiving spray-on fireproofing.

F. Touch-up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC 20 Type I - inorganic. 2.2 FABRICATION

A. General; Fabricate steel joist and girders in accordance with SJI and AISC standard specifications and the following: 1. Make all shop connections and splices with welds, shop bolted connection are not acceptable. 2. Use only full-length web members, do not splice. 3. Use uniform sizes throughout their length for top and bottom cords. 4. Do not splice bottom cord members in the middle third of the span. 5. The fabricator shall certify any splice in the bottom cord member equals 100% the strength of the

cord member. B. Provide extended ends in locations indicated on the plans per SJI requirements. C. Provide horizontal and/or diagonal type bridging in compliance with SJI requirements. D. Provide ceiling extensions on the bottom cord in areas with ceiling attached directly to the joist. E. Provide end anchorages, including steel bearing plates, to supporting structure. F. Provide header units to support tail joists at opening in the floor or roof system not framed with steel

shapes. G. Top chords shall be absolutely across the full width and length for application of metal decking. H. Extend and connect the bottom chords to columns or at column lines and where shown on structural

plans. I. Bevel the joist ends when slope exceeds ¼" in 12", may provide sloped shoes.

2.3 FINISH

A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-2. B. Shop prime structural steel members

1. Do not prime surfaces scheduled for fireproofing or field welding. 2. Do not prime surfaces in contact with concrete. 3. Do not prime surface of high strength bolts.

C. Galvanize steel ledge angle members to ASTM A123/A123M; provide minimum 1.25 oz/sq ft galvanized coating.

D. Shop Painting


SECTION 05 21 00

STEEL JOISTS


1. Remove all loose scale, rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joist, girder, and accessories before applying paint.

2. Spray, dip, or other approved method apply one shop coat of steel primer to steel joist, girder, and accessories, that applies a continuous paint film of at least 1.5 mil.


A. Section 01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination: Verification of existing conditions prior to beginning work

3.2 ERECTION

A. Install and secure steel joist per SJI specifications, final shop drawings, and this section. B. Furnish anchor bolts, steel bearing plates, and other devices installed in concrete and masonry

construction. C. Place steel joist on secure and completed supporting construction.

1. Adjust and align in proper location and spacing before permanently fastening. D. Allow for erection loads, and sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true

alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. E. Install bridging simultaneously with joist erection and before applying construction loads. F. Fastening of joists and girders:

1. Field weld joists to supporting steel framework and steel bearing plates as indicated in SJI specifications for type of joist and per final shop drawings.

2. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework per SJI specifications and final shop drawings for type of joist.


A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: ¼" B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: ¼"


A. After installation of joists and girders, wire brush and clean with solvent before painting any unpainted surfaces, surfaces with rust, or surfaces damaged during erection.

B. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Control: The A/E or the District may require field inspection, testing of bolt torque, welds and torque of fasteners.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 05 31 00

STEEL DECK

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 05 31 00 Page - 1 Steel Deck Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011


A. Steel floor deck and accessories B. Steel roof deck C. Framed floor and roof openings 18" or less D. Bearing plates and angles E. Shear stud connectors

1.2 REFERENCES

A. AISI – Specification for Steel the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel C. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, and Alloy, Cold-Finished D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-

Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process E. ASTM A780 - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized

Coatings F. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,

High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability G. ANSI/AWS A2.4 - Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination H. AWS D1.3- Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel I. FM - Roof Assembly Classifications J. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Paint Manual K. SDI – Steel Deck Institute - -Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof Decks L. UL - Fire Resistance Directory



1. Indicate decking plan, support locations, projections, openings and reinforcement, cellular raceways and outlet box locations, pertinent details, cant strips, special joining, anchor details, and accessories.

2. Provide manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of decking and accessories.

C. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Mill Test Reports: Submit indicating structural strength, destructive and non-destructive test analysis. E. Welders' Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualifications within the

previous 12 months. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5-years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5-years documented experience.


A. Structural steel design and construction shall comply with AISI Specification for Steel the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

B. Properly certified Welders shall perform all work in accordance with AWS standards. C. Roof deck to conform to UL, FM 1-60.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Section 01 60 00 - Materials Equipment and approved equals: Transport, handle, store and protect product.


SECTION 05 31 00

STEEL DECK


B. Follow the requirements and recommendations of AISI and Manufacturer for delivery, storage, and protection of materials.


A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A663/A653M, G90 Galvanized coating conforming to ASTM A525. B. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A653/A653M, commercial quality, galvanized. C. Galvanizing: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 D. Galvanizing Repair: Damaged galvanized surfaces, prepare surfaces and repair per ASTM A780. E. Flexible Closure Strips: Use Manufacturer's standard vulcanized, closed cell, synthetic rubber.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Minimum roof deck material at building shall be 24-gage having slots in the flutes equal to a minimum of 0.5% of the deck area.

B. Minimum roof deck material at canopy shall be 20-gage sheet steel. C. Minimum composite steel deck material shall be 20 gage sheet steel. D. Minimum non-composite form deck for stage floor shall be 24 gage sheet steel. E. Form deck units in lengths to span at least three spans (1 at roof canopy), with flush, telescoped, or

nested 2" laps at ends or butted ends and interlocking or nested side laps, of metal thickness, depth, and width indicated.

F. Roof Deck Units: Provide deck configurations complying with SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck.

G. Composite Steel Deck: 1. Fabricate deck units with integral embossing or raised pattern to furnish mechanical bond with

concrete slab. 2. Fabricate open-beam deck units with fluted sections interlocking side laps.

H. Non-Composite Form Deck: Provide fluted sections of metal deck as permanent forms for lightweight insulating concrete, at roof and normal weight concrete at floor.

I. Metal Cover Plates: 1. Fabricate metal cover plates for end-abutting floor deck units of not less than same thickness as

decking. 2. Form to match contour of deck units and approximately 6" wide.

J. Metal Closure Strips: 1. Fabricate metal closure strips, for sell raceways and openings between decking and other

construction, of not less than 0.045", minimum 18-gage sheet steel. 2. Form to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of cells or flutes and sides of decking.

K. Roof Sump Pans: 1. Fabricate from single piece of 0.071", minimum 14-gage galvanized sheet steel with level bottoms

and sloping sides to direct water flow to drain. 2. Provide sump pans of adequate size to receive roof drains and with bearing flanges not less than 3"

wide. 3. Recess pans at least 1½" below roof deck surface unless otherwise shown or required by deck

configuration. 4. Cut holes for drains in the field by others.


A. Section 01 31 00 –Project Management and Coordination: Verification of existing conditions prior to beginning work

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's requirements, shop drawings, and as specified in this section.


SECTION 05 31 00

STEEL DECK


B. Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting metal members before being permanently fastening. 1. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks.

C. Align deck units for entire length of run of cells and with closure alignment between cells at ends of abutting units.

D. Place deck units flat and square, secure to adjacent framing without warp or deflection. E. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to prevent overloading

of structural members. F. Do not use floor deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured. G. Fastening Deck units:

1. Fasten floor deck units to steel supporting members as noted on drawings. 2. Fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members as noted on drawings. 3. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance

and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 4. Mechanically fasten side laps of adjacent deck units between supports, at intervals as noted on

drawings using self-tapping No. 10 or larger machine screws. 5. Fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members at building as noted on drawings. Attach with

welding washers having minimum thickness of .0598 inches (16 gage) and have nominal 3” diameter hold.

H. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as shown on plans.

I. Reinforcement at Openings: Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work as shown.

J. Hanger Slots or Clips: Provide UL-approved punched hanger slots between cells or flutes of lower elements where floor deck units are to receive hangers for support of ceiling construction, air ducts, diffusers, or lighting fixtures. 1. May use hanger clips designed to clip over male side lap joints of floor deck units instead of hanger

slots. 2. Locate slots or clips not more than 14" oc in both directions, not over 9" from walls at ends, and not

more than 12" from walls at sides, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Provide manufacturer's standard hanger attachment devices.

K. Joint Covers: Provide metal joint covers at abutting ends and changes in direction of floor deck units, except at taped joints.

L. Roof Sump Pans: Place them over openings in roof decking and weld to top decking surface, spacing the welds not more than 12" oc with at least one weld at each corner.

M. Shear Connectors: 1. Weld shear-connectors to supports through decking units in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. 2. Do not weld connectors through two layers (lapped ends) of decking. 3. Weld only on clean dry deck surfaces.

N. Closure Strips: Provide and weld metal closure strips at open uncovered ends and edges of roof decking and in voids between decking and other construction to provide complete decking installation. 1. Provide and install flexible closure strips instead of metal closures, at Contractor's option, wherever

their use ensures complete closure, use adhesive per manufacturer's instructions. O. Touch-Up Painting: After decking installation, wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust

spots and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members. 1. Touch-up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. 2. Touch-up painted surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent surfaces. 3. In areas of exposed shop painted surfaces, apply touch-up paint to blend into adjacent surfaces.

P. Ridge and Valley Plates: 1. Weld ridge and valley plates to the top surface of the roof decking. 2. Lap end joints not less than 3", with laps made in the direction of water flow.

Q. Repair and Valley Plates: 1. Holes up to ½" in diameter fill with urethane or silicone sealant and cover with duct tape. 2. Holes over ½" diameter require sheet metal plate patches fastened to deck.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 05 40 00

COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 05 40 00 Page - 1 Cold Formed Metal Framing Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011


A. Cold formed steel stud exterior and interior wall and other framing.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute - Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual. B. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products. C. ASTM A645/A645M - Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Five Percent Nickel Alloy Steel,

Specially Heat Treated. D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-

Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process E. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,

High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability F. ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs Runners

(Track), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Board and Metal Plaster Bases G. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code H. ANSI/AWS D1.3 - Light Steel Welding Code I. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual. J. IBC - International Building Code K. MFMA (Metal Framing Manufactures Association) - Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing L. ASCE 7 – Wind loads

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Contract documents establish overall design intent and standard of quality but do not necessarily total extent of work required.

B. Structural design of cold formed metal framing including sizes, profiles, details, and methods of connection and attachment are Contractors responsibility.

C. Maintain design concept shown and meet specified performance criteria without altering profiles and alignments. Make modifications from what is shown as required to meet performance requirements and coordinate work, except do not modify stud depths or spacing.

D. Design wall system to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges.

E. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings.

1.4 PERFORMANCE

A. Design wall framing supporting brick to provide maximum deflection of L/600. B. Design wall framing not supporting brick to provide maximum deflection of L/240.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, welds, type, and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related work.

2. The same specialty engineer shall certify the erection and fabrication plan. C. Indicate stud and ceiling joist D. Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for bolted or welded, screwed framing connections. E. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, product criteria

and limitations. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special

attention.


SECTION 05 40 00




A. Design light gage metal framing in accordance with the IBC, and AISI "Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

B. Wind loads shall be in accordance with ASCE 7. C. Design interior partitions for a minimum of 5 PSF with no stress increase.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum 5-years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3-years documented experience.

C. Design structural elements under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State of Texas.

1.8 MOCKUP

A. Provide mockup of exterior framed wall including insulation, sheathing, window frame, doorframe, and interior and exterior finish specified in other sections, under provisions of Section 01 40 00.

B. Mockup Size: 6' x 4' including corner condition C. Mockup may not remain as part of the Work

1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Coordinate with the placement of components within the stud framing system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL USED FOR STUDS SHALL BE MINIMUM 30% RECYCLED STEEL.

A. General: Manufacturer's standard load bearing steel studs of type, size, shape, and gauge as required by design. With each type of metal framing required, provide manufacturer's standard steel runners (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements, fasteners, and accessories for applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete metal framing system.

B. Components: Channel shaped sections of depths indicated, fabricated of structural quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33 ksi conforming to ASTM A653.

C. Finish: Galvanized complying with ASTM A653 for minimum G60 coating. Finish of installation accessories to match that of main framing components.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered B. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered. Use

Verticlip SLB by the Steel Network, Inc. or approved equal at exterior wall connections. C. Shop and Touch-up Primer: SSPC - Paint 15, Type Type-1, red oxide D. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC - Paint 20 Type-I Inorganic

2.3 FASTENERS

A. Self-drilling, Self-tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers, use ASTM A123/A123M, hot dip galvanized to 1.25 oz/sq ft.

B. Anchorage Devices: Power-actuated, drilled expansion bolts and screws with sleeves. C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.3

2.4 FABRICATION


SECTION 05 40 00



A. Fabricate assemblies of framed sections of sizes and profiles required; with framing members fitted,

reinforced, and braced to suit design requirements. B. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Studs: Galvanize to G90 coating class, prime paint. B. Tracks and Headers: Galvanize to G90 coating class, prime paint. C. Joists and Purlins: Galvanize to G90 coating class, prime paint. D. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Same finish as framing members, prime paint. E. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Same finish as framing members, prime paint. F. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Same finish as framing members, prime paint.


A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Verify that substrate surfaces and building framing components are ready to receive work.

3.2 ERECTION OF STUDDING

A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to partition layout. Secure in place with fasteners.

1. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks. C. Place studs at 16" on center and not more than 2" from abutting walls and at each side of openings.

1. Connect studs to tracks using fasteners. D. Construct corners using minimum three studs.

1. Double stud wall openings; door and window jambs. E. Provide deflection allowance below supported horizontal building framing in ceiling or head track for non-

load bearing framing. F. Provide slip clip anchor for stud attachment to structural steel. G. Erect load-bearing studs in one-piece full length do not splice the studs. H. Erect studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength, to achieve design requirements. I. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection. J. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing. K. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load bearing

framing. L. Attach cross studs and furring channels to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls. M. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, plus to prevent stud

rotation. N. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized and primed surfaces with primer.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATIONS

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 05 50 00 Page - 1 Metal Fabrications Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011


A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal items. B. Shop fabricated aluminum items.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels

B. AAMA 204 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels

C. AAMA 606.1 - Voluntary Guide Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum

D. AAMA 607.1 - Voluntary Guide Specification and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum

E. AAMA 608.1 - Voluntary Guide Specifications and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum

F. ANSI A14.3 - American National Standard for Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements G. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel H. ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and

Seamless I. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products J. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware K. ASTM A283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars L. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength M. ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing

in Round and Shapes. N. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. O. ASTM B26 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings P. ASTM B85 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings Q. ASTM B177 - Standard Guide for Engineering Chromium Electroplating R. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate S. ASTM B210 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes T. ASTM B211 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Bar, Rod and Wire U. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles

and Tubes V. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, Nondestructive Examination W. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code Bundled Set B X. IBC - International Building Code Y. SSPC - Steel Structure Painting Council - Steel Structures Painting Council


A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals Procedures B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size, and type of

fasteners, and accessories. 1. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details.

C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. 1. Indicate net weld lengths.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Contractor to employ registered professional engineer to design each component. Prepare Shop Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas.


SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATIONS


B. Welders' Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12-months.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - STEEL

A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B C. Plates: ASTM A283 D. Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B, Schedule 40 minimum E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 or A307 galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M for galvanized

components F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for welded materials G. Ladders: ANSI A14.3 H. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide I. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC 20, Type I Inorganic zinc rich

2.2 MATERIALS - ALUMINUM

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063, Temper T5 B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy, Temper C. Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes: ASTM B210, Alloy 6063, Temper T6 D. Aluminum-Alloy Bars: ASTM B211, Alloy 6063, Temper T6 E. Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings: ASTM B26, Alloy F. Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings: ASTM B85, Alloy G. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Stainless steel H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for welded materials

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface.

1. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. 2. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Provide flush countersunk screws or bolts unobtrusively located consistent with design of component except as noted otherwise

F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. 1. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except as noted

otherwise. 2.4 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Square: 1/8" maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset between Faces: 1/16" C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16" D. Maximum Bow: 1/8" in 48" E. Maximum Deviation from Plane: 1/16" in 48"

2.5 FINISHES - STEEL

A. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC SP 2. B. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. C. Do not prime surfaces in where field welding is required. D. Prime paint items with one coat. E. Structural Steel Members:


SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATIONS


1. Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M. 2. Provide minimum 1.25 oz/sq ft galvanized coating.

F. Non-structural Items: 1. Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M. 2. Provide minimum 1.25 oz/sq ft galvanized coating.

G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B177, weight, nickel-chromium alloy, satin finish. 2.6 FINISHES - ALUMINUM

A. Exterior Aluminum Surfaces: Exterior, hard coat, two step anodized to clear color to 0.0007" thickness organic coating to color selected.

B. Interior Aluminum Surfaces: Interior, hard coat, two-step anodized to clear color to 0.0007" thickness organic coating to color selected.

C. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials.


A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal and aluminum where site welding is required. B. Supply required items for casting into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates to appropriate

sections. 3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of

erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in

contact with concrete G. Provide isolation coatings where dissimilar metals are in contact or where aluminum is in contact with

concrete. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: ¼" per story, non-cumulative B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: ¼" C. Maximum Out-of-Position: ¼"

END OF SECTION



Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 05 51 13 Page - 1 Metal Pan Stairs Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 05 51 00

METAL STAIRS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Steel stair frame of structural sections with closed risers. B. Pan to receive concrete-fill stair treads and landings C. Integral balusters and aluminum hand railing. D. Aluminum hand railing on walls. E. Safety Stair Nosings.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A202.1 - Metal Bar Grating Manual for Steel and Aluminum Gratings and Stair Treads. B. ASCE 7 - American Society of Civil Engineers, Wind loads (Chapter 6 only) C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel D. ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Black, and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless E. ASTM A123/123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products F. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware G. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel

Plates H. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength I. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum

Tensile Strength J. ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural

Tubing in Rounds and Shapes K. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural

Tubing L. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-

Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process M. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,

High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability N. ASTM E935 – Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for

Buildings O. ASTM E985 - Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings P. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols Welding, Brazing, Nondestructive Examination Q. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code Steel Bundled Set B R. IBC – International Building Code S. NAAMM AMP 510 - Metal Stairs Manual T. NAAMM MBG 531 - Metal Bar Grating Manual U. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual


A. International Building Code (IBC) B. Design stair assembly in accordance with ASCE 7


A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals Procedures B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of

fasteners, and accessories. C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols show net weld lengths.


A. Prepare work in accordance with ASTM E985.



B. Contractor to employ registered professional engineer to design each component of stair. Prepare and submit signed & sealed Shop Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas.

C. Welders' Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12-months.


A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B C. Plates: ASTM A283/A283M D. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B Schedule 40 E. Sheet Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, Grade B Structural Quality with G90, 0.90 oz/sq ft galvanized coating F. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 or A307 galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M for galvanized

components G. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with design of stair

structure H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for welded materials I. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide J. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC 20 Type-I Inorganic zinc rich

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Gratings: ANSI A202.1 B. Concrete for Treads and Landings: Portland Cement Type I, 3000 psi 28 day strength, with a 2" to 3"

slump C. Stair Nosing: Based on American Safety Tread Company.

1. Type FA411D - Color Selected From Manufacturers Selection.

2.3 FABRICATION - GENERAL

A. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sections for delivery to site. B. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Continuously seal jointed pieces by continuous welds. D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface.

1. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. 2. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts unobtrusively located consistent with design of component except as noted otherwise

F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications of same material and finish as fabrication, except as noted otherwise.

G. Accurately form components required for anchorage of stairs, landings, and railings to each other and to building structure.

2.4 FABRICATION - PAN STAIRS AND LANDINGS

A. Fabricate stairs and landings with closed risers and treads of metal pan construction, ready to receive concrete.

B. Prime paint components. 2.5 FABRICATION - UNIT STAIR TOWERS

A. Fabricate self-supporting steel stair towers with formed treads and risers; steel channel stringers; landing platforms; sectioned for transport; corner structural support members designed to support full weight of complete stair tower plus design live load; with aluminum railings, newel posts, and balusters.

B. Fabricate stair towers to height not exceeding 40' for transportation purposes; designed for stacking to height of building as a self-supporting structure.

2.6 FINISHES



A. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC SP 2. B. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. C. Do not prime surfaces where field welding is required. D. Prime paint items with one coat. E. Galvanized items to minimum 1.25-oz/sq ft zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.


A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply items required to be casted into concrete and embedded in masonry with setting templates.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide anchors, plates, angles, hangers, and struts required for connecting stairs to structure. C. Allow for erection loads and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of

erection and installation of permanent attachments. D. Field weld components as indicated on shop drawings in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. Grind welds smooth and flush. E. Field bolt and weld to match shop bolting and welding.

1. Conceal bolts and screws whenever possible. 2. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings.

F. Mechanically fasten joints butted tight, flush, and hairline. G. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. H. After erection, clean and remove any rust before priming any field welds, abrasions, and surfaces not

shop primed or galvanized. I. Stair Nosings - Install per manufacturers installation instructions.


A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: ¼" per story, non-cumulative B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: ¼" C. Completed installations shall meet IBC tolerance requirements for rise and run.

END OF SECTION



Dallas ISD – Oran M. Roberts 05 51 30 Page-1 Metal Ladder and Cage Elementary School – BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 05 51 30

METAL LADDER

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Aluminum access ladders.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. AA – Aluminum Association.

B. ASTM B209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

C. ASTM B 221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes.

D. OSHA 1910.27 – Fixed Ladders

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 2. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Detailed drawings indicating project location and application.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing aluminum metal ladders similar to those indicated for this project. 1. Record of successful in-service performance. 2. Sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 3. Professional engineering competent in design and structural analysis to

fabricate ladders in compliance with industry standards and local codes.

B. Installer Qualifications: Experience with ladder assemblies and regulatory requirements of installation and operation.


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Subject to the conditions below, Seller warrants its products against defects in workmanship and material for a period of one year from the date of installation. Buyer shall provide written notice of any claim under this warranty within 60 days


Dallas ISD – Oran M. Roberts 05 51 30 Page-2 Metal Ladder and Cage Elementary School – BP 74 12/30/2011

after it becomes aware of the defect and shall provide reasonable access to the product for the Seller's investigation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: O’Keefe’s, Inc.; 325 Newhall St. San Francisco, CA 94124. Web:http//www.okeefes.com.

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.

2.02 APPLICATIONS

A. Regulatory Compliance: The ladder shall be designed to comply with OSHA and ANSI standards for fixed ladders. 1. Safety factors for fastening to supporting structure shall comply with the

OSHA and ANSI standards or manufacturer recommendation whichever is more stringent.

B. Fixed Access Ladder: 1. Tubular Rail Low Parapet Access Ladder with Platform and Return.

a. Model 503 as manufactured by O’Keeffe’s, Inc.

2.03 FINISHES

A. Mill finish. As extruded.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: Alloy 5005-H34 to comply with ASTM B209.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy 6063-T6 to comply with ASTM B221.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Coordinate anchorages.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in proper relationship with adjacent construction.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 05 52 00 Page - 1 Handrails and Railings Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 05 52 00

HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Steel pipe handrails, balusters, and fittings.


A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Placement of anchors in concrete.

B. Division 9 – Interior and Exterior Paint

1.03 REFERENCES

A. AA DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes; The Aluminum Association, Inc.; 2003.

B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1998.

C. ASTM A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2002.

D. ASTM E 985 - Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2000.

E. ASTM A385 Practice for providing high-quality zinc coatings (hot-dip)

F. ASTM A449 Specification for quenched and tempered steel bolts and studs

G. ASTM A563 Specification for carbon and alloy steel nuts

H. ASTM A780 Practice for repair of damaged hot-dip galvanized coatings

I. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):

1. SSPC-SP 1 Solvent Cleaning

2. SSPC-SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning

3. SSPC-SP 10 Near-White Blast Cleaning

4. SSPC-SP 11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal

5. SSPC-SP 15 Steel Joist Shop Paint; The Society for Protective Coatings

J. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): 1. "Pipe Railing Manual, Including Round Tube"


A. Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements of ASTM E 985 and applicable local code.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 1 – Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 STEEL RAILING SYSTEM

A. Metal Handrails: Standard Steel Pipe, Architectural Handrail Grade, of diameter and sizes indicated. Exterior metal handrails shall be galvanized. Provide terminal safety returns for all stair handrails. Handrail Brackets shall be galvanized malleable iron manufactured for the purpose, for anchorage to concrete walls. Include all fittings and component sleeves, hardware, backing plates, and accessories as required for complete and finished handrail instillations.

B. Steel Pipe: Pipe for railings, pipe supports, and pipe sleeves shall be seamless steel pipe, conforming to ASTM A53, Type S, Grade A, of diameters and sizes indicated. Special instructions shall be given the pipe manufacturer to provide Architectural Handrail Grade pipe.

C. Plate: Steel plate for anchor plates shall be standard steel plate, conforming to ASTM A36, weldable quality.

D. Welding Rod/Electrodes: Industry Standards

E. Anchors, Fasteners, and Accessories: Provide all required anchors, fasteners, miscellaneous components, and accessories as required for complete and finished railing installations. Bolts and studs, nuts, and washers shall conform with ASTM A307, A449, and A563, as applicable, and shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.

F. Expansion Bolts: Where anchors are not included in the concrete construction, provide galvanized expansion type anchors with matching galvanized steel bolts or studs with nuts, of sizes required. Provide washers under all bolt heads or nuts. Expansion bolts require approval of the Engineer before they may be installed in post-tensioned slabs. Expansion Bolts will not be permitted for use on concrete curbs or along the edge of concrete or a concrete joint.

G. Paint: Corrosion-inhibitive protective metal primer as herein specified under "Cleaning and Painting"

H. Grout: Refer to Section 03 61 11 - Non-Shrink Grout, for requirements.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Metal Handrails and railings shall be fabricated by firms or shops experienced and skilled in the custom fabrication of architectural metal handrails and railings, and shall meet the quality requirements of NAAMM's Pipe Railing Manual.

B. Bends in rails shall be precision-formed to a smooth continuous radius by skilled workers. Work quality and finish shall be true to detail. Butt joints shall have internal pipe sleeve or dowel. Ends shall be closed with similar materials, welded and ground smooth.

C. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site.

D. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation.

E. Provide anchors and plates required for connecting railings to structure.

F. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Provide flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically



noted otherwise.

G. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.

H. Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds. Drill condensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not encourage water intrusion.

I. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

J. Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to building structure.

K. Accommodate for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to connections or members.

2.03 GALVANIZING

A. Ferrous metal railings and related items on the exterior of the building, or as otherwise indicated, shall be galvanized, after fabrication, by the hot-dip process in accordance with ASTM A123 and ASTM A385. Weight of zinc coating shall conform with requirements specified under "weight of Coating" in ASTM A123.

B. Safeguarding against steel embrittlement shall conform with applicable requirements of ASTM A143.

C. Safeguarding against warpage and distortion of steel members shall conform with applicable requirements of ASTM A384.

D. Shop galvanized metalwork necessitating field welding which in any manner removes original galvanizing shall be restored by galvanizing repair in accordance with ASTM A780.

E. Bolts and screws for attachment of galvanized shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153, or of compatible, non-corrodible material.

2.04 CLEANING AND PAINTING

A. Cleaning and painting shall conform to like requirements specified in

Structural Steel Fabrication, and Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications.

B. All surfaces of metal handrails and railings shall be cleaned and treated to assure maximum paint adherence, prior to application of the shop prime coat, in accordance with SSPC-SP 1, SSPC-SP 3, SSPC-SP 10, SSPC-SP 11 as applicable for the type of substrate, exposure, and application.

C. Ferrous metalwork shall be given a shop coat of rust-inhibitive metal primer as specified in Section 05 12 00 - Structural steel framing, or other approved rust-inhibitive metal primer standard with railing manufacturer. All surfaces of handrails and railings shall be spray-painted.

D. Where galvanized surfaces are indicated to be painted, comply with cleaning and painting requirements of section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications.

E. Coordinate with Section 09 91 00 - Painting, For compatibility of the prime coat and



finish coats of paint.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.

B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates, for installation as work of other sections.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.

C. Anchor railings securely to structure.

D. Field weld anchors as indicated on drawings. Touch-up welds with primer. Grind welds smooth.

E. Conceal bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings.

F. Assemble with spigots and sleeves to accommodate tight joints and secure installation.


A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per floor level, non-cumulative.

B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.

C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.

3.05 SCHEDULE

A. Exterior Railings: Steel pipe railings, welded, paint finish – color selected by Architect

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 06 10 00 - 1 Wood Blocking, Curbing, Misc. Carpentry Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 06 10 00

WOOD BLOCKING, CURBING, MISC. CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Blocking at Toilet Accessories

B. Blocking in window openings.

C. Wood furring and grounds.

D. Preservative treatment of wood.

E. Telephone and electrical panel boards.

F. Requirements for any blocking needed

G. Misc. Lumber Requirements for Trim, Sheathing, Etc.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 1995.

B. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 1999.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product indicated.

1. Include data for wood-preservative and fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that materials comply with requirements.

C. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following:

1. Treated Wood.

2. Engineered wood products.

3. Foam-plastic sheathing.

4. Power-driven fasteners.

5. Power-actuated fasteners.

6. Expansion anchors.

7. Metal framing anchors.


A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. 1. Acceptable Lumber Inspection Agencies: Any agency with rules approved by

American Lumber Standards Committee.

B. Plywood: Comply with PS 1.



PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirement,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into Work include, but are not limited to, the manufactures specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirement, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.2 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: LOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by

the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark for each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading

agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive stained of natural finish, mark

grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.

3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide kiln-dried lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at

time of dressing for 2-inch nominal thickness unless, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Engineered Wood Products: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research of evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Meet or exceed those indicted per

manufacturer’s published values determined form empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

C. Wood Structural Panels: 1. Oriental Strand Board: DOC PS2 2. Comply with “Code Plus” provisions in APA Form No. E30K, “APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential and Commercial.”

2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9

(plywood), except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).

B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber or 15 percent for plywood.

C. Mark each treated item with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:



1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with flooring, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, jambs, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade and first level and first level framing members and assemblies.

4. Wood floor plates that are installed over slabs directly in contact with earth.

2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General: Of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards

committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated.

B. Non-Load-Bearing Partitions: Standard, Stud, or NO. 3 grade and any of the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods; NELMA 3. Northern species; NLGA 4. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.

C. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade

and any of the following species:

D. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Partitions: Any species of machine stress-rated dimension lumber with a grade of not less than 2400f-2.0E.

E. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Partitions: Any species and grade with a modulus of elasticity of at least 1,300,000 psi and an extreme fiber stress in bending of at least 850 psi for 2-inch nominal thickness and 12 inch nominal width for single-member use.

F. Exposed Framing: Hand select material for uniformly of appearance and freedom

from characteristics that would impair finish appearance. 1. Species for Grade: As indicated above for load-bearing construction of

same type. 2. Species and Grade: Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north), Select Structural grade:

NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Species and Grade: Southern Pine, select structural grade; SPIB. 4. Species and Grade: Spruce-pine-fir or spruce-pine-fir (south), Select

Structural Grade; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. Provide miscellaneous lumber for support or attachments of other construction, including the following: 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Blocking 3. Blocking at Openings 4. Cants 5. Nailers 6. Furring 7. Grounds



B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species.

C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed Southern Pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB 2. Eastern Softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA 3. Northern Species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA 4. Western Woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or

WWPA.

2.6 SHEATHING

A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior Exposure 1, Structural 1 sheathing.

B. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.

C. Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C79, with water-resistant material incorporated into core and with water-repellent paper bonded to core’s face, back and long edges. 1. Available Manufacturers:

a. G-P Gypsum Corporation b. American Gypsum Co, c. National Gypsum Co. d. United States Gypsum Co.

2. Type and Thickness: Regular, ½ inch 3. Edge and End Configuration: V-shaped, tongue-and-groove long edges;

square ends.

D. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASYM C1177. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “Dens-Glass

Gold” by G-P Gypsum 2. Type and Thickness: Regular, ½ inch thick.

E. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior sheathing.

F. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.

2.7 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicted, not less than ½ inch (12.7 mm) thick.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Fasteners: 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in

area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153.

2. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. 3. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A with ASTM A

563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.



B. Metal Framing Anchors: Made from hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A653, coating designation. 1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Alpine Engineered Products. b. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. c. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. d. KC Metal Products, Inc. e. Silver Metal Products, Inc. f. Simpson Strong-tie Company, Inc. g. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc. h. United Steel Products Company, Inc.

2. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in effect for Project.

3. Allowable Design Loads: Meet or exceed those indicted per manufacture’s published values determined form empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

C. Sheathing Tape: Tyvek® Tape – Refer for Section 07271

D. Sill-Sealer - Tyvek® and Tyvek® Flashings.

E. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA

AFG-01 ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by booth adhesive and panel manufacturers.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Set members level and plumb, in correct position.

B. Place horizontal members with crown side up.

C. Construct curb members of single pieces.

D. Space framing and furring members 16 inches o.c.

E. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating lapping side members.

F. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings.

G. Provide miscellaneous members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to framing members, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using nails, screws, or staples.

B. Install telephone and electrical panel back boards made of plywood or other acceptable structural panels at locations indicated. Size back boards to be minimum 6 inches beyond size of telephone and electrical panels.

3.03 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT

A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts, complying with manufacturer's instructions.



B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.

3.04 Exposed Trim

A. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 06 41 00 Page - 1 Custom Millwork Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 06 41 00

CUSTOM MILLWORK



B. Millwork and custom casework including cabinetry, countertops, and shelving C. Millwork and casework hardware and accessories

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials B. AWI – Quality Standards C. BHMA A156.9 – Cabinet Hardware D. FED MMM-A-130 – Adhesive, Contact E. NEMA (National Electric Manufacturer’s Association) LD3 – High Pressure Decorative Laminates F. PS 1 – Construction and Industrial Hardwood G. PS 20 – American Softwood Lumber Standard

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 1. Indicate quality grade, materials, species, construction, sizes, shapes, quantities, locations, and

conditions of adjoining work. 2. Indicate items in related or dimensional position with sections or details shown either full size or 3" =

1'-0" scale. 3. Indicate required field measurements beyond control of mill. 4. Indicate the allowable uniformly distributed loads for shelving.

B. Samples: Submit manufacturer's full range of sample colors, textures, and patterns of plastic laminate for Architect's selection.

C. Installation Instruction: Provide installation instructions and lists of replacement parts for all hardware and accessories.

D. Product Data: Provide product data for all hardware and accessories. E. Key Schedule:

1. Provide lock and key schedule for lockable cabinets. 2. Coordinate key schedule with Section 08 71 00 Door Hardware.

F. Certification: Submit certifications by treating plant that pressure treatment materials comply with governing ordinances.


A. Millwork and casework fabricator shall have a minimum 5-years previous experience of successfully completed comparable work.

B. Lumber Grading: 1. Lumber Grading Rules and Wood Species in accordance with Voluntary Product Standards PS 20-

70 2. Grading rules of Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB) apply to materials furnished.

C. Fire Hazard Classification: Comply with required NFPA, ANSI, and UL surface burning characteristics for plastic laminates, lumber, and plywood.

D. Perform work in compliance with AWI standards. 1.5 MOCK-UP

A. Prepare mock-up under provisions of Section 01 40 00.



B. Provide full size base cabinet and upper cabinet of each type indicated, in specified finish with hardware installed.

C. Owner shall inspect units to ascertain quality and conformity to AWI Standards. D. Units will establish a minimum standard of quality for this work. E. Vendor may use undamaged approved units as part of the work.

1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Design and fabricate units based upon field conditions and measurements. B. Verify field measurements are included in shop drawings.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Convene a pre-installation conference after site inspection and prior to commencement of work. B. Discuss any items that may alter fabrications or intended installation and determine acceptable

conclusions. 1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work with plumbing, mechanical, electrical, and other trades for rough-in work and installation of adjacent and associated components.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROTECTION

A. Section 01 60 00 - Material Equipment and approved equals: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

B. Immediately prior to, during and after installation of work of this section, maintain the same temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy.

C. Protect work from damage until final acceptance. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 QUALITY GRADE

A. Materials and Fabrication: Provide custom grade construction and finishing in accordance with AWI "Quality Standards".

B. Design Type: Reveal overlay design in accordance with AWI Architectural Casework - General Details, except as otherwise specified and detailed.

2.2 CABINET MATERIALS

A. Sub-base Material: 1. Provide millwork or casework plywood cores of Hardwood Plywood "veneer core" with no-added-

Urea Formaldehyde adhesives. 2. Use ¾" thick, 9-ply closed-grain hardwood plywood typical unless noted otherwise. 3. Use ¼" thick hardwood plywood at cabinet backs and drawer bottoms.

B. Adhesive: Provide type II, CS 35 or as recommended by plastic laminate manufacturer. 1. Adhesives shall be low VOC meeting USGB LEED for Schools requirements for low VOC.

C. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure laminate, General Purpose Grade, NEMA LD3, GP-50 by Formica, Nevamar, Wilson Art, and Abet Laminati. Color Locations Indicated on Plans. 1. Exposed horizontal surfaces: Use 0.050" thick, matte finish. 2. Exposed vertical surfaces: Use 0.030" thick, matte finish. 3. Provide GP 42 for post forming: Use 0.042" thick, matte finish. 4. BK 20 for concealed backing: Use 0.020" thick, matte finish, vertical grade, white unless otherwise

indicated. 5. Use Square stained oak edge. 6. At all art and science lab locations - use chemical resistant 'epoxy resin' with marine edge. 7. Clarification: No Formica or wood countertops allowed in Kitchen.



D. Finish Hardware Items: Provide following items of finish hardware with millwork: Satin Brushed Aluminum. 1. Drawer Glides: No. 8400 Extension Slides by Knape & Vogt Mfg. Co.

a. Equal products to Knape & Vogt produced by Accuride and Blum are acceptable. 2. Shelf Standards and Supports (recessed in cabinets): No. 255 Standard and No. 256 Supports by

Knape & Vogt Mfg. Co., Natural aluminum finish. a. Equal products to Knape & Vogt produced by Accuride and Blum are acceptable.

3. Doors: 1 pair heavy-duty institutional hinges, Stanley HT1592, US28. a. 1 catch, Stanley 41 Series. b. 1 pull, Stanley 4483, US28. c. Equal products to Stanley produced by Grant and Hettich America are acceptable.

4. Drawer Pulls: Stanley 4483, US28. Equal products to Stanley produced by Grant and Hettich America are acceptable.

5. Drawer Locks: Schlage CL 888R or Olympus 888IC cabinet drawer lock, US26D, complete with strike plate. a. Provide locks with Interchangeable Core Schlage cylinders keyed to the existing Facility Master

Key System as directed by Owner. 6. Door Locks: Schlage CL 777R or Olympus 777IC cabinet door lock, US26D, complete with strike

plate. a. Provide locks with Interchangeable Core Schlage cylinders keyed to the existing Facility Master

Key System as directed by Owner. b. Provide one elbow catch per pair doors.

7. Cabinet locks keyed to the facility shall be coordinated with the Hardware Supplier of section 08710 who shall provide the locks.

8. Master key: a. Master key doors and drawers of cabinetry in each room with each other and the main

entrance room door. b. Use a Schlage Everest D245 or Schlage 1456 restricted keyway as directed by owner. c. Equal products to Schlage produced by Olympus are acceptable.

9. Silencers: Use neoprene type with self-adhesive at all cabinet doors. E. Glazing: Provide clear, tempered glass for glazed doors and openings in cabinetwork, ¼" thick unless

otherwise indicated, or approved. F. Accessories: Provide adhesives, concealed fasteners, nuts, bolts, screws, pins, washers, and etc. of type

and size to suit application and severity of use. 1. Provide finished grommets for holes and cut-outs

G. Miscellaneous: Provide shims, blocking, etc. as required for complete installation. 2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: 1. All exposed cabinet edges shall be beveled or rounded to prevent sharp edges or corners. 2. All counter tops exposed to room or student access have beveled or rounded edges, and exposed

corners rounded with minimum ½" radius. B. Fabrication Workmanship:

1. Construct millwork items in accordance with specified quality grade of reference standards, except as otherwise specified or detailed.

2. Construct millwork items using materials specified for plastic laminate finish. C. Milling:

1. Fabricate and assemble work at mill as complete as practicable. 2. Deliver ready to assemble and set in place. 3. Machine sand all work at mill and deliver free of machine or tool marks or defects that will show

through finish. D. Plastic Laminate Tops, Panels, Cabinet Shelving, and All Exposed Surfaces:

1. Use plywood substrate as specified. a. Particleboard, hardboard, and flake-board are not acceptable.

2. Glue tops and panels under pressure using Type II water- resistant adhesive. a. Glue plastic, core, and backing sheet in one operation after applying edge bands.

E. Fabricate finished tops and edges from one continuous sheet of plastic laminate. 1. Make corners and joints hairline.



2. Slightly bevel arises. F. Ease the edges of millwork as required to eliminate sharp edges. G. Backsplash and Aprons:

1. Square edge, direct bond cover, and full returns. 2. Make corners and joints hairline.

H. Door and Drawer fronts shall be ¾" thick. I. Provide plastic laminate finish on all exposed surfaces of doors, drawers, countertops, splashes, etc. of

cabinets. 1. Shelves shall be finished on all sides and edges.

J. Construction: Construct each unit or cabinet in one section where practical, or construct in largest practical sections to facilitate ease of handling and installation. 1. Cabinet constructed in more than one section, ship trim and scribe strips loose at field joints. 2. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2' from sink cutouts.

K. Finish Hardware: Fit drawer guides and cabinet-mounted shelf standards at mill. 1. Ship other finish hardware items loose for installation at job site.

L. Glazing: Install glazing at mill to the greatest extent practical. 1. Field glazing shall be with dry type glazing gaskets sized to eliminate gaps and prevent loose

glazing installations. 2.4 Stains / Finishes -

A. For consistency of stain for millwork, provide stain equivalent to ICI Wood professional wood finishes, semi-transparent stain, Early American Interior Wood Finishing Stain, Solventborne 1700-6700. Laminate finish equivalent to Wilsonart 7209-60 (Nepal Teak).

B. Coatings to be low-VOC consistent with the California Department of Health Services Standard Practice for Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions for Various Sources using small-scale environmental chambers, included the 2004 addenda.


A. Examine surfaces for conditions that would prevent quality installation of millwork. B. Verify that grounds and blocking are in place to support millwork. C. Do not install on defective conditions, doing so shall indicate acceptance of site conditions and require

you to correct any defects. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Install all millwork items, plumb, level and true (within 1/16" in 10'), in accordance with drawing

details and shop drawings. 2. Do not install trim until backs and unexposed edges have been back primed. 3. Provide cutting, fitting, fabricating, erecting, wedging, bracing, blocking, nailing, and securing of

items of rough woodwork throughout, including miscellaneous furring, grounds, blocking, and nailers. a. Build-in items where indicated on Drawings or where required for attachment of finish and other

work. 4. Provide 4" high backsplash and end splashes at all locations where countertops abut walls. 5. Fully bed backsplashes and end splashes to top and each other with Dow Corning #786 mildew

resistant silicone sealant. 6. Offsets: Offsets in plane on work surfaces and counters shall be negligible and no more than 1/32"

at other abutting materials. B. Cabinets:

1. Install cabinets plumb with countertops level to within 1/16" in 10'. 2. Level the base cabinets to within allowable tolerances. 3. Accurately scribe and fit scribe strips, trim strips, and filler panels to irregularities of adjacent

surfaces, maximum gap opening 0.025". 4. Secure cabinets permanently to floor using anchors spaced at maximum of 30" o.c., minimum of two

for each unit while maintaining ¾” clearance between the back of cabinet and the exterior wall. 5. Bolt adjoining cases together, maximum width of joints 1/32".



6. Fasten tops to bases with screws driven through base cabinet top frame into bottom of countertop. 7. Scribe all backsplashes and aprons and caulk. 8. Blocking, Bucks, and Nailers: Install plumb, level and true with joints flush, fastened securely in

place. 9. Furring and Stripping: Install plumb and level, shim to provide true finish surface. 10. Install color-matched sealant at unfinished joints with other materials. 11. Install wall-shelving standards on solid backing or with toggle bolts into steel studs or masonry or

TEK screws into concrete. a. Do not install wall-shelving standards into gypsum wallboard only. b. Space standards as required to support indicated loading but not less than 5-plf based on shelf

material provided. 12. Do not install cabinetry or millwork closer than 24" to ceilings in fully sprinklered buildings or such

that installation obstructs any fire sprinkler head. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures, and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.

B. On completion of installation, touch up marred or abraded finished surfaces and wipe down surfaces to remove fingerprints and markings, and leave in clean condition.

END OF SECTION



Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 07 11 13 Page - 1 Bituminous Damproofing Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 07 11 13

BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements, are included as a part of this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The Work required under this Section consists of bituminous dampproofing and related items necessary to complete the Work, including: 1. Cold applied asphalt bitumen dampproofing 2. Protective covering

B. Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary for providing necessary coatings to stop moisture penetration through surfaces of walls below grade.

C. Apply to interior masonry or concrete walls below grade, which have additional layers of metal framing and gypsum board.

D. Apply to concrete faces of inclined ramp that are below grade. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D41 – Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing

B. ASTM D43 – Standard Specification for Coal Tar Primer used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing

C. ASTM D449 – Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Dampproofing and Waterproofing D. ASTM D450 – Standard Specification for Coal Tar Pitch Used in Roofing, Dampproofing and

Waterproofing E. ASTM D1187 – Standard Test Method for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings

for Metal F. ASTM D2822 – Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement G. ASTM D3747 – Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Adhesive for Adhering Roof

Insulation H. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Waterproofing Manual I. IBC - International Building Code

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals B. Product Data: Provide properties of primer, bitumen, and mastics. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions

requiring special attention. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Waterproofing Manual. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5-years of

documented experience. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 60 00 - Material Equipment and approved equals


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 07 11 13 Page - 2 Bituminous Damproofing Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

B. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40°F for 24 hours before and during application and until membrane has cured.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COLD ASPHALTIC MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Emulsion: Conforming to ASTM D3747. B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41, compatible with substrate. C. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D2822, Type I.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Protection Board: ⅛" thick biodegradable hardboard B. Flexible Flashings: Butyl


A. Section 01 31 00 - Coordination and Meetings: Verify of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify substrate surfaces are durable, free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of

dampproofing system. C. Verify the secure installation of items penetrating surfaces receiving dampproofing.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated receiving dampproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces receiving dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. C. Do not apply dampproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer or applicator. D. Apply mastic to seal penetrations, small cracks or honeycomb in substrate.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions 3.4 INSTALLATION - PROTECTION BOARD

A. Place protection board directly against membrane; butt joints. B. Install the protection board to substrate onto tacky dampproofing surface.

1. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations and interruptions.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 07 13 54 Page - 1 Thermoplastic Sheet Waterproofing Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 07 13 54

THERMOPLASTIC SHEET WATERPROOFING Part 1 – GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1

General requirements, apply to the work of this section. 1.02 WORK SUMMARY A. The work of this section includes, but is not limited to the furnishing and installing of the following

materials, per project specifications and drawings, or as directed by waterproofing manufacturer: Product is for use at Elevator pit. Other sheet waterproofing is part of the construction documents for under slab portions (Stego)

1. CoreFlex®-60 waterproofing membrane with all applicable accessory products. 2. Aquadrain prefabricated drainage composite and Aquadrain 100BD Base Drain 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Other specification Sections which directly relate to the work of this section include, but are not limited

to, the following: 1. Division 2: Subsurface and Geotechnical Investigations 2. Division 3: Waterstops 3. Division 5: Expansion Joint Products 4. Division 7: Joint Treatment/ Sealants, Flashing and sheet metal, and Insulation 5. Division 22: Deck and Floor Drains and other Mechanical Penetrations 6. Division 26: Conduit and other Electrical Penetrations 7. Division 31: Earthwork, Excavation and Fill, Shoring, 8. Division 33: Geocomposite Foundation Drainage 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. At the Elevator Pit - Provide waterproofing system and prefabricated drainage composite system to

prevent the passage of liquid water and install without defects, damage or failure. Waterproofing shall be a 60 mil thick Elvaloy KEE based thermoplastic membrane reinforced with a 5.0 oz. weft inserted knit polyester fabric integrally bonded to an Active Polymer Core (APC) layer. All thermoplastic field seams shall be continuously welded and supported with all applicable accessory products installed.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit specified submittals in accordance with "Conditions of the Contract" and

Division 1 Submittals Sections. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, with complete general and specific installation

instructions, recommendations, and limitations. C. Product Samples: Submit representative samples of the following for approval:



1. CoreFlex-60 and CoreFlash-60 waterproofing membranes. D. Warranty Sample: Submit a sample copy of the Manufacturer’s Waterproofing Warranty complete

with all coverage’s, limitations and conditions. E. Material Certificates: Submit certificate(s) signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with

specified performance characteristics and physical requirements. Submit certification that waterproofing system and components, drainage and protection materials are supplied by a single-source manufacturer.

F. Contractor Certificate: At time of bid, submit written certification that installer has current Approved

Applicator status with waterproofing material manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installing Company should have at least three (3) years experience in work of

the type required by this section, who can comply with manufacturer's warranty requirements, and who is an Approved Applicator as determined by waterproofing/drainage system manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Waterproofing membranes and all accessory products shall be provided

by a single manufacturer with a minimum of 30 years experience in the direct production and sales of waterproofing systems. Manufacturer shall be capable of providing field service representation during construction, approving an acceptable installer, and recommending appropriate installation methods.

C. Pre-Installation Conference: A pre-installation conference shall be held at least two weeks prior to

commencement of field installation to establish procedures to maintain required working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work. Confirm that all parties understand what is required to provide a substrate that is suitable to receive the CoreFlex-60 Waterproofing System. Verify that final waterproofing and waterstop details comply with waterproofing manufacturer's current installation requirements and recommendations. Pre-con meeting attendees should include representatives for the owner, architect, inspection firm, general contractor, waterproofing contractor, concrete contractor, excavating/backfill contractor, and mechanical and electrical contractors if work penetrates the waterproofing.

D. Materials: Obtain waterproofing and prefabricated drainage materials with accessory products from a

single manufacturer to assure material compatibility. E. Independent Inspection: Owner shall make all arrangements and payments for an independent

inspection service to verify and approve substrate prior to installation; monitor waterproofing material installation compliance with the project contract documents and manufacturer’s published literature and site specific details. Independent Inspection Firm shall be an approved company participating with the waterproofing manufacturer’s Certified Inspection Program. Inspection service shall produce reports and digital photographs documenting each inspection. Reports shall be made available to the Contractor, waterproofing installer, waterproofing material manufacturer, and Architect. Inspections should include substrate examination, beginning of waterproofing installation, periodic intervals, seam welding per Section 3.05M and final inspection prior to concrete or backfill placement against the waterproofing.

F. Water Sample Test: Waterproofing contractor shall supply project site water sample to waterproofing

membrane manufacturer for analysis. Manufacturer shall conduct test free of charge. Contractor is responsible for collection and shipment of one liter of actual site water. Water should be shipped in uncontaminated, sealed plastic container to: CETCO Technical Center, Attn: BMG Field Services, 1500 West Shure Drive, Arlington Heights, IL 60004. Also provide project name, city and state along with return address to forward test results.

1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING



A. Delivery and Handling: Deliver materials in factory sealed and labeled packaging. Sequence

deliveries to avoid delays, while minimizing on-site storage. Handle and store following manufacturer's instructions, recommendations and material safety data sheets. Protect from construction operation related damage, as well as, damage from weather, excessive temperatures and prolonged sunlight. Remove damaged material from site and dispose of in accordance with applicable regulations.

B. Storage: Do not double-stack pallets during shipping or storage. Protect waterproofing materials

from moisture, excessive temperatures and sources of ignition. Provide cover, top and all sides, for materials stored on-site, allowing for adequate ventilation. Canvas tarps are recommended.

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Substrate Condition: Proceed with work only when substrate construction and preparation work is

complete and in condition to receive waterproofing system. B. Weather Conditions: Perform work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within

the guidelines established by the manufacturer of the waterproofing materials. Do not apply waterproofing materials into standing or active water; over ice and snow. Though exposure to precipitation and ground water seepage typically will not adversely affect CoreFlex-60, the General Contractor shall maintain site conditions to remove standing water from precipitation or ground water seepage in a timely manner. Should CoreFlex-60 be subjected to prehydration as a result of prolonged immersion (prior to completion and final detailing), inspection of the material and written acceptance from CETCO is required prior to concrete or backfill placement.

1.09 WARRANTY A. Warranty must be validated by Manufacturer confirming acceptance of installation, including

independent inspection reports, in accordance with all applicable instructions. B. Waterproofing Warranty: Upon completion and acceptance of the work required by this section, the

waterproofing materials manufacturer will provide a written five (5) year warranty, covering both materials and labor, to the project owner. Issuance of Manufacturer's HydroShield Warranty requires the following: (1) System waterproofing and prefabricated drainage products shall have been provided by a single manufacturer; (2) Installation of waterproofing and prefabricated drainage products by Manufacturer's Approved Applicator; (3) Installation inspected by Independent Inspection Firm per Section 1.06; (4) In Section 3 work, Waterstop-RX must be installed in all applicable horizontal and vertical cold pour concrete construction joints and around applicable penetrations. Manufacturer's warranty shall be independent from any other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents and may run concurrent with the other warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Provide CoreFlex-60 waterproofing membrane and applicable accessories as manufactured by

Colloid Environmental Technologies Company (CETCO), 1500 West Shure Drive, Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004-1440, USA. Phone: (847)392-5800; Fax: (847)506-6195; Web-site: http://www.cetco.com/bmg

2.02 MATERIALS A. COREFLEX-60 MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING



1. CoreFlex-60 MEMBRANE: 60 mil (1.5 mm) nominal thick Elvaloy KEE based thermoplastic membrane reinforced with a 5.0 oz. weft inserted knit polyester fabric integrally bonded to an Active Polymer Core (APC). CoreFlex-60 is designed for use on backfilled foundation walls, plaza decks, structural podium slabs, under floor slabs, property line retention walls, earth-covered structures, tunnels and greenroofs. Roll size: 54” x 50′ (1.4 m x 15 m). 54” wide thermoplastic membrane with APC layer offset 6” (150 mm) along the long roll edges.

B. COREFLEX-60 MEMBRANE PERFORMANCE PROPERTIES:

C. ACCESSORY WATERPROOFING PRODUCTS: All accessory waterproofing materials shall be

provided by the waterproofing manufacturer or shall have manufacturer’s written approval for substitution.

1. CoreFlash-60: 60 mil nominal reinforced thermoplastic membrane used for non-exposed flashing

applications including curbs, walls, field wraps and patches. Membrane is yellow top coat and black bottom coat.

2. CoreFlash-UV: 60 mil nominal reinforced UV stable thermoplastic membrane (white top coat and

black bottom coat) used for flashing applications exposed to direct UV and or weathering conditions. Including curbs, walls, field wraps and patches.

3. CoreFlash-NR: 60 mil nominal UV stable non-reinforced extruded white thermoplastic membrane

used for above or below grade flashing applications including curbs, walls, field wraps and patches. Available in 4’ x 24’ rolls.

Physical Properties

Property Test Method Typical Value

CoreFlex-60

Membrane Composite Thickness ASTM D751

150 mil (3.8 mm) Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance (min 1 hour @ 100 psi) ASTM D5385

231 ft (70 m)

Puncture Resistance ASTM D4833

228 lbf (1014 N)

Breaking Yield Strength ASTM D751

318 lbf/in(62.2 N/mm)

Low Temperature Flexibility (-30°F) ASTM D2136

Pass Resistance to Wicking (max. 0.125” (3.2 mm)) ASTM D751

Pass

Tear Strength ASTM D4533

95 lbs (423 N)

Hydrostatic Resistance ASTM D751

756 psi (4.7 mPa)

Membrane Bursting Strength ASTM D751

627 lbs (284 kg)

Water Vapor Retarder ASTM E1745

Class A

Water Vapor Transmission ASTM E96

0.1 perms (0.036 gr/m/hr)

Tensile Strength ASTM E154

387 lbf/in (68 kN/m)

Puncture Resistance ASTM D1709

12 lbs (5500 grams)



4. CoreClad-A: 0.040 in thick 3003H14 Aluminum sheet laminated with a 20 mil (0.50 mm) nominal

thick UV stable compatible thermoplastic coating on one side for above or below grade flashing and detail applications. Available in 47.5-in x 120-in (1.2 m x 3.0 m) sheets.

5. CoreDisc: 4” (100 mm) diameter thermoplastic discs. Used for attaching CoreFlex-60 membrane

to vertical surfaces prior to concrete pour and for finishing T-Joints. 6. Universal Corner: Preformed injection molded thermoplastic flashings that will accommodate inside

and outside corner details of any dimension. CoreFlex Universal Corners come as one piece and are trimmed to fit the appropriate condition.

7. Adhesive SB-100: Solvent-based adhesive for securing CoreFlash membranes to various

substrates, including cured concrete, wood, metal and cementitious boards. 8. AkwaSwell: Hydrophilic polyurethane caulk used for detail work. 9. Cortex: A low permeable geotextile waterproofing material that utilizes Blended Polymer Alloy

(BPA) technology. 10. Termination Bar: Minimum 1/8” thick x 1” wide stainless steel or aluminum termination bar punched

6” (150 mm) o. c. or approved equal. 11. Sealant: Chemlink M-1 UV stable single component polyether moisture cure sealant or CETCO

approved equal. 12. AS-100 Adhesive: Caulk grade adhesive used to secure APC flaps as applicable or CETCO

approved equal. 13. Hydrobar Tubes: 2” (50 mm) diameter x 2’ (600 mm) long, water soluble tube container filled with

granular sodium bentonite. 14. Protection Course: CoreFlash-60 or other CETCO approved protection layer products. D. BASE AND SHEET DRAINAGE COMPOSITE: Aquadrain by CETCO shall be used

where drainage composite is specified to promote positive drainage. Use base drain accessory connectors and outlets as required.

1. Vertical Applications: Aquadrain 15XP - 4-ft by 52-ft roll of a three-dimensional polypropylene

drainage core with a non-woven geotextile adhered to one side to allow water passage while restricting soil particles. Composite includes a thin polyethylene sheet on the back of the drainage core.

a. Compressive Strength, 15,000psf (718 kPa); b. Water Flow Rate, 20gpm/ft (251 l/m/m); c. Thickness, 7/16” (11 mm).

2. Aquadrain 100BD Base Drain – 1” (25 mm) thick x 12” (300 mm) high base drain composite

designed to collect water from sheet composite drainage and then discharge the water to proper sump system or gravity flow to daylight.

a. Compressive Strength, 10,000psf (457 kPa); b. Water Flow rate, 97gpm/ft (1,197 l/m/m) c. Thickness, 1” (25 mm)



PART 3 – EXECUTION A. Comply with contract documents and manufacturer's product data, including product application and

installation instructions. 3.01 SUBSTRATE INSPECTION AND CONDITIONS A. The installer, with the Owner’s Independent Inspector present, shall examine conditions of substrates

and other conditions under which this section work is to be performed and notify the contractor, in writing, of circumstances detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory substrate conditions are corrected and are acceptable for compliance with manufacturer's warranty requirements.

B. General substrate conditions acceptable for the waterproofing installation are listed below. For

conditions not covered in this Section, contact the waterproofing manufacturer for guidance. C. WORKING MUD SLAB: CoreFlex-60 applications require a working mud slab with a float finish to

provide a planar surface; without sharp angular depressions, voids or raised features. Do not install CoreFlex-60 membrane over compacted soil or gravel substrate.

D. MECHANICAL OR OTHER PENETRATIONS: Mechanical, structural, or architectural materials that

will pass through the plane of the waterproofing membrane shall be properly installed and secured in their final position prior to installation of the waterproofing system.

E. CONCRETE: Concrete to be waterproofed shall be properly placed and consolidated. Reinforced

structural slabs should be a minimum of 6" (150 mm) thick when placed over CoreFlex-60 membrane. When hydrostatic conditions exist, install CoreFlex-60 under all footings, elevator pits and grade beams. Cast-in-place concrete to receive waterproofing shall be of sound structural grade with a smooth finish, free of debris, oil, grease, laitance, dirt, dust, or other foreign matter which will impair the performance of the waterproofing and drainage system and which do not comply with manufacturer's warranty requirements. CoreFlex-60 can be installed on green structural concrete as soon as the forms are removed provided the contractor gains written approval from project structural engineer listing any site specific concrete curing time requirement prior to waterproofing installation. Do not apply CoreFlex-60 waterproofing over lightweight insulating concrete, wood or steel decking.

1. Form fins, ridges, ponding ridges and other protrusions should be level and smooth with monolithic

concrete surface. 2. Honeycombing, aggregate pockets, tie-rod holes and other voids should be completely filled with

non-shrink cementitious grout and level with monolithic concrete surface. 5. All expansion joints should receive applicable expansion joint sealant product manufactured by others

prior to the installation of the CoreFlex-60 Waterproofing System. Expansion joint material is the primary seal at the expansion joint and the expansion joint material manufacturer is responsible for watertightness of the joint.

NOTE: Related work to be completed under Division 3. Waterstop-RX shall be installed in all applicable vertical and horizontal concrete construction cold pour joints and around applicable



penetrations and structural members. Refer to Waterstop-RX Product Manual for further installation procedures and guidelines.

3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove dirt, debris, oil, grease, cement laitance, or other foreign matter which will impair or

negatively affect the performance of the waterproofing and drainage system. B. Protect adjacent work areas and finished surfaces from damage or contamination from waterproofing

products during installation operations. 3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION GUIDELINES A. Install CoreFlex-60 in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation guidelines using

accessory products, protection and drainage layers, as specified or required. Install membrane in a flat, relaxed position avoiding wrinkles and stretching. Apply in standard roll size or longest workable cut length to reduce the number of T-Joints (three-way overlaps). Overlap membrane a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and construct all seams with a continuous thermoplastic weld. Installation of the waterproofing material should be scheduled in order to permit prompt placement of concrete or backfill following installation of the CoreFlex-60 membrane.

B. Underslab Installation Guidelines: Install CoreFlex-60 membrane with the grey APC geotextile side up

to receive concrete pour (yellow membrane side down). C. Backfilled Wall Installation Guidelines: Install CoreFlex-60 membrane as specified with the grey APC

geotextile directly in contact with the concrete to be waterproofed (yellow membrane side out facing installer).

D. CoreFlash-60 Installation guidelines: Install CoreFlash-60 membrane with the black side oriented

toward the concrete to be waterproofed. E. CoreFlash UV: Install CoreFlash UV membrane with the black side oriented toward the concrete to be

waterproofed; white side exposed to UV and or weathering conditions. F. CoreFlash NR: Install CoreFlash NR membrane with the either side oriented toward the side to be

exposed to direct UV and or weathering conditions. G. Workman and all others that walk on waterproofing should wear clean, soft-soled shoes so as not to

damage materials. H. Lay out work to minimize traffic over installed areas. Membrane is slippery when wet or covered with

frost, snow or ice. Take proper precautions and heed all manufacturers’ warnings in regard to product use.

I. Where applicable, daily production schedules shall be limited to only that which can be made

watertight at the end of the day or prior to inclement weather, including all flashing and night seals. J. Expansion Joints: CoreFlex-60 waterproofing is not an expansion joint filler or sealant, but may be

used as an expansion joint cover over a properly installed expansion joint material placed during substrate preparation.

3.04 COREFLEX-60 OVERLAP ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES A. General: Assemble CoreFlex-60 membrane overlaps with both the thermoplastic membrane and the

Active Polymer Core (APC) layers overlapping a minimum 4” (100 mm) with all thermoplastic



membrane edges continuously welded per CETCO guidelines. Membrane overlaps shall be oriented to shed water (shingle style) whenever possible. Specific equipment, especially wedge welders, may require greater overlap dimensions to facilitate welding.

B. CoreFlex-60 Seam Assembly: Prior to welding, the following steps are required.

1. Along the long roll edges, both CoreFlex-60 is produced with the APC layer offset 6” (150 mm) from the thermoplastic membrane to facilitate thermoplastic welding. To facilitate thermoplastic welding along roll end edges or field cut roll dimensions, peel the APC back away from the thermoplastic membrane edge as required to accommodate various welding equipment and field conditions. Do not cut off the peeled APC geotextile. After peeling, fold back and temporarily secure the peeled APC layer with duct tape or other similar non-penetrating method to suspend it out of the way for the overlap thermoplastic welding process. The adjacent CoreFlex-60 membrane APC layer edge does typically not need to be peeled.

2. Overlap the adjacent membrane edges, thermoplastic to thermoplastic, and maintain a uniform minimum overlap width of 4” (100 mm).

3. Following the overlap thermoplastic welding process, fold back any peeled APC layer material to its approximate original position, whereas it overlaps the adjacent membrane APC layer a minimum 4” (100 mm), and secure it with a continuous bead of AS-100 Adhesive.

4. Depending on site and detail specific conditions, alternate overlap/weld methods may be required.

Consult CETCO for other overlap techniques, procedures and details to properly provide a 4” (100 mm) membrane overlap and a continuous thermoplastic weld.

3.05 MEMBRANE WELDING PROCEDURES

A. Welding equipment shall be approved by CETCO. Contact CETCO for a list of suitable equipment. B. All welding shall be performed only by qualified personnel trained by CETCO representative prior to

field welding. C. Use of automated welding equipment is recommended for all CoreFlex-60 and CoreFlash-60

membrane overlap seams exceeding 10 feet (3 m) in length. Automated equipment can either be hot air welding machine or a wedge welding machine. All welds shall be continuous and without interruption or defect.

D. Prior to welding, start welding equipment and allow it to warm up to optimum welding temperature.

Equipment warming period may vary depending on weather conditions and will need to be verified each day and after equipment has been cooled down and restarted and must be confirmed with a test weld.

E. Hot Air Welders: For all field seams use a 1-1/2” (40 mm) wide nozzle to create a nominal 1-1/2” (40

mm) wide homogeneous thermoplastic weld. Use a minimum ¾ “ (20 mm) wide nozzle for corners, T-joints, patches and other field detailing, maintaining a nominal ¾” (20 mm) wide homogeneous thermoplastic weld. All welds shall be continuous and without interruption or defect.

F. All seams must be clean and dry prior to initiating any field welding procedures. Remove all foreign

materials from the seams (dirt, oils, etc.) using CLEAN WHITE COTTON cloth. Do not use denim or synthetic, synthetic blend or paper rags for cleaning. For detailed cleaning procedures consult CETCO.

G. Contamination occurring within a seam shall be patched to insure water-tight integrity of the weld.



H. Follow equipment manufacturer’s instructions and observe local codes and site requirements for

electricity supply, grounding, GFI and other current protection. Dedicated circuit, house power or a dedicated portable generator is required. No other equipment (including but not limited to hand welders) shall be operated off the dedicated power source.

I. T-Joints (multiple thermoplastic membrane overlaps) 1. A 4” (100 mm) CoreDisc or piece of CoreFlash NR is required centered and hot air welded at the T-

Joint intersection using the following steps. 2. All membrane edges forming the T-Joint that will be covered by the CoreDisc, plus 1” (25 mm)

beyond, must be feathered to provide a smooth transition for the CoreDisc. The feathering can be accomplished with a hot nozzle of hand welding tool.

3. While hand welding the CoreDisc, use the edge of the hand roller to conform the CoreDisc completely

to the thermoplastic membrane overlaps to prevent voids at the feathered membrane edges. J. Hand Welding seams shall be competed per the following three steps. 1. Step One: Intermittently tack weld the overlap to hold the thermoplastic membrane overlap in place

and maintain a uniform minimum overlap width of 4” (100 mm). 2. Step Two: Insert the nozzle into the back of the overlap. With a silicone roller pinch off the back

edge to trap the hot air and make a thin pre-weld. The pre-weld will serve to concentrate heat along the exterior edge of the overlap during step three.

3. Step Three: Insert the nozzle of the hand welder into the lap at a 45° angle relative to the sheet

edge. As the thermoplastic membrane surface begins to flow, apply light pressure with a hand roller oriented at a right angle to the tip of the hand welder. As rolled, a small bead of molten material should bleed out of the seam edge.

K. Machine Welding 1. Automated Hot-Air Welders 2. Use a 1-1/2” (40 mm) wide nozzle to create a nominal 1-1/2” (40 mm) wide homogeneous

thermoplastic weld. Depending on the location of the bearing weight and design of the equipment, a sheet metal track may be required. Welds shall be continuous and without interruption or defect.

3. Including but not limited to underslab installations, move the peeled APC geotextile out of the way (do

not cut it off) in order for welding equipment to run unobstructed and uninterrupted. Weld the thermoplastic membrane overlap following Section 3.05 instructions. Following the welding process, fold back the peeled APC geotextile to complete the 4” (100 mm) overlap assembly.

L. Wedge Welders 1. Use a minimum 2” (50 mm) wide wedge to create a nominal 2” (50 mm) wide homogeneous

thermoplastic weld without interruption or defect. 2. Membrane overlap assembly may need to be increased according to the requirements of the

equipment. 3. Prior to wedge welding, fold the APC geotextile selvege edge of the bottom sheet back under and out

of the way in order for the thermoplastic membrane of the bottom sheet to make contact with the wedge. Fold back the APC selvege edge for the entire length to be welded.



4. After completing thermoplastic weld, lift up membrane and unfold the APC geotextile selvege edge to

provide minimum 4” (100 mm) APC to APC overlap at the membrane overlap assembly. M. Quality Control/Inspection of Welded Seams 1. All welds shall be inspected by the waterproofing applicator’s job foreman and/or supervisor daily

after cooling. Weld continuity inspection shall include, but not be limited to, the probing of all field welds with a rounded screwdriver or other dull pointed instrument. Immediately mark and remediate any deficiencies per CETCO guidelines.

2. Each days welding should begin with an evaluation of welded seams conducted on a test strip of

membrane. Adjust equipment speed and or heat/power settings as necessary to achieve proper welds. From the test weld, cut out and retain a 2” – 4” (50 mm – 100 mm) wide seam sample, date it and retain for the independent inspector/owners rep. Further testing may be required as conditions change during the day, as problems arise or at the independent inspector/owners rep. discretion. Taking samples of completed waterproofing should be avoided whenever possible. However, when necessary, each test cut shall be filled with Cortex and patched with CoreFlash-60 extending 4” (100 mm) beyond the edges of the cut opening and completed with a homogeneous thermoplastic weld. Each test cut shall be patched by the waterproofing applicator at no additional cost to the owner.

3. Ensure that all aspects of the installation (sheet layout, attachment, welding, flashing details, etc.) are

in strict accordance with the most current CETCO Specifications and Details. Excessive patching of field seams because of inexperienced or poor workmanship will not be accepted at time of FINAL INSPECTION FOR WARRANTY ACCEPTANCE. Deviations from this specification and/or details must be authorized in writing by CETCO, prior to execution. Deviations from this procedure may result in forfeiture of warranty rights.

3.06 UNDER SLAB INSTALLATION – COREFLEX-60 A. Reinforced structural foundation slabs should be a minimum of 6" (150 mm) thick where CoreFlex-60

is installed. Install CoreFlex-60 under all footings, elevator pits and grade beams when hydrostatic conditions exists or are anticipated per the historical high ground water elevation reported in the project’s geotechnical documents.

B. Place CoreFlex-60 directly on properly prepared mud slab substrate (APC geotextile side facing up;

yellow side down) with adjoining thermoplastic membrane edges overlapped a minimum of 4” (100 mm). Assemble and weld laps per Sections 3.04 and 3.05; secure any loose or peeled APC layer material with continuous bead of AS-100 Adhesive. When the slab is poured in sections, extend CoreFlex-60 a minimum 12" (300 mm) beyond the slab section edge to enable proper membrane overlapping. At the slab perimeter overlap the corner transition sheet installed per section 3.07 a minimum 4" (100 mm); assemble and weld laps per Sections 3.04 and 3.05.

C. Slab Penetrations: For all pipe, rebar, structural or other penetrations install waterproofing system per

manufacturer’s standard detail for specific project condition(s). D. Grade Beams: Install CoreFlex-60 under the entire grade beam by lining the form work prior to

placing the reinforcing steel. Line the grade beam formwork with CoreFlex-60 prior to placement of reinforcing steel. Leave a minimum 12" (300 mm) of CoreFlex-60 at the top of the form to tie into under slab waterproofing. Overlap adjacent membrane edges a minimum 4" (100 mm); assemble and weld laps per Sections 3.04 and 3.05.

E. Inside and Outside Corners: Install CoreFlex-60 membrane per manufacturer’s standard detail with

applicable universal corner piece welded.



F. Inspect finished CoreFlex-60 installation and repair any damaged material prior to concrete slab placement.

G. NOTE: Related work to be completed under Division 3. Volclay Waterstop-RX shall be installed in all

slab joints, around applicable slab penetrations and structural members. Refer to Waterstop-RX Product Manual for further installation procedures and guidelines.

3.07 BACKFILLED WALL– COREFLEX-60 A. General: Backfilled wall applications install the CoreFlex-60 membrane with the grey APC geotextile

side against concrete; yellow side facing installer. The means of securing the CoreFlex-60 membrane to the wall prior to backfill is via mechanical attachment in the overlap; resulting in a homogeneous membrane waterproofing with no exposed fastener penetrations. For non-hydrostatic conditions adhere to Section 3.08 instructions; for hydrostatic conditions adhere to Section 3.09. In either instance the two installation procedures in Section 3.07 A.1 and A. 2 are required.

1. At the bottom of the wall (at the wall footing transition), install a horizontally oriented transition course

consisting of a full width sheet of CoreFlex-60 membrane. 2. At the top of the wall follow the grade termination procedures as outlined per Section 3.10. 3.08 BACKFILLED CIP CONCRETE WALL– NON-HYDROSTATIC – COREFLEX 60 A. At the wall/footing intersection, install Hydrobar Tubes prior to the placement of the CoreFlex-60

membrane. Install bottom course of CoreFlex-60 membrane horizontally oriented (grey APC geotextile side against concrete; yellow side facing installer) with the bottom edge extending out onto the footing minimum 12” (300 mm). Install sheet with the APC offset edge on the wall and the thermoplastic membrane edge is on the slab / footer.

B. Approximately 1-1/2 (38 mm) down from the top edge of the yellow thermoplastic membrane,

mechanically attach membrane to the concrete wall with CETCO approved washer-head mechanical fasteners spaced a maximum of 24” (600 mm) on center. Install adjacent membrane sheets with the thermoplastic membrane and APC layers overlapped a minimum 4” (100 mm). Assemble and weld laps per Sections 3.04 and 3.05. As applicable, secure any loose or peeled APC layer material with continuous bead of AS-100 Adhesive.

C. Terminate bottom edge of CoreFlex-60 to concrete footing: First trim the yellow membrane selvege

edge back to the APC layer along the long edge of the membrane on the footing. Insure that the CoreFlex-60 membrane conforms tightly to the footing/wall transition and then mechanically secure the trimmed membrane edge to the footing with a termination bar fastened 6” (150 mm) o.c. Complete the footing termination detail with ChemLink M-1 sealant applied continuously along trimmed edge of membrane. Tool sealant bead to insure it completely encapsulates the edge of the membrane and extends slightly onto concrete footing and yellow thermoplastic membrane.

D. After the bottom horizontal course, CoreFlex-60 sheets can be installed either vertically or horizontally

oriented. Continue CoreFlex-60 installation up wall. Do not allow horizontal CoreFlex-60 overlap joints to run at same elevation as the concrete pour lift joints; extend membrane past a minimum 12” (300 mm). Install adjacent membrane sheets overlapped a minimum 4” (100 mm). Assemble and weld laps per Sections 3.04 and 3.05. As applicable, secure any loose or peeled APC layer material with continuous bead of AS-100 Adhesive.

E. Wall Penetrations: For all pipe, rebar, structural and other penetrations install waterproofing system

per manufacturer’s standard detail for specific project condition(s). F. Inside and Outside Corners: Install CoreFlex-60 membranes, CoreFlash-60 membranes or Universal

Corners per manufacturer’s standard details.



G. Inspect finished CoreFlex-60 installation and repair any damaged material prior to Aquadrain 15XP drainage sheet layer and backfill placement.

H. Continue CoreFlex-60 membrane installation up wall to an elevation 12” (300 mm) down from finished

grade elevation. Terminate membrane per section 3.10. I. Per manufacturers guidelines, install Aquadrain 15XP sheet drainage layer to the exterior of the

CoreFlex-60 membrane installation. Secure Aquadrain sheet drainage to yellow thermoplastic membrane of CoreFlex-60 with CETCO approved adhesive or tape. NO mechanical fasteners that penetrate the CoreFlex-60 membrane can be used to secure Aquadrain. Install base of Aquadrain 15XP to Aquadrain 100BD connected to operable water discharge system with applicable connection accessories.

3.09 BACKFILLED CIP CONCRETE WALL– HYDROSTATIC CONDITIONS -- COREFLEX-60 A. At the wall/footing intersection, install Hydrobar Tubes prior to the placement of the CoreFlex-60

membrane. Install bottom course of CoreFlex-60 membrane horizontally oriented (grey APC geotextile side against concrete; yellow side facing installer) with the bottom edge extending out onto the footing minimum 12” (300 mm) or further as required to overlap leading edge of CoreFlex-60 membrane previously installed under the footing as part of underslab work. Install sheet with the APC offset edge on the wall and the thermoplastic membrane selvege edge is on the slab / footer.

B. Approximately 1-1/2 (38 mm) down from the top edge of the yellow thermoplastic membrane, mechanically attach membrane to the concrete wall with CETCO approved washer-head mechanical fasteners spaced a maximum of 24” (600 mm) on center. Install adjacent membrane sheets with the thermoplastic membrane and APC layers overlapped a minimum 4” (100 mm). Assemble and weld laps per Sections 3.04 and 3.05. As applicable, secure any loose or peeled APC layer material with continuous bead of AS-100 Adhesive.

C. Along footer, overlap leading edge of CoreFlex-60 membrane installed underslab with the

thermoplastic membrane and APC layers overlapped a minimum 4” (100 mm). Insure that the CoreFlex-60 membrane conforms tightly to the footing/wall transition and then assemble and weld laps per Sections 3.04 and 3.05. Install adjacent membrane sheets with the thermoplastic membrane and APC layers overlapped a minimum 4” (100 mm). Assemble and weld laps per Sections 3.04 and 3.05. As applicable, secure any loose or peeled APC layer material with continuous bead of AS-100 Adhesive.

D. After the bottom horizontal course, CoreFlex-60 sheets can be installed either vertically or horizontally

oriented. Continue CoreFlex-60 installation up wall. Do not allow horizontal CoreFlex-60 overlap joints to run at same elevation as the concrete pour lift joints; extend membrane past a minimum 12” (300 mm). Install adjacent membrane sheets overlapped a minimum 4” (100 mm). Assemble and weld laps per Sections 3.04 and 3.05. As applicable, secure any loose or peeled APC layer material with continuous bead of AS-100 Adhesive.

E. Wall Penetrations: For all pipe, rebar, structural and other penetrations install waterproofing system

per manufacturer’s standard detail for specific project condition(s). F. Inside and Outside Corners: Install CoreFlex-60 membranes, CoreFlash-60 membranes or Universal

Corners per manufacturer’s standard details. G. Inspect finished CoreFlex-60 installation and repair any damaged material prior to backfill placement. H. Continue CoreFlex-60 membrane installation up to elevation 12” (300 mm) down from finished grade

elevation. Terminate membrane per section 3.09B. 3.10 BACKFILLED WALL GRADE TERMINATION COURSE – COREFLEX-60



A. Start grade termination course with top edge of CoreFlex-60 membrane 12” (300 mm) below finished grade (or per project requirements) with membrane horizontally oriented (grey APC geotextile side against concrete). Install termination bar fastened 6” (150 mm) o.c. along the top edge of the CoreFlex-60 membrane.

B. Install CoreFlash-UV with bottom edge overlapping top edge of CoreFlex-60 membrane a minimum

4” (100 mm) and secure with a homogeneous thermoplastic weld per Section 3.05. Use Adhesive SB-100 to adhere CoreFlash-UV membrane continuously to wall.

C. Install top edge of CoreFlash UV in reglet cut into face of concrete wall. Then install continuous foam

backer rod into reglet to secure top membrane edge and seal reglet with continuous bead of Chemlink M-1 sealant. .

D. Inspect finished CoreFlex-60 / CoreFlash UV termination and repair any damaged material. 3.11 PROTECTION COURSE A. For backfilled wall construction, install CoreFlash-60 or other CETCO approved protection material,

over completed CoreFlex-60 membrane installation as soon as possible. As applicable, coordinate this work with third-party inspector to allow inspection and acceptance of membrane work before installation of protection layer. CoreFlash-60 protection layer laps shall be either hot air welded or taped with Volclay Seamtape.

3.12 INSULATION A. Always apply CoreFlex-60 waterproofing directly to properly prepared structural concrete

substrates. Insulation, if used, should be installed to the exterior of the waterproofing. 3.13 BACKFILL EXCAVATED CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WALLS A. Backfill shall be placed promptly after CoreFlex-60 waterproofing has been installed. Closely

coordinate with contractor responsible for Backfill work by informing them each time a waterproofed area is ready for backfill. Care should be used during backfill operation to avoid damage to the waterproofing system. Backfill operations shall follow generally accepted practices for placement and compaction. Backfill should be added in 6" to 12" (150 - 300 mm) lifts and compacted to a minimum 85% Modified Proctor density. If gravel backfill, specify angular aggregate <3/4” (18mm) with fines.

3.14 CLEAN UP A. In areas where adjacent finished surfaces are soiled by work of this Section, consult manufacturer

of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their recommendations and instructions. Remove all tools, equipment and remaining product on-site. Dispose of section work debris and damaged product following all applicable regulations.

End of Section



SECTION 07 21 16

BATT INSULATION

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 07 21 16 Page - 1 Batt Insulation Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011


A. The provisions of the general Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements, are included as a part of this Section.


A. Batt insulation in exterior walls and ceiling. B. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall and roof C. Acoustical batt / Sound Attenuation batt insulation for interior partitions

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM E96 – Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials B. ASTM C665 – Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction

and Manufactured Housing C. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials D. ASTM E136 – Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750o C E. ASTM C518 – Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat

Flow Meter Apparatus F. ASTM C423 – Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption Coefficient by the Reverberation Room Method G. NFPA 255 - Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials H. UL 723 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials I. International Building Code (IBC)

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials of this Section: Provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements. 1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Coordinate the work of Section 07 26 00 for installation of vapor barrier as necessary

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTUERS

A. Johns Manville, Corp. B. Owens Corning C. Georgia Pacific D. Fibrex E. CertainTeed

2.2 MATERIALS - All insulations shall contain low or no formaldehyde and be certified by the 'Greenguard Certified for

Children and Schools' (www.greenguard.org) for searchable database listing complaint products.

A. Thermal Batt Insulation: Provide and install ASTM C665; un-faced (unless noted otherwise) glass fiber thermal insulation, with thermal Resistant in accordance with ASTM C518, R-Value for exterior walls to be R-19 minimum. Thicknesses as indicated on drawings.


SECTION 07 21 16

BATT INSULATION

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 07 21 16 Page - 2 Batt Insulation Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

1. Surfacing Burning Characteristics: 2. Maximum Flame Spread: 25 3. Maximum Smoke Developed: 50 4. Combustion Characteristics: Non-combustible. 5. Dimensional Stability: Linear Shrinkage less than 0.1%

B. Acoustical Batt Insulation, Sound Attenuation batts: Provide and install ASTM C665 un-faced (unless noted otherwise) on drawings glass fiber acoustical insulation, install in areas as shown on the drawings. Thicknesses as indicated on drawings. 1. Type I 2. Surfacing Burning Characteristics:

a. Maximum Flame Spread: 10 b. Maximum Smoke Developed: 10

3. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E136 4. Fire Resistance Ratings: Passes ASTM E119 as part of a complete fire tested wall assembly 5. Dimensional Stability: Linear Shrinkage less than 0.1%

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Steel wire: electroplated; type and size to suit application. B. Tape: Polyethylene self-adhering type, mesh reinforced. C. Insulation Fasteners: Steel impale spindle and clip on flat metal base, self-adhering backing, length to suit

insulation thickness, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place. D. Wire Mesh: Galvanized steel, hexagonal wire mesh.


A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00 B. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive insulation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior walls, roof, and ceiling spaces without gaps or voids do not compress insulation. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of

insulation. E. Install with factory applied membrane facing exterior side of building spaces.

1. Lap the ends and side flanges of membrane over framing members. F. Retain in place with wire mesh secured to framing members. G. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane. H. Metal Framing: If vapor barrier is used, place on exterior side of insulation; lap and seal sheet retarder joints

over membrane face.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD – Oran M. Roberts 07 25 00 Page 1 Weather Resistant Barrier Elementary School – BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 07 25 00

WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIER

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Weather resistant barrier for exterior wall assemblies


A. Cold-Formed Metal framing – Section 05 40 00

B. Gypsum Board Assemblies – Section 09 26 00

C. Flashings – Section 07 60 00

1.3 REFERENCES:

A. AATCC Test Method 127 – Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test. B. ASTM E 96 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. C. ASTM E 1677 – Standard Specifications for an Air Retarder (AR) Material or System for

Low-Rise Framed Building Walls.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:


B. Test Results: Submit copies of test results showing performance characteristics equaling of exceeding those specified.

C. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions.


A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

B. Storage and Protection: Protect materials from rain and physical damage. Provide cover on top and on all sides, allowing for adequate ventilation. Store all products in a dry area away from high heat, flames or sparks.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: DuPont Company, DuPont Pharmaceuticals Plaza, P.O. Box 80705, Wilmington, DE 19880-0705. 1-800-448-9835, 1-800-203-0013 (Fax) 1. Tyvek Commercial Wrap® for masonry veneer and siding 2. Tyvek® HeaderWrap®

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. C. Provide all weather resistant barriers from a single manufacturer.



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Weather Resistant Barrier: 100% flash spun-bonded high density polyethylene fibers bonded together by heat and pressure, nonwoven, non-perforated: 1. Classification: ASTM E1677, Type 1; air leakage at 25 mph (40km/h) wind

pressure less that 0.06 cubic feet per minute per square foot (0.0003 cubic m per second per square m).

2. Water vapor Transmission: Greater that 20 perms ( 1,148 ng per second per square meter per Pa) per ASTM E96, Method B.

3. Water Penetration Resistance: Minimum 82.7 inches (210 cm) per AATCC Test Method 127.

B. Sealing Tape: DuPont Contractor Tape.

C. Fasteners (Steel Framing): DuPont Wrap Caps: 2” diameter plastic cap self-tapping

screws.

1. Available Products a. OSI® Quad Pro-Series®; solvent release butyl rubber sealant. b. DAP® DynaFlex 230™. c. Other products as approved and recommended by the weather resistant

barrier manufacturer

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Install weather resistant barrier over exterior side of exterior wall sheathing.

B. Unwrap roll at corner, leaving 6”-12” (152 – 305 mm) overlap.

C. Maintain roll plumb during installation. Extend bottom edge of roll over sill plate interface 2-3 inches (51-76 mm).

D. Secure Tyvek® 12”-18” (305-457 mm) on vertical stud line. Use 2” diameter plastic cap self-tapping screws (DuPont Tyvek® Wrap Caps) for metal stud applications.

E. Unroll directly over windows and doors.

F. Cover interface of upper and lower top plates with Tyvek®. Tape all horizontal seams at band joists, headers and roll overlaps with 2” or 3” DuPont Contractor tape. Tape any accidental tears or damage.

3.2 INSTALLATION AT WINDOWS AND DOORS

A. Coordinate installation of Tyvek® with installation of flashings at windows and doors. Install flashing at windows and doors in accordance with the flashing manufacturer’s instructions and good flashing and waterproofing practice. 1. Installation of Tyvek® prior to window and door installation:

a. Prepare each window rough opening by cutting a modified “I” pattern in the Weather Resistant Barrier. Horizontally cut weather Resistant Barrier along bottom of header. Vertically cut Weather Resistant Barriers down the center of window openings from top of the window opening down to 2/3 of the way to the bottom of the window openings. Diagonally cut Weather Resistant Barrier from the bottom of the vertical cut to the left and right bottom corners of the opening.

b. Fold side and bottom flaps into window opening and fasten every 6 inches. Trim off excess.



c. At top corners of window frame, cut Tyvek® at 45° angles creating a flap. This flap should overlap the window flange and head flashing after they are installed. Tape 45° seams and horizontal seam along window head using 2” or 3” DuPont Contractor tape.

d. Prepare each rough door opening by cutting a standard “I” pattern in the Weather Resistant Barrier. This is done as follows.

e. Horizontally cut Weather Resistant Barrier along bottom of door frame header and along top of sill.

f. Vertically cut Weather Resistant Barrier down the center of door openings from the top of the door opening (Header) down to the bottom of the door opening (sill).

g. Fold side flaps inside around door openings and fasten every 6 inches. Trim off excess.

h. At top corners of door frame, cut Tyvek® at 45° angles creating a flap. This flap should overlap the door flange and head flashing after they are installed. Tape 45° seams and horizontal seam along door head using 2” or 3” DuPont Contractor tape.

3.3 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. Tape remaining horizontal seams and seal joints and penetrations through weather resistant barriers with tape before installation of finish materials. Tape and remaining vertical breaks or overlaps of the Tyvek® at locations such as between tilt wall sections of at corners. Avoid taping edges of Tyvek® to sheathing or substrates. Provide strips of cut Tyvek® material as necessary to provide Tyvek® to Tyvek® taped joints.

B. Protect installed weather resistant barriers from damage. Ensure that weather resistant barriers are air tight, free from holes, tears, and punctures immediately prior to installation of finish materials.

END OF SECTION



Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 07 26 00 Page - 1 Vapor Retarders Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

07 26 00

UNDER-SLAB VAPOR BARRIER/RETARDER

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Products Supplied Under This Section

1. Vapor Barrier, seam tape, mastic, pipe boots, detail strip for installation under concrete slabs.

B. RELATED SECTIONS 1. Section 03300 Cast-in-place Structural Concrete 2. Section 07260 Under-Slab Vapor Retarder

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM E 1745-09 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or

Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs 2. ASTM E 154-88 (2005) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth

Under Concrete Slabs 3. ASTM E 96-95 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 4. ASTM E 1643-09 Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with

Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. ACI 302.2R-06 Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Control / Assurance 1. Summary of test results as per paragraph 8.3 of ASTM E 1745. 2. Manufacturer’s samples, literature 3. Manufacturer’s installation instructions for placement, seaming and pipe boot installation

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Vapor Barrier for slabs on void forms. 1. Vapor Barrier membrane must have the following properties.

A. Permeance less than 0.01 Perms [grains/(ft2 *hr * in.Hg)] after conditioning ASTM E 1745 Section 7.1 and sub-paragraphs 7.1.1 - 7.1.5.

B. Other performance criteria a. Strength: ASTM E 1745 Class A b. Thickness: 15mils minimum

C. Basis of Design: Stego Wrap 15- mil Vapor Barrier by Stego Industries LLC, 949.257.4100 i. Acceptable product: Reef Vaporguard

D. No substitutions 2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Tape 1. Stego Tape by Stego Industries LLC, San Clemente, CA (949) 257-4100

www.stegoindustries.com 2. Stego Crete-Claw Tape by Stego Industries LLC, San Clemente, CA (949) 257-4100

www.stegoindustries.com

B. Vapor Proofing Mastic

1. Stego Mastic by Stego Industries LLC, San Clemente, CA (949) 257-4100 www.stegoindustries.com

C. Pipe Boots 1. Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material, pressure sensitive tape and/or mastic per

manufacturer’s instructions.


http://www.stegoindustries.com/�



Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 07 26 00 Page - 2 Vapor Retarders Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ensure the base material is approved by architect or geotechnical engineer.

1. Level and compact base material. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install Vapor Barrier/Retarder: 1. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM E 1643-09.

a. Unroll Vapor Barrier/Retarder with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the pour. b. Lap Vapor Barrier/Retarder over footings or seal to foundation walls. c. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with Stego Crete-Claw Tape. d. Install Stego Crete-Claw Tape on the entire perimeter of the Stego Wrap Installation. e. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer’s instructions. f. No penetration of the Vapor Barrier/Retarder is allowed except for reinforcing steel and

permanent utilities. g. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of Vapor Barrier/Retarder, overlapping damaged

area 6 inches and taping all four sides with tape.


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 07 41 13 Page - 1 Metal Roof Panels Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 07 41 13

METAL ROOF PANELS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Structural standing-seam roof panels. B. Metal roofing accessories.


A. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel Framing. B. Section 07 60 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Civil Engineers: ASCE -7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, version adopted by local Building Code authority having jurisdiction.

B. ASTM A792 - Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

C. ASTM E1592-01Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding System by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

D. ASTM E1680-95 (Reapproved for 2003) - Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems.

E. ASTM E1646-95 (Reapproved for 2003) Standard Test Method for Rate of Water Penetration Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems By Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

F. Factory Mutual 4471 Appendix G- Susceptibility to Leakage Test Procedure for Class 1 Panel Roofs.

G. ASTM E2140- Standard Test method for water penetration of metal roof panel systems by static water pressure head.

H. Building Code – as approved by local authority having jurisdiction. I. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Latest Edition. J. Underwriter’s Laboratories:

1. UL 580 - Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies. 2. UL 1897 - Uplift Tests for Roof Covering Systems, latest Edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer literature indicating product specifications, installation instructions, and standard construction details.

B. Shop Drawings: To be prepared by metal roof system manufacturer. 1. Submit roof plan showing panel layout, gutters and downspouts as applicable. 2. Provide metal roof flashing, gutter and downspout shop drawings.

a) Indicate gage and finish of materials. b) Indicate fastener type, finish and spacing. c) Indicate locations of field applied sealant. d) Indicate location size and gauge of all back up plates.

3. Roof Panel Attachment: a) Roof plan with wind uplift pressure calculations at field, corner and perimeter

areas according to version of ASCE-7 referenced by locally-adopted Building Code and the authority having jurisdiction.

b) Roof plan indication roof clip spacing pattern at field, corner, perimeters and where panels are to be fixed from thermal movement.



c) Roof panel attachment plan must be stamped by licensed engineer in State in which project is constructed, certifying roof attachment meets local Building Code requirements for wind uplift.

C. Engineering Calculations: Submit wind uplift pressure calculations according to ASCE 7 Wind Speed for project location with respect to appropriate Importance Factor, Exposure category and Safety Factor. Calculations shall be sealed by a professional engineer licensed to practice structural engineering in the state in which project is located.

D. Samples: 1. Submit two samples, 12" long, full width panel, showing metal gage, seam and required

finish. 2. Two samples each for roof panel clip, bearing plate and clip fastener. 3. Submit color samples for Architect's selection. 4. Submit sample warranties:

a) Coating Warranty. b) Manufacturer Watertightness Warranty complying with this Specification. c) Installer Warranty.

E. Certification: 1. Submit roof panel manufacturer's certification that fasteners, clips, backup plates,

closures, roof panels and finishes meet specification requirements, wind uplift requirements.

2. Submit roof panel manufacturer’s certification that installer meets requirements to install roof system and is qualified to obtain required warranties.

3. Test Reports –Certified test results that indicate roof system meets or exceeds design and performance criteria. Testing to include: a) Static Water Testing Certification: The panel system shall be tested in

accordance with FM4471 Appendix G, and pass with no leakage. The test specimen must successfully withstand being submerged under 6” of water for a minimum period of 7 days.

b) UL 580 – Submit UL 580/1897 test results for full assembly metal roof panel system as specified substantiating that the full assembly will meet the wind pressures with a safety factor of 2.0.

c) ASTM E1680 – Manufacturer’s test data for air infiltration rates up to 20 pounds per square inch differential pressure.

d) ASTME1646- Manufacturer’s test data for water infiltration rates up to 20 pounds per square inch differential pressure.

e) ASTM E 1592. Submit ASTM E 1592 Test reports prepared by independent test laboratory substantiating that roof system will meet the allowable wind pressures with a safety factor of 2.0.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver panels to jobsite properly packaged to provide protection against transportation

damage. B. Exercise care in unloading, storing and erecting panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting,

and surface damage. C. Store all material and accessories above ground on well skidded platforms. Store under

waterproof covering. Provide proper ventilation to panels to prevent condensation build-up between each panel.

D. Remove from site panels which are damaged, or become water-stained during storage and handling. Remove, and replace materials, which are installed damage, or stained.

1.06 WARRANTIES A. Panel Coating: Furnish manufacturer's 20-year warranty panel coating warranty covering

checking, crazing, peeling, chalking, fading, and adhesion. B. Metal Roof Warranty:



1. Manufacturer’s 20 year Standard Weathertightness Warranty. 2. Coverage includes roof panels, roof flashing, roof penetrations and roof curbs.

1.07 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Thermal Movement: Metal Roofing system, including flashing, shall accommodate unlimited thermal movement without buckling or excess stress on the structure.

B. Roof panel and trim attachments will be designed to satisfy the requirements of the roof design (shown in shop drawings).

C. Maximum wind uplift capacity of roof system shall be determined ASTM E 1592, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. Testing shall be reported by an independent ASTM accredited testing laboratory.

D. Maximum wind uplift capacity of roof system shall be determined using certified results from UL 1897-98, Uplift Tests for Roof Covering Systems. Testing of the entire roof assembly shall be conducted in a UL-580 test chamber.

E. Panel system installation shall be in accordance with ASCE 7 Wind Speeds for project location with respect to appropriate Exposure category, Building Importance Factor and a Safety Factor of 2.0.

1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work, with installation of other associated Work, to ensure quality application. B. Coordinate Work with installation of associated metal flashings and building walls. C. Coordinate Work to minimize foot traffic and construction activity on installed finished

surfaces. D. Coordinate location of pipe penetrations to allow centering of pipe in panel. E. Coordinate location of roof curbs, to allow proper integration with roof panel seams.

1.09 PRE-ROOFING CONFERENCE

A. Schedule meeting to discuss roof Work before start of work onsite. B. Comply with requirements of roof Specification Section(s). C. Required attendees: Contractor, metal deck & roof installer, metal roof system

manufacturer’s representative, and any other subcontractors who have equipment penetrating the roof or Work that requires roof access or traffic.

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer ("roofer") to perform the Work of this Section, which firm

has no fewer than 5 years of successful experience with installation metal roof systems similar to those required for this Project, and is qualified by the roof panel manufacturer, for installation of manufacturer-warranted systems.

B. Field Measurements: Prior to fabrication of panels, take field measurements of structure or substrates to receive panel system. Allow for trimming panel units, where final dimensions cannot be established prior to fabrication.

C. Install a 30 foot wide, quality control area of metal roofing, for review by the Architect, to establish the quality of installation for the roof, and have approved prior to installing additional metal panels.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF PANEL SYSTEM

A. Basis of Design: 238T by Architectural Building Components, Houston, TX , or approved substitute, meeting the following requirements.



1. Requests for approval must be submitted in writing at least ten (10) days prior to bid date, and are accompanied by all related test reports and design calculations listed in Reference section 1.3 and Design and Performance criteria Section 1.7.

2. Substitute manufactures will be approved written addendum to all bidders. Voluntary alternates will not be considered. Substitutions will not be permitted after the bid date of this project.

3. Site Formed Panels, Panel widths up to 24 inches. Panels shall be symmetrical in design and shall be mechanically seamed with a field operated electric seaming machine provided by the manufacturer.

4. Minimum seam height 2 3/8 inches. Integral seam, double lock and snap together type panels are not acceptable

5. Seam cap matching panel finish with two rows of integral factory hot applied sealant. 6. Galvalume coated sheet steel, Type AZ-50, Grade 50 as described in ASTM A792; 24

gauge. 7. Finish: Two coat coil applied, baked-on full-strength (70% resin, PVF2) fluorocarbon

coating consisting of a nominal of .25 mil dry film thickness primer, nominal dry film thickness of .75 mil color coat. Finish to be selected from manufacturer’s standard color selection. The back side of the material should be .25 mil. primer and 0.25 polyester wash coat.

8. Roof panel system must allow individual roof panel removal and replacement from any point on the roof without damage to adjacent roof panel(s).

9. Panels must be furnished and installed in continuous lengths from ridge to eave with no overlaps. Panels too long to ship will be manufactured on site using manufacturers employees and equipment, No Snap Lock Panels –Trapezoidal Panels or Asymetrical Panels will be approved.

10. Panel surface characteristics to be chosen by Architect for roof panel manufacturer’s available types. a) Smooth. b) Striations. c) Stiffener ribs.

11. Manufacturer Watertightness Warranty, meeting requirements of this Section. 12. Roof panels proposed for substitution shall fully comply with specified requirements in

appearance, assembly, and performance. Substitution request must comply with Division 1 requirements for submission.

13. Materials must contain a minimum of 20% total recycled content.

2.02 FASTENERS AND ACCESSORIES A. Panel Clip Screw - screw required in wind uplift rating requirements for application, with

corrosion-resistant coating, in length necessary to penetrate metal deck minimum 3/4 inch., as supplied by roof panel manufacturer.

B. Roof Panels Clip: 1. Intermittent Clip: 16 gage galvanized steel, one-piece, designed to allow roof panel

thermal movement and not contact roof panel cap, as supplied by roof panel manufacturer, marking meeting wind uplift requirements of this Section.

2. Intermittent Clip Bearing Plate: in gage, size and finish as supplied by and approved by roof panel manufacturer for use in roof panel manufacturer’s full assembly warranted systems.

3. Continuous Clip: as provided by roof panel manufacturer for full assembly warranted systems.

C. Trim and flashing will be of the same gage and finish unless approved otherwise by the metal roof system manufacturer. 1. All sheet metal valleys will be supplied in continuous lengths up to 32’ 2. Ridge closures, consisting of metal channel surrounding factory precut closed cell foam,

will not be secured through the field of the panel.



3. Trim will be installed specifically as displayed in the manufacturer provided shop drawings. Proposed changes must be approved in writing by the metal roof system manufacturer.

D. Concealed supports, angles, plates, accessories and brackets: in gage and finish as recommended, and furnished by manufacturer.

E. Accessory Screw: Size and screw type as provided by panel manufacturer for each use, with prefinished hex washer head in color to match panels where exposed to view.

F. Rivets: Full stainless steel, including mandrel, in size to match application. G. Field Sealant: Color coordinated primerless silicone, or high grade, non-drying butyl, as

supplied by panel manufacturer. H. Sealant Tape: Non-drying, 100 percent solids, high grade butyl tape, as supplied by panel

manufacturer, in sizes to match application. I. Ice Breaks: Model SG1 IceBrake by East Coast Roof Specialties; www.icebrakes.com.

Furnish with finish to match roof panels. Furnish with adhesive for installation on roof panels, Durasil by Chemlink, Inc.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Ensure surfaces are ready for panel application. B. Inspect and ensure surfaces are free from objectionable warp, wave, and buckle before

proceeding with installation of pre-formed metal roofing. C. Ensure substrate is ready to receive metal roofing. Report items for correction and do not

proceed with metal roof panel system installation until resolved. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ROOF PANELS

A. Comply with and install roofing and flashings in accordance with all details shown on manufacturer’s approved shop drawings and manufacturer's product data and instructions, within specified erection tolerances.

B. Install field panels in continuous lengths, without endlaps. Remove and replace panels with endlaps.

C. Do not install panels damaged by shipment or handling. D. Install intermittent clips with bearing plates and continuous clips according to pattern in wind

uplift rating at field, corners and perimeter roof areas. E. Fix panels at location depicted on reviewed shop drawing(s). F. Breadpan roof panel at ridge, hip and headwalls. G. Allow for 1 inch panel clearance at penetrations. H. Install concealed supports, angles and brackets as furnished by manufacturer to form

complete assemblies. I. Remove roof panel and flashing protective film prior to extended exposure to sunlight, heat,

and other weather elements. J. Field-apply sealant tape and gun-grade sealant according to reviewed shop drawings and

manufacturer’s requirements for airtight, waterproof installation. K. Ensure sealant beads and tape is applied prior to sheet metal installation to achieve a

concealed bead. Neatly trim exposed portions of sealant without damaging roof panel or flashing finish.

L. Align pipe penetrations to occur at center of roof panel. Report and have corrected improperly-placed penetrations before proceeding with panel installation. Remove and replace roof panels which have improperly-placed penetration flashings.

M. Align roof curbs to fit roof panel module and overlap standing seam(s). Allow for proper drainage on both sides of curb.



N. Install sheet metal flashings according to manufacturer’s recommendations, reviewed shop drawings and in accordance with provision of Section 07 62 00.

3.03 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of Work promptly after completion of installation. B. Clean mud, dirt, and construction-related debris from panels before panels are scratched or

marred.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Protect Work as required to ensure roofing will be without damage at time of final completion. B. Do not allow excessive foot traffic over finished surfaces. C. Do not track mud, dirt, or construction-related debris onto panel surfaces. D. Replace damaged Work before final completion.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 07 52 00 Page - 1 Modified Bitumen Sheet Roofing System Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 07 52 00

MODIFIED BITUMEN SHEET ROOFING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Modified bitumen sheet roofing system, hot mopped application, over cellular insulating concrete decks.

B. Related membrane flashing and penetration flashing.


A. Section 03 52 16.13 - Cellular Concrete Insulating Fill: Roof deck.

B. Section 07 60 00 - Sheet Metal Work: Metal flashing and other roof related sheet metal items.

C. Section 07 71 00 - Manufactured Roof Specialties: Pre-formed metal copings.

D. Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories.

1.03 REFERENCES:

A. ASTM D41 - Asphalt Primer.

B. ASTM D312 - Asphalt for Use in Constructing Built-up Roof Coverings.

C. ASTM D4586 - Fibrated Asphalt Roof Cement.

D. ASTM D 6163 - Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Glass Fiber Reinforcements; 2000 (Reapproved 2008).

E. ASTM E 1980 - Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces; 2001.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:


B. Product Data: Submit latest edition of manufacturer's roofing and base flashing specifications, including list of materials proposed for use, and manufacturer's data sheets for other products.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Manufacturer's standard pre-printed details will not be acceptable Shop Drawings. 2. Indicate complete installation details of roofing and flashing, including roof slopes, flashing

details, penetration details and accessories. 3. Include complete flashing detail for each flashing condition. Indicate flashing detail

locations on roof plan.

D. Samples: Submit 8 x 11 in. sample of roof membrane cap sheet with specified color.

E. Quality Control Submittals (For Information Only): 1. Warranty: Submit specimen copy of manufacturer's roofing warranty with Product Data

submittal, including evidence of application for warranty. 2. Manufacturer's Reports:

a. Concurrent with Shop Drawing submittal; submit roof manufacturer's review of Contract Documents, acceptance of applicator and warranty conditions.

b. At completion of project, submit manufacturer's field quality reports of field inspections, including 2 copies of manufacturer's final inspection punch list.

c. Test Reports: Submit 2 copies of initial fastener withdrawal resistance tests and 2 copies of field quality control fastener withdrawal resistance tests



F. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Maintenance Data: Compile and submit maintenance instructions in accordance with

Division 1. Include complete manufacturer's instructions for periodic inspection and maintenance of roofing system, including precautions and warnings to prevent damage and deterioration to roofing system.


A. Applicator: 1. Roofing sub-contractor shall have the highest level of certification issued by the roofing

system manufacturer prior to bidding of the Construction Contract and shall enclose said letter stating such in the envelope with the Contractor's bid.

2. This documentation shall demonstrate the roofing sub-contractor's experience for a minimum of 5 completed projects of similar size and type within the last 4 years.

3. The Owner reserves the right to reject any proposed roofing sub-contractor, based on the roofing sub-contractor's past performance on Dallas ISD projects. The General Contractor (Contractor), having the ultimate control of Project quality, shall ensure that the proposed roofing sub-contractor meets the Owner's experience criteria and has a positive performance record with the Owner. Should the Owner reject the proposed roofing sub-contractor, the Contractor will not receive an adjustment in the Contract Sum when procuring a roofing sub-contractor acceptable to the Owner's requirements.

4. Roofing sub-contractor shall maintain a permanent office within a reasonable distance of project site to satisfy Owner that projects can be properly serviced during warranty phase.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Class A fire hazard classification from a recognized independent testing laboratory.

C. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Prior to installation of roofing system, conduct a pre-installation conference at the project

site. 2. Attendance: Architect, Contractor, project superintendent, roof foreman and roof

manufacturer's technical representative. 3. Agenda:

a. Quality control. b. Roofing details and procedures. c. Critical work sequencing. d. Coordination with installation of cellular conctere insualting fill,


A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packages with labels intact and legible, including required fire resistance classification labels.

B. Store rolled goods on end on clean raised platforms with weather protective covering when stored outdoors.

C. Provide continuous protection of materials against wetting and absorption; remove wet materials from project site.

D. Materials stored on roof levels for immediate use shall be: 1. Distributed to prevent concentrated loads that would impose excessive strain on deck or

structural members. 2. Positively secured to prevent displacement by excessive wind forces.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Apply roofing in dry weather. 2. Do not apply roofing when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F. 3. Ensure roof deck is structurally sound and sufficiently rigid to support the live and dead



load requirements of the construction traffic.

B. Protection: 1. Provide special protection or avoid heavy traffic on completed work when ambient

temperature is above 80 degrees F. 2. Restore to original condition or replace work or materials damaged during handling of

roofing materials.

C. Emergency Equipment: Maintain on-site equipment necessary to apply emergency temporary edge seal in the event of sudden storms or inclement weather.

D. Restrictions: 1. Comply with requirements of Section 01 10 00 on use of site. 2. Smoking is prohibited on roof areas.

1.08 WARRANTY:

A. Applicator: Furnish a 5 year warranty against leaks and defects in materials and workmanship. 1. Include repairs required to maintain roof and base flashing in a watertight condition. 2. Make repairs at no expense to Owner.

B. Roof Manufacturer: Furnish a 20 year NDL total roof system warranty against leaks and defects in materials and workmanship. 1. Include agreement to maintain roof and base flashing in a watertight condition for period of

warranty. Warranty coverage to include: a. Base ply materials, fasteners and adhesives. b. Roof membrane components and adhesives. c. All accessory products required for installation of membrane roofing system, including

surface mastics, coatings, stripping plies, primers, and tapered edge and cant strips. d. Warranty shall not exclude coverage as a result of winds less than 54 m.p.h. e. Make repairs at no expense to Owner. f. Monetary liability of warranty shall not be limited.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER:

1. Contract Documents are based on products by Johns Manville.

A. System specified for roofing is an SBS modified bitumen sheet roof system manufactured by Johns Manville Roofing Systems and is listed as a standard of quality.

B. Other SBS systems by GAF are acceptable substitutions. These acceptable substitution roof systems shall include modifications and other accessories required by roof system manufacturer to provide same performance and warranty as specified.

C. Products furnished for roofing system shall be products of a single manufacturer.

D. Component products listed for roofing system are product names of Johns Manville Roofing Systems, unless otherwise specified.

E. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's recommendations for component roofing system materials not listed in this specification.

2. The following manufacturers are acceptable if Project requirements are met and approved by the Architect prior to receipt of Bids:

1. Siplast

2. GAF



2.02 ROOFING SYSTEM:

A. Qualities: Mop-on multi-ply SBS modified bitumen roofing, consisting of an unsurfaced SBS sheet and reflective mineral surfaced SBS cap sheet, applied over venting base sheet mechanically fastened over cellular insulating concrete deck.

B. Roofing System Performance Requirements: 1. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI): 78, minimum, calculated in accordance with ASTM E 1980,

based on 3-year aged data. a. Field applied coating may not be used to achieve specified SRI.

2. External Fire Exposure Classification: ASTM E 108 Class A, UL or Warnock Hersey listed.

3. Wind Resistance Classification: Factory Mutual I-60, in accordance with FM DS 1-28.

C. Source: Specification 3FLD by Johns Manville consisting of Ventsulation base sheet, one layer of DynaBase and one layer of DynaGlas FR CR is basis of design.

2.03 ROOFING AND FLASHING MEMBRANES:

A. Base-Sheet: ASTM D 4897, Type II, venting, nonperforated, heavyweight, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber base sheet with coarse granular surfacing or embossed venting channels on bottom surface. Product: Ventsulation Felt by Johns Manville.

B. Roofing Membranes - Hot applied: SBS type modified bitumen with glass fiber mat reinforcing. 1. Unsurfaced Ply Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type I, glass-fiber-reinforced,

SBS-modified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified. Product: DynaBase by Johns Manville.

2. Reflective Mineral Surfaced Cap Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Grade G, Type I, glass-fiber-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced with white, reflective synthetic chips; suitable for application method specified. Product: DynaGlas FR CR by Johns Manville.

C. Flashing: 2 ply system with reflective mineral surfaced top sheet. 1. Base Ply: Unsurfaced base ply sheet. Product: DynaBase by Johns Manville. 2. Top Sheet: ASTM D 6221, Grade G, Type I, composite polyester- and

glass-fiber-reinforced, granular surfaced with white, reflective synthetic chips; suitable for application method specified. Product: DynaFlex CR by by Johns Manville..

D. Penetration Flashing: 1. Liquid Applied Flashing: A liquid and fabric reinforced flashing system created with a

stitchbonded polyester scrim and a two-component, moisture cured, elastomeric, liquid applied flashing material, consisting of an asphalt extended urethane base material and an activator. Product: PermaFlash System

2. Product: PermaFlash System by Johns Manville.

2.04 RELATED MATERIALS:

A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41.

B. Asphalt Bitumen: ASTM D312, Type IV.

C. Cold-Applied Flashing Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's asphalt-based, two-component, asbestos-free, trowel-grade, cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with flashing applications. Product: MBR Flashing Cement by Johns Manville.

D. Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586, Type II; asbestos free; PA-1021 by Siplast.

E. Fasteners: 1. Nails: Non-ferrous, cement-coated, or galvanized fasteners approved by roofing

manufacturer. 2. Self Clinching Nails: (Cementitious Roof Deck) Zonolite base ply fastener, (Nail-Tite MK



III), by ES Products, Inc., or Lightweight Concrete (LWC) Base Sheet Fasteners by Johns Manville.

F. Roof Drain Flashing: 4 lb. sheet lead, 30 x 30 inch.

G. Walkway Pads: Mineral-granule-surfaced, reinforced modified asphalt composition,

slip-resisting pads, manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic provided by roofing system

manufacturer, with a pad size of 32 inch x 32 inch. Product: Johns Manville DynaTred.

H. Fiber Cants and Tapered Edge Strips: Asphalt impregnated preformed fiberboard or preformed perlite board.

I. Metal Termination Bar: 1/8 x one inch aluminum bar pre-drilled or punched for fasteners at 6 in. o.c.

J. Synthetic Chips: Synthetic chips to match the factory applied reflective surfacing of the finish ply cap sheet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION:

A. Verify that work which penetrates roof deck has been completed.

B. Examine surfaces for defects, rough spots, ridges, depressions, foreign material, moisture and unevenness.

C. Do not proceed until defects are corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION:

A. Priming: Prime metal, concrete and masonry surfaces with asphalt primer.

B. Cleaning: 1. Verify that debris has been completely removed. 2. Broom clean roof deck immediately prior to roofing application.

3.03 APPLICATION:

A. Bitumen: 1. Maximum bitumen temperature in kettle: 500 degrees F. or not to exceed FBT. 2. Bitumen temperature at time and point of application: Within 25 degrees F. of EVT

temperature. Do not reheat bitumen. 3. Provide thermostatic controls and visible thermometer on kettle and maintain in working

order and keep calibrated.

B. Roofing Membrane - Hot Mopped Application: 1. Install in accordance with roofing manufacturer's specification, and as specified below. 2. Phased construction of roofing membrane is strictly prohibited, unless specifically

approved by roofing manufacturer. 3. Lay sheets at right angles to slope of deck. 4. At areas where roof slope exceeds 1/2 inch per foot, install roof system using cold

adhesive in accordance with roof system manufacturers' recommendations to prevent membrane slippage

5. Install one ply of venting base sheet over roof deck, dry. Lap each sheet 3 inches over underlying sheet and lap ends 4 inches. Nail each sheet at 9 inches o.c. through laps and stagger nail remainder of sheet with 2 rows of fasteners at 18 inches o.c. Use self-clinching nails.

6. Fully mop unsurfaced ply sheet to substrate lapping sides a minimum of 3 inches and ends a minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end laps a minimum of 3 ft.



7. Fully mop cap sheet over unsurfaced ply sheet, lapping sides a minimum of 4 inches and

ends a minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end laps a minimum of 3 ft. and stagger side laps between plies a minimum of 12 inches.

8. Apply pressure to membrane during application to ensure bonding and prevention of air pockets.

9. Synthetic Chip Embedment: Broadcast synthetic chips over bitumen overruns on the finish ply surface while bitumen is still hot.

10. Rate of application of asphalt: Minimum 17 lbs./sq., maximum 25 lbs./sq. 11. Complete application of roofing system without pockets, blisters, wrinkles or fishmouths. 12. Complete installation of roofing system up to line of termination of day's work. Install

temporary water cut-offs of asphalt or plastic cement and fiberglass felts at end of each day's work. Remove upon resumption of work.

C. Base Flashing: 1. Install 2 ply system consisting of unsurfaced ply sheet and a reflective, granular surfaced

flashing sheet in accordance with requirements of roofing system manufacturer, with each ply sheet extending full height of flashing.

2. Adhere sheets with hot mopping of asphalt or cold adhesive application and mechanically attach leading edge at 9 inches o.c.

3. Install where roofing system abuts vertical surfaces and at curbs. 4. Extend base flashing up rise walls a minimum of 8 inches above roofing membrane, up

parapet walls full height of parapet, up curbs full height of curb and 4 inches onto field of roofing membrane.

D. Liquid Applied Penetration Flashing: 1. Install penetration flashings at scheduled penetrations in accordance with manufacturer's

directions, Manville Detail No. WFE-1. 2. Prepare steel surfaces by sandblasting to bare metal. Prime surfaces with manufacturer's

recommended primers. 3. Install liquid flashing in a layered application with scrim cloth reinforcing.

E. Plumbing Vent Flashing: 1. Install liquid applied penetration flashings at plumbing vent penetrations in accordance with

manufacturer's directions. 2. Prepare steel surfaces by sandblasting to bare metal. Prime surfaces with manufacturer's

recommended primers. 3. Install liquid flashing in a layered application with scrim cloth reinforcing.

F. Roof Drains: 1. Extend roof membrane into roof drain and flash with lead flashing and membrane in

accordance with manufacturer's directions and as detailed. 2. Securely tighten clamping rings and securely install strainers.

G. Roof Walkways: Install walkway pads in adhesive or hot asphalt in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Provide a one inch space between adjacent walkway pads.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Initial Fastener Withdrawal Resistance Tests: As specified in Section 03 52 16.13.

B. Field Quality Control Fastener Withdrawal Resistance Tests: During roof installation, perform following withdrawal resistance tests, one set at start of project and one set for each 500 squares of roof area over cellular concrete insulating fill roof deck, conducted by an independent testing laboratory or roofing system manufacturer issuing warranty: 1. Roof corners. 2. Minimum of 3 tests at other perimeter areas. 3. Field of roof (2 at each roof level).



C. Manufacturer's Field Service: 1. During installation, provide for 2 on-site inspections of roof application by qualified

technical representatives of roofing manufacturer. 2. Upon completion of installation, provide a final inspection by a technical representative of

roofing manufacturer to confirm that roofing system has been installed in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.

D. Ponding Water: Areas which pond water in excess of the roofing system manufacturer's definition of acceptable standing or ponding water, shall be corrected by adding additional ply layers or by adding a coating to the mineral surface cap sheet in accordance with the roofing system manufacturer's written instructions in order to issue the specified warranty. This shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Review of DISD’s Habitual Punch List items as they relate to this project as follows: 1. All roof system base flashings shall be a minimum of 8 inches from finish roof elevation. The

height of all roof curbs should take this requirement into consideration.

2. Provision of soldered corners on counter flashings installed at roof curbs. Installation of

properly sized roof curbs.

3. Provision of soldered joints on all thru wall scuppers. Continuous sealant installed on scupper

escutcheon plates.

4. Installation of properly sized pipe supports for all roof level piping at 8 ft. o.c. maximum and

within 2 ft of each change in direction. Provide pipe supports with rollers for all piping 1.25

inches or greater in diameter. All pipe supports are to be installed over an additional ply of

modified bitumen cap sheet.

5. Provision of non-damaging pads for all equipment installed directly on roof.

6. Provision of temporary roof protection by trades performing work over roof system. Limit

storage of materials on roof.

7. Roof system base flashings shall not have aluminum cladding.

8. No penetrations thru base flashings unless resin flashings for such are approved by roofing

manufacturer.

9. Installation of resin flashings in lieu of pitch pans or metal penetration dams at piping and

conduit penetrations. All piping and conduit penetrations must be hard pipe or conduit and

shall be properly anchored to deck.

10. Refrigerant line penetrations. Membrane to be peeled at refrigerant line penetration to

determine flashing and sealed.

11. Avoid damage to roof from cutting oils, refrigerant oils, soldering, etc.

12. Provision of overflow provisions in conductor heads.

13. Provision of thru-wall flashings with weeps at all masonry rise walls that occur above roofing.

14. Provision of minimum 8 inch high roof system base flashings below windows that occur above

roofing.

15. Overflow drains shall have their inlet elevations set at 2 inches above the inlet elevation for the

primary roof drains.

16. Ponding water 48 hrs after rain is unacceptable.



17. New and replaced roof drain strainers to be metal not plastic.

18. All gas legs should have 1 inch clearance from finish roof elevation.

19. Turn in all lead flashings at plumbing stocks a minimum of 1 inch.

20. Precast concrete splash blocks are required at locations where a given roof area discharges

storm water onto a roof system.

21. All condensing units are to be installed on pre-manufactured roof curbs with sheet metal curb

caps.

22. Where required sumps are to be provided at all roof drains.

23. Roof penetrations shall not occur within 18 inches of any roof system base flashings.

24. Gutter expansion joints should be every 50ft. maximum or as otherwise required.

25. Roof to roof ladder supports must not penetrate copings. Any supports occurring in the roof

system base flashings must be flashed with resin flashings.

26. Clamping rings at drains must be properly secured.

27. All fastener spacing should be 8 in. o.c. maximum.

28. No stepping thru wall flashings and base flashings – be consistent.

29. Provide isolation at support clamps for where dissimilar metals occur.

30. All roof level gas piping shall be primed and painted.

31. Rise wall base flashings must not cover weep holes installed above thru wall flashings.

32. Three course flashing and term bar anchored at 6 in. o.c. to be installed at all base flashings.

33. At all cap sheet installations a maximum of one patch per membrane roll shall be considered

acceptable.

3.05 CLEANING AND PATCHING:

A. Clean up debris, excess materials and equipment and remove from site.

B. Remove drippage or spills of coatings, sealant, mastic or primers from finish surfaces.

C. Patch misaligned or inadequately lapped seams, inadequately adhered areas, punctures or other damage to membrane with a patch of membrane sheet that extends at least 6 inches in each direction from deficiency.

3.06 PROTECTION:

A. Provide special protection and avoid heavy traffic on completed work when ambient temperature is above 80 degrees F.

B. Restore to original condition or replace work or materials damaged during handling of roofing materials.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 07 60 00 Page - 1 Sheet Metal Work Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 07 60 00

SHEET METAL WORK

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Shop or field-formed sheet metal work for moisture protection

B. Reglets and accessories.


A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and nailers.

B. Section 07 52 00 - Modified Bitumen Sheet Roofing System: Roofing system.

C. Section 07 71 00 - Manufactured Roof Specialties: Metal coping system.

D. Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories: Prefabricated curbs, roof hatch.

E. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealers.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification , Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 1998.

B. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2000.

C. ASTM B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2000.

D. FS FF-S-325 - Shield Expansion; Nail, Expansion; and Nail, Drive-Screw.

E. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details.

C. Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating metal finish color.


A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 5 years of documented experience.

C. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Attend roofing pre-installation conference at the project site as specified in Section 07 52

00. 2. Attendance: Architect, Contractor, project superintendent, sheet metal fabricator and

applicator. 3. Agenda: As specified in Section 07 52 00.




A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.

B. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining.

1.07 WARRANTY:

A. Provide Owner a written warranty which shall warrant sheet metal work to be free of leaks and defects in materials and workmanship for 2 years after date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.


B. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating, color as selected. 1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA

2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as selected from manufacturer's standard colors.


2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal, with soft neoprene washers. 1. Nails: Flathead, wire, barbed, slating type. 2. Screws: Self-tapping sheet metal type. 3. Rivets: Type and size as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. 4. Concrete Fasteners: Round-head stainless steel screw and neoprene washer with lead

expansion anchor, FS FF-S-325, Group IV, Type 2. Powers Rawl Screw Type Nailins.

B. Rubberized Underlayment: Self-adhering, polyethylene coated rubberized asphalt, minimum 30 mil. thick, Vycor Ultra by W.R.Grace and Co. or WIP 300HT by Mirafi, for high temperature applications.

C. Primer: Zinc chromate type.

D. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc chromate alkyd.

E. Sealant: Type silicone sealant specified in Section 07 90 05.

F. Solder: ASTM B 32; Sn50 (50/50) type.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.

B. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, minimum 3 inches wide, interlocking with sheet.

C. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.

D. Make angle bends and folds for interlocking metal with full regard for expansion and contraction to avoid buckling or fullness in metal after installation.

E. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.

F. Form material with scheduled or specified seams. At moving joints, use sealed lapped,



bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.



G. Solder shop formed metal joints in galvanized steel fabrications. After soldering, remove flux.

Wipe and wash solder joints clean. Weather seal joints.

H. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant.

I. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip.

J. Fabricate sight-exposed items on building exterior using pre-finished galvanized sheet steel; fabricate items visible only of roof areas using plain galvanized sheet steel.

2.04 FABRICATED ITEMS:

A. Flashings, Counter Flashings and Misc: Prefinished sheet steel or galv. sheet steel as scheduled, formed in minimum 10 ft. lengths. 1. Two piece system with metal flashing receiver at masonry walls, SMACNA Figure 4-3. 2. Two piece system with metal flashing receiver, similar to SMACNA Figure 4-3, unless

otherwise indicated. 3. One piece system, similar to SMACNA Figure 4-3B. 4. One piece surface applied reglet/counter flashing receiver with formed top rabbet for

sealant where indicated.

B. Overflow Parapet Scuppers: Galv. sheet steel throat and flashing flange, Prefinished sheet steel face flange, SMACNA Figure 1-30, joints of flashing flange and throat fully soldered.

C. Expansion Joint Cover: Prefinished sheet steel or galv. sheet steel, SMACNA Figure 5-6, with loose locked standing seam joints at 10 ft. o.c. maximum.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located.

B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.

C. Verify that substrates are smooth and clean to extent needed for sheet metal work.

D. Do not start sheet metal work until conditions are satisfactory.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. Install at exposed edges of metal cap flashings, and where shown or required, nailed at 4 inches o.c.

B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil.

C. Rubberized Underlayment: 1. Completely cover scheduled substrates with self-adhering rubberized underlayment,

securely adhered to substrate. 2. Weather lap joints 6 inches minimum horizontally and 8 inches minimum on end. 3. Turn up 4 inches behind metal flashing where applicable.

3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install work watertight, without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or distortion, allowing for expansion and contraction.

B. Install fabricated sheet metal items in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, except as otherwise detailed.



C. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with plastic wedges. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant.

D. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners.

E. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.

F. Seal prefinished metal joints watertight using sealant.

G. Solder metal joints in galvanized steel items for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water.

3.04 INSTALLATION - FABRICATED ITEMS:

A. Flashings, Counter Flashings: 1. Extend flanges into reglets or receivers and securely fasten as indicated. 2. Where nailing is required, nail at 6 inches o.c. 3. Set applied reglet/counter flashing in plastic cement and attach with drive pins at 6 inches

o.c. Seal top of reglet with sealant. 4. Overlap counter flashing 4 inches over base flashing, lap ends of sheets 3 inches.

B. Scuppers: Install throat with joints fully soldered. Extend flashing flanges 4 inches in each direction. Install sealant between face and flashing flanges and wall surfaces.

C. Expansion Joint Covers: 1. Install rubberized underlayment over expansion joint curbs and wood blocking

continuously. 2. Secure continuous metal counter flashings at vertical face of wood blocking of expansion

joint with neoprene washered screws at 8 inches o.c. 3. Install metal cover in accordance with SMACNA Figure 5-5A and 5-6B. 4. Provide loose-locked standing seams at roof-to-roof (Figure 5-5A) conditions. Anchor

cleats (at standing seams) to blocking with screws or nails. 5. At roof-to-wall (Figure 5-6B) conditions, lap ends of covers 3 inches and seal with sealant. 6. Taper cover and terminate at roof edge similar to SMACNA Figure 5-3.

3.05 CLEANING:

A. Remove flux and residual acid immediately by neutralizing with baking soda and washing with clean water. Leave work clean and free of stains, scrap, and debris.

END OF SECTION



Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 07 71 00 Page - 1 Roof Specialties Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 07 71 00

ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Manufactured roof specialties, including copings.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories: Manufactured curbs, roof hatches.

B. Section 07 60 00 - Sheet Metal Work: Shop-formed sheet metal items.

C. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealers.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005.

B. ANSI/SPRI ES-1 - Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems, American National Standards Institute/Single-ply Roofing Institute.

C. FM DS 1-49 - Perimeter Flashing; Factory Mutual Research Corporation.

D. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on shape of components, materials and finishes, anchor types and locations.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration and dimension of components, adjacent construction, required clearances and tolerances, and other affected work.

D. Samples: Submit one appropriately sized sample of coping. Submit verification sample of pre-finished metal color.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.


A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual details, FM DS 1-49 and ANSI/SPRI ES-1.

1.06 WARRANTY:

A. Provide Owner a written warranty which shall warrant metal coping and gravel stop system to be free of leaks and defects in materials and workmanship for 5 years after date of Substantial Completion.

B. Provide finish warranty for 20 years against defects in finish including fading, chipping and

chalking.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Copings: 1. W.P. Hickman Company; Product Permasnap Coping : www.wph.com. 2. MM Systems Corp; Product Snap-Lock Coping: www.mmsystemscorp.com. 3. Construction Specialties; Product Snap-Lock Coping. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 COMPONENTS

A. Copings: Formed 24 gauge prefinished galvanized steel, shaped as indicated, including special supports spaced at 60 inches on center. Include cover plates to conceal and weather seal joints and attachment flanges. Copings tested to meet requirements of ANSI/SPRI ES-1 1. Internal Splice Plates: Concealed with matching finish to maintain outside face continuity. 2. Coping Finish: Fluoropolymer coating (High Performance). 3. Color: As selected. 4. Materials must contain a minimum of 20% total recycled content.

B. Contractor's Option: Shop and field fabricated copings may be substituted for manufactured copings providing that independent testing of fabricated copings is performed in accordance with ANSI/SPRI ES-1. Materials must contain a minimum of 20% total recycled content.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchor Cleats: Formed anchor cleat with integral drainable gutter, 20 ga. galvanized steel.

B. Sealant: Type silicone sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00.

2.04 FINISHES

A. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that walls, curbs, roof membrane, base flashing, and other items affecting work of this Section are in place and positioned correctly.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, FM DS 1-49 and ANSI/SPRI ES-1.

B. Install work watertight, without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or distortion, allowing for expansion and contraction.

C. Securely fasten copings with concealed fasteners, anchors and cleats. 1. Cleats: Secure with fasteners spaced at 12 inch centers maximum. 2. Copings: Secure at exterior face to continuous cleat and at interior face with neoprene

gasketed fasteners at 12 inch centers maximum through slotted holes. 3. Double fasteners (decrease spacing by 1/2) at corners in accordance with ANSI/SPRI

ES-1.

D. Install copings plumb and level, and in true alignment.

E. Coordinate installation of components of this section with installation of roofing membrane and base flashings.



END OF SECTION



Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 07 72 00 Page - 1 Roof Accessories Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 07 72 00

ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Prefabricated equipment supports.

B. Prefabricated roof curbs.

C. Roof hatch.

D. Factory fabricated roof hatch fall protection safety rail system.

E. Precast concrete splash blocks.


A. Section 07 52 00 - Modified Bitumen Sheet Roofing System: Membrane roofing and flashing.

B. Section 07 60 00 - Sheet Metal Work: Sheet metal flashing.

C. Section 07 71 00 - Manufactured Roof Specialties: Preformed copings.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D4586 - Fibrated Asphalt Roof Cement.

B. ASTM A 500/A 500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2007.

C. Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA): 29 CFR 1910.23 - Guarding Floor and Wall Openings and Holes.

D. Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA): 29 CFR 1910.27 - Fixed Ladders.

E. FS FF-S-325 - Shield Expansion; Nail, Expansion; and Nail, Drive-Screw.

F. FS TT-C-494A - Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid Resistant.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's product data sheets, including installation instructions..

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate following. 1. Prefabricated Equipment Supports: Indicate dimensions of supports, heights, weights of

units being supported, gauge of metal selected to support scheduled load, accessories, location and size of fasteners and correlation to adjacent construction.

2. Prefabricated Roof Curbs: Indicate inside and outside dimensions of curbs, height of curbs (at high side and at low side), weights of units being supported, gauge of metal selected to support scheduled load, location and size of fasteners and correlation to adjacent construction..

3. Roof Hatch: Indicate materials, construction, sizes, operation, finishes and installation details.

4. Roof Hatch Safety Rail System: Indicate materials, construction, connections, profiles, accessories, location and dimensions.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PREFABRICATED EQUIPMENT SUPPORT:

A. Qualities: Prefabricated equipment support fabricated from galv. sheet steel, 18 ga. minimum, welded construction designed to support weight of equipment being supported. Provide with metal cap flashing and preservative treated wood nailer. 1. Size: Height: 12 inches above roof deck; length and width required for conditions.

B. Source: 1. Model CES - 3 by Custom Curb, Inc. 2. Model TEMS-3 by ThyCurb.

2.02 PREFABRICATED ROOF CURB:

A. Qualities: Prefabricated insulated curb for mechanical equipment support fabricated from galvanized sheet steel, 18 ga. minimum, welded construction designed to support weight of unit being supported. Provide with preservative treated wood nailer. 1. Fabricate curbs to compensate for roof slope at location of each curb unit. 2. Fabricate curbs with minimum 12 inch height above roof deck, unless otherwise detailed. 3. Fabricate curbs to width and length of unit being supported, less 1-1/2 in. overall to allow

for membrane flashing installation.

B. Source: 1. Model CRC-3 by Custom Curb, Inc. 2. Model TC-3 by ThyCurb.

2.03 ROOF HATCH:

A. Qualities: Single leaf roof hatch with insulated curb and cover, fabricated from galv. sheet steel, 14 gage for cover and curb and 22 gage for cover liner, welded construction. Provide curb with integral 3-1/2 inch wide flashing flange and metal cap flashing. Provide cover with EPDM gasket. 1. Size: 4'-0" x 4'-0". 2. Hardware: Heavy pintle hinges, compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic

tubes, snap latch turn handle and padlock hasp and automatic hold open arm, cadmium plated.

3. Finish: Paint bond.

B. Source: Type S50-T by the Bilco Co.

2.04 ROOF HATCH FALL PROTECTION SAFETY RAIL SYSTEM

A. Basis of Design: Roof Hatch Fall Protection Safety Rail Model No. MC3036 by SafePro L.P . www.safeprosafety.com.

B. Description: Steel tube railing system mounted on roof hatch providing an ergonomic correct power grip in a safe upright egress and ingress through roof hatches in addition to protection from accidental falls through roof opening while roof hatch is open. Includes top and mid-rail and wrap around self closing gravity gate mounted with heavy duty hinges acting as a ladder extension. 1. Steel Tubing: 1-1/2 inch cold rolled electric welded steel tubing, ASTM A500, Grade B,

cold formed. Materials must contain a minimum of 20% total recycled content. 2. Size: Formed to fit roof hatch size of 30 x 36 inches. 3. Height: 42 inch above roof surface when mounted on standard roof hatch cap flashing. 4. Mounting System: Integrated stanchions of rail system through bolted to extended cap

flashing of roof hatch using 3/8 inch bolts.



5. Gate System: Gravity self closing, non-collapsible full wrap around steel tubing grab hold,

welded construction. Heavy duty hinges with 5/8 inch hinge pin with built in pinch-less gate stop and pull up full open positioning .

6. Fasteners: Stainless steel 316 Grade Hex head bolts, 3/8 inch x 2 inch, Nylon locking Hex nut and flat washers.

7. Labels: Furnish with manufacturer's standard labels containing safety warnings, fall dangers, “No Hoisting” warning and manufacturer identification.

C. Performance: 1. Meets and exceeds OSHA Standard CFR 29 1910.23 and CFR 29 1910.27.

D. Fabrication: Factory formed and fully welded construction, free of sharp edges and snag points.

E. Finish: Factory finished with powder coating. Color: Safety yellow.

2.05 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Concrete and Masonry Fasteners: Round-head stainless steel screw and neoprene washer with lead expansion anchor, FS FF-S-325, Group IV, Type 2, Powers Rawl Screw Type Nailins.

B. Nails: Stainless steel material, flathead, wire, barbed, slating, type. For washers use lead or neoprene.

C. Flashing Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I; asbestos free.

D. Asphaltic Coating Compound: FS TT-C-494A, Type II.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrates are smooth and clean to extent needed for roof accessories work.

B. Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Install work watertight, without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or distortion,

allowing for expansion and contraction. 2. Coat contact surfaces of dissimilar metals with asphalt coating compound or zinc chromate

paint. 3. Install curbs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Prefabricated Equipment Supports: 1. Install equipment supports beneath scheduled equipment units. 2. Set supports level and square on roof deck and securely fasten curb flanges to roof deck

with appropriate fasteners for type of deck material. Seal bolt heads with flashing cement. 3. Set cap flashing over support after membrane flashing is complete and securely fasten cap

flanges to top nailer.

C. Prefabricated Roof Curbs: 1. Install prefabricated roof curbs beneath rooftop equipment and fans requiring curbs. 2. Set level and square on roof deck; securely fasten curb flanges to roof deck with

appropriate fasteners for type of deck material. Seal bolt heads with flashing cement. 3. Install foam gasket continuously on top of curb frame immediately prior to setting units on

curbs.



D. Roof Hatch:

1. Set level and square on roof deck; securely fasten curb flanges to roof deck with appropriate fasteners for type of deck material. Seal bolt heads with flashing cement.

E. Roof Hatch Safety Rail System: 1. Install safety rail system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using bolts

furnished by railing manufacturer. 2. Install safety rail system by through-bolting to integral curb flashing of roof hatch, avoiding

penetration of roof base flashing.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust roof hatches for smooth operation.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Leave work clean and free of stains, scrap, and debris.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 07 84 00 - Page 1 Firestopping Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/11

SECTION 07 84 00

FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Firestopping perimeter and penetrations of fire and rated assemblies.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. E 119 – Fire Tests of building Construction and Materials. 2. E 814 – Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.

3. E 1966 – Fire-Resistive Joint Systems

B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 1479 – Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 2. 2079 – Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.


A. Provide continuous protection against passage of heat, fire, smoke, and gases at perimeter of and penetrations through fire rated assemblies.


A. Firestopping: Fire resistance rating equivalent to adjacent construction; tested by a recognized independent testing laboratory to ASTM E 814, E 1966, UL 1479, or UL 2079.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. Include product description, limitations in use, and fire hazard classifications and

ratings. 2. Provide UL or equivalent details for each firestop system.

B. Test Reports: Indicate conformance with ASTM E 814, ASTM E 1966, UL 1479, or UL 2079.

C. Certificates of Compliance: Indicating conformance of installed systems to specified requirements.


A. Do not apply sealants, mortars, or putties when temperature of substrate material and surrounding air is below 40 degrees F or is anticipated to drop below that temperature within 24 hours after installation.

B. Maintain sealant at a minimum 70 degrees F.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Isolatek International. 3. 3M Fire Protective Products 4. Nelson Firestop Products. 5. Specified Technologies, Inc. 6. Tremco, Inc.

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Firestopping: One or more of the following 1. Silicone elastomer compound: Single or multiple component, low modulus,

moisture curing silicone sealant. 2. Ceramic sealant: Single component, moisture curing ceramic sealant. 3. Intumescent sealant: Single component, water based intumescent sealant. 4. Acrylic Sealant: Single component acrylic sealant, suitable for painting. 5. Putty: Single component ceramic fiber base putty or intumescent elastomer putty

that expands on exposure to surface heat gain. 6. Mortar: Hydraulic Cementitious mortar. 7. Pillows or blocks: Formed intumescent or mineral fiber pillows or blocks. 8. Intumescent devices; Solvent free intumscent wrap strips. 9. Mechanical devices: Incombustible fillers or silicone elastomer covered with

sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops.

10. Cast-in-place devices: Containing intumescent material and smoke/water seals.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Forming and Damming Materials: As recommended by firestopping manufacturer for intended use. 1. Permanent: Mineral fiber board, mineral fiber matting, or mineral fiber putty. 2. Temporary: Plywood, particle board, or other.


3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare openings to receive firestopping as directed by manufacturer: 1. Remove incidental and loose materials from penetration opening. 2. Remove free liquids and oil from involved surfaces and penetration components. 3. Install damming materials to accommodate and ensure proper thickness and fire

rating requirements and provide containment during installation. 4. Remove combustible materials and material not intended for final penetration

seal system.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install firestopping at perimeter of and penetrations through fire rated assemblies.

B. Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Apply firstopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required ratings.

D. Compress fibered material to achieve a density of 40 percent of its uncompressed density.

E. Place foamed material in layers to ensure homogenous density, filling cavities and spaces. Place sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials.

F. Place intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating required.

G. Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured.

H. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, flush appearance.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 07 92 00

JOINT SEALANTS

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 07 92 00 Page - 1 Joint Sealants Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011



1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. This Contractor shall furnish and install all joint sealers as shown on the drawings or herein specified, or both.

B. This work includes all plant facilities, services, materials, labor, tools, and appliances as required. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS

A. This Contractor shall inspect the job conditions as he finds them, and his starting of the work constitutes approval of all conditions.


A. All manufacturer items must be factory labeled, on the material or its container. B. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10-years experience specializing in specified item. C. Applicator shall be Sealant Manufacturer approved with 5-years successful experience.

1. Applicator shall also agree to employ only skilled tradesmen for the Work. D. Obtain elastomeric materials only from manufacturers that if requested, will send a qualified technical

representative to the project site for advising the Installer of proper procedures and precautions for the use of the materials.

E. Contractor shall hold a pre-caulking meeting at the project site with the Architect and all involved parties to review conditions, materials, colors, and other requirements.

1.5 REFERENCES

A. ACI 504 R – Guide to Joint Sealants for Concrete Structures B. ASTM C834 – Standard Specification for Latex Sealants C. ASTM C919 – Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications D. ASTM C920 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants E. ASTM C 1193 – Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants F. ASTM D1056 – Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber G. SWRI (Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute) - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's detailed technical data for materials, fabrication, and installation, including catalog cuts of bond breakers, backer rods, and accessories. 1. Submit full color samples for Architect selection.

B. Certificates from the manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply with the specification and are suitable for the use indicated.


A. Deliver materials to the project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer’s requirements to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature, contaminants, or other causes.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall furnish written guarantee that work executed under this section is free from defects of material and workmanship for a period of 5-years from date of substantial completion of the entire


SECTION 07 92 00

JOINT SEALANTS


project. 1. Include coverage that he will immediately and at his own expense, repair and replace all such

defects as may develop during the term of this guarantee. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide products by one on the following: 1. DAP, Inc., Dayton, Ohio 2. Dow Corning Corp., Midland, Michigan 3. Emseal Joint System, Ltd., Westborough, Massachusetts 4. General Electric Co., GE Silicones, Waterford, New York 5. Mameco International, Inc., Cleveland, Ohio 6. Pecora Corp., Harleysville, Pennsylvania 7. Polytite Manufacturing Corp., Cambridge, Massachusetts 8. Rhone-Poulenc, Inc., Plymount, New Jersey 9. Sonneborn Building Products Div., Minneapolis, Minnesota 10. Tremco, Inc., Beachwood, Ohio 11. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Tulsa, Oklahoma

B. Contractor may request other products or manufacturers for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. 1. The "Substitution Request Form" and complete technical data for evaluation must accompany

requests for Architect's approval. 2. All materials for evaluation must be received at least 10-days prior to bid due date.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General 1. The term “Acceptable Standard” when used within this Section, refers to the manufacturer and

product listed, specified as to type and quality required for this project. 2. Contractor shall supply a single resource responsibility for joint sealer materials.

a. Obtain joint sealer materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. 3. Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with

one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and final experience.

B. Caulking Compounds (Acrylic Latex Sealant) 1. Latex rubber modified, acrylic emulsion polymer sealant compound; manufacturer’s standard, one

part, non-sag, mildew resistant, acrylic emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, formulated for accepting paint. (Product recommended for exposed interior locations involving joint movement of less than 5%).

2. Acceptable Standard a. “Sonolac”; Sonneborn Building Products, Inc b. “Acrylic Latex Caulk 832”; Tremco, Inc c. “Acrylic Latex Caulk with Silicone”; DAP d. “AC-20”; Pecora Corp

C. One-Part Elastomeric Sealant (Silicone) 1. One component elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Class 25, Type NS (non-sag),

unless manufacturer recommends Type S (self-leveling) for the application shown.(general caulking , glazing applications). a. Acceptable Standard

i) “Pecora 864 Architectural Silicone Sealant; Pecora Corp. ii) “Dow Corning 791; Dow Corning Corp iii) “Silpruf”: General Electric iv) “Omniseal”; Sonneborn Building Products, Inc v) “Spectrem 2; Tremco, Inc

2. One component mildew resistant silicone sealant used around countertops, backsplashes, and other wet interior locations. a. Acceptable Standard

i) “Rhodorsil 6B White”; Rhone-Poulenc, Inc ii) “Dow Corning 786”, Dow Corning Corp iii) “Sanitary 1700”; General Electric


SECTION 07 92 00

JOINT SEALANTS


3. One-component high movement joints (+100/-50) use sealants in locations indicating high movement. a. “Dow Corning 790”; Dow Corning Corp b. “Spectrem 1”; Tremco, Inc

D. Elastomeric Sealants (Polyurethane) – Precast concrete & Tilt-Up Concrete Panels 1. One component polyurethane sealant, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS (non-sag),

Class 25 (expansion and control joints, precast concrete panel joints, tilt-up concrete panel joints, perimeter caulking, flashing and sheet metal conditions). a. Acceptable Standard

i) “Sonolastic NP 2”; Sonneborn Building Products, Inc ii) “Dymonic”: Tremco, Inc iii) “Dynatrol I”; Pecora Corp iv) “Vulkem 921”; Mameco v) “CS 2130”; Hilti

2. Multi- component polyurethane sealant, complying with ASTM C920, Type M, Grade N(non-sag)Class 25 (same uses as in previous item) a. Acceptable Standard

i) “Sonolastic NP 2” Sonneborn Building Products, Inc ii) “Dymeric 511”; Tremco, Inc iii) “Dynatrol II”; Pecora Corp iv) “Vulkem 922”; Mameco

3. Multi-component epoxidized polyurethane sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class A (same uses as described in item 1, also used on fire resistance rated joint design details.) a. Acceptable Standard

i) “Dymeric”; Tremco, Inc ii) “DynaTrol II”; Pecora Corp

E. One-part self-leveling polyurethane sealant (for traffic areas) 1. One component polyurethane self-leveling sealant, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P,

Class 25. a. Acceptable Standard

i) “Sonolastic SL 1”; Sonneborn Building Products, Inc ii) “NR-201 Urexpan”; Pecora Corp iii) “Vulkem 45”; Mameco

2. Two component polyurethane self-leveling sealant, complying with ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25. a. Acceptable Standard

i) “Sonolaastic SL 2”; Sonneborn Building Products, Inc ii) “NR-200 Urexpan”: Pecora Corp iii) “Vulkem 245”; Mameco iv) “THC900/THC901”: Tremco, Inc

F. Flexible Polyurethane Security Sealant (for use on interior joints, perimeter of fixtures, penetrations, vents, doors, windows and similar openings) 1. Two component polyurethane sealant, complying with ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12.5, with a

Shore A Hardness of 55, Type M. a. Acceptable Standard

i) “Dynaflex”, Pecora Corp ii) “Ultra”, Sonneborn Building Products, Inc

G. Miscellaneous Materials 1. Provide joint cleaner and joint primer sealer as recommended by the sealant or caulking compound

manufacturer. 2. Sealant backer rod shall be compressible rod stock, polyethylene foam; polyethylene jacketed

polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam, or other materials as recommended by sealant manufacturer. a. Where plans indicate a 2" building expansion joint, provide an expanding foam secondary

sealant, “BackerSeal” as manufactured by Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd., or Apolytite Standard as manufactured by Polytite Manufacturing Corporation, behind sealant in lieu of standard backer rod.

3. Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealer substrate tests and field tests.

4. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide non-staining, chemical cleaners of type acceptable to manufacturer of sealant and sealant backing materials, which are not harmful to substrates and


SECTION 07 92 00

JOINT SEALANTS


adjacent nonporous materials, and which do not leave oily residues or otherwise have a detrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in service performance.

5. Masking Tape: Provide non-staining, non-absorbent type compatible with joint sealants and to surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 EXECUTIONS 3.1 INSPECTION

A. This Contractor shall notify the General Contractor, when he has completed his work and is ready for A/E inspection.

B. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work. C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. D. Clean and prime all joints in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. E. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that might impair adhesion of sealant.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install all products in strict accordance to all manufacturers' recommendations. B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges.

1. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within ranges. G. Tool joints concave. H. Exterior wall joints

a. Seal both sides (outside and inside) with an exterior joint system consisting of a foam-backer rod (set into the joint for the entire length of the joint cavity) and cover with a urethane or other acceptable joint sealant material (sealant depth should be one-half the joint width, max. ½” depth) tool joint material in place.

b. Protect sealant material during painting of walls. I. Interior wall joints

a. In fire resistance rated walls i) Seal both sides of joint with a fire-stopping sealant, encapsulating the ceramic blanket

protection material, finish joint similar to that of the exterior wall joint described above. b. In non fire resistance rated walls

i) Seal exposed concrete panel joints ii) Concealed (furred) concrete panel joints need not be sealed

3.3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. After installation, thoroughly clean all exposed surfaces and restore all damaged material to its original condition, or replaced with new material.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 07 95 13

EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 07 95 13 Page - 1 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011


A. Expansion joint assemblies for floor, wall and ceiling surfaces 1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes

B. ASTM B308/B308M - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy, 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles C. ASTM B455 - Standard Specification for Copper-Zinc Lead Alloy (Leaded Brass) Extruded Shapes D. IBC - international Building Code

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate joint and splice locations, miters, and layout of the work, affected adjacent

construction, and anchorage locations. C. Product Data: Provide joint assembly profiles, profile dimensions, anchorage devices, available colors, and

finish. D. Submit two samples 12" long, illustrating profile, dimension, color, and finish selected. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate rough-in sizes; provide templates for cast-in or placed

frames or anchors; required tolerances for item placement. 1.4 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by the manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221, 6005 alloy, T5 temper; MIL AA-MIO or clear anodized AA C22A41 B. Resilient Filler: Neoprene, exhibiting Shore A hardness of 40 - 50 Durometer. C. Threaded Fasteners: Aluminum D. Backing Paint: Asphaltic type E. Types Indicated Below - Noted on Drawing Details:

1. Silicone Compression/Extension Seals: a. Type CE-100SX: Joint dimension 1 inch (25 mm)

2. No Bump Floor Covers: a. Type: NBA, Floor to Floor Cover.

3. 7500 Elastomeric Interior Wall and Ceiling Covers: a. Type: 75FWG Wall Joint Cover. b. Type: 75FWGC 90 Degree Corner Cover. c. Insert: Extruded Santoprene.

Color: Black. Color: Gray.

d. Subchannel: Extruded Aluminum, ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5; Anodized.

4. Snap-On Wall and Ceiling Covers: a. Type: WD Wall Joint Cover. b. Type: WDC 90 Degree Corner Cover.


SECTION 07 95 13

EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 07 95 13 Page - 2 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

c. Subchannel: Extruded Aluminum, ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5; Anodized. d. Cover Plate: Aluminum, ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5; Mill Finish.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Joint Covers: Aluminum cover plate, aluminum frame construction, retainers with resilient neoprene filler strip, designed to permit plus or minus 50% joint movement with full recovery, flush and recess mounted.

B. Back paint components in contact with cementitious materials. C. Galvanize embedded ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices. D. Shop assembled components and package with anchors and fittings. E. Provide joint components in single length wherever practical. Minimize site splicing. F. Visual seals, functional seals, corner angles, fasteners, sealants as necessary.

2.3 FINISHES

A. Floors: Mill finish B. Walls and Ceilings: Clear anodized C. Resilient Filler Exposed to View: Gray

2.4 MANUFACTURERS

A. Balco/Metalines B. C. Con Spec Systems D. Watson Bownan Acme Corp E. MM Systems F. Architectural Art G. Substitutions : Under Division 1


A. Verify existing conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Verify that joint preparation and affected dimensions are acceptable.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide anchoring devices for installation and embedding. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Align work plumb and level, flush with adjacent surfaces. C. Rigidly anchor to substrate to prevent misalignment. D. Provide rated units where required.


A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 73 00. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor joint surfaces. C. Provide removable strippable coating to protect finish surface.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 08 11 13

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 08 11 00 Page - 1 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Standard steel doors and frames.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements. 2. Section 04 05 13 - Masonry Mortar and Grout 3. Section 08 71 00– Door Hardware 4. Section 08 80 00 – Glazing 5. Division 9 – Interior and Exterior Paint

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People

B. ASCE 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures

C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

D. ASTM C1363 – Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus

E. ASTM E413 - Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class

F. ASTM E2074 – Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Including Positive Pressure Testing of Side-Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door Assemblies

G. DHI (Door Hardware Institute) - The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware

H. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows

I. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies

J. SDI-100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames

K. UL 10B - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's literature, and installation instructions.

B. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings details of construction, location, and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements and details of joints and connections.


SECTION 08 11 13



C. Indicate door and frame configuration, anchor spacing, anchor types, location of cutouts for hardware and glazing, and internal reinforcement.

D. Provide hollow metal doors and frame assemblies that comply with performance requirements as demonstrated by testing manufacturer’s assemblies in accordance with ASCE 7.


A. Doors: Must Comply with all Requirements of the Steel Door Institute SDI-100 and ANSI A117.1

B. Frames: SDI 100 – Heavy Duty.

C. Fire Door and Frame Construction: Conform to UL 10B.

D. Installed Fire Rated Door and Frame Assemblies: Conform to NFPA 80.


A. Ship door frames with removable angle spreader; do not remove until frame is installed.

B. Store doors upright in: protected, dry area, off ground or floor, with at least ¼ inch space between individual units.

C. Do not cover with non vented coverings that create excessive humidity.

D. Remove wet coverings immediately.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide minimum 5-year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01 77 00. PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS - MUST BE SDI OR NAAMM MEMBERS CONFORMING TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION.

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Amweld Building Products, Inc. 2. Ceco Door Products. 3. Curries Company. 4. Fenestra Corp. 5. Kewanee Corp. 6. Poineer Industries. 7. Republic Builders Products. 8. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co.



SECTION 08 11 13



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Commercial quality carbon steel conforming to ASTM A568 and A569, hot-dipped A60 Galvannealed steel conforming to ASTM A653 or hot dipped G90 galvanized steel.

B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653/M, Structural Quality, Class A60 Galvanized

C. Door Core: 1. Interior doors: Resin impregnated fibrous honeycomb or vertical steel stiffeners. 2. Exterior doors: Foamed-in-place core of polyurethane - welded seams.

B. Batt Insulation: Fiberglass

C. Primer: Zinc rich type.

D. Fire Rated: Provide fire rated assembly where scheduled or required by Code. All installations shall be in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 80.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Glass, Glazing Sealers, and Accessories: Specified in Section 08 80 00.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors and frames in accordance with SDI 100.

B. Accurately form to required sizes and profiles.

C. Grind and dress exposed welds to form smooth, flush surfaces.

D. Do not use metallic filler to conceal manufacturers defects.

E. Fabricate with internal reinforcement for hardware specified in Section 08 71 00 welded in place.

F. Doors: 1. Fabricate from minimum:

a. Interior: 18 gauge steel sheets. b. Exterior: 16 gauge steel sheets. *Doors more than 36”wide to be 14 gage steel sheet.

2. Close top and bottom edges of doors with steel channel, minimum 16 gage, extending full width of door, and spot welded to both faces, with top channel flush and bottom channel recessed.

3. Provide manufacturer’s standard metal astragal on one leaf at pairs of fire rated doors.

4. Fill voids between vertical steel stiffeners with batt insulation.


SECTION 08 11 13



G. Frames: Flush frame construction of hot-dipped A60 Galvannealed steel conforming to ASTM A653 or hot dipped G90 galvanized steel. 1. Fabricate from minimum:

a. Interior: 18 gauge steel 16 gauge at door more than 36" wide. b. Exterior: 16 gauge steel 14 gauge at door more than 36" wide.

2. Close corner joints tight with trim faces mitered, continuously welded, and ground smooth.

3. Anchors:

a) Provide anchor at each jamb for each 30 inches of door height or fraction thereof.

b) Use proper anchor types to provide positive fastenings to adjacent construction.

c) Provide one welded floor anchor at each jamb. 4. Where frames will be filled with grout, install silencers in frames before erection.

H. Glazing Stops: 1. Manufacturer’s standard, screw on type with mitered corners. 2. Form stops from minimum 20 gage steel; prefit for field glazing. 3. Locate screws within 1 inch of ends of stops and maximum 8 inches on center. 4. Install glazing stops on secure side of frames.

I. Finish: 1. Dress tool marks and surface imperfections to smooth surfaces. 2. Chemically treat and clean; apply manufacturer’s standard prime coating.

J. Protective coatings

1. Frames: Provide full immersion dip coat of rust-inhibitive metal primer reaching all surfaces in accordance with ANSI A250.10.

2. Doors: Fill in all groves and seams on top of door prior to painting, and provide full coverage electrostatic spray coat of rust-inhibitive metal primer.

3. Dry the protective coating of all frames and doors in a baking oven process. 4. Bituminous Coating: Coat the inside of frame profile with bituminous coating to a

minimum thickness of 1/16".

K. ACCESSORIES

1. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single frames and two silencers on heads of double frames.

2. Jamb Anchors: 3. Provide a minimum of four anchors on both the hinge and latch jambs. 4. Provide 14-gauge galvanized sheet steel, angle anchors welded for each jamb,

which extends to the floor, punched for a minimum of two ¼" bolts. 5. Spreader: Provide frames with temporary steel spreader bars tack welded to

jamb bottoms to maintain full rigidity and proper alignment during installation. 6. Astragals: Provide steel astragals (removable) as scheduled.


SECTION 08 11 13



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine new and existing adjacent framing and rough opening preparation for conditions, which would prevent quality installation of doors and frames.

B. Install frames in accordance with SDI-105 and ASCE 7.

C. Install doors in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115-1G.

D. Install fire rated frames in accordance with NFPA 80.

E. Coordinate with masonry wall construction for anchor placement.

F. Install roll-formed-steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames.

G. Anchor to structure and floor.

H. Fully grout exterior hollow metal frames, and hollow metal frames in masonry and concrete walls with non-shrink grout.

I. Install with no spaces between the frame and the structure to prevent water or pest from entering the building.

J. Install sealant to maintain watertight seal.

K. Recess all door frames opening to the exterior of the building a minimum of one-inch from the exterior surface of the adjoining wall.

L. Maintain the proper swing and opening capacity to meet the code requirements.

M. Set plumb and level.

N. Secure to adjacent construction using fastener type best suited to application.

O. Install glass as specified in Section 08 80 00

P. Install hardware in accordance with Section 08 71 00

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Touch up minor scratches and abrasions in primer paint.

B. Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition.

END OF SECTION



Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 08 14 00 Page - 1 Wood Doors Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 08 14 00

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated and non-rated.


A. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

B. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.

C. Section 09 91 00 - Painting

1.03 REFERENCES

A. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2003.

B. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2003.

C. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.

D. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association.

E. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

F. NEMA (National Electric Manufacturers Association) LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics.

C. Shop Drawings Schedule: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria, factory finishing criteria.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.

E. Samples: Submit two samples - 12" x 12" illustrative wood grain, stain color and sheen. this sample will become the standard of quality for all solid core wood doors delivered to the project site.


A. Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and finishing.

B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience.

C. Installed Fire Rated Door and Transom Panel Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated.



1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.

B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.

C. Deliver all wood doors to the site after the HVAC system is operational and temperature and humidity levels are controlled.

D. Doors shall be stored flat on a level surface in a dry conditioned shelter.

1. Protect doors with resilient packaging.

2. Do not store in damp or wet areas, or in areas that may be subject to sunlight that might blanch the veneer.

3. Cover to keep clean, but allow air circulation by breaking factory seals once on site.

4. Doors stored for more than 7-days shall have all ends primed.


A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements

B. See Section 01 77 00 - Contract Closeout

C. Provide warranty for the following term: 1. Interior Doors: Life of installation.

D. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Veneer Doors: 1. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com. 2. Haley Brothers: www.haleybros.com. 3. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc: www.marshfielddoors.com. (formerly Weyerhaeuser

Door Division) 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 – Products and Substitutions.

2.02 DOORS AND PANELS

A. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements. 1. Quality Standard: AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards

Illustrated, Section 1300, Custom Grade. 2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-7 ply unless otherwise indicated.

B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at all locations. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with

International Building Code ("positive pressure"); UL or WH (ITS) labeled without any visible seals when door is open.

4. Wood veneer facing shall be medium oak with stain to match Library furniture.



2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES

A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type Structural Composite Lumber Core Wood Doors, plies and faces as indicated above.

B. Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core, Type FD, plies and faces as indicated above.

C. Core shall be bonded to hardwood stiles and rails. Top rail and bottom rail shall be 2-3/8" minimum. Stiles shall be a minimum of 2-1/2" Doors shall receive lock blocking and reinforcements for exit devices.

2.04 DOOR FACINGS

A. Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish to Match Library Stain: Veneer grade as specified by quality standard, plain sliced, book veneer match, running assembly match; unless otherwise indicated. 1. Vertical Edges: Any option allowed by quality standard for grade. 2. Pairs: Pair match each pair; set match pairs within 10 feet of each other when

doors are closed.

B. Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Glazing Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. To be capable of being removed and reinstalled using vandal proof fasteners.

B. Astragals for Non-Rated Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge.

C. Astragals for Fire Rated Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge, specifically for double doors.

2.06 DOOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.

B. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement. See 2.03, Letter 'C' Above. 1. Provide solid blocking for throughbolted hardware.

C. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing.

D. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions.

E. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings.

F. Cut and configure exterior door edge to receive recessed weatherstripping devices.

G. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI Quality Standards Illustrated Section 1700.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FABRICATION

A. Refer to Door Schedule for types, sizes, and details.

B. Fabricate non-rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Premium requirements.

C. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Premium and to UL requirements.

1. Attach fire-rating label to door.



D. Astragals for Fire Rated Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge specifically for double doors.

E. Sound Rating for Single Door Leaf and Frame Assembly: Provide a minimum STC 30, see door schedule for required rating meet ASTM E413.

F. Provide lock blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement.

G. Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles: Provide hardwood for transparent finish.

H. Provide factory-machined doors for finish hardware per hardware requirements and dimensions.

1. Do not machine for surface hardware.

2. Provide solid blocking for through bolted hardware.

I. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. 1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements.

B. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch (19 mm). 1. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating

requirements.

C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.

D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.

E. Coordinate installation of glazing.

3.04 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, corner to corner, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inches surface area.

B. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, top to bottom, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inches surface area.

C. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inches surface area.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.

B. Adjust closers for full closure.

3.06 SCHEDULE - See Drawings

END OF SECTION


SECTION 08 31 00

ACCESS DOORS and FRAMES

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 08 31 00 Page - 1 Access Doors and Frames Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011




A. Access doors and frames at wall, ceiling, and floor locations. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with UL Design requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide data on unit construction, size, configuration, scheduled locations, and attachment method.

B. Manufacturer’s installation instructions: Indicate any special installation criteria requiring an interface with adjacent components.

C. Contractor shall provide information so the Architect can record actual location of all access units on as-built drawings.

1.5 REFERENCES

A. UL-Fire Resistance Directory B. Warnock Hersey-Certification Listings C. IBC - International Building Code


A. Conform to applicable Code for UL and FM requirements for fire rated access doors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturers

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: B. Babcock-Davis Hatchways, Inc. C. Cesco Porducts. D. J.L. Industries. E. Karp Associates, Inc. F. Milcor, Inc. G. Nystrom Products Co.

2.2 ACCESS DOORS / HATCHES

A. Walls/Ceilings - Non-Fire Rated Door and Frame Unit: Formed steel, prime painted. B. Walls/Ceilings - Fire Rated Door and Frame Unit: Formed steel, prime painted with rated label. C. Floors, Non-Fire and Fire Rated Hatch and Frame Unit: Stainless Steel, fire-rating label as required.

2.3 FABRICATION WALL / CEILING UNITS

A. Fabricate frames and flanges of 16-gauge steel. B. Fabricate door panels of 14-gauge single thickness steel sheet or double sheet with integral non-

combustible insulation filler.


SECTION 08 31 00

ACCESS DOORS and FRAMES

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 08 31 00 Page - 2 Access Doors and Frames Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

C. Weld, fill, and grind joints to assure flush and square unit. D. Hardware:

1. Hinge shall be 175° steel piano hinge with removable pin. 2. Lock shall have screwdriver slot for quarter turn cam-lock.

2.4 FABRICATION FLOOR UNITS

A. Fabricate frames and flanges of ¼” aluminum. B. Fabricate door panels of ¼” aluminum single thickness sheet or double sheet with integral non-

combustible insulation filler. C. Weld, fill, and grind joints to assure flush and square unit. D. Hardware:

1. Hinge shall be 175° stainless steel piano hinge with removable pin. 2. Lock shall have screwdriver slot for quarter turn cam-lock.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Steel protection shall be galvanized, hot dipped finish, prime coat units with alkyd primer. B. Steel finish shall be two coats, baked enamel, and color as selected by the Architect. C. Aluminum finish shall be factory mil finish.


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Coordinate with work of other trades. C. Verify sizes of openings prior to installation. D. Install frames plumb and level in opening, and secure rigidly in place. E. Position the door to provide convenient access to the concealed work-requiring access. F. Provide minimum clear access opening of 24” X 24” with 180° swing on the door to access mechanical

devices. 3.2 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. B. Protect installation during construction activities. C. Adjust unit for a smooth operation.

END OF SECTION


08 33 33

SECURITY GRILLES

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 08 33 33 Page - 1 Security Grilles Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011


A. Upcoiling Security Grilles, power operated. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05 50 0 - Metal Fabrications: Support framing and framed opening.

B. Section 06 10 00 - Finish Carpentry: Wood jamb and head trim.

C. Section 08 33 23 - Overhead Coiling Counter Doors.

D. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Product Requirements for cylinder core and keys.

E. Division 26 - Raceway and Boxes: Conduit from electric circuit to grille operator and from grille operator to control station. Wiring Connections: Power to disconnect.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

B. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and

Flat Bar.

C. ASTM A 924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

D. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,

Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).

F. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC.

G. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Include detailed plans, elevations, details of framing members, required

clearances, anchors, and accessories. Include relationship with adjacent materials.

D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.


http://www.astm.org/Standards/A653.htm�



http://www.astm.org/Standards/B221.htm�

http://www.astm.org/Standards/B221.htm�

http://www.nema.org/stds/ics2.cfm�

http://www.nema.org/stds/MG1.cfm�


E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6

inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

F. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with a minimum of five years experience in the fabrication and installation of security closures.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with

minimum three years and approved by manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Protect materials from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver until after wet work is complete and dry.

C. Store materials in a dry, warm, ventilated weathertight location.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work with other operations and installation of adjacent finish materials to avoid damage to installed materials.


A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Overhead Door Corp., 2501 S. State Hwy. 121, Suite 200, Lewisville, TX 75067. ASD. Tel. Toll Free: (800) 275-3290. Phone: (469) 549-7100. Fax: (972) 906-1499. Web Site: www.overheaddoor.com. E-mail: [email protected].

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60

00. 2.2 UPCOILING SECURITY GRILLES

A. Overhead Coiling Metal Grilles: Overhead Door Corporation 671 Series. 1. Curtain: Horizontal 5/16 inch (7.8 mm) diameter rods with network of vertically

interlocking links to form a pattern. Bottom bar extruded aluminum tubular shape. a. Material:

1) Stainless Steel. b. Vertical Rod Spacing:

1) 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) on center. c. Horizontal Link Spacing:

1) 6 inches (152 mm) on center. d. Pattern:

1) Brick pattern; horizontal spacing 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) on center. 2. Finish:

a. Stainless Steel: No. #4 finish. 3. Guides:


http://www.overheaddoor.com/�

mailto:[email protected]�


a. Extruded aluminum shapes with retainer grooves and continuous silicone treated wool-pile strips or PVC inserts to reduce noise and assist operation.

b. Guides face mounted on adjacent construction. 4. Brackets: Minimum 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) steel to support barrel, counterbalance and

hood as applicable. 5. Counterbalance: Helical torsion spring type housed in a steel tube or pipe barrel,

supporting the curtain with maximum deflection of 0.03 inches per foot of span. Counterbalance adjustable by means of an adjusting tension wheel.

6. Hood: a. Stainless steel.

7. Electric Motor Operation: Provide UL listed electric operator, size as recommended by manufacturer to move door in either direction at not less than 2/3 foot nor more than 1 foot per second. a. Sensing Edge Protection:

1) Pneumatic sensing edge. b. Operator Controls: Control stations with open, close, and stop functions.

1) Push-button and key operation.

2) Surface mounting. 3) For interior location.

c. Emergency Egress Device: Interior flush mounted handle mechanism to automatically open grille part way to permit passage even if power is not available.

d. Special Operation: 1) Card reader control. 2) Door timer operation. 3) Commercial light package.

8. Locking: a. Chain keeper locks for chain hoist operation. b. Cylinder lock for electric operation with interlock switch. c. Thumb turns.)


A. Verify opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.

B. Examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions under which this work is to be performed.

C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION




B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress.

C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to

structural members only.

D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.

E. Coordinate installation of electrical service with Division 26. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components.

F. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in

Section 07 90 00.

G. Install perimeter trim and closures. 3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Test security grilles for proper operation and adjust as necessary to provide proper operation without binding or distortion.

B. Adjust hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean curtain and components using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer.

B. Remove labels and visible markings.

C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

3.6 PROTECTION



Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 08 41 13 Page - 1 Aluminum-Framed Entrances (Doors) Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 08 41 13

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES (DOORS)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01

Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes Kawneer Aluminum Entrances, glass and glazing, and door hardware and components.

1. Types of Kawneer Aluminum Entrances include: a. 500 Heavy Wall™ Swing Door; Wide stile, 5" (127 mm) vertical face dimension, 2" (51 mm) depth, 3/16” (5mm)

wall thickness high traffic applications. B. Related Sections:

1. Division 079200 “Joint Sealants” for joint sealants installed as part of the aluminum sliding door system 2. Division 084113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" 3. Division 084313 "Aluminum-Framed Storefronts" 4. Division 087100 "Hardware" 5. Division 088000 "Glazing"

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions: For fenestration industry standard terminology and definitions refer to American Architectural Manufactures

Association (AAMA) – AAMA Glossary (AAMA AG).

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed storefront system shall withstand the effects of the following performance

requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to the Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles

per hour, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed (MPH): See wind loading requirement sheet A3.10 b. Importance Factor (I, II, III): See wind loading requirement sheet A3.10 c. Exposure Category (A, B, C, D): See wind loading requirement sheet A3.10

B. Aluminum Framed Entrance Performance Requirements: 1. Wind loads: Provide storefront system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures to meet

wind loading requirements on sheet A3.10. 2. Air Infiltration: For single acting offset pivot or butt hung entrances in the closed and locked position, the test specimen

shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a pressure differential of 6.24 psf (300 Pa) for single doors and 1.567 psf for pairs of doors. A single 3'0" x 7'0" (915 mm x 2134 mm) entrance door and frame shall not exceed 0.50 cfm per square foot. A pair of 6'0" x 7'0" (1830 mm x 2134mm) entrance doors and frame shall not exceed 1.0 cfm per square foot.

3. Structural Performance: Corner strength shall be tested per the Kawneer dual moment load test procedure and certified by an independent testing laboratory to ensure weld compliance and corner integrity [Testing procedure and certified test results available upon request].

4. Doors installed in aluminum curtainwall are to include aluminum subframe.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 08 41 13 Page - 2 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and installation instructions for each type of aluminum-framed entrance door indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, and attachments to other work, operational clearances and installation details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes including samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For sliding aluminum-framed glass door and components required. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for each type,

class, grade, and size of aluminum-framed entrance doors. Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted.

F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. G. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed systems, made from 12” (300 mm)

lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery, including welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing.

H. Other Action Submittals: 1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and

assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.

I. Provide copy of manufacturers installation instructions with submittal.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls, Aluminum Storefronts and Aluminum Framed Entrances and Doors are to be from the

same manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: An installer which has had successful experience with installation of the same or similar units

required for the project and other projects of similar size and scope. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum-framed entrance doors and storefronts that

meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion of test reports, and calculations.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain sliding aluminum-framed glass door through one source from a single manufacturer. E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum-framed glass entrance doors

and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." Do not modify size and dimensional requirements. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If

modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set

quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup for type(s) of swing entrance door(s) indicated, in location(s) shown on Drawings.

G. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions od door openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate field

measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.8 WARRANTY A. Installation: Submit a written warranty, executed by the installer, for a period of 2 years from the date of substantial

completion, against defective materials or workmanship, including substantial non-compliance with applicable specification

requirements, which result in premature failure.



a. In the event that installation of components is found to be defective, installer will repair or provide replacements without charge at the installer’s option.

B. Manufacturer’s Product Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s warranty for curtain wall system as

follows: 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project provided however that the Limited

Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months from date of shipment by Kawneer. a. Components found to be defective will be repaired or replaced by the manufacture without charge. b. Warranty for all components must be direct from the manufacturer and non-prorated for the entire term of the

warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product:

1. The door stile and rail face dimensions of the 500 Heavy Wall™ entrance door will be as follows Door Vertical Stile Top Rail Bottom Rail 500 5" (127 mm) 5" (127 mm) 10 1/4"(260.4 mm)

2. Major portions of the door members to be 0.188” (5mm) nominal in thickness and glazing molding to be 1.05” (1.5mm) thick.

3. Glazing gaskets shall be either EPDM elastomeric extrusions or a thermoplastic elastomer. 4. Provide adjustable glass jacks to help center the glass in the door opening.

B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by the following: 1. Manufacturer: Manko 2. Series: 150i 3. Profile dimension: Vertical Stile: 5” Top Rail: 5” Bottom Rail: 7 ½” 4. Performance Grade: Heavy duty

C. Substitutions: Refer to Substitutions Section for procedures and submission requirements 1. Pre-Contract (Bidding Period) Substitutions: Submit written requests ten (10) days prior to bid date. 2. Product Literature and Drawings: Submit product literature and drawings modified to suit specific project requirements

and job conditions. 3. Certificates: Submit certificate(s) certifying substitute manufacturer (1) attesting to adherence to specification

requirements for storefront system performance criteria, and (2) has been engaged in the design, manufacturer and fabrication of aluminum storefront for a period of not less than ten (10) years. (Company Name)

4. Test Reports: Submit test reports verifying compliance with each test requirement required by the project. 5. Samples: Provide samples of typical product sections and finish samples in manufacturer's standard sizes.

D. Substitution Acceptance: Acceptance will be in written form as an addendum.

2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by sliding aluminum-framed glass door manufacturer for strength,

corrosion resistance, and application of required finish and not less than 0.090” wall thickness at any location for the main frame and sash members.

B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials to be non-corrosive and compatible with sliding aluminum-framed glass door members, trim hardware, anchors, and other components.

C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.

D. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. 1. Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semi-rigid, polypropylene sheet or

polypropylene-coated material. Comply with AAMA 701/702.

2.3 STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 08 41 13 Page - 4 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

A. Storefront Entrance Framing Trifab® VG 450-2” sightline. B. Where doors are in curtainwall use appropriate door frame adaptors to accomidate heavy wall door and all hardware. C. Non-Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for

aligning system components. D. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and

accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Where exposes shall be stainless steel. E. Perimeter Anchors: When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum material to

prevent galvanic action F. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers

with identification labels intact. G. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle storefront material

and components to avoid damage. Protect storefront material against damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after storefront installation.

2.4 GLAZING A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, extruded EPDM rubber. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop

adhesion.

2.5 HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, or other corrosion-resistant

material compatible with aluminum; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely aluminum-framed entrance doors.

B. Standard Hardware: 1. Weatherstripping:

a. Meeting stiles on pairs of doors shall be equipped with an adjustable astragal utilizing wool pile with polymeric fin. b. The door weathering on a single acting offset pivot or butt hung door and frame (single or pairs) shall be Kawneer

Sealair® weathering. This is comprised of a thermoplastic elastomer weathering on a tubular shape with a semi-rigid polymeric backing.

2. Sill Sweep Strips: EPDM blade gasket sweep strip in an aluminum extrusion applied to the interior exposed surface of the bottom rail with concealed fasteners (Necessary to meet specified performance tests).

3. Threshold: Extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, with ribbed surface. 4. Continuous Hinge: Reference Door Schedule and Hardware specifications. 5. Push/Pull: Reference Door Schedule and Hardware specifications. 6. Exit Device: Reference Door Schedule and Hardware specifications. 7. Closer: Reference Door Schedule and Hardware specifications. 8. Security Lock/Dead Lock: Reference Door Schedule and Hardware specifications. 9. Latch Handle: Reference Door Schedule and Hardware specifications. 10. Cylinder(s)/Thumbturn: Reference Door Schedule and Hardware specifications. 11. Electric Strike/Strike Keeper: Reference Door Schedule and Hardware specifications.

C. Access Control Entrance Hardware: 1. Reference Door Schedule and Hardware specifications.

2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate aluminum-framed glass entrance doors in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components

and anchoring doors. B. Fabricate aluminum-framed glass doors that are reglazable without dismantling perimeter framing.

1. Door corner construction shall consist of mechanical clip fastening, SIGMA deep penetration plug welds and 1-1/8" (29 mm) long fillet welds inside and outside of all four corners. Glazing stops shall be hook-in type with EPDM glazing gaskets reinforced with non-stretchable cord.

2. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints hairline in appearance. 3. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware. 4. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.



C. Weather Stripping: Provide weather stripping locked into extruded grooves in door panels or frames as indicated on manufactures drawings and details.

2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with AAMA-AFPA "Anodic Finishes/Painted Aluminum" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within

one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating

aluminum finishes. B. Factory Finishing:

1. Kawneer Permanodic® AA-M10C22A41, AAMA 611, Architectural Class I Clear Anodic Coating (Color #14 Clear).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weather tight sliding door installation. 1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. 2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads

are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches (76 mm) of opening. 3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at

joints. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing aluminum swing entrance

doors, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Install aluminum swing entrance doors level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement,

anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill threshold in bed of sealant, as indicated, for weather tight construction. D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with

other materials.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon Owner’s written request, provide periodic site visit by manufacturer’s field service

representative.

3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing aluminum framed storefronts. Avoid damaging protective coatings and

finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. B. Clean glass immediately after installation. Comply with glass manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and

maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

END OF SECTION



Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 08 43 13 Page - 1 Aluminum Framed Storefronts Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 08 43 13

ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Kawneer Architectural Aluminum Storefront Systems, including perimeter trims, stools, accessories, shims and anchors, and perimeter sealing of storefront units.

1. Types of Kawneer Aluminum Storefront Systems include: a. Trifab® VG 450 (2” Sightline) Storefront System – 2" x 4-1/2" (50.8 mm x 114.3 mm) nominal dimension;

Non-Thermal; Front Plane, Structural Silicone or Weatherseal Glazed, Stick Fabrication.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 079200 “Joint Sealants” for joint sealants installed as part of the aluminum storefront system 2. Division 084113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances (Doors)" 3. Division 084313 "Aluminum-Framed Storefronts" 4. Division 088000 "Glazing" 5. Division 087100 "Door Hardware"

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions: For fenestration industry standard terminology and definitions refer to American Architectural Manufactures Association (AAMA) – AAMA Glossary (AAMA AG).


A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed storefront system shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:

1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to the Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings.

2. Basic Wind Speed (MPH): See wind loading requirement sheet A3.10 3. Importance Factor (I, II, III): See wind loading requirement sheet A3.10 4. Exposure Category (A, B, C, D): See wind loading requirement sheet A3.10

B. Storefront System Performance Requirements:

1. Wind loads: Provide storefront system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures to meet wind loading requirements on sheet A3.10

2. Air Infiltration: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2 (0.3 l/s · m2) at a static air pressure differential of 6.24 psf (300 Pa).

3. Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. There shall be no leakage at a minimum static air pressure differential of 8 psf (383 Pa) as defined in AAMA 501.

4. Uniform Load: A static air design load of 20 psf (958 Pa) shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member.



At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.2% of their clear spans shall occur.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and installation instructions for each type of aluminum frame storefront system indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, and attachments to other work, operational clearances and installation details.


D. Samples for Verification: For aluminum framed storefront system and components required.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for each type of aluminum-framed storefront.

F. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed systems, made from 12” (300 mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:

1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage.

G. Other Action Submittals:

1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.

H. Provide copy of manufacturers installation instructions with submittal.


A. Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls, Aluminum Storefronts, and Aluminum Framed Entrances and Doors are to be from the same manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: An installer which has had successful experience with installation of the same or similar units required for the project and other projects of similar size and scope.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of providing aluminum framed storefront system that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion of test reports, and calculations.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum framed storefront system through one source from a single manufacturer.

E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum framed storefront system and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." Do not modify size and dimensional requirements.

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup for type(s) of storefront elevation(s) indicated, in location(s) shown on Drawings.



G. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

H. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401, "Guide for Structural Sealant Glazing" for design and installation of structural-sealant-glazed systems.

I. Structural-Sealant Joints: Design reviewed and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of aluminum framed storefront openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Installation: Submit a written warranty, executed by the installer, for a period of 2 years from the date of substantial completion, against defective materials or workmanship, including substantial non-compliance with applicable specification requirements, which result in premature failure.


B. Manufactures Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty. 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project provided however that the

Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months from date of shipment by manufacturer. a. Components found to be defective will be repaired or replaced by the manufacture without charge at the

manufacturer’s option. b. Warranty for all components must be direct from the manufacturer and non-prorated for the entire term of the warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: 1. Kawneer Company Inc. 2. Trifab® VG 450 (non-Thermal, 2” Sightline) 3. 2” x 4-1/2” (50.8 mm x 114.3 mm) System Dimensions 4. Glass: Front Plane

B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by the following: 1. Manufacturer: Manko 2. Series: 2450 FS Thermally Broken Front Set 3. Profile dimension: 2”x4 ½” front set

C. Substitutions: Refer to Substitutions Section for procedures and submission requirements 1. Pre-Contract (Bidding Period) Substitutions: Submit written requests ten (10) days prior to bid date. 2. Product Literature and Drawings: Submit product literature and drawings modified to suit specific project

requirements and job conditions. 3. Certificates: Submit certificate(s) certifying substitute manufacturer (1) attesting to adherence to specification

requirements for storefront system performance criteria, and (2) has been engaged in the design, manufacturer and fabrication of aluminum storefronts for a period of not less than ten (10) years. (Company Name)

4. Test Reports: Submit test reports verifying compliance with each test requirement required by the project. 5. Samples: Provide samples of typical product sections and finish samples in manufacturer's standard sizes.

D. Substitution Acceptance: Acceptance will be in written form as an addendum.



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum storefront manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish and not less than 0.070” wall thickness at any location for the main frame and complying with ASTM B 221: 6063-T6 alloy and temper.

B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim hardware, anchors, and other components.

C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.

D. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.

E. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated storefront system, provide permanently elastic, non-shrinking, and non-migrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint size and movement.

F. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional dimensions of storefront members are nominal and in compliance with AA Aluminum Standards and Data.

2.3 STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM

A. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

B. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Where exposes shall be stainless steel.

C. Perimeter Anchors: When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action

D. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

E. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle storefront material and components to avoid damage. Protect storefront material against damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after storefront installation.

2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS

A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, extruded EPDM rubber.

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.

E. Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type, and as follows:

1. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, single-component neutral-curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by a structural-sealant manufacturer for use in aluminum-framed systems indicated. a. Color: Black

2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; single-component neutral-curing formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it



comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and aluminum-framed-system manufacturers for this use. a. Color: Matching structural sealant.

2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Entrance Doors: As specified in Division 08 41 13 Section "Aluminum Framed Entrances."

B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 08 71 00 Section "Door Hardware."

2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30 mil (0.762 mm) thickness per coat.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fit joints; make joints flush, hairline and weatherproof. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the

system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge

clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible.

B. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

C. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.

D. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using manufactures standard installation instructions.

E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

B. Factory Finishing: 1. Kawneer Permanodic® AA-M12C22A41, AAMA 611, Architectural Class I Clear Anodic Coating (Color #14 Clear)

(Optional).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weather tight aluminum framed storefront system installation.

1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris.



2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches (76 mm) of opening.

3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints.

4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing aluminum framed storefront system, accessories, and other components.

B. Install aluminum framed storefront system level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction.

C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weather tight construction.

D. Install aluminum framed storefront system and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within sliding door to the exterior.

E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.


A. Field Tests: Architect shall select storefront units to be tested as soon as a representative portion of the project has been installed, glazed, perimeter caulked and cured. Conduct tests for air infiltration and water penetration with manufacturer's representative present. Tests not meeting specified performance requirements and units having deficiencies shall be corrected as part of the contract amount. 1. Testing: Testing shall be performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Refer to Testing Section for

payment of testing and testing requirements. Testing Standard per AAMA 503, including reference to ASTM E 783 for Air Infiltration Test and ASTM E 1105 Water Infiltration Test. a. Air Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 783. Allowable air infiltration shall not

exceed 1.5 times the amount indicated in the performance requirements or 0.09 cfm/ft2, whichever is greater.

b. Water Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 1105. No uncontrolled water leakage is permitted when tested at a static test pressure of two-thirds the specified water penetration pressure but not less than 6.24 psf (300 Pa).

B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon Owner’s written request, provide periodic site visit by manufacturer’s field service representative.

3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION

A. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing aluminum framed storefronts. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

B. Clean glass immediately after installation. Comply with glass manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 08 44 13

GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 08 44 13 Page - 1 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 Summary

A. Section Includes: Kawneer Architectural Aluminum Curtain Wall Systems, including perimeter trims, stools, accessories, shims and anchors, and perimeter sealing of curtain wall framing. 1. Types of Kawneer Aluminum Curtain Wall include:

a. 1600 Wall System®1 - 7–1/2" (63.5 x 190.5), outside glazed pressure plate format. B. Related Sections:

1. Division 08 41 13 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" 2. Division 08 43 13 "Aluminum-Framed Storefronts" 3. Division 08 51 13 "Aluminum Windows" 4. Division 08 71 00 "Hardware" 5. Division 08 80 00 "Glazing"

1.02 References A. AA (Aluminum Association) - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes B. AAMA Series number 11 - Design Wind Loads for Buildings and Boundary Layer Wind Tunnel Testing C. AAMA 101 - Standard Specification for Window, Doors, and Skylights D. AAMA 200 – Standard Practice for the Installation of Windows with Frontal Flanges for Surface Barrier Masonry Construction E. AAMA 502-08 – Voluntary Specification for field Testing of Newly Installed Fenestration Products F. AAMA 511 – Voluntary Guideline for Forensic Water Penetration Testing of Fenestration Products G. AAMA 606.1 – Voluntary Guide Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum H. AAMA 607.1 – Voluntary Guide Specification and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum I. AAMA 608.1 – Voluntary Guide Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum J. AAMA 701/702 - Combined Voluntary Specifications for Pile Weather-stripping and Replaceable Fenestration Weatherseals K. AAMA 1503.1 – Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections L. ASCE 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures M. ASTM A123/A123M – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products N. ASTM B209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate O. ASTM B221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes P. ASTM C509 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material Q. ASTM D2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications R. ASTM D2287 - Standard Specification for Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and Extrusion Compounds S. ASTM E283 – Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified

Pressure Differences Across the Specimen T. ASTM E330 – Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air

Pressure Difference U. ASTM E331 – Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure

Difference V. ASTM E1105 – Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain

Walls by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference W. ASTM F588 – Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of Window Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact

1.03 System Description

A. Curtain Wall System Performance Requirements: 1. Wind loads: Provide Curtain Wall system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures to meet requirements on sheet

A3.10. 2. Air Infiltration: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2 (0.3 l/s · m2) at

a static air pressure differential of 6.24 psf (300 Pa). 3. Water Resistance, (static): The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. There shall be no leakage at a static air pressure

differential of 12 psf (575 Pa) as defined in AAMA 501. 4. Water Resistance, (dynamic): The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with AAMA 501.1. There shall be no leakage at an air pressure

differential of 12 psf (575 Pa) as defined in AAMA 501. 5. Uniform Load: A static air design load of 40 psf (1915 Pa) shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330.

There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member at design load. At structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.2% of their clear spans shall occur.

6. Seismic: When tested to AAMA 501.4, system must meet design displacement of 0.010 x the story height and ultimate displacement of 1.5 x the design displacement.

9. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the thermal transmittance (U-factor) shall not be more than: 0.43 HP Glass) .



10. Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the condensation resistance factor shall not be less than 71frame and 71glass (HP glass).

11. Sound Transmission Loss: When tested to ASTM E90 and ASTM E1425, the Sound Transmission Class (STC) and Outdoor/Indoor Transmission Class (OITC) shall not be less than: STC 31 or OITC 26 based upon 1” insulating glass (1/4", 1/2" AS, 1/4"),

1.04 Submittals

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and installation instructions for curtainwall system indicated.\

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, and attachments to other work, operational clearances and installation details. Provide three photocopied sets of shop drawings, including half size details of all necessary conditions.


D. Samples for Verification: For aluminum curtainwall system and components required.

E. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics.

F. Other Action Submittals:

1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.

G. Provide copy of manufacturers installation instructions. 1.05 Warranty A. Installation: Submit a written warranty, executed by the installer, for a period of 2 years from the date of substantial completion, against defective materials or workmanship, including substantial non-compliance with applicable specification requirements, which result in premature failure.


B. Manufacturer’s Product Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s warranty for curtain wall system as follows:

1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project provided however that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months from date of shipment by Kawneer.

a. Components found to be defective will be repaired or replaced by the manufacture without charge. b. Warranty for all components must be direct from the manufacturer and non-prorated for the entire term of the warranty.

1.06 Quality Assurance A. Aluminum Curtain Walls, Aluminum Storefronts and Aluminum Framed Entrances and Doors are to be from the same manufacturer. B. Qualifications:

1. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced (as determined by contractor) to perform work of this section who has specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this project and who is acceptable to product manufacturer.

2. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer capable of providing structural calculations, applicable independent product test reports, installation instructions, a review of the application method, customer approval and periodic field service representation during construction.

C. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer’s installation instructions, and manufacturer’s warranty requirements.

1.07 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. B. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels

intact. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle material and components to avoid damage.

Protect curtain wall material against damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after curtain wall installation.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturers (Acceptable Manufacturers/Products)

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Address: Kawneer Company, Inc.


SECTION 08 44 13

GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS


555 Guthridge Court, Technology Park/Atlanta, Norcross, GA 30092 Telephone: 770 449 5555 Fax: 770 734 1560 2. Proprietary Product(s)/System(s): Kawneer Aluminum Curtain Wall

a. Series: 1600 Wall System®1

b. Finish/Color: (See 2.06 Finishes) B. Alternate (Manufacturers/Products): In lieu of providing below specified base bid/contract manufacturer, provide below specified alternate

manufacturers. Refer to Alternates Section. 1. Base Bid/Contract Manufacturer/Product: Kawneer Company, Inc.

a. Product: Kawneer Aluminum Curtain Wall b. Series: 1600 Wall System®1 c. Framing Member Profile:

2. Alternate # Manko Curtainwall a. Product: 250i- 2 ½” Glazed Aluminum Curtainwall b. Series:250i c. Framing Member Profile: 7 5/8” (include stell reinforcement where required to meet design)

C. Substitutions:

1. General: Refer to Substitutions Section for procedures and submission requirements. a. Pre-Contract (Bidding Period) Substitutions: Submit written requests ten (10) days prior to bid date.

2. Substitution Documentation a. Product Literature and Drawings: Submit product literature and drawings modified to suit specific project requirements and job conditions. b. Certificates: Submit certificate(s) certifying substitute manufacturer (1) attesting to adherence to specification requirements for curtain wall

system performance criteria, and (2) has been engaged in the design, manufacturer and fabrication of aluminum curtain wall for a period of not less than ten (10) years.

c. Test Reports: Submit test reports verifying compliance with each test requirement for curtain wall required by the project. d. Product Sample and Finish: Submit product sample, representative of curtain wall for the project, with specified finish and color.

3. Substitution Acceptance: Acceptance will be in written form as an addendum. 2.02 Materials

A. Aluminum (Curtain Wall and Components): 1. Material Standard: Extruded Aluminum, ASTM B 221, 6063-T6 alloy and temper. 2. Member Wall Thickness: Each framing member shall have a wall thickness sufficient to meet the specified structural requirements. 3. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional dimensions of curtain wall members are nominal and in

compliance with AA Aluminum Standards and Data. 2.03 Accessories

A. Fasteners: Where exposed, shall be Stainless Steel. B. Gaskets: Glazing gaskets shall comply with ASTM C 864 and be extruded of a silicone compatible EPDM rubber that provides for silicone adhesion. C. Perimeter Anchors: Aluminum. When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic

action. D. Thermal Barrier: Thermal separator shall be extruded of a silicone compatible elastomer that provides for silicone adhesion.

2.04 Related Materials A. Sealants: Refer to Joint Treatment (Sealants) Section. B. Glass: Refer to Glass and Glazing Section.

2.05 Fabrication A. General:

1. Fabricate components per manufacturer's installation instructions and with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.

2. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline and weatherproof. 3. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. 4. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.

2.06 Finishes A. Shop Finishing:

1. Kawneer Permanodic® AA-M12C22A41, AAMA 611, Architectural Class I Clear Anodic Coating (Color #14 Clear ) 2.07 Source Quality Control

A. Source Quality: Provide aluminum curtain walls specified herein from a single source. 1. Building Enclosure System: When aluminum curtain wall are part of a building enclosure system, including entrances, entrance hardware,

windows, storefront framing and related products, provide building enclosure system products from a single source manufacturer.



PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 Examination

A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions (which have been previously installed under other sections) are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Verify openings are sized to receive curtain wall system and sill plate is level in accordance with manufacturer’s acceptable tolerances. 1. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop

drawings. Coordinate field measurements, fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. 3.02 Installation

A. General: Install curtain wall systems plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames with manufacturer’s prescribed tolerances and installation instructions. Provide support and anchor in place. 1. Dissimilar Materials: Provide separation of aluminum materials from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action contact points. 2. Glazing: Glass shall be outside glazed and held in place with extruded aluminum pressure plates anchored to the mullion using stainless steel

fasteners spaced no greater than 9" on center. 3. Water Drainage: Each light of glass shall be compartmentalized using joint plugs and silicone sealant to divert water to the horizontal weep

locations. Weep holes shall be located in the horizontal pressure plates and covers to divert water to the exterior of the building. B. Related Products Installation Requirements:

1. Sealants (Perimeter): Refer to Joint Treatment (Sealants) Section. 2. Glass: Refer to Glass and Glazing Section.

a. Reference: ANSI Z97.1, CPSC 16 CFR 1201 and GANA Glazing Manual 3.03 Field Quality Control

A. Field Tests: Architect shall select curtain wall units to be tested as soon as a representative portion of the project has been installed, glazed, perimeter caulked and cured. Conduct tests for air infiltration and water penetration with manufacturer’s representative present. Tests not meeting specified performance requirements and units having deficiencies shall be corrected as part of the contract amount. 1. Testing: Testing shall be performed per AAMA 503 by a qualified independent testing agency. Refer to Testing Section for payment of testing and

testing requirements. a. Air Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 783. Allowable air infiltration shall not exceed 1.5 times the amount indicated

in the performance requirements or 0.09 cfm/ft2, which ever is greater. b. Water Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 1105. No uncontrolled water leakage is permitted when tested at a static

test pressure of two-thirds the specified water penetration pressure but not less than 8 psf (383 Pa). B. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Upon Owner’s written request, provide periodic site visit by manufacturer’s field service representative.

3.04 Protection and Cleaning A. Protection: Protect installed product’s finish surfaces from damage during construction. Protect aluminum curtain wall system from damage from

grinding and polishing compounds, plaster, lime, acid, cement, or other harmful contaminants. B. Cleaning: Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to owner’s

acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 08 51 13 - Page 1 Aluminum Windows Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/11

SECTION 085210

ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. All exterior windows furnished and installed as shown on drawings, specified in this section and designated in

AAMA 101/I.S.2.. 2. All labor, materials, tools, equipment and services needed to furnish and install Architectural Performance Class

Windows. 3. Components furnished with installed windows. 4. Installation accessories furnished and installed.

1.02 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design Wind Loads 1. The design wind pressure for the project will be:

a. 25 psf positive and negative b. Per wind pressure diagram c. Per local building codes

2. All structural components, including meeting rails, mullions and anchors shall be designed accordingly, complying with deflection and stress requirements of Paragraph 1.02 B.

B. Air, Water and Structural Performance Requirements

1. When tested in accordance with cited test procedures, windows shall meet or exceed the following performance criteria, as well as those indicated in AAMA 101/I.S.2 for Heavy Commercial (HC) Performance Class windows, Performance Grade 65 (HC65) (AW100 at Fixed) unless otherwise noted herein.

2. Air Test Performance Requirements a. Air infiltration maximum 0.3 cfm per square foot at 6.24 psf pressure differential when tested in accordance

with ASTM E283. 3. Water Test Performance Requirements

a. No uncontrolled water leakage at 10.00 psf static pressure differential, with water application rate of 5 gallons/hr/sq ft when tested in accordance with ASTM E331.

4. Structural Test Performance Requirements a. Uniform Load Deflection Test

i. No deflection of any unsupported span L of test unit (framing rails, muntins, mullions, etc.) in excess of L/175 at both a positive and negative load of 65 psf (design test pressure) when tested in accordance with ASTM E330.

ii. Structural reinforcing that is not standard on units being furnished is not allowed. b. Uniform Load Structural Test

i. Unit to be tested at 1.5 x design test pressure (97.5 psf), both positive and negative, acting normal to plane of wall in accordance with ASTM E330.

ii. No glass breakage; permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or anchors; damage to make windows inoperable; or permanent deformation of any main frame or ventilator member in excess of 0.2% of its clear span.

C. Life Cycle Testing:

1. When tested in accordance with AAMA 910-93, there is to be no damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support arms, activating mechanisms or any other damage that would cause the window to be inoperable at the conclusion of testing. Air infiltration and water resistance tests shall meet the primary performance requirements specified.

D. Condensation Resistance and Thermal Transmittance Performance Requirements

1. Perform thermal tests in accordance with the configuration specified in AAMA 1503.1. a. Thermal Transmittance ("U" Factor) shall not exceed 0.60 BTU/hr/sf/deg F at 15 mph exterior wind. b. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF) requirements: CRF minimum 47 (Frame) and CRF minimum 47

(specimen). 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General Requirements 1. Provide all submittals in a timely manner to meet the required construction completion schedule.



B. Shop Drawings 1. Shop drawings must be prepared wholly by the window manufacturer, or a qualified engineering services firm

under the direction of the manufacturer. Shop drawings for pre-engineered configurations may be prepared by installers authorized per 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE.

2. Provide design details along with bid proposals to define system aesthetic and functional characteristics. 3. Provide three photocopied sets of shop drawings, including half size details of all necessary conditions.

C. Samples

1. Components: Submit samples of anchors, fasteners, hardware, assembled corner sections and other materials and components as requested by Architect.

2. Finish: Submit color samples for Architect's approval as requested.

D. Test Reports and Calculations 1. Submit certified independent laboratory test reports verifying compliance with all test requirements of 1.02

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS as requested by Architect. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications 1. Upon request, the window manufacturer will provide written confirmation that the installer is authorized to install

window products to be used on this project. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading 1. Materials will be packed, loaded, shipped, unloaded, stored and protected in accordance with AAMA CW-10.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Aluminum Window Warranty 1. Products: Submit a written warranty, executed by the window manufacturer, for a period of 3 years (10 years for

insulated glass seal failure) from the date of manufacture, against defective materials or workmanship, including substantial non-compliance with applicable specification requirements and industry standards, which results in premature failure of the windows, finish, factory-glazed glass, or parts, outside of normal wear.

a. In the event that windows or components are found defective, manufacturer will repair or provide replacements without charge at manufacturer’s option.

b. Warranty for all components must be direct from the manufacturer (non-pass through) and non-prorated for the entire term. Warranty must be assignable to the non-residential owner, and transferable to subsequent owners through its length.

2. Installation: Submit a written warranty, executed by the window installer, for a period of 2 years from the date of substantial completion, against defective materials or workmanship, including substantial non-compliance with applicable specification requirements, which result in premature failure.

a. In the event that installation of windows or components is found to be defective, installer will repair or provide replacements without charge at the installer’s option.


A. Acceptable Manufacturer 1. Drawings and specifications are based on:

a. Manko Window Systems, Inc. 6035 Series Horizontal Dual Sliding Windows. i. Base bid will be Manko Window Systems, Inc.

B. Substitutions

1. Other manufacturers’ products that meet or exceed specified design requirements may be considered. Submit the following information with request for substitutions at least ten (15) working days prior to bid date.

a. Test reports specified in 1.02 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS b. Full proposal details and samples window with all accessories. c. Copy of manufacturer's warranty specified in 1.06 WARRANTY d. Other information as requested for evaluation

2. Substitute products not pre-approved by the Architect via addenda will not be considered. 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Members 1. Extruded aluminum prime billet 6063-T5 or 6063-T6 alloy for primary components; 6063-T5, 6063-T6, or 6061-T6

for structural components; all meeting the requirements of ASTM B221. 2. Aluminum sheet alloy 5005 H 32 (for anodic finish), meeting the requirements of ASTM B209 or alloy 3003 H 14

(for painted or unfinished sheet).



2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Materials

1. Principal window frame members will be a minimum 0.062" in thickness except at frame sills, which will be 0.094” minimum thickness.

2. Extruded or formed trim components will be a minimum 0.062" in thickness.

B. Fabrication 1. Frame depth 3 1/2” minimum. 2. Sill must allow for drainage to the exterior and function under both negative and positive pressure. 3. Frame-to-sash interface shall be designated for sweep seals, to prevent loss of weather-strip contact under positive

pressure. 4. Sash must be tubular and be removable to the interior for maintenance. 5. Frames are designed for self-mulling (stacking). 6. Screen fame must not protrude from exterior of window frame.

C. Glazing 1. Stop glazed with interior removable stop and gasket. 2. Standard cavity for 1” infill. 3. Glass or panel set in structural silicone and heal bead.

2.04 COMPONENTS

A. All steel components including attachment fasteners to be 300 series stainless steel except as noted. B. Extruded aluminum components 6063-T5 or 6063-T6. C. Locking handles, cases and strikes to be die cast or stainless steel. D. Thermoplastic or thermo-set plastic caps, housings and other components to be injection-molded nylon, extruded PVC, or

other suitable compound. E. Hardware:

1. Rollers a. Tandem stainless steel 3/4” rollers. b. Field adjustable tandem rollers. c. Stainless steel roller cap track.

2. Locks a. Provide automatic spring-loaded jamb locks to secure sash in closed position b. Provide white bronze strikes c. White Bronze cam action sweep latches; one per meeting rail.

3. Pull Handles a. Provide integral continuous pull handles on sash.

F. Sealants 1. All sealants shall comply with applicable provisions of AAMA 800 and/or Federal Specifications FS-TT-001 and 002

Series. 2. Frame joinery sealants shall be suitable for application specified and as tested and approved by window

manufacturer.

G. Glass 1. Provide in accordance with Section 08800. 2. Sealed insulated glass shall meet ASTM E774 Class A.

H. Glazing 1. Provide in general accordance with Section 08800. 2. Glazing method shall be in general accordance with the FGMA Glazing Manual for specified glass type, or as

approved by the glass fabricator. I. Glazing Materials

1. Setting Blocks/Edge Blocking: Provide in sizes and locations recommended by FGMA Glazing Manual. 2. Back-bedding tapes, expanded cellular glazing tapes, toe beads, heel beads and cap beads shall meet the

requirements of applicable specifications cited in AAMA 800. 3. Glazing gaskets shall be non-shrinking, weather-resistant, and compatible with all materials in contact. 4. Structural silicone sealant where used shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1184. 5. Spacer tape in continuous contact with structural silicone shall be tested for compatibility and approved by the

sealant manufacturer for the intended application. Gaskets in continuous contact with structural silicone shall be extruded silicone or compatible material.

J. Steel Components

1. Provide steel reinforcements as necessary to meet the system performance requirements of 1.02. 2. Concealed steel anchors and reinforcing shall be factory painted after fabrication with rust-inhibitive primer

complying with Federal Specification TT-P-645.



K. Thermal Break Construction: 1. Frame and sash members must include a thermal break applied in the manufacturer’s facility, using concealed low

conductance poured-in-place polyurethane in a pre-treated cavity. 2. After proper curing, the aluminum bridge section must be removed to provide a 3/16” separation between exterior

and interior metal surfaces.

L. Weather Stripping: 1. Dual durometer PVC, neoprene, EPDM or other suitable material as tested and approved by the window

manufacturer. 2. Bulb type at exterior vent members. 3. Securely stake and join at corners. Provide drainage to exterior as necessary. 4. Weather-stripping shall provide an effective pressure-equalization seal at the interior face of the sash ventilator.

M. Receptors/Sill Starter:

1. Provide extruded aluminum receptors to receive windows, as shown on architectural drawings. 2. Finish to match window frames.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. General: 1. Finish, fabricate and shop assemble frame and sash members into complete windows under the responsibility of

one manufacturer. 2. No bolts, screws or fastenings to bridge thermal barrier or impair independent frame movement. 3. Fabricate to allow for thermal movement of materials when subjected to a temperature differential from -30 degrees

F to +180 degrees F.

B. Frames: 1. Cope and mechanically fasten each corner leaving only hairline joinery, then seal weather tight.

C. Operating Sash Ventilator 1. Cope and mechanically fasten each corner leaving only hairline joinery, then seal weather tight.

D. Tolerances 1. Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional dimensions of entrance members are nominal

and in compliance with the Aluminum Standards and Data. 2.06 FINISHES

A. Finish of Aluminum Components 1. Finish of all exposed areas of aluminum windows and components shall be done in accordance with the AAMA

Voluntary Guide Specification AAM12C21A31 Clear - Class II. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions 1. Verify that building substrates permit installation of windows according to the manufacturer's instructions, approved

shop drawings, calculations and contract documents. 2. Do not install windows until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Erection of Aluminum Windows

1. Install windows with skilled tradesman in exact accordance with approved shop drawings, installation instructions, specifications, and AAMA 101/I.S.2.

2. Windows must be installed plumb, square and level for proper weathering and operation. Jambs must not be “sprung”, bowed or warped during installation.

3. Aluminum that is not organically coated shall be insulated from direct contact with steel, masonry, concrete or other dissimilar metals by bituminous paint, zinc chromate primer, nonconductive shims or other suitable insulating material.


SECTION 08 56 56

SECURITY SCREENS

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 08 56 56 Page - 1 Security Screens Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 Description A. The security screens shown on the plans and herein specified are the products of Kane Manufacturing Corp., Kane, Pennsylvania. This manufacturer’s name and products have been used to establish the standards of construction and quality of workmanship required for this project. Manufacturers bidding on this project must be actively engaged in the fabrication of specified items for a minimum of five (5) years prior to the bid date. Manufacturers requesting approval to bid their products as equal must submit to the Architect full-size drawings, including details of construction, and a complete operating security screen sample, ten (10) days prior to the bid date. 1.02 Submittals

A. Manufacturer shall submit shop drawings, showing details of attachment to surround materials and elevations showing scope of the project.

B. Samples of materials as may be requested without cost to owner; frame sections, wire cloth, fasteners,

mullion section, corner section, etc. 1.03 Warranty A. The operation of the security screen supplied by Kane Manufacturing Corp. on the designated project shall have a one (1) year warranty against any proven defective material or parts, as called for in the specifications and approved shop drawings. This warranty does not cover abuse by others. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers A. Kane Manufacturing Corp., Kane, PA (814) 837-6464 Fax: (814) 837-6230 2.02 Main Frame

A. The main frame shall be reinforced, open channel type with removable concealment plates. The open channel frame shall be formed of 12-gauge steel and reinforced by a “Z” shaped bar formed of 12-gauge steel that supports the wire cloth. The corners of the main frame shall be mitered, continuously welded on both sides and dressed smooth.

B. Removable concealment plates formed of 16-gauge steel shall be secured to the back of the main frame to conceal the locking mechanism and the wire cloth supports using TORX® tamper-resistant screws. 2.03 Sub-frame A. The sub-frame shall be formed of 12-gauge steel on all sides. The corners of the sub-frame shall be notched for self-aligning and robotically welded to provide a rigid frame within the main frame operates. 2.04 Finish

A. All interior and exterior surfaces of the main frame, sub-frame and concealment plates shall have a hot-

dipped galvanized or galvannealed finish which shall be thoroughly cleaned in a 5-step bonderizing process. The surfaces shall receive an electrostatically applied thermoplastic, polyester powder coating which shall be applied and baked to a hard mar-resistant finish as follows:

Custom - Architect to furnish color selection from Kelley Moore or Sherwin Williams Color Wheel.

2.05 Infill Option 12-mesh .028-inch diameter stainless steel wire cloth

2.06 Wire Cloth Attachment

A. The wire cloth hardware shall consist of clevises, stainless steel pins, bolts, washers, oil tempered coil springs and full tempered steel 1/8" x 3/8" shock distributing bars.

B. Each shock absorber shall be individually mounted on an electroplated, oil tempered coil spring, which shall

have a capacity of 175 pounds per 1/2” of movement and spaced no more than 8” apart.


SECTION 08 56 56

SECURITY SCREENS

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 08 56 56 Page - 2 Security Screens Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

C. The four edges of the wire cloth shall be wrapped 180 degrees around continuous shock distributing bars for the full length of each edge, embedded within the yokes of the shock absorbers and held in position with stainless steel pins passing completely through the yoke and engaging the wire cloth twice. 2.07Locks and Releases

A. Locks Each screen shall have a concealed Kane 107® bitt key lock, actuating ball bearing and case-

hardened steel bolts. The bolts shall operate simultaneously from one key station with a special bitt key.

B. Releases Push-Quick® release which conforms to NFPA 101 (5-2.1.7.1)

2.08 Hardware

A. Each screen shall be provided with two or more concealed 13-gauge, electroplated steel hinges with 1/4” diameter hardened, loose stainless steel pins and integral compression guards.

B. 16-gauge 3/4" x 1" steel scribes shall be supplied at the head and jambs if required. C. Each screen shall come fully assembled and tested from the factory.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Inspection A. Verify that openings fit allowable tolerances, are plumb, level, provide a solid anchoring surface and comply with approved shop drawings. 3.02 Installation

A. Install in accordance with approved shop drawings and specifications. B. Plumb and align faces in a single plane and erect screens square and true, adequately anchored. C. After completion of installation, screens shall be adjusted, in working order and clean.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 08 71 00 Page - 1 Door Hardware Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

Part 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Selection Includes: Furnish and deliver all items of finish hardware required to adequately trim and hang all doors, as is hereinafter specified and listed in the hardware sets. This further includes hardware for doors and frames of unusual profile or shape or other special conditions. The hardware shall be provided with all necessary standard and special fasteners, screws, bolts, expansion shields, or anchors to properly secure hardware to its intended door, frame, or other surface.

B. Related Sections: Other sections within this specification which relate to products supplied and installed under finish hardware are as follows, but not limited to:

1. Metal Doors and Frames: Section: 08 41 13, 08 44 13 2. Wood Doors and Frames: Section: 08 14 00 3. Electrical: Division 26 4. Millwork - Hardware at Cubbies, Misc. Coat Hooks 1.2 REFERENCES A. The following documents should be used in estimating and detailing and considered as a standard of

quality and performance: 1. I.B.C. International Building Code 2006 Edition 2. NFPA-80 Fire Door Windows (current year adopted) 3. NFPA-101 Life Safety Code (current year adopted) 4. NFPA-105 Smoke Control Door Assembly (current year adopted) 5. ANSI-117.1 Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People (current year adopted) 6. A.D.A.A.G. Federal Register for Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines 7. T.A.S. Texas Accessibility Standards 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General Requirements: Make all submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. Schedules: Unless specifically stated, furnish six (6) copies of a completely detailed schedule of Finish Hardware (see DHI’s Sequence and Format of the Hardware Schedule) for approval.

Hardware Schedule to be complete with Title Page, Door Index / Keying Schedule, and Manufacturers Legend. After “Approval” provide eight (8) copies, unless otherwise requested, of the corrected, revised and approved schedule for field use, distribution and files. Provide one (1) copy, complete with Catalog Cuts, marked “Installer’s Copy” and deliver it to job site.

C. Product Data: Provide a catalog cut, clearly marked and identified, illustrating and describing each product included in the Hardware Schedule submitted.

D. Samples: If so requested by the Architect, provide a sample of any product or item requested, properly marked and tagged, for the opening for which it is intended. After examination and approval by the Architect, the sample shall be turned over to the General Contractor for incorporation into the project.

E. Templates: When resubmitting “Approved” copies of the Hardware Schedule, provide a complete “Template List” covering the items scheduled. Further and upon request, provide copies of templates to manufacturers or trades, whose work includes preparation of their products, to receive hardware. Provide copies of all such transmittals to the contractor for his files.


SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE


F. Keying: Provide a Keying Schedule, listing the levels of keying, (GGMK, GKD, MKD, or KA) as well as an explanation of the key system’s function, the key symbols used and the number of the doors controlled. This shall be provided in conjunction with the Door Index / Keying Schedule (which lists the door number schedule heading, lock type, and individual key symbol, and remarks, or special instructions) mentioned above. This project is to be Masterkeyed and provide ten (10) grandmaster keys, fifteen (15) master keys, and five (5) keys per lock set or cylinder. (SECURITY KEYING)

G. Operations and Maintenance Data: At the completion of a project, provide to the owner or his maintenance chief, a copy of the latest, revised and updated schedule of finish hardware, complete with catalog cuts and keying schedule. In addition, furnish one (1) copy of maintenance and parts manual for those items for which they are readily available and normally provided.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Substitutions: Request for substitutions shall not be accepted within this project. Architect,

owner, and Hardware Consultant have selected one (1) specified and two (2) equals listed hereinafter the Hardware Schedule. By this selection process they have established three (3) equal products for competitive pricing, while insuring no unnecessary delays by a substitution process. If any specified product is listed as a “No Substitution” product, this product will be supplied as specified, with no alteration or request of substitution. The reason for this is to comply with the uniformity established at this project. Parts and supplies are inventoried for these particular products for ease and standardization of replacement.

B. Supplier Qualification: Qualifications of supplier listed below shall meet or exceed those standards and be documented, in writing, upon the request of the Architect:

1. The hardware supplier shall be engaged regularly in the furnishing, delivery, and servicing of contract builder’s hardware and must be experienced and knowledgeable in all phases of estimating, detailing, scheduling, master keying, shipping, and installation practices.

2. An A.H.C. or equivalent shall be on staff at hardware supplier’s place of business to assist Architect and General Contractor throughout project.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDELING

A. Marking and Packaging: All items of hardware shall be delivered to the jobsite in the manufacturer’s original cartons or boxes Each item of hardware shall be marked with the abbreviation set forth on the shop drawings to insure that the product reaches its installation destination without needing specific hardware product number knowledge.

B. Delivery: The hardware supplier shall coordinate with the General Contractor in order to compile a mutually beneficial delivery schedule, which imposes no hardship on either party. If items of hardware are to be delivered to manufacturers or fabricators for installation on their portion of work, the General Contractor must be advised of such shipments, along with copies of shipping tickets, and other documentation, thus transferring responsibility to the manufacturer / fabricator, for care of said hardware.

C. Storage: No hardware is to be delivered to the jobsite until the contractor has provided a dry, secure area with adequate shelving to store the hardware. If requested by the contractor, the hardware supplier shall send a representative to the jobsite to assist in the checking-in and layout of the hardware at the storage location. This must be done only when a representative of the contractor is present.

D. Warranty: All warranties shall be that of the manufacturer as stated in the most recent product literature. Any evidence of misuse or abuse voids all warranties expressed or implied.


SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE


1.6 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Service: If there are any products listed hereinafter that would normally require a

maintenance or service contract, provide the Owner / Architect with details and costs of said contract.

Part 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products listed in the following with an asterisk (*) shall denote specified manufacturers in Hardware Schedule. The remaining two (2) listed manufacturers will be accepted equals. If only one manufacturer is listed this will be handled as a “No Substitution” specification, as set forth in 1.04 Quality Assurance.

2.2 MATERIALS A. Screws and Fasteners: Provide all screws and fasteners of the proper size and type to properly anchor

or attach the item of hardware scheduled. Provide all fasteners with Phillips head, unless security type screws (spanner-head or torx-head) are hereinafter specified.

B. HINGES Where hinges are specified, they shall be as follows: 1. On doors to exterior openings and main corridor doors, and other doors of high frequency use, provide a continuous, gear type hinge of appropriate weight as specified.

2. Where regular ball bearing hinges are listed for other doors, provide one hinge for each 30-inch of door height.

3. The width of the hinges shall be sufficient to clear all trim that is mounted to the door frame. 4. Provide hinges with height and weight to match frame prep where existing hollow metal frames

are re-used. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS---Ives*, Stanley, McKinney, Hager.

C. Continuous Hinges: Continuous hinges shall consist of three (3)-interlocking extrusions in a pin-less assembly applied to the full height of the door. All continuous geared hinges shall be manufactured to template screw locations and be non-handed. All mortise hinges and half mortise hinges shall cover and wrap the door edge completely. Doorframe heads shall be extended for clearance on full or half mortise hinges versus downsizing doors for ease of repair & replacement. All frames shall be properly reinforced per manufacturer’s standards. Standard warranty shall be for the life of opening. Provide surface mounted continuous hinges where existing wood frames are re-used.

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS---Ives*, Pemko, Select. D. Locks: All locks shall incorporate a seven-pin tumbler system core that will be keyed to the existing

GRANDMASTER SYSTEM. Provide locks and cylinders complete with keyed color-coded construction cores. All locks shall be operational Grade 1 mortise as is hereinafter listed in the Hardware Schedule. Provide L9050 function at Teacher’s Lounge and Administration areas. Provide L9071 function on all classroom doors with locksets.

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS---Schlage* (no substitution) E. Lock Trim: Mortise locks are to be furnished with lever handle trim, with levers having a return to

within ½ inch of the door face, as is hereinafter listed in the Hardware Schedule. Provide “N” escutcheons on all new locks for renovation projects.


SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE


F. Cylinder Housings: Rim and mortise cylinder housings shall accept Best / Stanley Cormax interchangeable cores. Cams and tailpieces must be coordinated with locking mechanism. Provide blocking rings as required to adapt cylinder housing to the locking mechanism.

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS---Best, Falcon, or Schlage. G. Construction Cores: Shall be a minimum of 2 level combinated cores such that a pass key can

be issued to individual users limiting access to a single space with a second level “master” of all construction cores that can be issued to a school principal and / or designated site staff. Furnish keyed brass construction cores installed in every cylinder and cylinder housing included in the project. Provide one construction key for each core and master keys installed by contractor per the following schedule.

Elementary Schools: 3 Master Keys Middle Schools: 4 Master Keys High Schools: 6 Master Keys H. Permanent Cores: Furnish combinated cores so as not to breach security of existing system.

CORMAX keying system must be guaranteed of no duplication of existing change keys, master keys, or grandmaster keys located in this project. Provide new permanent cores for all new cylinder housings and locks as well as any existing locks that have been modified.

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS---Best* (no substitutions) I. Surface Bolts: Surface bolts to have 8 (eight) inch bolt for ease of access to bolt lever. Surface

bolts should be U.L. listed for use on the inactive leaf of a pair of labeled doors. Surface bolts shall be packed with both top and bottom strike and ms and sms.

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS---Ives*, Rockwood, Trimco J. Flush Bolts: Manual flush bolts to have 12-inch rods for doors 7’6”. Doors over 7’6” high shall

have bolts with top rods of 18 inch or 24 inch to allow ease of access to bolt lever. Furnish dust proof strikes for all bottom bolts.

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS---Ives*, Rockwood, Trimco K. Automatic Flush Bolts: Bolts are to be adjustable for unusual clearance or conditions and have a

thermal lock that automatically locks the inactive door under high heat conditions due to fire. Furnish dust proof strikes for all bottom bolts.

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS---Ives*, Rockwood, Trimco L. Door Coordinators: Coordinators to be non-handed and designed to become an integral part of

the door frame and engineered to prevent damage in case of abnormal force against the door that is held open.

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS---Ives*, Rockwood, Trimco M. Exit Devices and Mullions: Exit devices shall be rim, mortise or vertical rod type as called for in

the Hardware Schedule. All such devices shall be U.L. listed. Interior devices, (except vestibule doors), shall be furnished with lever handle trim, 996-L2, matching lock design unless specified as exit only function. Exterior doors and vestibule doors shall be furnished with VR trim unless specified as exit only function. XP devices shall be furnished at all exterior locations. Provide 330


SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE


series push bars at vestibule doors that do not require exit devices. Provide key removable mullions with stabilizers. All devices shall have a published three-year warranty.

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS---Von Duprin* (no substitution) N. Door Closers: Door closers shall be of cast iron material and be of rectangular designs and

furnished with a full cover and thru-bolts. Provide heavy duty arms on exterior doors. They shall be furnished with backcheck, delayed action, hold-open, and advanced backcheck as listed in the Hardware Schedule. Closers shall be mounted out of the line of sight wherever possible (i.e., room side of corridor doors, etc.) with parallel arm mounting on out swinging doors. Mount closers top jamb or on brackets and / or drop plates, where special conditions call for it.

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS---LCN* (no substitution) O. Push Plates: Push plates are to be .050 brass, bronze, or stainless steel with four (4) beveled

edges, drilled and countersunk for screws, as is hereinafter specified in the Hardware Schedule. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS---Ives*, Rockwood, Trimco P. Door Pulls: Door pulls to be ADA complaint with a 2 ½ inch projection from back of pull to face

of door. All door pulls to be thru bolted or back-to-back mounting. All pulls to be supplied with mounting bolts for high abuse areas with a minimum of 3/8 inch – 16 heavy-duty bolts.

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS---Ives*, Rockwood, Trimco Q. Protective Plates: Protective plates shall be mop (6”), kick (10”) or armor (34”) and shall be .050

brass, bronze, or stainless steel, with three (3) beveled edges, drilled and countersunk for screws. Plates to be mounted to avoid louvers and / or glass kits.

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS---Ives*, Rockwood, Trimco R. Door Stops and Holders: Where a door strikes a wall at approximately 90 degrees, a suitable

door stop shall be provided, either a wall bumper or floor stop. Do not provide floor stops unless they are specifically listed in the Hardware Sets. If door does not strike a wall, an overhead stop shall be required. Provide Ives FS18L heavy duty floor stops only at exterior doors. Provide proper blocking for wall bumpers at stud walls and in frame and door for overhead stops.

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS---Ives*, Glynn Johnson* Rockwood S. Thresholds and Weatherstrip: Weatherstripping to have aluminum housing and specified insert,

and have elongated holes for adjustment. Door sweeps to be surface mounted of aluminum housing with specified insert. Overhead drip caps to be of aluminum, have a 2 ½ inch projection, and be 4” wider than the door opening. Thresholds shall be of saddle type with no more than ½ inch in rise with stainless steel fasteners.

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS---NGP*, Pemko, Hager T. Coat Hooks - Stanley Hardware Model #S806-687, 3-1/2" Nickel. Located at all millwork cubbies

and some administration offices as indicated on drawings. 2.3 FINISHES A. Hardware finishes shall match and be maintained to BHMA symbols, as is specified hereinafter in the

Hardware Schedule. A strict adherence to base metals and finish with be mandate.


SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE


2.4 KEY CONTROL A. Provide key cabinet(s) as manufactured of sufficient capacity to handle all keys, plus 50 percent

expansion. Provide key control cross-reference chart and accountability (sign-out) tags. General Contractor shall install the key cabinet with cabinet set up by Best Access Systems.

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS---Telkee, Lund

Part 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examination of project requirements on site prior to submitting bids will be mandate of all bidders of finish hardware. At this time, suggestions and / or problems will be addressed and answered by the Architect and / or Hardware Consultant. If any decision affects bidding documents, Addenda will be issued of said decision with complete explanation.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall occur with a qualified installer with a minimum five (5) years experience in the

installation of commercial grade hardware. Manufacturer’s instructions shall dictate templating and installation.

1. Best Access Systems is to coordinate with DISD on keying system design, provide permanent cores, and key cabinet set up.

2. All costs associated with Best’s work, shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. 3. Installation of the permanent cores and keys shall be coordinated with the Owner.

All work shall be provided by Best Access Systems or a subcontractor trained and approved by Best Access Systems. Installation of permanent cores shall be completed prior to Final Completion and paid for by the General Contractor.

4. Best Access Systems is to deliver the keys directly with no 3rd party or General Contractor involvement. Contact Lock Supervisor, Steve Finkel at (972) 925-5239. General Contractor to acquire signed letter of acceptance from Lock Supervisor at Final Completion.

5. General Contractor to return construction cores to the hardware supplier. 6. Renovations to existing facilities where existing doors are to be reused with new locking

hardware may require the use of a metal wrap at the lock location to cover any exposed holes from previous lock prep. Existing door jambs shall be prepped to accept flush mounted ANSI strikes. Pre to factory specs.

7. Where existing doors are to be reused with new locking hardware, the district will determine if any deviation from the DISD standard of a mortise lock will be acceptable.

8. Install all door closers with thru-bolts and adjust after HVAC is in operation. 9. Install exit devices with six (6) nuts and bolts through all doors. 10. Set thresholds in full bed of exterior grade caulk near interior and exterior edges.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. A final inspection shall take place by the hardware installer and hardware supplier to insure correct

installation and operation, and check for any damaged or defective items. Observe and inspect that all hardware has been installed to its correct destination in proper working order.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. At completion of the installation and before turnover of the project, make final adjustments to door

closures and other items of hardware. Leave all hardware clean, and fully operable. Should any item be found to be defective, it shall be repaired or replaced as directed.


SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE


3.5 PROTECTION A. Provide protection for all items of hardware during construction to prevent damage or marring of such items.

Damaged or disfigured hardware shall be replaced or corrected by the responsible party. 3.6 HARDWARE SETS as FOLLOWS

HARDWARE SCHEDULE :

A. Hardware Group No. 001 Provide each RU door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA CYLINDER SFIC CYLINDER TYPE AS REQ 626 SCH 1 SET HARDWARE REMAINDER OF HARDWARE BY DOOR/FRAME

MFR. FBO UNK

Hardware Group No. 101 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA OFFICE LOCK L9453HD 17A 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA CLOSER 4041 OR P4041 X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP Hardware Group No. 101H Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA OFFICE LOCK L9453HD 17A 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA CLOSER 4041 OR P4041 X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP/HOLDER WS445 626 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP


SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE


Hardware Group No. 101OH Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA OFFICE LOCK L9453HD 17A 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA CLOSER 4041 OR P4041 X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100S - SIZE AS REQ 630 GLY 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP Hardware Group No. 103 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA OFFICE LOCK L9453HD 17A 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP Hardware Group No. 201 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080HD 17A 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA CLOSER 4041 OR P4041 X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP Hardware Group No. 201C Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080HD 17A 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA CLOSER/STOP 4041 SCUSH X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP


SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE


Hardware Group No. 201DL Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9480HD 17A 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA CLOSER 4041 OR P4041 X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP Hardware Group No. 204 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 SET CONST LATCHING BOLT FB51P OR FB61P- TYPE AS REQ 630 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080HD 17A 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA ASTRAGAL ASTRAGAL BY DOOR MFR. FBO UNK 1 EA CLOSER/STOP 4041 SCUSH X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100S - SIZE AS REQ 630 GLY 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 1" LDW) 630 IVE 1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 155S (HEAD & JAMBS) 628 NGP 1 EA DRIP CAP 16A 628 NGP 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 200NSS 630 NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 425E MS/LA 628 NGP Hardware Group No. 303 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY SET L9040 17A 626 SCH 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP


SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE


Hardware Group No. 303OH Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY SET L9040 17A 626 SCH 1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 900S - SIZE AS REQ 630 GLY 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP Hardware Group No. 403OH Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET L9010 17A 626 SCH 1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 900S - SIZE AS REQ 630 GLY 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP Hardware Group No. 403W Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 4 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET L9010 17A 626 SCH 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP Hardware Group No. 500 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31P OR FB41P - TYPE AS REQ 630 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD 17A 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA COORDINATOR COR72 W/MTG BRKTS 628 IVE 1 EA ASTRAGAL ASTRAGAL BY DOOR MFR. FBO UNK 2 EA CLOSER 4041 OR P4041 X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 1" LDW) 630 IVE 2 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP


SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE


Hardware Group No. 500N Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31P OR FB41P - TYPE AS REQ 630 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD 17A 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA COORDINATOR COR72 W/MTG BRKTS 628 IVE 1 EA ASTRAGAL ASTRAGAL BY DOOR MFR. FBO UNK 2 EA CLOSER 4041 OR P4041 X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 1" LDW) 630 IVE 2 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP Hardware Group No. 501 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD 17A 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA CLOSER 4041 OR P4041 X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP Hardware Group No. 501W Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 4 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD 17A 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA CLOSER 4041 OR P4041 X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN



SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE


Hardware Group No. 501WC Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 4 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD 17A 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA CLOSER/STOP 4041 SCUSH X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP Hardware Group No. 503 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD 17A 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP Hardware Group No. 503N Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD 17A 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP Hardware Group No. 503OH Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD 17A 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 900S - SIZE AS REQ 630 GLY 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP


SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE


Hardware Group No. 503SS Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD 17A 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA CYLINDER SFIC CYLINDER TYPE AS REQ 626 SCH 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SOUND SEAL 170NA (HEAD & JAMBS FOR SOUND CONTROL) 628 NGP 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 200NSS 630 NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 425E MS/LA 628 NGP Hardware Group No. 503W Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 4 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD 17A 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP Hardware Group No. 551CH Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9071HD 17A (PROVIDE N ESCUTCHEON AT

EXIST DOOR) 626 SCH

2 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA CLOSER 4041 OR P4041 X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN



SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE


Hardware Group No. 551FS Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9071HD 17A (PROVIDE N ESCUTCHEON AT

EXIST DOOR) 626 SCH


CONDITIONS 689 LCN

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 EA FLOOR STOP & HOLDER FS41** 626 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP Hardware Group No. 551H Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9071HD 17A (PROVIDE N ESCUTCHEON AT

EXIST DOOR) 626 SCH


CONDITIONS 689 LCN

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP/HOLDER WS445 626 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP Hardware Group No. 700 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA REMOVABLE MULLION KR4954 W/STABILIZERS 689 VON 2 EA EXIT DEVICE 99L 996L-2 17 X SNB 626 VON 5 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 5 EA CYLINDER SFIC CYLINDER TYPE AS REQ 626 SCH 1 SET ASTRAGAL 9600A - LENGTH AS REQ. AL NGP 2 EA CLOSER 4041 OR P4041 X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN



SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE


Hardware Group No. 700AC Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA REMOVABLE MULLION KR4954 W/STABILIZERS 689 VON 1 EA EXIT DEVICE 99EO 626 VON 1 EA EXIT DEVICE 99NL-OP 626 VON 2 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 2 EA CYLINDER SFIC CYLINDER TYPE AS REQ 626 SCH 1 EA DOOR PULL VR910DT 630 IVE 1 EA DOOR PULL VR910NL 630 IVE 1 SET MEETING STILE MEETING STILE BY DOOR MFR. FBO UNK 2 EA CLOSER/STOP 4041 SCUSH X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

1 SET WEATHERSTRIP WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME MFR. FBO UNK Hardware Group No. 700ACE Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA REMOVABLE MULLION KR4954 W/STABILIZERS 689 VON 2 EA EXIT DEVICE 99EO X SNB 626 VON 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA CYLINDER SFIC CYLINDER TYPE AS REQ 626 SCH 2 EA DOOR PULL VR910DT 630 IVE 1 SET MEETING STILE MEETING STILE BY DOOR MFR. FBO UNK 2 EA CLOSER/STOP 4041 SCUSH X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 1" LDW) 630 IVE 1 SET WEATHERSTRIP WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME MFR. FBO UNK Hardware Group No. 700CH Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA REMOVABLE MULLION KR4954 W/STABILIZERS 689 VON 2 EA EXIT DEVICE 99L 996L-2 17 X SNB 626 VON 5 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 5 EA CYLINDER SFIC CYLINDER TYPE AS REQ 626 SCH 1 SET ASTRAGAL 9600A - LENGTH AS REQ. AL NGP 2 EA CLOSER 4041 OR P4041 X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN



SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE


Hardware Group No. 700CSS Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA REMOVABLE MULLION KR4954 W/STABILIZERS 689 VON 2 EA EXIT DEVICE 99L 996L-2 17 X SNB 626 VON 5 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 5 EA CYLINDER SFIC CYLINDER TYPE AS REQ 626 SCH 1 SET ASTRAGAL 9600A - LENGTH AS REQ. AL NGP 2 EA CLOSER 4041 OR P4041 X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 2 EA WALL STOP/HOLDER WS445 626 IVE 1 SET SOUND SEAL 170NA (HEAD & JAMBS FOR SOUND CONTROL) 628 NGP 1 SET SEALS 5050CL (TWO ROWS ON MULLION TO SEAL

GAP) CLR NGP

2 EA DOOR BOTTOM 420NA AL NGP Hardware Group No. 701 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA EXIT DEVICE 99L 996L 17 X SNB 626 VON 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA CYLINDER SFIC CYLINDER TYPE AS REQ 626 SCH 1 EA CLOSER 4041 OR P4041 X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP Hardware Group No. 701ACH Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA EXIT DEVICE 99L 996L-2 17 X SNB 626 VON 2 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 2 EA CYLINDER SFIC CYLINDER TYPE AS REQ 626 SCH 1 EA CLOSER 4041 OR P4041 X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP/HOLDER WS445 626 IVE


SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE


Hardware Group No. 701CH Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA EXIT DEVICE 99L 996L-2 17 X SNB 626 VON 2 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 2 EA CYLINDER SFIC CYLINDER TYPE AS REQ 626 SCH 1 EA CLOSER 4041 OR P4041 X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP/HOLDER WS445 626 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP Hardware Group No. 701CSS Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA EXIT DEVICE 99L 996L-2 17 X SNB 626 VON 2 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 2 EA CYLINDER SFIC CYLINDER TYPE AS REQ 626 SCH 1 EA CLOSER 4041 OR P4041 X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP/HOLDER WS445 626 IVE 1 SET SOUND SEAL 170NA (HEAD & JAMBS FOR SOUND CONTROL) 628 NGP 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 420NA AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 425E MS/LA 628 NGP Hardware Group No. 701OH Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA EXIT DEVICE 99L 996L-2 17 X SNB 626 VON 2 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 2 EA CYLINDER SFIC CYLINDER TYPE AS REQ 626 SCH 1 EA CLOSER 4041 OR P4041 X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

1 EA OVERHEAD HOLDER 100H - SIZE AS REQ 630 GLY 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP


SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE


Hardware Group No. 704AC Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA REMOVABLE MULLION KR4954 W/STABILIZERS 689 VON 1 EA EXIT DEVICE XP99EO X SNB 626 VON 1 EA EXIT DEVICE XP99NL-OP X SNB 626 VON 2 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 2 EA CYLINDER SFIC CYLINDER TYPE AS REQ 626 SCH 1 EA DOOR PULL VR910DT 630 IVE 1 EA DOOR PULL VR910NL 630 IVE 1 SET MEETING STILE MEETING STILE BY DOOR MFR. FBO UNK 2 EA CLOSER/STOP 4041 SCUSH X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 1" LDW) 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 5050CL (TWO ROWS ON MULLION TO SEAL

GAP) CLR NGP

1 SET WEATHERSTRIP WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME MFR. FBO UNK 1 EA DRIP CAP 16A 628 NGP 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 200NSS 630 NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 425E MS/LA 628 NGP Hardware Group No. 704AEO Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA REMOVABLE MULLION KR4954 W/STABILIZERS 689 VON 2 EA EXIT DEVICE XP99EO X SNB 626 VON 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA CYLINDER SFIC CYLINDER TYPE AS REQ 626 SCH 2 EA DOOR PULL VR910DT 630 IVE 1 SET MEETING STILE MEETING STILE BY DOOR MFR. FBO UNK 2 EA CLOSER/STOP 4041 SCUSH X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 1" LDW) 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 5050CL (TWO ROWS ON MULLION TO SEAL

GAP) CLR NGP

1 SET WEATHERSTRIP WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME MFR. FBO UNK 1 EA DRIP CAP 16A 628 NGP 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 200NSS 630 NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 425E MS/LA 628 NGP


SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE


Hardware Group No. 704C Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA REMOVABLE MULLION KR4954 W/STABILIZERS 689 VON 1 EA EXIT DEVICE XP99EO X SNB 626 VON 1 EA EXIT DEVICE XP99NL-OP X SNB 626 VON 2 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 2 EA CYLINDER SFIC CYLINDER TYPE AS REQ 626 SCH 1 EA DOOR PULL VR910DT 630 IVE 1 EA DOOR PULL VR910NL 630 IVE 2 EA CLOSER/STOP 4041 SCUSH X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 1" LDW) 630 IVE 1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 170NA (HEAD & JAMBS) 628 NGP 1 SET SEALS 5050CL (TWO ROWS ON MULLION TO SEAL

GAP) CLR NGP

1 EA DRIP CAP 16A 628 NGP 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 200NSS 630 NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 425E MS/LA 628 NGP Hardware Group No. 704CV Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA REMOVABLE MULLION KR4954 W/STABILIZERS 689 VON 1 EA EXIT DEVICE XP99EO X SNB 626 VON 1 EA EXIT DEVICE XP99NL-OP X SNB 626 VON 2 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 2 EA CYLINDER SFIC CYLINDER TYPE AS REQ 626 SCH 1 EA DOOR PULL VR910DT 630 IVE 1 EA DOOR PULL VR910NL 630 IVE 2 EA CLOSER/STOP 4041 SCUSH X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

2 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 (34" X 1" LDW) 630 IVE 1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 170NA (HEAD & JAMBS) 628 NGP 1 SET SEALS 5050CL (TWO ROWS ON MULLION TO SEAL

GAP) CLR NGP

1 EA DRIP CAP 16A 628 NGP 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 200NSS 630 NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 425E MS/LA 628 NGP 1 EA VIEWER 698 626 IVE 1 EA DOOR BUZZ DOOR BUZZ BY ANOTHER SECTION FBO UNK


SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE


Hardware Group No. 705C Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA EXIT DEVICE XP99NL-OP X SNB 626 VON 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA CYLINDER SFIC CYLINDER TYPE AS REQ 626 SCH 1 EA DOOR PULL VR910NL 630 IVE 1 EA CLOSER/STOP 4041 SCUSH X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 170NA (HEAD & JAMBS) 628 NGP 1 EA DRIP CAP 16A 628 NGP 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 200NSS 630 NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 425E MS/LA 628 NGP Hardware Group No. C201 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080HD 17A 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE IC7 626 BES 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6200 SERIES - 24VAC - FAIL SECURE 630 VON 1 EA CLOSER 4041 OR P4041 X TB - MOUNT TO SUIT

CONDITIONS 689 LCN

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2" LDW) 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (IF REQ. BY CODE OR USE SILENCERS) BRN NGP 1 SET DOOR LOCKING DEVICE AIR-PWRINJ4 POWER INJECTOR BY SECURITY

CONTRACTOR UNK

1 EA CARD READER CARD READER BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR FBO UNK 1 SET DOOR CONTROL PANEL DOOR CONTROL PANEL BY SECURITY

CONTRACTOR UNK

1 EA DOOR POSITION SWITCH DOOR POSITION SWITCH BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR

FBO UNK

1 EA REQUEST TO EXIT REQUEST TO EXIT SENSOR BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR

FBO UNK


SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE


Hardware Group No. KEYCAB Provide each door with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 1 EA KEY CABINET 1200 SERIES SUFFICIENT CAP. (+50 PERC

EXPAN) GRY LUN

END OF SECTION



SECTION 08 80 00

GLAZING

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 08 80 00 Page - 1 Glazing Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Glass for other sections referencing this section.


1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASCE-7– Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures

B. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test

C. ASTM C-162 – Standard Terminology of Glass and Glass Products

D. ASTM C864 – Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers

E. ASTM C920 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

F. ASTM C1036 – Standard Specification for Flat Glass

G. ASTM C1048 – Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass

H. ASTM C1172 – Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Safety Glass

I. ASTM C1349 - Standard Specification for Architectural Flat Glass Clad Polycarbonate

J. ASTM C 1503 - Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror.

K. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

L. ASTM E152 – Methods for Fire Test of Door Assemblies

M. ASTM E283 – Standard Test Method For Determining Rate of Air leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen

N. ASTM E330 – Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

O. ASTM E1996 - Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes

P. ASTM E2025 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Fenestration Components and Assemblies for Resistance to Impact Energies


SECTION 08 80 00

GLAZING


Q. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing Materials

R. GANA - Glazing Manual

S. GANA Laminated Glazing Reference Manual

T. FGMA - Sealant Manual


A. Size glass to withstand positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane in accordance with Building Code as measured in accordance with ASTM E 330.

B. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Descriptive data for accessory items.

B. Samples: 1. 1 Sample of Each Glazing Type: 6 x 6 or 12 x 12 inch glass samples, except

clear. 2. Sealant samples showing available colors.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide tempered safety glass where required by regulatory agencies or Code.

B. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and GANA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods.


A. Perform glazing when ambient temperature is above 40 degrees F.

B. Perform glazing on dry surfaces.

1.7 GLASS BREAKAGE

A. The glazing subcontractor shall be responsible for all glass broken, scratched, damaged, or defective and shall replace same at his expense.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Provide a 5-year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure. B. Provide a 5-year warranty to include coverage for delamination of laminated glass and

replacement.


SECTION 08 80 00

GLAZING


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. PPG Industries, Inc. 2. Guardian Industries Corp. 3. Interplane Coatings, Inc. 4. Pilkington-Libby Owens Ford. 5. Ford Glass 6. Viracon, Inc.

7. AFGD, Inc.


2.2 TYPES

A. General Project Glazing Clarifications: (Further Description of Types Below, Letter B & C) 1. All Interior Glazing to be 1/4" Tempered. 2. All Exterior Glazing to be 1" Tempered.

B. Glass Type "1": Tempered Clear float glass with Low Emissivity coating conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3; ¼" to 1" thick - as indicated on drawings.

C. Glass Type "2": Tempered Low-E Clear Insulating Glass "Solarban" R100 (2) Clear+Clear Tempered by PPG Industries.

Outdoor Lite: Clear Glass by PPG Industries., Sputter Coated on second surface (2)

Indoor Lite: Clear Float Glass

Low-E Coating: "Solarban" R100 Solar Control (Sputtered) by PPG Industries

Location; Second Surface (2)

Performance Values:

Visible Light Transmission: 42%

U-Value Winter: 0.29

U-Value Summer: 0.27 U-Value EN 673: 1.55

SHGC: .23

Shading Coefficient 0.27

Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance: 32%

Approved Manufactures: PPG Certified Fabricator


SECTION 08 80 00

GLAZING


Outdoor Appearance: Clear color, reflective glass product

Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4" glass Tempered + 1/2" airspace + 1/4" glass Tempered Maximum distortion shall be .003 (.076 mm) from peak to valley.

Other Requirements: Tempered (T) Clear float glass conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, which has been fully tempered by manufacturer's standard process (after cutting to final size), to achieve a flexural strength of 4 times normal glass strength, in accordance with ASTM C 1048, Condition A; 1" thick - as indicated on drawings.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Setting Blocks: ASTM C 864 Option II; neoprene, EPDM, or silicone, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing of minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.

B. Spacer Shims: ASTM C 864 Option I II; neoprene, EPDM, or silicone, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum 3 inches long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application.

C. Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C 864 Option II; resilient polyvinyl chloride or silicone, extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; black color.

D. Glazing Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses MT, N, G, and A; single component silicone, low modulus type, non sag, color to be selected from manufacturer’s standards.

E. Backer Rod and Primer: As recommended by glazing sealant manufacturer.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Tempered Glass: 1. Comply with ASTM C 1048 for type listed. 2. Process in horizontal, position so that inherent roller distortion will run parallel to

building floor lines after installation.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: ASTM C 1036 and C 1048.

C. Glass Identification: 1. Glass shall bear labels indicating the manufacturer, type and thickness, and a

note "Do Not Remove Label". 2. All safety glass shall at least a permanent label indicating manufacturer, type,

thickness, and compliance with CPSC 16 CFR 1201. 3. If temporary label, label is to remain on glass until District Building Inspection is

complete, then removed and turned into the District Building Department. 4. Etch manufacturer’s label on each light of tempered glass.



SECTION 08 80 00

GLAZING


3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing rabbets; remove loose and foreign matter.

B. Remove protective coatings on metal surfaces.

C. Clean glass just prior to installation.

D. Seal porous rabbet surfaces with primer or sealer.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements: 1. Follow recommendations of the glass manufacturer and the sealant, gaskets and

glazing materials manufacturer, except if the codes or listed references are more restrictive.

2. Where a combination of sealing materials is required for glazing in the same frame, the manufacturer must certify that all glazing materials furnished are compatible with each other.

3. Where setting blocks and spacer shims require setting into a glazing compound or sealant, contractor may butter them with the compound or sealant, then place them in position and allow to firmly setting prior to installation of glass.

B. Sash and Frame Preparation and Acceptance 4. Inspect all window sash, frames, and surrounds glazed under this section and

notify the Contractor of any defects, improper materials, or workmanship of other conditions that will affect the satisfactory installation of glass.

a. Do not proceed with glazing until such conditions are acceptable. b. Absence of notification, or the beginning of glazing, will indicate acceptance of all previously placed related work executed by other trades.

5. Other trades will execute the following work; but before starting glazing work, the glazier shall verify compliance with the requirements listed.

a. That the sash and frames are firmly anchored in proper position, plumb and square within 1/8" nominal dimensions on approved shop drawings. b. That the rivet, screw, bolt or nail heads, welding fillets and other projections are removed from glazing rabbets to provide the specified clearances. c. That all corners and fabrication intersections are sealed and sash and frames are weather-tight. d. That rabbets at seals weep to outside and all rabbets are of sufficient depth and width to receive the glass and provide the required overlap of the glass. e. That all sealing surfaces of steel sash and frames are primer painted.

C. Preparation of Glass and Rabbets: 1. Clean the sealing surfaces of glass and the sealing surfaces of rabbets and stop beads before applying any glazing compound or gaskets. 2. Use only the approved solvents and cleaning agents recommended by the compound manufacturer.

D. Positioning Glass: 1. Center in glazing in the frame and rabbet to maintain specified clearances at perimeter on all four sides. 2. Maintain centered position of glass in rabbet and provide the required sealer thickness (⅛" maximum) on both sides of glass. 3. Whenever glass dimensions are larger than 50 united inches, provide setting blocks at the sill and spacer shims on all four sides; locate setting blocks one- quarter way in from each end of glass.


SECTION 08 80 00

GLAZING


E. Stop Bead Glazing; Use Putty or Elastic Glazing Compound for bedding glass in hollow metal frames, except if other wise specified in this document.

1. Apply ample back putty or compound to rabbet so that it will ooze out when pressing glass into position and completely cover glass in rabbet.

a. Place setting blocks and spacer shims as required, and press glass into position.

2. Secure glass in place by the application of stop beads. a. Bed stop beads against glass and bottom of rabbet with compound and/or putty, leaving proper thickness between glass and stop beads. b. Secure stop beads in place with suitable fastenings. c. Strip surplus compound or putty from both sides of glass and tool to provide clean sight lines.

F. Glazing - Using Glazing Gaskets 1. Use glass stops with glazing gaskets for securing glass in frames of all storefront type entrance-doors and in such other locations as indicated on the drawings. 2. Use glazing gaskets without stops for glazing glass in all storefront type sash and frames, except where as indicated on the drawings.

a. Install glazing of storefront type sash and frames using glazing gaskets without stops in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions. b. Provide and place setting blocks as required. c. Gaskets shall be of the proper size for the thickness of installed glass. d. After glazing, seal gaskets to glass continuously with a clear elastic and watertight sealant similar to G.E. Silicon Sealant. e. Seal gaskets to glass on exterior face only.

3.3 REPLACEMENT AND CLEANING:

A. Upon completion of work, all glass shall be free from cracks and other defects. Any defective or broken glass that may appear before acceptance or within the 1-year warranty period shall be removed and replaced with new glass without additional cost to the Owner; excepting glass which is broken by a specific cause relating to building occupancy not relating to this contract. B. Thoroughly wash and clean all glass upon completion of the work and just prior to occupancy of the building.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 08 91 19 - 1 Fixed Louvers Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 08 91 19 FIXED LOUVERS


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification section, apply to work of this section.


A. Fixed louvers and frames 1. Fixed blade louvers 2. Drainable lowers 3. Storm-proof louvers

B. Screening C. Blank out sheeting

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AMCA 500-L (Air Movement Council Association) – Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating B. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate C. ASTM A653/A653M - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process or Zinc-Iron Alloy

Coated Galvannealed) D. ASTM B209 - Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate E. ASTM B221 - Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes F. IBC - International Building Code


A. Provide a louver to permit passage of air without blade vibration or noise. B. Louvers to permit minimum 50% free area.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions, tolerances;

head, jamb, and sill details; blade configuration; screens, blank out areas required and frames. C. Provide product data describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air velocity, free area,

materials, and finishes. D. Submit samples 12 x 12 illustrating finish and color of exterior and interior pre-finish. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 77 00. B. Maintenance Data: Include lubrication schedules and adjustment requirements.


A. Perform work in accordance with AMCA Certification for louvers. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum with 5-years experience.




A. Conform to applicable codes for closing of operable louvers in conjunction with the fire and smoke alarm

system. B. Provide -Florida Building Code Product Approval certificates for exterior louvers. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified

and indicated. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Coordinate work with installation of wall assembly. C. Coordinate work with installation of mechanical ductwork and electrical services to motorized devices.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Provide 10-year warranty under provisions of Section 01 77 00. B. Warranty: Include coverage for degradation of finish.


A. Aluminum shall be ASTM B221, 6063 alloy, T5, extruded shape, pre-finished with mill applied fluropolymer finish.

B. Steel sheet shall be ASTM A653, galvanized to G90 zinc coating, pre-finished with shop applied fluropolymer finish.

C. Stainless steel shall be ASTM A167, Type 304, soft temper, smooth surface. 2.2 SCREENS

A. Bird screen shall be interwoven wire mesh of steel 0.063" diameter wire, with 1/2" open weave, square design.

B. Insect screen (Note: To be only used if specified by the Mechanical Engineer in the Design Documents, but in no case is it to be used on fresh air intake) shall be 18 x 16 size aluminum mesh set in aluminum frame.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Stainless steel type B. Primer: Zinc chromate, alkyd type C. Flashings: Of same material as louver frame D. Sealants: Type specified in Section 07 92 00 E. Sleeve: 12-ga Aluminum

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Louver Blade Design: 1. Sloped at 45°, Inverted 'Y' shape; or Inverted V shape; reinforced with intermediate stiffeners, integral

and lateral rainwater stops positioned on blade. 2. Drainable and/or storm-proof as indicated on plans.

B. Louver Frame: Channel shape, mechanically fastened welded corner joints. C. Intermediate Mullions: Provide a concealed piece of formed steel, or formed and extruded aluminum profiled

to suit louver frame. D. Head and Sill Flashings: Roll formed or extruded to required shape, single length in one piece per location. E. Screens: Install a screen mesh in a shaped frame, with reinforce corner construction, and shop installed to

louver with fasteners.



F. Blank Out Sheeting on Interior of Louver: 1. Use the same material as louver and frame configuration of single sheet. 2. Separate dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic action.

G. Design and fabricate louver to prevent entry of wind driven rain into the building. 1. Provide louver, which traps rain and diverts water back to the exterior and not into the building or the

wall cavity. H. Sleeve:

1. Fabricate an aluminum sleeve around entire perimeter of louvered opening, 16” in horizontal depth, with a 1 ½” perimeter flange at the exterior perimeter, with an upturned flange along the back of the sleeve, so there is at least 2" between the bottom of the ductwork and the bottom of the sleeve.

2. The sleeve is to serve as a pan to collect wind driven rainwater back to the exterior of the building envelope.

3. Seal all louvers to wall penetrations through the sleeve. 4. Also seal both the exterior and interior perimeter of the sleeve.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Shop coat the exterior steel surfaces, screens, and blank-out sheeting with a coat of primer for field painting. B. Final finishes of exterior aluminum surfaces, screens, and blank-out sheeting as selected by architect. C. The interior steel surfaces, screens, and blank-out sheeting shall be of galvanized or galvananealed,

unfinished material. D. Interior aluminum surfaces, screens, and blank-out sheeting shall be of mill finished. E. Stainless steel shall be a No. 4 finish.


A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as

indicated on shop drawings. C. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install louvers level and plumb. C. Install flashings and align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion of moisture

to exterior. D. Secure louvers in opening framing with concealed fasteners, removable and hinged for maintenance

purposes. E. Install bird and insect screen and frame to exterior of louver, hinge screens for access. F. Install insect screens and frame to intake louvers. G. Install bird screens to exhaust louvers. H. Install perimeter sealant and backing rod in accordance with Section 07 92 00.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 77 00. B. Adjust operable louvers for freedom of movement of control mechanism.

1. Lubricate operating joints. 3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01 77 00. B. Strip protective finish coverings. C. Clean surfaces and components.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 09 26 00

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 09 26 00 Page - 1 Gypsum Board Assemblies Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Metal Stud partition framing. 2. Suspended metal channel ceiling framing. 3. Acoustical insulation. 4. Gypsum board. 5. Gypsum sheathing. 6. Taping and bedding of gypsum board.


1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A 591 – Steel Sheet, Cold-rolled, Electrolyic Zinc-Coated. 2. A 653/A 653M – Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-

Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. C 36 – Gypsum Wallboard. 4. C 79 – Treated Core and Non-treated Core Gypsum Sheathing Board. 5. C 422 – Gypsum Backing Board and Coreboard. 6. C 475 – Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. 7. C 630 – Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. 8. C 645 – Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid

Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. 9. C 655 – Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Wood Frame and Light

Construction Buildings. 10. C 754 – Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached

Gypsum Wall board, Backing Board, or Water-Resistant Backing Board. 11. C 1002 – Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board. 12. C 1280 – Application of Gypsum Sheathing Board. 13. E 136 – Test for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 Degrees

C. 14. ASTM E119 – Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction

and Materials 15. ASTM C840 – Standard Specification for the Application and Finishing of

Gypsum Board

B. Gypsum Association (GA): 1. GA-201 – Using Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings 2. GA-214 – Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. 3. GA-216 – Recommended Specifications for the Application of Finishing of

Gypsum Board. 4. GA-600 – Fire Resistance Design manual.

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) – Fire Resistance Directory.


A. Fire Resistance Ratings: 1. Construct assemblies to achieve fire resistance ratings indicated on Drawings, in

accordance with applicable GA or UL design number. 2. If requirements of assembly numbers referenced conflict with Contract Document

requirements, conform to assembly requirements.


SECTION 09 26 00



B. Deflection Limits: 1. Limit deflection of partitions to following limits, based on 5 PSF uniform design

load.

a) Partitions to receive tile: L/240.

b) Other partitions: L/120. 2. If partition height exceeds stud manufacturer’s limiting height for applicable

loading and deflection, install bracing above ceiling, decrease stud spacing, or increase stud gage.


A. Maintain temperature in spaces in which work is being performed above 50 degrees F during and after installation.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 USE PRODUCTS MANUFACTURED BY UNITED STATES BASED COMPANIES ONLY, DO NOT USE DRYWALL MANUFACTURED IN CHINA.

A. National Gypsum Corp

B. U.S. Gypsum Corp

C. Georgia-Pacific Corp

D. Lafarge North America Inc

E. Other approved equal

2.2 ALL GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS SHALL HAVE MINIMUM MOLD GROWTH ASTM D3273 RATING OF 10.

2.3 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Furring Channels: USG metal stud channel, 1½" deep, roll-formed sections of 20-ga galvanized steel, ASTM C645

B. Finish: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Quality, Class G60 hot dip galvanized or ASTM A 591, Class B electrogalvanized.

C. Studs: Non-load bearing rolled steel, channel shaped, punched for utility access.

D. Runners: Of same material and finish as studs, channel shaped; provide deep leg runners at top of partitions; provide flexible head tracks at load bearing partitions.

E. Runner Channels: 1-1/2 inches deep, cold-rolled, channel shaped, 16 gage core steel.

F. Furring Channels: Hat shaped, 7/8 inch deep, 25 gage core steel.


SECTION 09 26 00



2.4 PANEL PRODUCTS

A. Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end to end joints as indicated on drawings. Note: At radius wall in Library - Contractor has the option to install ¼" and/or ⅜" thick gypsum wallboard in layers. Coordinate with other adjacent finishes as necessary.

Provide gypsum board in thicknesses/type as described below or indicated, if not otherwise indicated, in 5/8 inch thicknesses to comply with ASTM C 840 for application system and support spacing indicated.

B. Gypsum Wallboard (All Stair Locations, Elevator Shaft Construction): High Impact, ⅝" thick, ASTM C36/C36M, tapered edge, fire rated Type X.

C. Gypsum Wallboard (Cafeteria, Stage, Multipurpose, Maintenance/Receiving Areas, Book Room) up to at least 8' AFF minimum): High Impact, ⅝" thick, ASTM C36/C36M, tapered edge, fire rated Type X. Acceptable High Impact drywall manufacturers: 1. Fiber Rock VHI by USG 2. Hi-Impact Gypsum Wallboard by National Gypsum 3. DensArmor by Georgia Pacific 4. Or approved equal

D. Sag-Resistant at Ceilings - Gypsum Board: ASTM C 36, 48 inches wide x 5/8 inch thick, maximum practical length per manufacturers recommendations, tapered edge.

E. Wet Areas (Areas Subject to Contact with Water) - Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 Where indicated on the drawings, and elsewhere as required for floors and walls, interior and/or exterior, wet areas, and dry as recommended substrate for tile, fire rated wall installations, heat shield with UL listing for floors and walls; installation to comply with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's installation instructions. 1. 1/2 inch (12 mm) Cementitious Board

F. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Standard or Fire Rated type, tapered edges, ends square cut, ASTM C931.

G. Gypsum Backing Board: Standard or Fire Rated type, square edges, ASTM C442/C442M.

H. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing 5/8" thick exterior water resistant board for metal framing systems with book tongue and grooved edges. 1. Acceptable product shall be DensGlass Gold Exterior Guard, or similar product

by other approved manufacturers in 2.1 of this section.


SECTION 09 26 00



2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: 1. For attaching framing to concrete and masonry: Type best suited to application. 2. For fastening framing members together: 3/8 inch long pan head screws. 3. For attaching gypsum panels to framing: ASTM C 1002, Type S screws and

GA216, length required for each assembly.

B. Acoustical Insulation: 1. ASTM C 665, type I, glass fiber composition, unfaced. 2. Noncombustible, tested to ASTM E 136.

C. Wire: Galvanized steel. 1. Hanger wire: 8 gage. 2. Tie wire: 18 gage, soft annealded.

D. Metal Accessories: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated. 1. Corner Beads; Dur-A-Bead No. 101, galvanized or plastic. 2. Metal Trim (Casing Bead): No. 200-A or 200-B metal trim, galvanized or plastic.

E. Acoustical Sealer: Non hardening, non skinning acoustical sealer designed for use with gypsum board.

F. Joint Treatment Materials: Reinforcing tape and joint compound; ASTM C 475.

G. Sheathing Joint Tape: Fiberglass joint tape, minimum 2 inches wide, self-adhering; as recommended by sheathing manufacturer.

H. Interior Expansion Joint Covers: Balco Inc. or equal; 1. Walls – Use Type 6ADW-1 and 6ADWC-1 or type as recommended by

manufacturer. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine adjacent construction for conditions that prevent proper installation of drywall systems.

B. Do not proceed until defects are corrected. 3.2 METAL FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Install metal framing in accordance with ASTM C754 except as otherwise specified. 2. Install the members true to line and level to provide surface flatness with maximum variation

of ⅛" in 10' in any direction. 3. Install metal studs at 16" o.c. unless noted otherwise.

B. Metal Furring Channels

1. Secure to masonry walls and around door and window openings, intersections, and corners with low velocity power driven anchors.

2. Install metal furring at 16" o.c. vertically. 3. Extend furring on exterior walls full height of wall.

3.3 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install in strict accordance with GA-201, GA-216 and GA-600, do not install until building is dried in.


SECTION 09 26 00



B. Maximum variation in flatness required is ⅛" in 10'.

C. Install sound-attenuation blankets, where indicated, prior to installing gypsum panels unless

blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

D. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. 1. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panel not less than one framing member.

E. Install gypsum panels with face side out.

1. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. 2. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16" of open

space between panels. 3. Do not force into place.

F. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where providing

intermediate supports or gypsum board back blocking behind end joints. 1. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. 2. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. Avoid joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings where possible.

G. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open

(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

H. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.

I. Spot grout hollow metal doorframes for solid-core wood doors, and hollow metal doors.

1. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately insert gypsum panels into frames.

J. Form control and expansion joints at locations indicated and as detailed, with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum panels.

K. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Except in concealed applications indicating or requiring sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings,

may use scraps of not less than 8 sf in. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural

members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow ¼" - ⅜" wide joints to install sealant.

L. Isolate perimeter of non load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors, as detailed. 1. Provide (¼" - ½" wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with U-bead edge trim

where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. 2. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

M. In STC-rated gypsum board assemblies, seal construction at perimeters, behind control and

expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant at both faces of the partitions. 1. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim

and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

N. Space the fasteners in gypsum panels according to GA-216, finishing standard, and manufacturer's recommendations.


SECTION 09 26 00



3.4 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

A. Corner Beads: Install on external corners, with screws spaced 8" o.c. both sides.

B. Trim: Install over face-layer gypsum board with fasteners spaced 8" o.c. Install where gypsum board surfaces meet dissimilar surfaces and at other detailed locations.

C. Corner beads and trim may be either galvanized metal or plastic.

D. Install Control joints at ceilings: 1. At maximum 50 feet on center. 2. Where ceiling framing changes direction.

E. Install control joints at walls and partitions:

1. At changes in backup material. 2. At maximum 30 feet on center. 3. Above both jambs of openings in partitions.

3.5 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Treat joints, interior angles, fastener depressions, and finishing trim on face-layer gypsum board, including gypsum board in ceiling plenums.

B. Pre-fill, tape, fill, and finish in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

C. Apply a thin skim coat of joint compound over entire surface of gypsum board.

D. Sand finish coat and leave surfaces smooth, uniform, and free of fins, depressions, cracks and other imperfections.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 09 30 13

TILING

FWISD 2007 - CIP 09 30 13 Page - 1 Tiling District Maintenance - BP 072 12/30/2011

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic/Porcelain tile - floor and wall finishes. 2. Trim and accessories.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements. 2. Section 07 92 00 –Joint Sealants & Caulking 3. Section 09 26 00– Gypsum Board Assemblies

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/CTI A108/A118/A136.1 - Specification for the Installation of Ceramic/Porcelain Tile - A Collection of 20 ANSI/CTI A108 Series Standards on Ceramic/Porcelain Tile Installation: A108.1A-C, 108.4 -.13, A118.1-.10, ANSI A136.1

B. ANSI/CTI A108.1 - Installation of Ceramic/Porcelain Tile with Portland Cement Mortar C. ANSI/CTI A108.3 - Quarry Tile and Paver Tile Installed with Portland Cement Mortar D. ANSI/CTI A108.4 - Installation of Ceramic/Porcelain Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water

Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive E. ANSI/CTI A108.5 - Installation of Ceramic/Porcelain Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement

Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar F. ANSI/CTI A108.6 - Installation of Ceramic/Porcelain Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water

Cleanable Tile Setting and Grouting Epoxy G. ANSI/CTI A108.8 - Installation of Ceramic/Porcelain Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan

Mortar and Grout H. ANSI/CTI A108.9 - Installation of Ceramic/Porcelain Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion

Mortar/Grout I. ANSI/CTI A108.10 - Installation of Grout in Tile work J. ANSI/CTI A118.1 - Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar K. ANSI/CTI A118.3 - Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and Grouting Epoxy

and Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive L. ANSI/CTI A118.4 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar M. ANSI/CTI A118.5 - Chemical Resistant Furan Mortars and Grouts for Tile Installation N. ANSI/CTI A118.6 - Ceramic/Porcelain Tile Grouts O. ANSI/CTI A118.8 - Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout P. ANSI/CTI A136.1 - Organic Adhesive for Installation of Ceramic Tile Q. ANSI/CTI A137.1 – Ceramic/Porcelain Tile R. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar S. ASTM C206 - Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime T. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes U. TCA CTI - (Tile Council of North America) - Handbook for Ceramic/Porcelain Tile

Installation


SECTION 09 30 13

TILING


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s installation, cleaning and maintenance instructions.

B. Samples: 1. Tile: Minimum 1 x 1 inch samples showing available colors. 2. Grout: Cured samples showing available colors.


A. Tile and Trim Units: Meet ANSI A 137.1, Standard Grade.

B. Static Coefficient of Friction for Floor Tile: Minimum 0.60, tested to ASTM C 1028 in dry condition.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver mortar, adhesive, and grout containers bearing hallmark certifying compliance with reference standards.

B. Protect adhesive containers from freezing and overheating according to manufacturer’s instructions.


A. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F during and after installation.

1.7 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Stock: 3 percent of each tile.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Contract Documents are based on products as Noted in 2.2 and 2.3 below.

B. Matching products in size and quality by the following manufacturers are acceptable after approved Substitution Request: 1. Dal-Tile 2. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. 3. Interceramic

C. Substitutions: Refer to Division 1 – Substitution Procedures

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Ceramic/Porcelain Tile in This Package: Series, Profiles, Colors, Locations as Indicated in Plans.

1. Porcelain Tile/Base by 'Concept Surfaces' in 24" x 24", 24" x 6", 16" x 16" 2. Ceramic Tile/Base by 'Atlas Concorde' in 12" x 22" 3. Ceramic Tile/Base by 'Interceramic' in 6" x 6" 4. Colors: as Indicated in Plans. 5. Trim units: Beads, coves, bases, and bullnoses, color to match adjacent tile.

(Item B to be used where trim pieces to match not available)


SECTION 09 30 13

TILING


B. Brushed Stainless Steel Bullnose: Schluter®-RONDEC 1. Description: bullnose-type profile with symmetrically rounded visible surface with

1/4 inch (6 mm) radius, integrated trapezoid-perforated anchoring leg, and integrated grout joint spacer.

2. Matching inside and outside corners and connectors for long runs. 3. Material and Finish: 4. EB - Brushed Stainless Steel Type 304 = V2A 5. Height: 1/2” 6. Manufacturer: Schluter Systems, L.P., 194 Pleasant Ridge Road, Plattsburgh,

NY 12901-5841. Tel: (800) 472-4588. Fax (800) 477-9783. E-mail: [email protected]. Internet: www.schluter.com.

C. Brushed Stainless Steel Cove Wall to Floor Transition: Schluter®-DILEX-EHK 1. Description: roll-formed stainless steel profile with integrated trapezoid-perforated

anchoring legs, connected at a 90-degree angle by cove shaped section with 23/32 inch radius that forms the visible surface.

2. Matching inside and outside corners and connectors for long runs. 3. Material and Finish: 4. EB - Brushed Stainless Steel Type 304 = V2A 5. Height: Height as required for tile type and thickness. 6. Manufacturer: Schluter Systems, L.P., 194 Pleasant Ridge Road, Plattsburgh,

NY 12901-5841. Tel: (800) 472-4588. Fax (800) 477-9783. E-mail: [email protected]. Internet: www.schluter.com.

D. Brushed Stainless Steel Cove Wall to Floor Transition: Schluter®-DILEX-EHK 1. Description: solid aluminum profile with integrated trapezoid-perforated anchoring Leg. 2. Matching inside and outside corners and connectors for long runs. 3. Material and Finish: 4. A - Aluminum Type 100 5. Height: Height as required for tile type and thickness. 6. Manufacturer: Schluter Systems, L.P., 194 Pleasant Ridge Road, Plattsburgh, NY 12901-5841. Tel: (800) 472-4588. Fax (800) 477-9783. E-mail: [email protected]. Internet: www.schluter.com.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Custom Building Products, Versabond Plex Fortified Thin Set Mortar, Gray, ANSI A118.4 and A118.11

B. Water: Clean, potable.

C. Grout: 1. Portland cement type: ANSI A118.6, polymer modified dry set type, sanded.

a) ANSI A108.10 and A118.6 b) ASTM C109, C531 and C580

2. Epoxy type: 2 Part, 100% Solid blend of epoxies and aggregates. a) ANSI A118.3

3. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer’s standards.

D. Sealer: Clear penetrating siloxane type.

E. Shower Pan Membrane (use at shower and drying rooms) 1. Mud-Set Method: Shall be equal to “Chloraloy” 40 mil chlorinated polyethylene

shower pan membrane by The Noble Co. 2. Thin-Set Method: Shall be equal to “Nobleseal TS” 30 mil chlorinated

polyethylene sheet membrane as manufactured by The Noble Co.


SECTION 09 30 13

TILING


F. Unless otherwise indicated: Use marble thresholds at all changes of materials, maximum of ½” thick to meet handicap requirements.

G. Joint Sealers: Specified in Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealers


3.1 PREPARATION – MULTIPLE CONDITIONS

A. Clean surfaces to remove loose and foreign, matter that could impair adhesion. For restrooms and EWC locations, ensure that substrate is cement board as specified in Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies: Cement Board

B. Remove ridges and projections. Fill voids and depressions with patching compound compatible with setting materials.

C. Allowable Substrate tolerances: 1. Maximum variation in substrate surface: 1/8 inch in 8 feet. 2. Maximum height of abrupt irregularities: 1/32 inch.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Methods: 1. Walls: ANSI A108.4, thin set with organic adhesive and portland cement grout.

B. Minimize pieces less than one half size. Locate cuts to be inconspicuous.

C. Lay tile to pattern furnished by Architect. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.

D. Place tile joints uniform in width. Align joints in wall and floor.


SECTION 09 30 13

TILING


E. Fit tile around projections and at perimeter. Smooth and clean cut edges. Ensure that trim will completely cover cut edges.

F. Install Trim: 1. Inside corners: Cove units. 2. Outside corners: Beads units. 3. Base: Base units. 4. Exposed tile ends: Bullnose units.

G. Sound tile after setting and before grouting. Replace hollow sounding units.

H. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours before grouting.

I. Grout tile joints in accordance with ANSI A108 .10 without excess grout.

J. After grout has cured, apply sealer to Portland cement grout surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

K. Control Joints: 1. Provide at following locations:

a) Changes in backup material.

b) Changes in plane.

c) Over joints in substrate.

d) Maximum 36 feet on center.

2. Form joints per TCA Method EJ-171. 3. Install joint backing and joint sealer as specified in Section 07 92 00 – Joint

Sealants

L. Soft Joints 1. Provide sealant to match ion color adjacent grout at inside corners.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Remove and replace pieces that have been damaged during installation.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Provide protection for completed work using non-staining Sheet coverings.

B. Prohibit traffic on tile floors for minimum 3 days after installation.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 09 51 00

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 09 51 00 Page - 1 Acoustical Ceilings Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C635 – Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings

B. ASTM C636 – Standard Practice for the Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels

C. ASTM C665 – Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing

D. ASTM E1264 – Standard Classification of Acoustical Ceiling Products E. Ceilings and Interior Systems Contractors Association (CISCA) - Acoustical Ceilings: Use and Practice F. UL - Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Product data for each type of product specified. 2. Samples for verification purposes of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size

indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of variations expected. a. 6" square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color b. Set of 12" long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for each

color and system type required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire Performance Characteristics: 1. Provide acoustical ceilings that are identical to those tested for the following fire performance

characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. a. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E

1264 for Class A products. i) Flame Spread: 25 or less. ii) Smoke Developed: 50 or less.

B. Single Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.

C. Single Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.


A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened packages.


SECTION 09 51 00

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS


1. Store in a clean dry fully enclosed space and protect against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Install interior acoustical ceilings only when space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is complete and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity are at values near those for final occupancy.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below matching installed products, packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full size units equal to 2% of amount installed.


A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Mineral Base Panels are typical unless noted on Reflected Ceiling Plans. 2. Tiles must contain a minimum of 30% total recycled to comply with TX-CHPS Credit ME4.1 - Recycled

Content 3. Tiles to be 24" x 24" non-directional, resistant to high humidity, and growth of mold/mildew, with Painted

Finish (white) Perforated and Fissured Pattern, Class A finish. Black finish at Stage a. General minimum NRC = 0.70 and CAC = 35

i) Armstrong World Industries "School Zone Fine Fissured" ii) CertianTeed Ceilings (FKA BPB America/Celotex) "Fine Fissured High NRC" iii) USG "Radar" Climaplus High CAC/High NRC

b. Kitchen - Unless Otherwise Noted In Plans i) USG "Climaplus Clean Room" ii) Armstrong World Industries, “Clean Room VL" or "Fine Fissured Ceramaguard" iii) CertianTeed Ceilings "Fine Fissured" with PlasticGard.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, and the grid system shall be compatible with the tiles to provide resistant to high humidity and growth of mold/mildew: 1. Non-Fire-Resistance Rated Double-Web Steel Suspension Systems:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation. c. USG Interiors, Inc. d. CertianTeed Ceilings

2. Edge Moldings: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation. c. Fry Reglet Corp. d. USG Interiors, Inc. e. CertianTeed Ceilings

2.2 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS, GENERAL

A. Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide manufacturers' standard units of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by reference to types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectance, unless otherwise indicated.


SECTION 09 51 00

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS


1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Use type E 400 (plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4" away from the test surface) per ASTM E 795.

B. Colors and Patterns: Provide products to match appearance characteristics indicated under each product type.

2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements.

B. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory applied finish for type of system indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless

otherwise indicated. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

1. Gage: Provide wire sized so that stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct-Hung), will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 2.69 mm (0.106") diameter wire.

E. Edge Moldings and Trim: 1. Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard

moldings for edges and penetrations that fit type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. 2. Provide column surround trim at round columns.

F. Retention Clips: Armstrong #414 or similar by other acoustical panel manufacturers. 2.4 NON-FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED DIRECT-HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Wide-Face Capped Double-Web Steel Suspension System: Main and cross-runners roll-formed from pre-painted or electrolytic zinc-coated cold-rolled steel sheet, with pre-finished 15/16" wide metal caps on flanges; other characteristics as follows: 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate Duty System 2. End Condition of Cross-Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type, as standard with manufacturer. 3. Cap Material and Finish: Steel sheet painted white

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Tile Adhesive as recommended by tile manufacturer, with UL label for Class 0-25 flame spread PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and structural framing ceiling system attaches or abuts, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that affect installation and anchorage of ceiling system.

B. Correct all unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with work. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors for installation specified in other sections. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time

needed for coordination of other work. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges

of each ceiling. 1. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 INSTALLATION


SECTION 09 51 00

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS


A. General: Do not suspend hangers directly from metal deck. Attach steel channel horizontally to adjacent framing members; place hanger at regular spacing. All suspension wires must be attached/hung from building structure; hanging from metal deck is not allowed.

B. General: Install acoustical ceiling systems to comply with installation standard referenced below, per manufacturer's instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Standard for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems: Comply with ASTM C 636.

C. Arrange acoustical units in a manner shown by reflected ceiling plans. 1. In areas of ACT unit installation, provide retention clips in accordance with ceiling panel manufacturer’s

recommendations. D. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by

bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacing that

interferes with the location of hangers at spacing supporting standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size the supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within

performance limits established by referenced standards. 3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye-screws, or

other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

4. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members. a. Attach to inserts, eye-screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for structure to

hanger attachments as well as for type of hanger involved. b. In a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated

temperatures. 5. Space hangers not more than 48" on center along each member supported directly from hangers.

a. In addition, provide hangers not more than 8" from ends of each member. E. Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal

edges of acoustical units. F. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by support of

suspension members. 1. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members. B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. C. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned, repair to eliminate evidence of damage.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD – Oran M. Roberts 09 51 13 Page-1 Cementitious Wood Fiber Ceilings Elementary School – BP 74 12/30/11

SECTION 09 51 13

CEMENTITIOUS WOOD FIBER CEILINGS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Cementitious wood fiber plank acoustical ceiling

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 9 Sections: Acoustical Suspension.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International:

1. ASTM C635 Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.

2. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

3. ASTM E1264 Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.

B. Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA):

1. CISCA Code of Practices.


A. Performance Requirements:

1. Provide acoustical ceiling assembly designed and tested to provide surface burning characteristics (ASTM E84) as follows:

a. Flamespread: 0.

b. Smoke Developed: 0.

2. Provide acoustical ceiling system which has been manufactured, fabricated and installed to provide Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) rating as follows:

a. 1.0

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions.

C. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples: 6 inch × 6 inch (152 × 152 mm) sample for each wood fiber ceiling unit required, showing full range of exposed texture to be expected in completed work.

D. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Certificates: Submit manufacturer’s certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity.

B. Regulatory Requirements and Approvals:

1. Corps of Engineers Guide Specification:

a. CE-219.01.

2. International Code Council (ICC):

a. ICC-ES Evaluation Report ESR-1112.

C. Pre-installation Meetings: At office of the Architect prior to shop drawing submittal.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section.

B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

1. Provide labels indicating brand name, style, size and thickness.

C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature



and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

1. Prevent soiling, physical damage or wetting.

2. Store cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture content and temperature.

1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Do not install ceiling panels until building is closed in and HVAC system is operational.

2. Locate materials onsite at least 24 hours before beginning installation to allow materials to reach temperature and moisture content equilibrium.

3. Maintain the following conditions in areas where acoustical materials are to be installed 24 hours before, during and after installation:

a. Relative Humidity: 65 - 75%.

b. Uniform Temperature: 55 - 70 degrees F (13 - 21 degrees C).

1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Provide 2% additional material for use by owner in building maintenance and repair.

B. Provide new unopened cartons of extra materials, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM

A. Manufacturer: Tectum Inc.

1. Contact: 105 South Sixth Street, Newark, OH 43055; Telephone: (888) 977-9691, (740) 345-9691; Fax: (800) 832-8869; E-mail: [email protected]; website: www.tectum.com.

B. Proprietary Systems. Acoustical ceiling systems, including the following:

1. Tectum Bevel/Bevel Direct Attachment Panels:

a. Material: Aspen wood fibers bonded with inorganic hydraulic cement.

b. Thickness: 1½ inches (38 mm)

c. Length: 48 inches

d. Width: 23¾ inches

e. Color: Factory painted white] [Custom Color.

f. Mounting Style: [“A”] [“C-20”] [“C-40”] [“D-20”]. Provide all fasteners, [Furring strips] and [OCF 703 fiberglass insulation] for a complete single source installation.

2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions: Per division 1

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide accessories as follows:

1. Tectum Painted Head Drywall Screws:

a. Material: Steel.

b. Length: 2¼ inches (57 mm)

c. Color: White.

2. Tectum Touch-Up Paint:

a. Color: White.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the ceiling system manufacturer.

B. Install materials in accordance with governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements and industry standards applicable to work.

1. Comply with CISCA Code of Practices.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions:



http://www.tectum.com/�


1. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive suspended or directly attached acoustical units for unevenness, irregularities and dampness that would affect quality and execution of work.

2. Do not proceed with installation of ceiling system until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Do not begin installation until materials sufficient to complete an entire room are received and prepared for installation.

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half width units at borders.

C. Supports to accept screws no greater that 24” o.c. Supports to run perpendicular to panel direction.

D. Panel ends must fall over support. Panel ends are to be staggered.

E. Screwed to supports, three screws per panel width for 23¾” panels and five screws per panel width for 47¾” panels.

F. Screw head to be flush with panel surface.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, trim, edge moldings and suspension members to comply with manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.

B. Touch up any minor finish damage.

C. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity, including temperature and humidity limitations and dust control, so that the work will be without damage and deterioration at the time of acceptance by the Owner.

END OF SECTION



Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 09 51 14 Page - 1 Acoustical Panel Ceilings Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 09 51 14

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL


Drawings and general conditions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical ceiling panels. 2. Grid suspension system. 3. Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, and wall angle moldings.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01350, Special Environmental Requirements 2. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board 3. Section 09120 - Suspension System Framing and Furring for Plaster and Gypsum

Board Assemblies 4. Division 15 Sections - Mechanical Work 5. Division 16 Sections - Electrical Work

C. Alternates 1. Prior Approval: Unless otherwise provided for in the Contract documents, proposed

product substitutions may be submitted no later than TEN (10) working days prior to the date established for receipt of bids. Acceptability of a proposed substitution is contingent upon the Architect's review of the proposal for acceptability and approved products will be set forth by the Addenda. If included in a Bid are substitute products which have not been approved by Addenda, the specified products shall be provided without additional compensation.

2. Submittals which do not provide adequate data for the product evaluation will not be considered. The proposed substitution must meet all requirements of this section, including but not necessarily limited to, the following: Single source materials suppliers (if specified in Section 1.5); Panel design, size, composition, color, and finish; Suspension system component profiles and sizes; Compliance with the referenced standards.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

2. ASTM A 641 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. 3. ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the

Hot-Dip Process. 4. ASTM C 423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the

Reverberation Room Method. 5. ASTM C 635 Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical

Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. 6. ASTM C 636 Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension

Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels.



7. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

8. ASTM E 1414 Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum.

9. ASTM E 1264 Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products. 10. ASTM E 1477 Standard Test Method for Luminous Reflectance Factor of Acoustical

Materials by Use of Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers. 11. ASTM D 3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the

Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. B. ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2004, "Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality"

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of acoustical ceiling unit and suspension system required.

B. Samples: Minimum 6 inch x 6 inch samples of specified acoustical panel; 8 inch long samples of exposed wall molding and suspension system, including main runner and 4 foot cross tees.

C. Shop Drawings: Layout and details of acoustical ceilings. Show locations of items which are to be coordinated with, or supported by the ceilings.

D. Certifications: Manufacturer's certifications that products comply with specified requirements, including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical panel units and grid components by a single manufacturer.

B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A products.

a. Flame Spread: 25 or less b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less

C. Optima Capz, as with other architectural features located at the ceiling, may obstruct or skew the planned fire sprinkler water distribution pattern, or possibly delay or accelerate the activation of the sprinkler or fire detection systems by channeling heat from a fire either toward or away from the device. Designers and installers are advised to consult a fire protection engineer, NFPA 13, or their local codes for guidance where automatic fire detection and suppression systems are present.

D. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any way.


A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any way.


A. Space Enclosure: Building areas to receive acoustical clouds shall be free of construction dust and debris.

Products can be installed in temperatures between 40°F (4° C) and 120°F (49° C). Cannot be



used in exterior applications, where standing water is present, or where moisture will come in direct contact with the acoustical cloud.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Acoustical Panels: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace acoustical clouds that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to:

1. Acoustical panels: Manufacturing defects. 2. Attachment devices: Rusting and manufacturing defects.

B. Warranty Period:

1. Acoustical Panels: Ten (10) years from date of substantial completion. 2. Attachment devices: Ten (10) years from date of substantial completion.

C. The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of

the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.9 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed. Packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quality of full-size units equal to 5.0 percent of amount installed.

2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed suspension component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.

Part 2-PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Ceiling Panels and Suspensions System:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2.2.0 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS

A. Acoustical Panels Type ACT-1:

1. Surface Texture: Fine 2. Composition: Fiberglass 3. Color: White 4. Size:Custom to fit between joists 5. Thickness: 7/8 inch 6. Edge Profile: Reverse Tegular Edge. 7. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423; 0.90. 8. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): ASTM C 1414; Not Applicable 9. Emissions Testing: Section 01350 Protocol, < 13.5 ppb of formaldehyde when used

under typical conditions required by ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2004, "Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality"

10. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A (UL) 11. Light Reflectance (LR): ASTM E 1477; White Panel: Light Reflectance: 0.90. 12. Antimicrobial Protection: Inherent - Resists the growth of mold/mildew and bacterial

growth.



13. Acceptable Product: Optima Capz , as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries. 14. Accessories:

Touch-Up Paint, #5761, for use on cut panels edges.

2.2.0 SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Components: All main beams and cross tees shall be commercial quality hot-dipped galvanized steel as per ASTM A 653. Main beams and cross tees are double-web steel construction with 15/16 inch type exposed flange design. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed, capping pre-finished galvanized steel in baked polyester paint. Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching.

1. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635, Intermediate Duty. 2. Color: White and match the actual color of the selected ceiling tile, unless noted

otherwise. 3. Acceptable Product: Prelude XL 15/16" Exposed Tee as manufactured by Armstrong

World Industries, Inc. B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct

Hung unless otherwise indicated. C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, pre-stretched,

with a yield stress load of at least time three design load, but not less than 12 gauge. D. Accessories:

1. QSUTC: Galvanized steel, attachment clip to fasten grid to structure. 2. ARBRKT: Galvanized steel, adjustable hanger bracket to fasten grid to structure. 3. ARSTUD: Galvanized steel, with (1/4-20 threads x 1 inch long) used to secure panel

to grid. 4. ARCAP: Aluminum, screws through the panel on the 1/4-20 stud and have 1-1/4

inch diameter face to align and support the panel. Available in white or silver. 5. ARPLUG: Galvanized steel, locks the cross tee tabs on outside rows of mains. Only

work with Armstrong XL cross tee end details.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not proceed with installation until all wet work such as concrete, terrazzo, plastering and painting has been completed and thoroughly dried out, unless expressly permitted by manufacturer's printed recommendations.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units. Coordinate panel layout with mechanical and electrical fixtures.

B. Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other sections.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination of other work.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install suspension system and panels in compliance with ASTM C 636 and with the authorities having jurisdiction, and in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions 1. Optima Capz Installation Instructions, LA-297435.



B. Grid must be installed straight, level and square for best panel fit and alignment. Suspend main beam from overhead construction with hanger wires or brackets spaced 4-0 on center along the length of the main runner. Install hanger wires plumb and straight.

C. Install Optima Capz panels with the directional arrow in the same direction to provide installation consistency, uniform visual and proper panel alignment.

D. Two installers are recommended for Optima Capz panels exceeding 72 inches.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Replace damaged and broken panels. B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor finish damage.

Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

END OF SECTION



Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 09 54 36 Page - 1 Suspended Decorative Grid Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 09 54 36

SUSPENDED DECORATIVE GRIDS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general conditions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Painted Suspension System 2. Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, and wall angle moldings.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 51 00 - Acoustical Ceilings 2. Section 09 20 00 - Plaster and Gypsum Board 3. Divisions 23 - HVAC 4. Division 26 - Electrical Work

C. Alternates 1. Prior Approval: Unless otherwise provided for in the Contract documents, proposed product

substitutions may be submitted no later than TEN (10) working days prior to the date established for receipt of bids. Acceptability of a proposed substitution is contingent upon the Architectï¿½s review of the proposal for acceptability and approved products will be set forth by the Addenda. If included in a Bid are substitute products which have not been approved by Addenda, the specified products shall be provided without additional compensation.

2. Submittals which do not provide adequate data for the product evaluation will not be considered. The proposed substitution must meet a ll requirements of this section, including but not necessarily limited to, the following: Single source materials suppliers (if specified in Section 1.5); Panel design, size, composition, color, and finish; Suspension system component profiles and sizes; Compliance with the referenced standards.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 641 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. 2. ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip

Process. 3. ASTM A 1008 "Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-

Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability" 4. ASTM B 117 Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus 5. ASTM C 635 Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in

Panel Ceilings. 6. ASTM C 636 Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturerï¿½s technical literature. B. Samples: 8 inch long samples of suspension system components, including main runner, cross tees and

angle molding. C. Certifications: Manufacturer's certifications that products comply with specified requirements, including

laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards.




A. Single-Source Responsibility: To ensure proper interface, all suspension system components shall be produced or supplied by a single manufacturer.

B. All accessory components from other manufacturers shall conform to ASTM standards. C. Coordination of Work:

1. Coordinate ceiling work with installers of related work including, but not limited to acoustical ceilings, building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical systems, electrical systems, and sprinklers.

2. All work above the ceiling line should be completed prior to installation. There should be no materials resting against or wrapped around the suspension system, hanger wires or ties.


A. Deliver materials to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Suspensions System: Submit a written limited warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace grid components that are supplied with a hot-dipped galvanized coating or aluminum base material. Failures include, but are not limited to: The occurrence of 50% red rust as defined by ASTM B 117 test procedures as a result of defects in materials or factory workmanship.

B. Warranty Period: Grid: Ten years from date of installation.

C. The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents.

Part 2-PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

Suspension Systems: Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2.2.2 Suspension System:

A. Components: All main beams and cross tees shall be commercial-quality galvanized steel coating as per ASTM A 653. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed, capping pre-finished galvanized steel. Main Beams and Cross Tees are double-web steel construction and have a 15/16" type exposed flange design. Cross Tees shall have staked-on end detail allowing for easy cross tee removal and remounting.

1. Structural Classification: ASTM C635 Intermediate duty. 2. 2. Color: As selected by architect from manufacturerï¿½s standard color offering. 3. Prelude XL 360ï¿½ Painted Grid, as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries.

B. Finish: All steel roll-formed parts shall be chemically cleansed hot dipped galvanized steel. Main Beams and Cross Tees shall be painted 360? and prefinished in (3.0 mil thick powder coating) (baked polyester paint).

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated.

D. Wire for Hanger and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, prestretched, with a yield stress load of at least three times design load, but not less than 12 gauge.

E. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations, including light fixtures, that fit type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. Provide moldings with exposed flange of the same width as exposed runner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install suspension system and panels in accordance with the manufacturers instructions, and in compliance with ASTM C 636 and with the authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Suspend main beam from overhead construction with hanger wires spaced 4-0 on center along the length of the main runner. Install hanger wires plumb and straight. Hanger wires shall not be installed in convenience holes.

C. Install wall moldings at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps.

D. Support edges by wall moldings.

END OF SECTION



STAGE FLOORING

09 64 01

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 09 64 01 Page - 1 Wood Stage Flooring Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1. GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A. Install a stage floor system as per the following specifications.

1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Delivery of Materials:

1. Materials shall not be delivered, stored or installed until all masonry, painting, and tile work are complete and until all overhead mechanical work, lighting, backstops, scoreboards are installed. Room temperature of at least 55 – 80 degrees Fahrenheit and relative humidity of 35 – 50 % are to be maintained. Ideal installation / storage conditions are the same as those which will prevail when building is occupied.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Do not install floor system until concrete has been cured/dried sixty (60) days. B. Permanent heat, light and ventilation shall be installed and operating during and after installation. Maintaining

a temperature range of 55 – 80 degrees Fahrenheit and a relative humanity range of 35 – 50 %. C. Slab depression shall be 1-1/2”.

PART 2. PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS:

A. Membrane 6 mil polyethylene. B. Plywood Subfloor – 3/4” thick 48” x 96” APA Rated sheathing exposure 1. (CD-X) D. Finish surface – 3/4" x 2-1/4” Select and Better, T&G, EM Red Oak Flooring. E. Base- ¾” x 4” Red Oak base with eased top edge and ¾” x ½” Red Oak base shoe molding.

PART 3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION:

A. Concrete subfloor shall be instrument-checked by flooring contractor and any discrepancies reported to general contractor for correction.

3.2 PREPARATION:

A. Preparation of Surface: The general contractor shall install and finish the concrete subfloors in areas to

receive the stage floor system, depressing the slab as shown on the drawings to accommodate the floor construction. The slab shall be steel troweled to a true level; maximum variation permitted shall be plus or minus 1/8" in a 10 foot radius, subject to the approval of the flooring contractor. High areas shall be ground down and low areas filled in with approved type leveling compounds. All work required to put the concrete subfloors in acceptable condition shall be the responsibility of the general contractor.

3.3 INSTALLATION:

A. Stage flooring system

1. Install polyethylene with joints lapped a minimum of 4".

1. Install 3/4” plywood at a 45 degree angle to finish flooring, mechanically anchoring each 4’ x 8’ sheet with 15 anchors per sheet, staggering panels in adjacent rows.

2. Machine nail oak finish flooring running the width of the stage with end joints properly driven up and proper spacing provided for humidity conditions in the specific regions. Provide 1” expansion voids at perimeter and at all vertical obstructions.

B. Sanding 1. Sand flooring with drum sander, edger, buffer, and hand scraper. a. Use coarse, medium and fine grade sandpaper. b. After sanding with drum sander, buff entire flooring using 100 grit screenback or equal grit sandpaper,

with heavy duty buffing machine.


STAGE FLOORING

09 64 01

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 09 64 01 Page - 2 Wood Stage Flooring Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

c. Vacuum and/or tack floor before first coat of finish d. Floor shall present a smooth surface without drum stop marks, gouges, streaks or shiners. C. Finishing Stage Floor 1. Apply 2 coats of sealer and 2 coats of finish. 2. Screen or steel wool and vacuum and/or tack between each coat after it dries. D. Perimeter Base Molding 1. Install base and shoe molding anchored to wall. F. Clean up all unused materials and debris and dispose of properly.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 09 64 66 Page - 1 Wood Athletic Flooring System Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 09 64 66

WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING SYSTEM PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

1. Related work specified under other sections. (A cross-reference should be incorporated in these sections.) a. Concrete Slab Depression: 1-7/8”. b. Concrete Tolerance: 1/8” in radius of 10’. Surface--steel troweled c. Concrete and Concrete Finishing ............................................................................................ Section 03300 d. Membrane Waterproofing and Dampproofing ......................................................................... Section 07100

1) Concrete subfloors on or below grade shall be adequately waterproofed beneath and at the perimeter of the slab and on the earth side of below grade walls.

2) Sand-Poly-Sand slab construction is note. Thresholds-Metal ..................................................................................................................... Section 08700

an acceptable construction.

f. Game Standard Inserts ........................................................................................................... Section 11500


1. Floor System Manufacturer Qualifications a. Manufacturer shall be an established firm experienced in field and have been in business or a minimum of ten (10)

years; Robbins, Inc. or an approved equal. 2. Floor Contractor/Installer Qualifications

a. Flooring contractor shall be a firm experienced in flooring field and approved by manufacturer. b. Submit a list of at least three completed projects of similar magnitude and complexity.

3. Performance Qualification a. System must meet or exceed all 6 criteria of DIN 18032 Part II (2001)

1) Bio-Star LP DIN Numbers a) Ball Rebound 97% ± 1.5 % b) Force Reduction 56.1% ± 0.88 % c) Vertical Deflection 2.73mm ± 0..3mm (.012”) d) Area Indentation 13% ± 2 % e) Rolling Load Pass f) Surface Friction Pass

4. Surface Appearance (Available option) a. Expansion spaces shall be placed between each flooring board throughout the entire floor, spaces not to exceed

1/64” at time of installation. b. Expansion spacing will be installed to allow for normal expected increases in Equilibrium Wood Moisture Content

(EMC). 5. Equivalent Systems

a. System must have slab depression of 1-7/8” b. Equivalent systems shall be DIN 18032 Part 2 (2001) certified with 3rd party laboratory test results presented with

submittal documents with continuous subfloor construction and homogenous pads. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

1. Manufacturer's Product Data a. Submit flooring manufacturer specification sheet.

2. Samples a. Submit one (1) sample of flooring system, if requested by architect. Sample to be made by the manufacturer and so

indicated. 3. Maintenance Literature

a. Submit copy of maintenance instructions. 4. Concrete Guidelines

a. Submit copy of MFMA Recommendations for correct preparation, finishing and testing of concrete subfloor surfaces to receive wood flooring.




1. Delivery of Materials a. Materials shall not be delivered, stored or installed until all masonry, painting, plastering tilework, marble and

terrazzo work is complete, and all overhead mechanical work, lighting, backstops, scoreboards are installed. Room temperature of 55-80 degrees Fahrenheit (13 to 27 degrees Celsius) and relative humidity of 35-50 % are to be maintained. Ideal installation/storage conditions are the same as those that will prevail when building is occupied.

b. Materials shall not be stored at the installation location if the slab moisture exceeds 4% or vapor transmission exceeds 4.5 pounds per 1,000 square feet (2.20 kg per 100 square meters).

1.05 JOB CONDITIONS-SEQUENCY

1. Do not install floor system until concrete has been cured 60 days and the requirements in paragraph 1.04 A are obtained.

2. General Contractor is responsible to ensure slab is clean and free of all dirt and debris prior to floor installation beginning.

3. Permanent heat, light and ventilation shall be installed and operating during and after installation. Maintain a temperature range of 55 to 80 degrees Fahrenheit (13 to 27 degrees Celsius) and a relative humidity range of 35 to 50%. Consult MFMA guidelines for further information.

4. After floors are finished, area to be kept locked by general contractor to allow curing time for the finish. If after required curing time general contractor or owner requires use of gym, he shall protect the floor by covering with non-fibered kraft paper or red rosin paper with taped joints, until acceptance by owner (or owner’s agent) of complete gymnasium floor.

1.06 GUARANTEE

1. The wood floor shall be jointly guaranteed by the floor contractor and the floor manufacturer against defects in material, workmanship, and performance for a period of two (2) years from date of substantial completion.

Part 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - Specifications are based on the Bio-Star LP System. Equal systems can be offered as substitution by following the procedures listed in Division 1.

1. Membrane a. 6-mil polyethylene

2. Bio-Star LP System a. Robbins 7/16” EPDM Bio-Pad b. Subfloor

1) Two layers of 15/32” thick, 2’ x 8’ APA Rated Sheathing, Exposure 1 (CD-X), fir or pine plywood. c. Fasteners

1) Flooring – 1-1/2” @ 6-8” O.C. 2) Subfloor

a) 1” length, 7/16” crown, coated staples or equivalent. b) Construction adhesive, PL400 or equivalent.

d. Flooring 1) Maple strip 2-1/4” width and a minimum of 7/32 wear surface above the nail groove, 2nd & Better, T&G and EM,

KD Northern Hard Maple, Robbins Continuous Strip® XL or MFMA random length maple 3. Perimeter Base - Robbins 3” x 4” ventilating type, color – black. 4. Finishing Materials

a. MFMA approved oil modified polyurethane sealer and finish. b. Gameline paint shall be recommended by the finishing materials manufacturer, compatible with the finish.

2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS 1. Substitutions - Per Division 1 Part 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION



1. Inspect concrete subfloors for proper tolerance and dryness, and report any discrepancies to the general contractor in writing.

2. All work required to put the concrete subfloors in acceptable condition shall be the responsibility of the general contractor.

3. Subfloor should be broom cleaned by general contractor.

3.02 INSTALLATION

1. Flooring System a. Install polyethylene with joints lapped a minimum of 6”. b. Install Robbins’ 7/16” Bio-Cushion pads (Or product from Equal Approved Manufacturer) on lower plywood 2’ x 8’

subfloor evenly spaced in 3 rows of 9 (27 pads per each 2’ x 8’ sheet) per manufacturer’s instructions. c. Install the lower plywood subfloor staggering seams per manufacturers’ instructions. d. Install the upper plywood subfloor staggering seams between rows of panels and seams in lower plywood layer.

Secure these panels using construction adhesive and 1”staples. e. Machine nail maple finish flooring 6” to 8” O.C. with end joints properly driven up and proper spacing provided for

humidity conditions in specific regions. Consult your “Certified” contractor. Expansion spacing shall be evenly distributed between each row of flooring when local conditions indicate the need for expansion spacing. Each expansion space shall not exceed 1/64”. Provide 2” expansion voids at the perimeter and at all vertical obstructions.

2. Sanding

a. Sand per manufacturer recommendations. b. After sanding, buff entire floor using 100 grit screen (or equal grit sandpaper), with a heavy-duty buffing machine. c. Vacuum and tack floor before first coat of finish. d. Floor shall present a smooth surface without drum stop marks, gouges, streaks or shiners.

3. Finishing a. Gymnasiums

1) Apply 2 coats of oil modified sealer and 2 coats of oil modified MFMA approved finish. 2) Abrade between coats of finish per manufacturer recommendations. 3) Apply game lines accurately in the sequence directed by the finish manufacturer, after buffing and vacuuming.

Layout in accordance with drawings. For game lines, use current rules of association having jurisdiction. Lines shall be straight with sharp edges in colors selected by architect.

4. Perimeter Base Molding a. Install vent cove base anchored to walls with base cement or screws and anchors. Use pre-molded outside corners

and neatly mitered inside corner. 5. Clean up all unused materials and debris and remove it from the premises.

CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE



ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REGARDING THIS FLOOR INSTALLATION - RECOMENDATIONS FOR CHECKING CONCRETE SLABS FOR SYSTEM INSTALLATION

Part 1-GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1. Concrete Slab Depression: determine total system thickness, including pad, sleeper, plywood, maple: include any that are incorporated in specified system

2. Concrete Levelness Tolerance: 1/8” (3mm) in radius of 10’ (3m) Surface--steel troweled

3. Concrete Levelers..............................………………………... .............................................................Section 03 50 00

NOTE: Concrete-leveling materials shall be Portland cement based and at least 4100 psi (28,250 Mpa) compressive strength after 7 days.

NOTE: When leveling compounds are used, see Part 3, paragraph 1 to check for appropriate moisture tolerances.

4. Waterproofing, Damp-proofing and Curing Additives

a. Spray or roller applied sealers may be used on concrete on which a floating floor or mechanically anchored sleeper floors are to be installed.

b. Curing agents may be used in concrete on which a floating floor or anchored sleeper floor is to be installed.

c. No sealers or curing agents are to be used when a direct glue down flooring system is to be installed. Check for these using water or Muriatic acid.

5. Game Standard Inserts.

a. All inserts should be installed at the correct height and location before floor is installed.

b. Material used to set inserts should be fully cured before floor is installed

PART 2 – GENERAL CONDITIONS

1. Do not install floor system until concrete has been cured 60 days. Permanent heat, light and ventilation shall be installed and operating during and after installation. NOTE: Maintain temperature range of 55 to 80 degrees Fahrenheit and a relative humidity range of 35 to 50%.

2. All outside doors and windows must be permanently installed

3. Floor should be broom cleaned and free of any obstacles in order to check slab for levelness.

4. All trades should vacate the area in which floor is to be installed

5. After floors are finished, area to be kept locked by general contractor to allow curing time for the finish. If, after required curing time, the general contractor or owner requires use of gym, he shall protect the floor by covering with non-fibered kraft paper or red rosin paper with taped joints for wood floors and kraft paper or at least 4mil poly for urethane floors, until acceptance by owner (or owner’s agent) of complete gymnasium floor.

PART 3 – TESTING

1. Moisture

a. Concrete moisture test: Calcium Chloride: Industry recommends maximum vapor transmission no greater than 4 pounds per 1000 square feet (1.82 kg per 93 square meters).

b. Electronic Meter: Concrete slab moisture content should not exceed 4%.

c. Accelerated Poly-test: Any moisture gathering in form of a very heavy mist or droplets, indicates excessive moisture.

2. Adhesion for glue down systems



a. Glue small piece of material to numerous areas of the floor with recommended adhesive, let adhesive cure and check bond

b. To assure that no sealers or curing agents are present, place drops of water on slab, the water should immediately be absorbed into the slab. When using muriatic acid, place a few drops on the concrete, the acid should foam up immediately.

3. Levelness – 1/8” (3mm)in a 10’ (3m) radius

a. 10’ (3m) straight edge: slide straight edge from end to end. Move sideways in 5’ (1.5m) increments until total area is done. Using a wax crayon or spray paint, mark low and high areas on the floor.

b. Transit level: set up level in center of room, mark floor with spray paint in a 5’ (1.5m) grid along both sides. Make a drawing of the area, duplicate the grid layout on a drawing. Check elevation of entire floor and record on drawing. Evaluate drawing and mark all low and high areas on floor with paint or wax crayon. Straight edge should also be used to check construction joints and saw cuts.

c. After leveling requirements are met, disc sand all repaired areas to feather edge

4. Slab, Humidity, Temperature & Wood Moisture Content Records

a. Place record of slab condition and before and after any repair work performed in job file

b. Check temperature, relative humidity and wood moisture content levels daily. Maintain a log until job is completed. Place log in job file

c. Relative humidity should be 35% - 50%

d. Temperature should be between 55- 80 degrees Fahrenheit (13 to 27 degrees Celsius).

e. Wood moisture content should meet with local requirements, place a record of any artificial expansion spacing in job file.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 09 65 00

RESILIENT FLOORING

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 09 65 00 Page - 1 Resilient Flooring and Base Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011


A. Resilient tile flooring B. Resilient base C. Resilient transitions

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for the Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials B. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring C. ASTM F1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile D. ASTM F1344 - Standard Specification for Rubber Floor Tile E. FS RR-T-650E - Treads, Metallic and Non-metallic, Skid Resistant F. ASTM F-1869 – Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Sub-floor

using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride G. ASTM F-2170 – Standard Test Method for determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs using in-situ

Probes

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan, borders, and patterns. C. Product data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes,

patterns and colors available. D. Samples: Submit two samples minimum of 12" x 12" in size illustrating color and pattern for each floor

material for each color specified. E. Submit two 12" long samples of base and stair material for each color specified. F. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions indicating procedures and perimeter conditions. G. Provide documentation of moisture testing on concrete slab surfaces to receive the resilient flooring system. H. Provide documentation of the VOC levels.


A. Conform to applicable code for flame/smoke rating requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00. B. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. C. Store the flooring material in the original manufacturers packaging in a clean dry space.


A. Store the materials at least 3-days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability. B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer at least 3-days prior to, during, and 24

hours after installation of materials. 1.7 MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 77 00. B. Maintenance Data:

1. Floors requiring wax; include maintenance procedures, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.

2. Pre-finished floor covering; include maintenance procedures and recommendations for cleaning and buffing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - TILE FLOORING - Colors per Schedule in Plans, Selected from the Cortina Colors and Cortina

Classics Standard VCT Selection by AZROCK. A. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): ASTM F1066; Class 2 Through Pattern


SECTION 09 65 00

RESILIENT FLOORING


1. Thickness: ⅛" 2. Design: As indicated on A3.00

B. Feature Strips: Of same material as tile. C. All tiles in a room or space shall be from the same dye lot or run. D. Provide and install color and pattern as selected by the Architect and Owner from manufacturer’s standard

colors and patterns. 2.2 MATERIALS - BASE

A. Base: Top set coved or toeless; formed external corners: 1. Material: Rubber 2. Height: 4" and 6" - As indicated on drawings 3. Thickness: ⅛" thick 4. Length: Roll

B. Base Accessories: Pre-molded end stops of same material, size and color as base. C. All base material in a room or space shall be from the same dye lot or run. D. Apply base with adhesive and in compliance with manufacturer's requirements.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Sub-floor Filler: Portland cement-based latex underlayment; type recommended by the flooring manufacturer meeting the VOC requirements of LEED for Schools.

B. Primers and Adhesives: Provide waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer meeting the VOC requirements of LEED for Schools.

C. Edge Strips/Transition Strips: Flooring material as Required at Transitions Throughout Facility. D. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer for floor coverings requiring wax.

1. Sealer and wax applied shall meet or exceed the ADAAG slip resistance coefficient of 0.6 on static surfaces and 0.8 on ramps, submit documentation to the Architect and Owner.

2. Sealer and wax shall meet the VOC requirements of LEED for Schools. 3. On floors requiring wax, It is a requirement that the contractor provide 6 coats of wax for start-up.


A. Verify concrete floors are dry to maximum moisture content level acceptable to manufacturer's requirements. 1. Moisture emission must not exceed 5.0 pounds per 1,000 square feet in a 24-hour period or as specified

by manufacturer). B. Verify the concrete floors do not exceed the alkalinity level required by the manufacturer. C. Verify the concrete floor has no carbonization and or dust. D. Verify floor and lower wall surfaces are free of substances that may impair adhesion of new adhesive and

finish materials. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. 1. Prohibit traffic in the space until any added filler properly cures.

B. Scrape all and any materials and debris from concrete surface before installing any finish floor tile or sheets goods. 1. This includes but not limited to; paint, varnish, oils, release agents, sealers, and waxes. 2. Remove residual adhesives as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. 3. Remove curing and hardening compounds not compatible with the adhesives used, as indicated by a

bond test or by the compound manufacturer’s recommendations for flooring. 4. Avoid organic solvents

C. Vacuum clean substrate 3.3 INSTALLATION - TILE FLOORING

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent in tile placement. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.


SECTION 09 65 00

RESILIENT FLOORING


D. Set flooring in place; roll with roller equal in weight to the manufactures requirement and within the time limit set by the manufacturer.

E. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. 1. Install tile to selected pattern, allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter.

F. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. G. Install resilient edge strips at any unprotected exposed edges and where flooring terminates. H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. I. Install flooring in pan type floor access covers and maintain floor patterns. J. At movable partitions, install flooring under partitions without interrupting floor pattern. K. Install feature strips, edge strips, and floor markings where indicated and fit joints tightly, apply sealant

approved by flooring manufacturer as necessary. 3.4 INSTALLATION - BASE

A. Fit joints tight and vertical maintaining minimum measurement of 18" between joints. B. Do not allow field miter internal or exterior corners.

1. At external corners, use pre molded exterior corner pieces. 2. At interior corners, use pre molded interior corner pieces 3. At exposed ends, use pre-molded units.

C. Install base on solid backing and bond tight to wall and floor surfaces. 1. Provide solid non-water absorbent material.

D. Scribe and fit to doorframes and other interruptions. 3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean work under provisions of section 01 77 00. B. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. C. VCT Flooring clean, seal and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,

apply a minimum of 6-coats of acrylic polish at installation. 1. Apply; prior to final acceptance, 6 additional coats of polish max no more than 4-coats in any 1-

application). 2. If installing pre-finished flooring, do not apply seal or wax/polish.


A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01 50 00. B. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 09 66 23

EPOXY RESIN TERRAZZO

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 09 66 23 Page - 1 Epoxy Resin Terrazzo Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Nominal Epoxy Resin Matrix Terrazzo B. Work Included In This Section

1) Epoxy Resin Terrazzo poured in place with joint, edge, and termination divider strip as indicated on drawings.

2) Crack suppression membrane with reinforcing mesh. 3) Moisture Vapor Transmission Barrier Placed on Concrete Slab.

C. Related Work In Other Sections 1) Cast In Place Concrete: Subfloor to be level with maximum variation of 1/4" in 10 feet, with a steel

trowel finish surface. Concrete slab shall have effective moisture/vapor barrier placed beneath slab, free of damage causing tears or perforations.

2) Adjacent floor finishes - see Division 9. 3) Furnish and placement of floor drains, plumbing fixtures, electrical fixtures. 4) Joint sealants installed with terrazzo at expansion joints. 5) Sufficient water, temporary heat and light, and adequate electric power connected with outlets

within 100 feet of work area. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Acceptable Suppliers 1) Suppliers shall be Associate members of the National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association (NTMA) and

shall supply materials in accordance with the standards and specification of the NTMA. 2) Marble chips and/or glass aggregates shall be standard colors and gradated sizes as supplied by

NTMA. B. Acceptable Installers

1) Terrazzo Instillation contractor shall be current Contractor members of the NTMA and shall perform all work in accordance with NTMA specifications and standards.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data Submit product data for all related materials including resin matrix, crack suspension membrane, divider strips, expansion strips, sealers and cleaners.

B. Samples 1) Submit (3) 6" square samples for each color and type of terrazzo specified or selected. 2) Submit (3) 6" lengths of each divider expansion strip required.

C. Certification Submit certification letter from NTMA that terrazzo instillation contractor is current member in good standing with the NTMA.

1.03 DILEVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery of Materials Deliver materials in a manner to prevent damage or contamination to containers or bags of materials.

B. Storage of Materials Store materials in a clean, dry location, heated to minimum 50 degrees, furnished by others.

1.04 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY

Terrazzo materials and instillation shall be guaranteed for a period of (1) year from date of substantial completion. Guarantee shall be limited to the repair and/or replacement of materials or workmanship found to be defective per NTMA standards and specifications.


A. Acceptable Substrates


SECTION 09 66 23



1) Concrete sub-floor level tolerance shall be 1/4" in 10 feet. Any irregularity of the surface, which requires repair shall be performed with epoxy fillers and aggregates recommended by epoxy resin matrix manufacturer.

2) Maintain ambient room and floor temperature at 50 degrees F or above for a period extending 72 hours before, during, and after terrazzo floor instillation.

3) Concrete substrate shall be tested to verify acceptable moisture levels prior to instillation. Testing should be conducted in accordance with ASTM F2170 or by calcium chloride test. Acceptable moisture levels shall be as established by the NTMA for use with resin matrix terrazzo.

1.06 REFRENCES

A. ASTM D-2240 using shore D Durometer. Hardness

B. ASTM D-638 run at .2" min. Specimen made using "c" die listed in ASTM D-412. Tensile Strength

C. ASTM D-695, Specimen B cylinder. Compressive Strength

D. ASTM D-1308 -7 days at room temperature by immersion method have no deleterious effects. Chemical Resistance

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Primer: Resin manufacturer's 100% solids epoxy primer. B. Flexible Membrane: Resin manufacturer's 100% Solid Epoxy Crack Suppression Membrane. C. Epoxy Resin: Epoxy Matrix, 100% solids, -0- VOC Epoxy Resin. Acceptable manufacturers are General

Polymers, Crossfield Products, T&M Terroxy Resin Systems, Key Resin West. D. Marble Chips: Standard color marble or glass chips as distributed by NTMA Associate member suppliers.

Maximum size #2 per NTMA gradation standards. E. Divider: Strips Zinc, 1/8" in thickness unless noted otherwise on drawings, as supplied by Manhattan

American, TESCO Products, or their authorized distributors. F. Terrazzo Cleaner: PH Factor between 7 and 10, biodegradable and phosphate free as recommended by

resin system manufacturer. G. Sealer: Penetrating Sealer TESCO Crystalseal. H. Moisture Transmission Barrier shall be supplied or recommended by epoxy resin manufacturer. I.

2.02 MIX

A. Terrazzo Selection 1) Terrazzo type shall be 3/8" Epoxy Resin Matrix Thin-Set Terrazzo 2) Terrazzo color mixes shall be NTMA color plate or custom matrix.

PROPERTY TEST METHOD REQUIREMENT HARDNESS ASTM D-2240 using shore D Durometer.

60 - 85

TENSILE STRENGTH ASTM D-638 run at .2" min. Specimen made using "c" die listed in ASTM D-412.

3,000 psi min.

COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

ASTM D-695, Specimen B cylinder.

10,000 psi min.

CHEMICAL RESISTANCE

ASTM D-1308 -7 days at room temperature by immersion method have no deleterious effects.

The Following Contaminants Used: Distilled water.....................1% Soap Solution Mineral Water....................10% Sodium Hydroxide Isopropanol........................10% Hydrochloric Acid Ethanol...............................30% Sulfuric Acid .025 Detergent Solution.....5% Acetic Acid


SECTION 09 66 23



B. Proportions In accordance with resin system manufacturer's recommendations

C. Mixing: Terrazzo Topping: Mix marble/aggregates and Epoxy Resin per formulations of approved samples.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION Examine areas to receive terrazzo for:

1) Defects in existing work that affect proper execution of terrazzo work. Notify contractor of any defects in concrete sub-floor or other related work for correction.

2) Concrete shall be a minimum 3,000 psi compressive strength and minimum 300 psi tensile strength, with 30-day cure and shall be level to within 1/4 per 10 lineal feet. Concrete slab shall have effective moisture barrier and moisture tests should be conducted to confirm suitability for instillation of epoxy resin terrazzo flooring system.

3) Conduct moisture tests for concrete slabs on grade with accordance with ASTM F2170 or calcium chloride test. Report results for certification that moisture level are acceptable for instillation of terrazzo system. Reading of less than 20 pounds of psf may allow for deletion of moisture vapor transmission barrier.

4) Inspect slab for visible cracks, if total length of cracks is less than the sq.ft. of the total terrazzo, membrane system may be deleted and all cracks bandaged per epoxy manufacturer's recommendations.

5) Start only when all defects have been corrected by others and moisture test results have been certified as acceptable if instillation on slab is grade.

3.02 INSTILLATION

A. Subfloor: 1) Prepare substrate to receive epoxy terrazzo by shot blasting to expose clean concrete substrate. 2) If required due to moisture vapor transmission rate test results exceeding NTMA recommended

levels, install moisture vapor transmission barrier to concrete per manufacturer's recommendations. 3) Where required, install membrane as required at cold joints and crack isolation membrane over

concrete substrate per manufacturer's recommendations. 4) Install control joints directly above control joints in sub floor. 5) Install divider strips as indicated on approved layout. place any expansion joint strips where

required. B. Placing Terrazzo

1) Prime subfloor in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2) Place terrazzo mixture in panels formed by divider strips and trowel mixture to top of strips.

C. Curing After completing placement of terrazzo allow to cure until topping develops sufficient strength to prevent lifting or pulling of terrazzo strips during grinding.

D. Finishing 1) Rough Grinding:

i. Grind with # 24 or finer grit stones or with comparable diamond plates. ii. Follow initial grind with #80 or finer grit stones as required to meet finish of approved

project control samples. 2) Grouting:

i. Cleanse floor with clean water and rinse. ii. Remove excess rinse water and machine or hand-apply grout, taking care to fill voids. iii. Grout may be left on terrazzo until all heavy or messy work in project is complete. iv. Any grouting should be non-absorbent.

E. Cleaning and Sealing 1) Wash all surfaces with neutral cleaner. 2) Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. 3) Apply penetrating sealer in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

F. Protection 1) Upon completion, the work shall be ready for final inspection and acceptance by owner and

architect. 2) The General Contractor shall protect the finished floor at the time that the Terrazzo Contractor

completes the work.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 09 68 00

CARPETING

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 09 68 00 Page - 1 Carpet Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Provisions established within the General and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section.


A. Work includes but is not limited to providing installation labor, carpeting, installation materials, installation accessories and moldings as noted in the Drawings and as specified in the following text.

B. All bidders shall quote in accordance with the exact specifications as detailed in this document. Any proposed substitutions to this specification must be presented for prior approval according to the conditions detailed under Section 1.03 and 1.04.

1.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR APPROVAL

A. Submit manufacturer's documentation showing a minimum of three (3) years experience in the manufacture of the specific type of carpet selected for installation.

B. Submit manufacturer's product specifications, product testing reports and other required documents referenced within this text. All product test reports must have been conducted by a Certified Independent Testing Laboratory.

C. Submit at least three (3) references of installations that have been in use for two (2) years or more, using a cellular backing technology as described within this text. Include contact names and telephone numbers.

D. Submit two (2) 15" x 20" finished samples of the exact type of carpet proposed including quality, backing, pattern and color.

E. Submit seaming diagrams for review prior to installation.

F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions prior to installation.

G. Submit manufacturer's maintenance instructions prior to installation.

1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. All Bid submittals must conform to the specifications in this document.

B. Any and all backing substitutions must meets or exceed all specified requirements of the product and be submitted in accordance with all requirements contained within the General Conditions.

C. All test results to be in accordance with a Certified Independent Testing Laboratory.

1.5 INSTALLATION QUALITY ASSURANCE


SECTION 09 68 00

CARPETING


A. Flooring contractor to be specialty contractor normally engaged in this type of work and shall have three (3) years minimum documented experience in the installation of these materials.

B. Flooring contractor must be approved by the manufacturer.

C. Flooring contractor will be responsible for the proper product installation, including floor preparation and moisture / alkalinity testing, in the areas indicated in the Drawings.

D. Flooring contractor to provide owner a written warranty that guarantees the completed installation to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of no less than one (1) year after job completion.

E. Manufacturer to provide field service experts to assist in project start-up as required by the job. Manufacturer will notify Owner, Architect, General Contractor or another designated contact if any installation instructions are not followed.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Sub-floor preparation is to include all required work to prepare the existing floor for installation of the product as specified in this document. Sub-floor preparation shall meet all conditions as specified in the manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Sub-floor preparation will include, as required, the removal and repair of the existing floor surface. It is recommended that the flooring of all renovation projects be inspected prior to the Bid.

C. Carpet installation shall not commence until painting and finishing work is complete and ceilings and overhead work is tested, approved and completed.

D. Site conditions shall include those specified in the carpet manufacturer's installation instructions and shall also include sufficient heat, light and power required for effective and efficient working conditions.

1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver all materials to the installation site in the manufacturer's original packaging. Packaging to contain manufacturer's name, product name, identification number and related information.

B. Product to be delivered as required by manufacturer.

C. All materials to be stored in a cool (above 65 deg. F and below 90 deg. F), dry location, safe from damage and soiling. Stack rolls horizontally no higher than two (2) high on a flat surface.

D. Delivered and stored materials must be available for inspection as required by the Owner, Architect, General Contractor or manufacturer.


SECTION 09 68 00

CARPETING


1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

Provide one percent (1%) overage of carpeting of each color and type specified. Deliver as requested to Owner’s storage.

PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.1 WARRANTY - CARPET

A. Provide a standard, printed warranty from the manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace unsatisfactory work caused by defective materials as detailed below. All warranty items to be full term, not pro-rated for the indicated period. If the product fails to perform as warranted when properly installed and maintained according to procedures, the affected area will be repaired or replaced at the expense of the manufacturer.

1. Fifteen (15) years against excessive surface wear. Excessive wear means more than 10% loss of pile fiber weight measured before and after use.

2. Fifteen (15) years against edge ravel.

3. Fifteen (15) years for Tuft bind (zippering), 8 lbs. min. in accordance with ASTM-D-1335.

4. Fifteen (15) years against backing delamination. Backing delamination is defined as separation of the secondary backing from the primary backing. ASTM-D 3936

5. Fifteen (15) years against loss of resiliency, per ASTM-D-3574.

6. Lifetime warranty against excessive static electricity. Lifetime static protection means built in protection below 3.0 kilovolts at 20% relative humidity and room temperature of 70 degrees F. or tested under AATTCC-134.

7. Density 5000 min. fifteen (15) year per ASTM-D-418-93.

B. Stairs included in all warranty statements.

C. Chair pads are not required for warranty coverage.

D. All warranties to be sole source responsibility of the carpet manufacturer. Second source warranties or warranties that involve parties other than the carpet manufacturer are unacceptable.

E. All warranties shall be official documents and shall be signed and notarized by an authorized representative of the manufacturer.

2.2 PERFORMANCE ASSURANCE – GENERAL

A. Flammability Requirements

The product when tested with its attached cushion backing shall meet or exceed all flammability requirements for floorcoverings as established by the following nationally recognized codes:

NFPA 101 Life Safety Code for Safety to Life in


SECTION 09 68 00

CARPETING


Buildings and Structures

Standard Building Code (SBC)

Uniform Fire Code (UBC)

See section 2.03 for testing requirements.

B. Face Fiber Characteristics

1. Continuous filament 6 or 6.6 solution dyed nylon fiber, with permanent static control.

2. Fiber type: Certified DuPont SDN, BASF Zeftron 500 with static control and stain resistance.

C. Stain Inhibiting and Resistance Properties

Permanent sintered stain inhibitor and soil inhibitor applied to the product, through heat and force activated cohesion creating mechanical polymeric entrapment, during manufacture, to resist fiber staining.

D. Backing Characteristics

1. Synthetic polymer cellular cushion.

2. The cellular cushion backing composite and polymer shall have been sold commercially for at least three (3) years in exactly this formulation. No deviation shall be acceptable.

3. Backing system to provide a barrier to moisture penetration. No penetration after 10,000 impacts based on dynamic crush testing @ 10.0 psi.

4. Product to be professionally seam sealed or chemical welded per manufacturer installation instructions.

E. Adhesive System Characteristics

1. Carpet product to be securely attached to the floor in compliance with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Section 4.5.3.

2. Product to be installed according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. Product to be supplied with a pressure sensitive adhesive (peel and stick) applied to 100% of the backing at the time of manufacture.

F. Environmental Impact Characteristics

1. All products must pass the University of Pittsburgh protocol for toxicity being "no more toxic than wood" when burned under the same conditions. This data will be supplied by style from a certified independent testing laboratory, or have been included in the Carpet and Rug Institute testing protocol which has been placed on file with the E.P.A.


SECTION 09 68 00

CARPETING


2. The carpet will, as suggested by the October 1993, Maryland State Dept. of Education Technical Bulletin, pass the Carpet & Rug Institute, Green Label Testing Program, as a minimum acceptable threshold or “first hurdle” for carpet product selection. “Carpet not meeting the CRI test program should not be considered for use in schools.”

2.3 PERFORMANCE ASSURANCE - CERTIFIED TESTING

A. Certified test reports shall be submitted for all performance assurance specifications listed below.

B. Requirements listed below must be met by all products.

C. All submitted test numbers shall represent average results for production goods. DISD reserves the right to send samples of carpet for testing. If the carpet meets or exceeds test minimums, DISD will pay for the testing. If the material doesn’t pass, the manufacturer/vendor will pay for the cost of the test and the replacement of carpet (installed and not installed).

D. Required Test Reports:

1. Pill Test (Federal Flame Standard)

DOC-FF-1-70

Passing Result

2. Flooring Radiant Panel Test

ASTM E-648

Class 1

3. Optical Smoke Density Test

NFPA 258 NBS Smoke Chamber

Less than 450, flaming mode

4. Backing Identification Test

a. Cushion thickness ASTM-D-3676-78

b. Cushion Density ASTM-D-3676-78

5. Backing Cellular Make-Up Identification

Cellular construction

6. Backing Cellular Make-Up Test

After 50,000 Phillips Chair Cycles

Microscopic cellular construction


SECTION 09 68 00

CARPETING


7. CRI VOC Chamber Test.

8. See Section 2.02 Item F, #1

9. Indoor Air Quality Test

CRI-IAG Green Label Test

10. Moisture Barrier (Moisture Penetration Testing).

Dynamic Crush Test @ 10.0 psi.

No penetration after 10,000 impacts

11. Antimicrobial Efficacy

AATCC 174

Passing Results

12. Stain Inhibitor

a. Stain Test

Professional Testing Laboratory Inc.

Minimum rating - 4

b. Colorfastness to Wet or Dry (Crocking)

AATCC-165

Minimum rating - 4

c. Colorfastness to Water

AATCC – 107

Minimum rating - 4

d. Accelerated Soiling

AATCC 123

Minimum rating - 4

13. Backing Lamination Test

ASTM-D-3936

2.4 MANUFACTURING SPECIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturers offering products that comply with this specification include C & A Floor coverings, A Tandus Company (f/k/a Collins & Aikman)


SECTION 09 68 00

CARPETING


Any manufacturer and / or product must meet or exceed those requirements

specified under Sections 1.3, 2.1, 22, 2.03, and 2.4 of this Document.

Any substitutions must be made in accordance with Section 1.4 of this Document and be approved in writing by the Owner.

B. Construction

1. Carpet must contain a minimum of 10% total recycled content entirely from post- consumer content to comply with TX-CHPS Credit ME4.1 - Recycled Content.

2. As manufactured 100% Solution Dyed Nylon

3. Surface construction - Loop Pile

4. Width - twelve (12) feet; six (6) feet (For Attic Stock)

5. Gauge - 1/13” to 9/64"

6. Stitches per inch - 6.0 minimum

7. Dry Tuft Bind - 8 lbs min. (ASTM-D-1335)

8. Pile Height - .125" to .175"

(ASTM-D-418)

9. Pile yarn weight - 20 oz. min.

10. Density: 5,000 min. (ASTM-D-418-82)

11. Fiber system - DuPont SDN or BASF Zeftron 500, with static control and stain resistance

12. Secondary Backing Type - Cellular cushion or PVC vinyl

13. Dye Method - Solution dyed

14. Adhesive system - Pressure sensitive adhesive, mill applied at time of manufacturing (peel and stick).

15. Color - From the Crayon Palette of the Powerbond line, the following selection of

color are acceptable.

48003 – Blizzard Blue

16. Total Product Weight - 85 oz. minimum

17. Static Generation - 3.0 KV or less (AATCC-134)(Lifetime)

2.5 ACCESSORIES


SECTION 09 68 00

CARPETING


A. Floor primer, seam sealer and seam cleaner: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer.

B. Edge Strips

1. Type: Tapered vinyl

2. Acceptable Manufacturer: Mercer or approved equal

3. Color: As selected by Owner or Owner Representative.

4. Products: Equal to the following: "Imperial" reducer where carpet terminates at concrete or ceramic / quarry tile; "Tile and Carpet Joiner" where carpet meets V.C.T. and 930 or 360 Snap-down "T" at carpet to carpet transitions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PRE-INSPECTION AND PREPARATION

A. Provide unobstructed spaces for carpet installation, including removal and replacement of furniture and equipment in the installation area as required.

B. All floors must be inspected and approved by the installation contractor prior to installation of carpet. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions.

C. Notify Architect in writing of any condition which will prevent satisfactory completion of work. Do not proceed until such defects are entirely corrected.

D. Ensure floors are level with maximum surface variation of 1/4 inch in ten (10) feet noncumulative. Inspect substrate for cracks, holes, abrasions, rough spots, ridges, scaling or other conditions which will adversely affect execution and quality of work.

E. All materials used in sub-floor preparation and repair shall be recommended by the carpet manufacturer and shall be chemically and physically compatible with the carpet system.

F. Installation contractor will test substrate for moisture evacuation and alkalinity. Results should not exceed those limits established by the carpet manufacturer.

G. Vacuum clean substrate.

H. There will be no exceptions to the provisions stated in the manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Installation to proceed as specified in the manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Lay out rolls of carpet full for Architect approval.

C. Check matching of carpet before cutting and ensure there is no visible variation.

D. Cut carpet, where required, in manner to allow proper seam and pattern match. Ensure cuts are true and unfrayed.


SECTION 09 68 00

CARPETING


E. Seams

1. Install in accordance with approved seam layout using a minimum of seams.

2. Do not use small carpet fill strips.

3. Do not place seams perpendicular to doors or entries.

4. Cross joints necessary due to layout of areas shall be at absolute minimum and shall be indicated on shop drawings.

5. Cross joints necessary due to length of rolls received shall be placed, in the cutting, to avoid occurence at conspicuous locations near doors or at pivot points, and shall be approved prior to seaming.

6. Join seams in recommended manner so as not to detract from the appearance of the carpet installation and decrease its life expectancy. Ensure seams are straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps.

F. Lay carpet on floors with the run of the pile in same direction of anticipated traffic.

G. Do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room to next where continuous through a wall opening.

H. Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor and to walls and other vertical surfaces.

I. Fit carpet snugly to walls or other vertical surfaces where no base is scheduled, leaving no gaps.

J. Entire carpet installation is to be laid tight and flat to subfloor and present a uniform, pleasing appearance. Ensure monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area.

K. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. Use full length pieces only. Butt tight to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be avoided, butt ends tight and flush.

3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. All rubbish, wrappings, debris, and trimmings to be removed from the site and disposed of properly.

B. Carpet to be thoroughly vacuumed after installation.

END OF SECTION - 09680



Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 09 84 13 Page - 1 Fixed Sound Absorptive Panels Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 09 84 13

FIXED SOUND ABSORPTIVE PANELS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Custom fabricated acoustical wall panels.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International:

1. ASTM C423 Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.

2. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

3. ASTM E795 Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption Tests.


A. Performance Requirements:

1. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84):

a. Flamespread: 25, maximum.

b. Smoke Developed: 450, maximum.

c. Fire ratings for all fabric covered panels is based on testing of the panel wrapped with the standard in stock fabric, Guilford of Maine, Model FR 701.

d. This rating applies to all acoustical wall treatment unless specifically excluded in the product specification section 2.02.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.

B. Product Data: Submit product data sheet, for specified products.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, edge profiles and panel components, including anchorage, accessories, finish colors and textures.

D. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples of finishes, colors and textures.

E. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance requirements.

1. Standard Systems: Submit certified copies of previous test reports substantiating performance of system in lieu of retesting.


A. Regulatory Requirements and Approvals:

1. International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO): Report #1116

2. Building Officials and Code Administrators International, Inc. (BOCA): Research Report #86-39


A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Section.

B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.


A. Environmental Requirements: Do not install panels until wet work, such as concrete and plastering, is complete; the building is enclosed; and the temperature and relative humidity are stabilized at 60 - 80 degrees F (16 - 27 degrees C) and 45%, respectively.


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 09 84 13 Page - 2 Fixed Sound Absorptive Panels Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS

A. Manufacturer: Kinetics Noise Control.

1. Contact: PO Box 655, 6300 Irelan Place, Dublin, OH 43017; Telephone: (614) 889-0480; Fax: (614) 889-0075; E-mail: [email protected]; Web site: www.kineticsnoise.com.


2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Hardside Panels:

1. Thickness: 2 inches (51 mm)

2. Size: As indicated on the drawings up to a maximum 48 inch (1219 mm) x 120 inch (3048 mm) panel.

3. Core: 2 inch (51 mm)

4. Edge Detail: Beveled/Square/ Mitered with non-resin, Class A hardening solution.

5. Facing: 100% polyester fabric, Guilford of Maine Customer Selected. Fabric Selection Indicated on Plans.

a. Colors as Indicated On Drawings.

6. Sound Absorption (ASTM C423): Noise Reduction Coefficient as follows:

a. 2 inch (51 mm) Panel: 1.00, minimum.

7. Mounting Accessories: Z-clips and/or Edgemount clips

2.03 FABRICATION

A. General: Treat fabric wrapped panels using heat shrink process to develop fully taut facing.

B. Hardside Panels: Wrap panel edges and return facing fabric 1 - 2 inches (25.4 - 51 mm) on back of panel. Secure fabric with adhesive applied to edges and back of panel only.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions and product carton instructions for installation.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that substrate conditions, which have been previously installed under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Verify that stud spacing is 16 inches (406 mm) oc, maximum, for panels installed over open studs.

2. Do not install panels until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning panels soiled during installation. Replace panels that cannot be cleaned to as new condition.

B. Keep site free from accumulation of waste and debris.

END OF SECTION



http://www.kineticsnoise.com/�

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 09 84 14 Page - 1 Sound Absorbative Canopies Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 09 84 14

Sound Absorptive Canopies PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general conditions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Divisions-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical canopies 2. Cable hangers and fasteners


1. Section 09 51 00 (09510) – Acoustical Ceilings 2. Section 09 26 00 (09250 –Gypsum Board Assemblies 3. Division 23 (15) Sections - HVAC 4. Division 26 (16) Sections - Electrical

C. Alternates

1. Prior Approval: Unless otherwise provided for in the Contract documents, proposed product substitutions may be submitted no later than TEN (10) working days prior to the date established for receipt of bids. Acceptability of a proposed substitution is contingent upon the Architect’s review of the proposal for acceptability and approved products will be set forth by the Addenda. If included in a Bid are substitute products which have not been approved by Addenda, the specified products shall be provided without additional compensation.

2. Submittals which do not provide adequate data for the product evaluation will not be considered. The proposed substitution must meet all requirements of this section, including but not neccessarily limited to, the following: Single source materials suppliers (if specified in Section 1.5); Panel design, size, composition, color, and finish; suspension system component profiles and sizes; compliance with the referenced standards.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation

Room Method. 2. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. ASTM E 1477 Standard Test Method for Luminous Reflectance Factor of Acoustical

Materials by Use of Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers.

B. International Code Council Evaluation Service AC156 - Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Qualification Testing of Non-structural Components



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each type of canopy system required. B. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings: Layout and details of canopies. Show locations of items which are to be

coordinated with canopies.

D. Certifications: Manufacturer’s certifications that products comply with specified requirements, including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide canopies and method of attachment by a single manufacturer.

B. Coordination of Work: Coordinate canopy work with installers of related work including, but not

limited to suspended ceilings, building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical systems, electrical systems, and sprinklers.

C. Seismic Performance: System seismic performance verified through full-scale testing in

accordance with ICC-ES – AC-156 Acceptance Criterial for Seismic Qualification Testing of Non-Structural components.

D. Acoustical canopies, as with other architectural features located in the ceiling plane, may

obstruct or skew the existing or planned fire sprinkler water distribution pattern, or possibly delay the activation of the fire sprinkler or fire detection system. Designers and installers are advised to consult a fire protection engineer, NFPA 13, and their local codes for guidance on the proper installation techniques where fire detection or suppression systems are present.


A. Deliver canopies to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space below 100ºF (38ºC) where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing canopies, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture

content.

C. Handle canopies carefully to avoid damaging units in any way.


A. Space Enclosure: Building areas to receive canopies shall be free of construction dust and debris. Products can

be installed up to 100°F (38°C) with humidity not exceeding 90% RH. Cannot be used in exterior applications where standing water is present or where moisture will come in direct contact with the canopy. Following installation, conditions must be maintained below 70% RH.

1.8 WARRANTY



A. Acoustical canopy: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace canopies that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to: 1. Canopies: Manufacturing defects. 2. Attachment devices: Rusting and manufacturing defects.

B. Warranty Period: 1. Canopies: One (1) year from date of substantial completion. 2. Attachment devices: One (1) year from date of substantial completion.

C. The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other

provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Canopies: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

B. Attachment devices:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2.2.1 CANOPY UNITS

A. Canopy: 1. Surface Texture: Smooth 2. Composition: Wet formed mineral fiber 3. Surface finish: DuraBrite acoustically transparent membrane on all sides and edges 4. Color: Kiwi/Moss or as indicated on drawings. 5. Size: 46-1/2 inches x 75 inches 6. Thickness: 1-1/4 inch 7. Edge Detail: Square edge 8. Panel Configuration: Flat 9. Arc Radius: 10 feet 9 inches 10. Flame Spread: (ASTM E 84), Class A 11. Light Reflectance: (LR): (ASTM E 1477), Minimum 0.86 12. Acoustical Absorption: (ASTM C423), Minimum 30 Sabin/panel 13. Recycle Content: Minumum 44% 14. Mold/Mildew Inhibitor: The surface and back of the product have been treated with

BioBlock, a paint that contains a special biocide that inhibits or retards the growth of mold and mildew, ASTM D3273.

15. Sustainability: The canopies are eligible for reclamation. 16. Acceptable Product: SoundScapes Acoustical Canopy, manufactured by Armstrong World

Industries. 2.2.2 ATTACHMENT SYSTEM

A. Installation Hardware 1. Hardware is partially embedded with little visible support mechanisms. 2. Cables and components for attachment to support are available to coordinate with the

canopy package.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of canopies. Comply with reflected ceiling plans. Coordinate panel layout with mechanical, electrical and sprinkler fixtures.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install canopies in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and in compliance with the authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Replace damaged and broken panels. B. Clean exposed surfaces of canopies per manufacturer’s instructions.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 09 84 39 Page - 1 Acoustical Ceiling Clouds Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 09 84 39

ACOUSTICAL CEILING CLOUDS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general conditions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Divisions-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Cloud Suspension System 2. Acoustical Panels


1. Section 09 51 00 (09510) – Acoustical Ceilings 2. Section 09 20 00 (09250 – Plaster and Gypsum Board 3. Division 23 (15) Sections - HVAC 4. Division 26 (16) Sections - Electrical

C. Alternates

1. Prior Approval: Unless otherwise provided for in the Contract documents, proposed product substitutions may be submitted no later than TEN (10) working days prior to the date established for receipt of bids. Acceptability of a proposed substitution is contingent upon the Architect’s review of the proposal for acceptability and approved products will be set forth by the Addenda. If included in a Bid are substitute products which have not been approved by Addenda, the specified products shall be provided without additional compensation.

2. Submittals which do not provide adequate data for the product evaluation will not be considered. The proposed substitution must meet all requirements of this section, including but not neccessarily limited to, the following: Single source materials suppliers (if specified in Section 1.5); Panel design, size, composition, color, and finish; suspension system component profiles and sizes; compliance with the referenced standards.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A 1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

2. ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. ASTM C 423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room

Method. 4. ASTM C 635 Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel

Ceilings. 5. ASTM C 636 Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels. 6. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 7. ASTM E 1264 Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.



8. ASTM E 1477 Standard Test Method for Luminous Reflectance Factor of Acoustical Materials by Use of Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers.

9. ASTM D 3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.

B. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA):

1. NFPA 286: Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each type of cloud system required. B. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings: Layout and details of clouds. Show locations of items which are to be

coordinated with clouds.

D. Certifications: Manufacturer’s certifications that products comply with specified requirements, including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide cloud suspension system and panels by a single manufacturer.

B. Fire Performance Characteristics: The fire performance of Infusions Lay-In Panels meets the

requirements for light transmitting plastics in Chapter 26 of the International Building Code. Infusions panels have been tested according to NFPA 286 and are equivalent to Class A Interior Finish as defined in Chapter 8 of the International Building Code.

C. Coordination of Work: Coordinate cloud work with installers of related work including, but not

limited to suspended ceilings, building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical systems, electrical systems, and sprinklers.

D. Ceiling clouds, as with other architectural features located at the ceiling, may obstruct or skew

the planned fire sprinkler water distribution pattern, or possibly delay or accelerate the activation of the sprinkler or fire detection systems by channeling heat from a fire either toward or away from the device. Designers and installers are advised to consult a fire protection engineer, NFPA 13, or their local codes for guidance where automatic fire detection and supression systems are present.


A. Deliver cloud system and panels to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing clouds, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture

content.

C. Handle components carefully to avoid damaging units in any way.




A. Space Enclosure: Building areas to receive clouds shall be free of construction dust and debris. Products can be

installed up to 100°F (38°C) and in spaces before the building is enclosed, where HVAC systems are cycled or not operating. Cannot be used in exterior applications where standing water is present or where moisture will come in direct contact with the canopy.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Formations: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to: 1. Panels: Sagging and warping as a result of defects in materials or factory workmanship. 2. Grid System: Rust and manufacturer's defects 3. Acoustical Panels with BioBlock Plus or designated as Inherently resistive to the growth of micro-

organisms installed with Armstrong suspension systems: Visible sag and will resist the growth of mold/mildew and bacterial growth.

B. Warranty Period::

1. Formations with panels designated as HumiGuard Plus: Ten (10) years from date of substantial completion.

2. Formations with metal panels, fabric panels and Infusions panels – one year (1) year from date of substantial completion.

C. The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of

the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents.


A. Cloud Suspension System: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

B. Acoustical Panels:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2.2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL UNITS

A. Formations Curves Acoustical Cloud Panel Options: 1. Surface Texture: Smooth 2. Composition: Mineral fiber - Fine Fissured 3. Surface finish: Factory Applied Latex Paint 4. Color: White - Unless noted otherwise on Plans. 5. Cloud Size: 6 feet x 6 feet to 14 feet x 14 feet (available in 2 foot increments) 6. Full Panel Size: 2 feet x 2 feet 7. Thickness: 3/4 inch 8. Edge Detail: Vector for interface with Prelude 15/16” Exposed Tee Grid System 9. Flame Spread: Class A per ASTM E 84 10. Light Reflectance (ASTM E 1477): 0.85 11. Acoustical Absorption (ASTM C423), Sabins/square foot:055 12. Acceptable Product: Formations Curves Panel Kit as manufactured by Armstrong World

Industries.



13. Application Consideration: Extra panels may be required.

B.. Formations Squares Acoustical Cloud Panel Options: 1. Surface Texture: Smooth 2. Composition: Mineral fiber - Fine Fissured 3. Surface finish: Factory Applied Latex Paint 4. Color: White - Unless noted otherwise on Plans. 5. Cloud Size: 6 feet x 6 feet to 14 feet x 14 feet (available in 2 foot increments) 6. Full Panel Size: 2 feet x 2 feet 7. Thickness: 3/4 inch 8. Edge Detail: Vector for interface with Prelude 15/16” Exposed Tee Grid System 9. Flame Spread: Class A per ASTM E 84 10. Light Reflectance (ASTM E 1477): 0.85 11. Acoustical Absorption (ASTM C423), Sabins/square foot:055 12. Acceptable Product: Formations Curves Panel Kit as manufactured by Armstrong

World Industries. 2.2.2 CLOUD SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Formations Curves Acoustical Cloud Suspension Kit: 1. All main beams and cross tees shall be commercial quality hot-dipped galvanized steel as per ASTM

A 653. Main beams and cross tees are double-web steel construction with type 15/16 inch exposed flange design. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed, capping pre-finished galvanized steel in baked polyester paint. Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching.

a. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635, Heavy Duty. b. Main Beam, #7301 c. Cross Tee, 2 foot, XL8320 d. Color: White

2. Axiom Vector Edge Trim System for suspended ceiling cloud: (See 2.2.3) a. Axiom Vector: 4”height, extruded aluminum alloy 6063 trim channel b. Axiom Vector Color: White.

3. Installation Hardware (included in Kit): a. Axiom Splices and connection clips b. StrongBack – Hot dipped galvanized cold rolled steel c. Cable Hardware – 2-1/16 inch x 1 inch x 3/8 inch quick loop wire rope clamp for 1/16 inch

diameter cable d. Cable – 7x7 aircraft cable, 1/16 inch x 120 inch galvanized with loop at one end.

4. Acceptable Product: Formations Curves Suspension Kit, Item # as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries.

B. Formations Squares Acoustical Clouds Suspension Kit:

1. All main beams and cross tees shall be commercial quality hot-dipped galvanized steel as per ASTM A 653. Main beams and cross tees are double-web steel construction with type 15/16 inch exposed flange design. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed, capping pre-finished galvanized steel in baked polyester paint. Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching.

a. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635, Heavy Duty. b. Main Beam, #7301 c. Cross Tee, 2 foot, XL8320 d. Color: To be chosen from manufacturer’s list of available colors.

2, Axiom – Formations Options: (See 2.2.3) a. Axiom Vector: 4” height, extruded aluminum alloy 6063 trim channel with pre-mitered

corners. b. Axiom Vector Color: To be chosen from manufacturer’s list of available colors. c. Knife Edge: Six inch wide horizontal face, extruded aluminum alloy 6063 trim channel d. Color: White



3. Installation Hardware: a. Axiom Splices and connection clips b. StrongBack – Hot dipped galvanized cold rolled steel c. Cable Hardware – 2-1/16 inch x 1 inch x 3/8 inch quick loop wire rope clamp for 1/16 inch

diameter cable d. Cable – 7x7 aircraft cable, 1/16 inch x 120 inch galvanized with loop at one end.

4. Acceptable Product: Formations Squares Suspension Kit, Item # as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries.

2.2.3 CUSTOM PERIMETER TRIM

A. Product/Manufacturer: Axiom-Classic Custom Perimeter Trim; Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

B. Components: Edge trim system for suspended ceiling system, extruded aluminum alloy 6063 trim channel, 10 foot straight or curved profiles to minimum (24 inches for 2 through 8 inch high) inside and outside radii for acoustical and for drywall applications.

1. Axiom Trim Channel: 4” wide face with 3/4 inch horizontal legs, straight or curved sections

with special bosses formed for attachment to the Axiom tee-bar connection clip or hanging clip; commercial quality, extruded aluminum, factory-finished in (factory-applied baked polyester paint to match Armstrong) ( ) color; (architectural film textured finish), (custom paint finish color-matched to approved sample).

2. Axiom Outside Corner Posts (Straight Only): Commercial quality extruded aluminum sections formed to match the Axiom trim channel profile; pre-assembled with built-in splice plates that connect to straight Axiom sections; 7/8 inch x 7/8 inch x 4” factory-finished in (factory-applied baked polyester paint to match Armstrong) ( ) color; (architectural film textured finish); (custom paint finish color-matched to approved sample).

a. AX4OSCP – 4” Axiom Classic Outside Corner Post

3. Axiom Inside Corners (Straight Only): Commercial quality extruded aluminum sections formed to match the Axiom trim channel profile that connect to straight Axiom sections, 12 inch x 3/4 inch x 4” factory-finished in (factory-applied baked polyester paint to match Armstrong) ( ) color); (architectural film textured finish); (custom paint finish color-matched to approved sample).

a. AX4QSIS – 4” inside corner

4. Accessories:

a. AXHGC – Hanging clip, commercial quality aluminum, unfinished, used to align grid members that extend beyond the lower edge of the trim.

b. AX2HGC – Hanging clip, commercial quality aluminum, unfinished, used when suspension wires must be attached directly to the trim sections.

c. AXSPLICE – Splice with set screws, galvanized steel, unfinished, used to attached factory-mitered inside corners

d. AX4SPLICE – Splice with set screws, galvanized steel, unfinished, used to attach joints between sections of trim.

e. AXTBC – T-bar Connector Clip, galvanized steel, unfinished, used to attach channel trim to supporting suspension members.

f. AXSPTHDC – Perimeter Trim Hold Down Clip used to secure cut edges of metal panels at the Axiom trim.

g. AXBTSTR – Drywall Bottom Trim Straight, extruded aluminum, 120 inches x 1-9/64 inch x 27/32 inch, used to finish edges of 5/8 inch drywall that is applied to the bottom surface of the Axiom.



h. AXBTCUR – Drywall Bottom Trim Curved, extruded aluminum, 120 inches x 1-9/64 inch x 27/32 inch, used to finish edges of 5/8 inch drywall that is applied to the bottom surface of the Axiom.


A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of clouds. Comply with reflected ceiling plans. Coordinate panel layout with mechanical, electrical and sprinkler fixtures.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install clouds in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and in compliance with the authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Replace damaged and broken panels. B. Clean exposed surfaces of canopies per manufacturer’s instructions.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 09 91 00

PAINTING

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 09 91 00 Page - 1 Painting Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011


A. Interior and Exterior paint and coating systems 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. See related sections of the specifications for surface preparation, primers, and finishes provided by others. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products B. ASTM D4442-92 – Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood

Base Materials C. EPA – Method 24 D. GS-11, GC-03 E. NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers) - Industrial Maintenance Painting F. NPCA (National Paint and Coatings Association) - Guide to U.S. Government Paint Specifications G. PDCA (Painting and Decorating Contractors of America) - Architectural Painting Specifications Manual H. PDCA Standard P1-04 Touchup Painting and Damage Repair; Financial Responsibility I. PDCA Standard P5-04 Benchmark Sample Procedures for Paint and other Decorative Coating System J. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual K. SSPC-SP 1 – Solvent Cleaning

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. 1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets on each paint and coating product shall include:

1. Product characteristics 2. Surface preparation instructions and recommendations 3. Primer requirements and finish specifications 4. Storage and handling requirements 5. Application methods 6. Cautions and VOC levels

C. Selection Samples: 1. Submit a complete set of color chips representing the selected colors in the contract documents. 2. Submit two samples illustrating selected colors and textures for each type.


A. Pre-Application meeting: 1. Prior to contractor starting to apply any material covered in this section, there shall be a meeting with the

Owner, Architect, Contractor, Subcontractor, and Material Supplier. 2. Meeting shall discuss mockups, surface condition, surface preparation, material application, and

inspection procedures. a. Prepare all mockups in accordance with PDCA P5-04.

B. The Contractor shall request the following in progress field inspections and the Owner's representative shall approve each inspection prior to proceeding with the next step. 1. Following surface preparation and prior to priming 2. Following priming and prior to applying finish coats 3. Following application of finish coats


SECTION 09 91 00

PAINTING


4. All inspections shall follow normal procedure for verifying surface conditions and materials applied. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum 5-years documented experience.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5-years documented experience.


A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for finishes.

1.9 FIELD SAMPLES

A. Locate where directed by Architect and Owner. B. Accepted sample may remain as part of the work.


A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00, follow manufacturer’s requirements.

B. Deliver products to site in manufacturer’s unopened containers with the following labeling and information: 1. Product name and type (description) 2. Application & use instructions 3. Surface preparation instructions 4. VOC content 5. Environmental issues; i.e. cleanup requirements, disposal requirements, etc 6. Batch date 7. Color number and name

C. Storage: 1. Store paint materials in a properly ventilated area at the temperature range r required by the

manufacturer'. 2. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials and materials used with solvent-based materials in

accordance with manufacturer’s and other regulating authorities having jurisdiction. 1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are below 40°F, or below the manufacturer’s requirements.

B. Do no interior or exterior work on unprotected surfaces if it is raining or moisture from any source is present or expected before finishes can dry or attain proper cure. 1. Allow surfaces to dry and attain required temperatures and conditions before proceeding or

continuing previously started work. C. Follow manufacturer's directions for extremes and dew point requirements.

1. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results.

2. Do not apply coatings under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. D. Provide lighting level of 80 foot-candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. E. Dispose of waste in accordance with applicable regulations.

1.12 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Stock - 1 Gallon Of Each Type/Color Used PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS


SECTION 09 91 00

PAINTING


A. Acceptable Manufacturers

1. The painting schedule is based on products manufactured by Kelly Moore and Sherwin Williams Paint Companies.

2. The owner’s representative will consider equal products by other manufacturers for approval in accordance with paragraph 1.4.

B. Owner will consider requests for substitutions in accordance with provisions of the specifications. 1. When submitting a request for substitution, provide complete product data specified above under

paragraph 1.4 for each substitute product. 2.2 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete (Walls, Ceilings, Poured, Precast, Unglazed Brick, Cement Board, Tilt-Up, and Cast-In Place)

1. Latex Systems

a. Semi-Gloss Finish 1st Coat: Masonry Primer (7-mil wet, 3-dry) 2nd Coat: Industrial Zero VOC Semi-Gloss Acrylic 3rd Coat: Industrial Zero VOC Semi-Gloss Acrylic,(2.5 - 4-mil dry per coat)

2. Epoxy System (Water/Wet Areas)

a. Semi-Gloss Finish 1st Coat: Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy 2nd Coat: Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy (2.5 - 3-mil dry per coat)

B. Masonry (Ceiling)

1. Dryfall Waterborne Systems

a. Eggshell Finish 1st Coat: Waterbased Acrylic Dry-Fall 2nd Coat: Waterbased Acrylic Dry-Fall

C. Masonry (CMU, Split-Face, Scored, Smooth, High-Density, Low- Density, Fluted) -

1. Latex

a. Semi-Gloss Finish 1st Coat: Block Surfacer (16-mil wet, 8-mil dry) 2nd Coat: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex 3rd Coat: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex (2.5 - 4-mil dry per coat)

2. Water Epoxy System (Water/Wet Areas)

a. Semi-Gloss Finish 1st Coat: Block Surfacer,(16-mil wet, 8-mil dry) 2st Coat: Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy 3rd Coat: Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy(2.5 - 3-mil dry per coat)

D. Metal – (Aluminum, Galvanized, Structural Steel Columns, Joists, Trusses, Beams, Miscellaneous & Ornamental Iron, Structural Iron, Ferrous Metal, Etc.)

1. Industrial Enamel

a. Semi-Gloss Finish 1st Coat: Industrial Rust Inhibiting Universal Primer (5.0 – 10.0-mil dry) 2nd Coat: Industrial Low VOC Semi-Gloss Enamel 3rd Coat: Industrial Low VOC Semi- Gloss Enamel (2.5 - 4.0-mil dry per coat)

E. Metal – (Galvanized: Ceiling & Ductwork)

1. Dryfall Waterborne Systems

a. Eggshell Finish 1st Coat: Waterbased Acrylic Dry-Fall


SECTION 09 91 00

PAINTING


2nd Coat: Waterbased Acrylic Dry-Fall

F. Wood (Walls, Ceilings, Doors, Trim) - Assume Stain unless 'Painted' noted on drawings.

1. Enamel Systems - Where paint noted:

a. Semi-Gloss Finish 1st Coat: Multipurpose Primer (Sim. to Glidden Multipurpose 3210-1200) 2nd Coat: Low Odor/Low VOC Interior Enamel Semi-Gloss 3rd Coat: Low Odor/Low VOC Interior Enamel Semi-Gloss (4-mil wet, 1.6-mil dry per coat)

2. Stain and Varnish Systems - Where stain noted

a. Gloss or Satin Finish (Coordinate with Architect) 1st Coat: Minwax 250 VOC Stains 2nd Coat: WoodClassics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish 3rd & 4th Coat: WoodClassics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish(4.0-mil wet, 1.0-mil

dry per coat) G. Drywall (Walls, Ceiling, etc)

1. Enamel w/Light Sand Texture -

a. Semi-Gloss Finish 1st Coat: Multipurpose Primer (Sim. to Glidden Multipurpose 3210-1200) 2nd Coat: Low Odor/Low VOC Interior Enamel Semi-Gloss - Color: Q7-56P 3rd Coat: Low Odor/Low VOC Interior Enamel Semi-Gloss (4-mil wet, 1.6-mil dry per coat)

Color: Q7-56P

2. Epoxy w/Light Sand Texture - (All Wet Areas Surfaces)

a. Semi-Gloss Finish 1st Coat: Multipurpose Epoxy Primer (Sim. to Glidden Multipurpose 3210-1200) 2nd Coat: Low Odor/Low VOC Interior Epoxy Semi-Gloss - Color: Q7-56P 3rd Coat: Low Odor/Low VOC Interior Epoxy Semi-Gloss (4-mil wet, 1.6-mil dry per coat)

Color: Q7-56P

2.3 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE: A. Concrete - All ALL exterior concrete locations

1. Weather/Water Repellant/Graffiti Control

a. Clear Finish Prosoco Blok-Guard & Graffiti Control II or Equal. Applied per Manufacturers Recommendations

B. Masonry (ALL Brick, Screen Walls, Brick at Fencing, CMU, Split-Face Scored, Smooth, High-Density, Low- Density, Fluted) - At all exterior locations

1. Weather/Water Repellant/Graffiti Control

a. Clear Finish Prosoco Blok-Guard & Graffiti Control II or Equal. Applied per Manufacturers Recommendations

C. Metal – (Aluminum, Galvanized)

1. Latex Systems

a. Industrial Clear Gloss Finish 1st Coat: Industrial Metal Universal Primer (5.0 – 10.0-mil dry) 2nd Coat: Zero VOC Gloss Acrylic 3rd Coat: Zero VOC Gloss Acrylic (2.5 - 4.0-mil dry per coat)

D. METAL - (Misc Iron, Ornamental Iron, Structural Iron, Ferrous Metal - ex. But not limited to, Doors, Handrails, Metal Steps)


SECTION 09 91 00

PAINTING


1. Alkyd Industrial Gloss (Sim. 4308-0900)

a. Gloss Finish 1st Coat: Industrial Alkyd Universal Primer, (2.0 – 4.0-mil dry) 2nd Coat: Industrial Low VOC Gloss Enamel 3rd Coat: Industrial Low VOC Gloss Enamel (2.5 - 4.0-mil dry per coat)

E. Wood (Trim, Hardboard-Bare/Primed)

1. Latex Systems

a. Gloss Finish 1st Coat: Exterior Latex Wood Primer (4-mil wet, 1.4-mil dry) 2nd Coat: Exterior Latex Gloss 3rd Coat: Exterior Latex Gloss (4.0-mil wet, 1.3-mil dry per coat)

b. Semi-Gloss Finish 1st Coat: Exterior Latex Wood Primer (4-mil wet, 1.4-mil dry) 2nd Coat: Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B42 Series 3rd Coat: S Acrylic Semi-Gloss (4.0-mil wet, 1.5-mil dry per coat)

F. Architectural PVC, Plastic, Fiberglass

1. Acrylic Latex Systems

a. Semi-Gloss Finish 1st Coat: Latex Primer (4-mil wet, 1.4-mil dry) 2nd Coat: Acrylic Semi-Gloss 3rd Coat: Acrylic Semi-Gloss (4-mil wet, 1.5-mil dry per coat)

G. Drywall (Gypsum Board, Exterior Drywall)

1. Acrylic Latex Systems

a. Semi-Gloss Finish 1st Coat: Exterior Latex Primer(4-mil wet, 1.4-mil dry) 2nd Coat: Acrylic Semi-Gloss 3rd Coat: Acrylic Semi-Gloss (4-mil wet, 1.5-mil dry per coat)

2.4 MATERIALS – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Paints and Coatings - General 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide factory-mixed coatings. 2. When required, mix coatings to correct consistency in accordance with manufacturer's instructions

before application. 3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless approved in manufacturer's

product instructions. 4. Confirm VOC’s need by using the products MSDS sheets.

B. Product requirements for this project: 1. Paints and coatings used on the interior of the building (defined as inside of the weatherproofing

system and applied on-site) shall comply with the following criteria: a. Consistent with the California Department of Health Services Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources using Small-scale Environmental Chambers, including 2004 Addenda. b. All products shall meet the VOC content requirements in the applicable category of South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings (Amended July 2007, or current version) c. All products shall meet the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act of 1986 and the most current list of chemicals (Proposition 65, CA OEHHA).

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Coating application accessories:


SECTION 09 91 00

PAINTING


1. Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required, per manufacturer’s specifications.


A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared; notify Owner’s

Representative of unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Owner’s Representative of

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. D. Proceed with work only after conditions are corrected and approved by all parties, otherwise application of

coatings will be considered as an acceptance of surface conditions. E. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. F. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter, DO NOT apply finishes unless

moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12% 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12% 3. Interior Wood: 15%, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016 4. Concrete Floors: 8%

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. The surface shall be dry and in sound condition. 1. Remove all oil, dust, dirt, loose rust, peeling paint, or other contamination to ensure good adhesion.

B. Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

C. Correct defects and clean surfaces that affect work of this section. 1. Remove existing coatings that exhibit loose surface defects.

D. Seal with shellac any marks, which may bleed through surface finishes. E. Impervious Surfaces:

1. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. 2. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

F. Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: 1. Remove all oil, grease, dirt, oxide, and other foreign material by cleaning per SSPC-SP1 Solvent

Cleaning. G. Block/Unit Masonry (Cinder and Concrete)

1. Remove all loose mortar and foreign material. 2. Surface must be free of laitance, concrete dust, dirt, form release agents, moisture curing

membranes, loose cement, and hardeners. 3. Let concrete and mortar cure at least 30 days at 75°F unless the manufactures products are

designed for application prior to the 30-day period. 4. The pH of the surface and moisture content must be in accordance with the paint manufacturer’s

recommendations prior to painting. H. Concrete:

1. Remove contamination by washing with an appropriate cleaner, rinse thoroughly. 2. The pH of the surface and moisture content shall be in accordance with the paint manufacturer’s

recommendations prior to painting. 3. Allow the surface to thoroughly dry. 4. Fill bug holes, air pockets, and other voids under another section with a cement-patching compound

of sufficient cohesive strength to support the specified coating system. I. Cement:

1. Remove all surface contamination by washing with an appropriate cleaner, rinse thoroughly. a. Allow the surface to dry thoroughly. b. The pH of the surface and moisture content should be in accordance with the paint

manufacturer’s recommendations prior to painting.


SECTION 09 91 00

PAINTING


J. Drywall – Interior: Light Sand Texture 1. Shall be clean, dry and all dust removed prior to painting. 2. All nail heads must be set and spackled. 3. Tape all joints and cover with a joint compound. 4. Spackled nail heads and tape joints shall be sanded smooth.

K. Galvanized Surfaces: 1. Clean per SSPC-SP1 using detergent and water or a degreasing cleaner to remove greases and oils. 2. Apply a test area, priming as required. 3. Allow the coating to cure in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation before testing. 4. Perform adhesion tests in accordance with ASTM 3359 Adhesion by Tape Test. 5. If adhesion is poor, then notify Owner’s representative that additional surface preparation under

another section is necessary to remove pre-treatments or contaminants that interfere with adhesion of the coating.

L. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. M. Plaster Surfaces:

1. Shall allow to thoroughly dry for at least 30 days before painting, unless the manufacturer’s products are designed for application prior to the 30-day period. a. Bare plaster must be cured and hard prior to painting. b. Correct any soft, porous, or powdery plaster per requirements under another section of the

specifications. N. Steel: Structural, Plate, etc:

1. Check other sections for additional surface preparation and shop priming of bare steel surfaces. 2. Surface preparation shall include appropriate SSPC recommended methods. 3. Shop primer shall be compatible with the field-applied coatings. 4. Surfaces shall be dry and clean prior to the application of field-applied coatings. 5. Remove all contaminants in accordance with SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning.

O. Wood: 1. Shall be clean and dry, then prime and paint as soon as possible. 2. Scrape, sand, and spot prime knots and pitch streaks before a full priming coat is applied. 3. Patch all nail holes and imperfections with a wood filler or putty and sand smooth after application of

primer. P. Wood and Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.

3.3 APPLICATION/INSTALLATION

A. Mix, thin, and apply all coatings and products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply coatings to wet or damp surfaces.

1. Wait at least 30 days before applying to new concrete or masonry, or follow manufacturer’s procedures to apply appropriate coatings prior to 30 days.

2. Test new concrete for moisture content. C. Apply coatings using methods recommended by manufacturer. D. Uniformly apply coatings without runs, drips, or sags, without brush marks, and with consistent sheen to

achieve a properly painted surface in accordance with PDCA Standard P1-04. E. Apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve the manufacturer’s recommended dry film thickness. F. The coated surface shall be inspected and accepted by the Owner’s Representative.

3.4 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Refer to Division 21, 22, 23, 26, 27, & 28 for schedule of color-coding and identification banding of equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit.

B. Paint shop primed equipment. C. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and

paint separately. D. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers,

brackets, collars, and supports, in finished areas, except where items are pre-finished. E. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through

grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to visible surfaces.


SECTION 09 91 00

PAINTING


1. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers and grilles to match face panels. F. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas. G. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing

equipment. H. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements indicated.

1. Color band and identify with flow arrows, names, and numbering. I. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to

finishing. 3.5 TOUCH UP and DAMAGE REPAIR

A. Contractor shall repair all deficiencies in coating application in accordance with PDCA Standard P1-04. B. Inform Owner’s representative of all damage to properly painted surfaces and receive authorization prior to

performing damage repair.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 11 00 Page - 1 Visual Display Surfaces Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 10 11 00

VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Marker boards. 2. Tack Boards.


1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Hardboard Association (AHA) A135.4 – Basic Hardboard.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A208.1 – Mat Formed Wood Particleboard.

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A 424 – Steel Sheets for Porcelain Enameling. 2. B 221 – Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. 3. E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics for Building Materials.

D. Porcelain Enamel Institute (PEI) – Performance Specifications for Porcelain Enamel Chalkboards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Descriptive data on display boards, including marker board surface, track boards, frame, time, and accessories.

B. Samples: 1. 3 x 5 inch marker board samples in specified color. 2. 3 x 3 inch fabric facing samples showing available colors.


A. Fabric Facings: Fire Hazard classification of 25 or less, tested to ASTM E 84.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Contract Documents are based on products by Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.

B. Equivalent products by the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Best-Rite Chalkboard Co. 2. Carolina Chalkboard. 3. Greensteel. 4. Newline Products

C. Substitutions: Under Provisions of Division 1.



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 424, Type 1, Commercial Quality.

B. Aluminum: 1. Extrusions: ASTM B 221, 6061 or 6063 alloy, temper best suited to application. 2. Foil: Minimum 5 mils thick.

C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, waterproof resin binder, sanded faces.

D. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, tempered.

E. Fabric: Manufacturer’s standard vinyl fabric.

F. Cork: Natural cork.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Type best suited to application.

B. Adhesive: Type Recommended by marker board manufacturer; compatible with substrate materials.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Marker Boards: (Matte Finish) 1. Facing: LCS Matte Porcelain Enamel Steel Markerboards, Color as Selected 2. Core: 3/8 Duracore 3. Backing: Moisture Barrier Backing

B. Tack Boards: 1. Facing: Fabricork Vinyl, Type II, Class A, 20 oz. 2. Cork: ¼ inch thick. 3. Backing: 3/8 Duracore

C. Frame and Trim: 1. Profile: Claridge 800 Series or approved substitute. 2. Trim Frame: Width 5/8” 3. Chalk rail: Extruded Aluminum, manufacturers standard profile, full width of

marker board, closed ends. 4. Map/display rail: Extruded aluminum, manufacturer’s standard profile, full width

of marker board, 1 inch high cork insert. 5. Map Hooks: Provide 1 map hook for each 2 feet of map rail.( Min. 2 hooks at all

locations) 6. Flag holder: Claridge No. 51FH; formed or extruded aluminum; provide two per

room.

D. Finishes: 1. Porcelain enamel: Glass fibered enamel baked to vitreous surface, PEI Type A,

special gloss finish for use with liquid markers, white color to be selected. 2. Fabric: Color to be selected from manufacturers standards 3. Aluminum frame and trim: Anodized, clear color.




3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install visual display boards in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions

B. Set plumb and level

C. Secure with concealed fasteners.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Cover marker board surfaces with temporary protective cover taped frame.

END OF SECTION



Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 14 00 Page - 1 Interior Signage Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 10 14 00

PLASTIC INTERIOR SIGNS PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes 1. Custom Fabricated Resin wall mounted interior signs.


1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings: Include location, size, schedule, mounting height, and content of each sign.

B. Samples: Typical Sign.


A. Conform to applicable code for location and mounting height of accessibility signs.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Andco Industries Corp. 2. APCO Graphics. 3. Architectural Graphics. 4. Best Manufacturing Co. 5. Spanjer Brothers, Inc. 6. Vomar Products, Inc.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Signs: 1. Type: Matte finish melamine plastic laminate with contrasting color core; non

static, fire, retardant, and self extinguishing. 2. Thickness: Indicated on Details 3. Face and core colors: As indicted on Drawings

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Manufacturer’s recommended security screws (mechanically fastened) at all surfaces.


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 14 00 Page - 2 Interior Signage Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Complete Schedule in Plans. All 8" Round for All Signs (As Scheduled) 9x12 Rectangle for Occupancy Signs (4 Total)

B. Fabricate signs per Details in plans.

C. Characters: 1. Height: 5/8 inch. 2. Style: Helvetica Medium, upper case. 3. Width to height ratio: Between 3:5 and 1:1. 4. Chemically fused to base

D. Graphics: Universal accessibility symbols, 6 inches high.

E. Provide Grade 2 Braille indications for each character and graphic.

F. Corners: ½ inch radius.

G. Edges: Beveled.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces of loose and foreign matter.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install with concealed fastener or security screws.

B. Locate signs on wall adjacent to scheduled doors to meet T.A.S. Standards

3.3 SCHEDULE - LOCATED IN PLANS

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 14 19 Page - 1 Dimensional Letters Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 10 14 19

DIMENSIONAL LETTERS PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Dimensional letters cut from aluminum. 2. Attachment hardware.


1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) 2604 – Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) B 209 – Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: indicate character style, layout, dimensions, materials, finishes, and attachment.

B. Samples: Typical letter in specified size, style, and finish.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Plate: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper best suited to application. B. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Sign International Inc. 2. A.R.K. Ramos 3. The Southwell Co.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors: Type best suited to application – Masonry

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate letters in accordance with approved Shop Drawings.

B. Cut from ½ inch thick aluminum plate.


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 14 19 Page - 2 Dimensional Letters Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

C. Letter Style: Helvetica

1. 2 Sets at Exterior: Height: 16 inches – 29 Letters – ORAN M. ROBERTS ELEMENTARY SCHOOL (Verify During Shop Drawing Phase)

2. 2 Sets at Exterior: Height: 14 inches – 14 Letters – 4919 E. GRAND AVE. (Verify During Shop Drawing Phase)

3. 1 Set at Interior: Height: 14 inches – 17 Letters – LIBRARY BIBLIOTECA. (Verify During Shop Drawing Phase)

4. 1 Set at Interior: Height: 14 inches – 36 Letters – MULTIPURPOSE ROOM SALON DE USOS MULTIPLES (Verify During Shop Drawing Phase)

D. Mounting Method: Projected on Masonry

E. Dress edges to remove tool marks.

F. Finish: Polyester enamel coating, AAMA 2604, color to be selected from manufacturer’s standards.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved Shop Drawings.

B. Set plumb, level, rigid, and aligned.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 14 23 Page - 1 Post and Panel Signs Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 10 14 23

POST AND PANEL SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Documents: Provisions established within the General and Supplementary Conditions of the

Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section.

B. Section Includes: 1. Double Post and Panel Signs

C.


A. Supplier: Obtain all products in this section from a single supplier. B. Regulatory Requirements: Products shall meet requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act

Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) and local amendments and modifications. C. Installer: Installation shall be performed by installer specialized and experienced in work similar to that

required for this project.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with requirements of Division 1. B. Product Data: Submit product data for specified products. Include material details for each sign

specified. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product components, including

dimensions, anchorage, and accessories. D. Samples: Submit supplier’s standard color chart for selection purposes and selected colors for

verification purposes. E. Installation: Submit supplier’s installation instructions. F. Closeout Submittals:

1. Submit operation and maintenance data for installed products, including precautions against harmful cleaning materials and methods.

2. Submit warranty documents specified herein.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

1. Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.

2. Deliver products in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

3. Store products protected from weather, temperature, and other harmful conditions as recommended by supplier.

4. Handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1.5 WARRANTY A. Project Warranty: Comply with requirements of Division 1. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized

company official. 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from product ship date.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SIGNAGE SYSTEMS A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. ASI, 3860 W. Northwest Highway, Suite 350, Dallas, TX 75220; (214) 352- 9140 telephone; (214) 352-9741 facsimile; (800) ASI-SPEC [274-7732]



2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01600. B. Acceptable Product: COMPASS Exterior Panel Sign System, with the following mounting options:

1. Double Post and Panel Signs: a) Panel size: 24” X 36” or as indicated on plans. b) Panel type: Regular panel, 1" (25 mm) wide. c) Panel attachment type: Top loading panels. d) Posts

1) 2) Round Posts: [3-1/2" (90 mm) diameter, one-, two- or four-channel posts.] [2-3/4" (70 mm) diameter, one channel posts.]

e) Mounting: 1) Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel ground sleeve.

C. Graphic Process: 1. Letter styles and sizes: 4” letters - Helvetica 2. Graphic technique: Surface screen process. 3. Text or graphic color(s) - Specify from manufacturer's standard color chart. 4. Text and graphic schedule: Indicated on drawings.

2.2 SIGN MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Materials and Components

1. Aluminum Panels: Meeting ASTM B209, alloy EN 5052 H12, minimum 0.05" (1.25mm) thick. 2. Aluminum Extrusions: Meeting ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5. 3. Accessories: Provide end caps, couplings, coupling fittings, mounting fittings, interchangeable

fittings, and other hardware and accessories for a complete installation. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard two-phase, high temperature cured polyester color coating as follows:

1. Primer: 2 mil thick chromium layer for optimum surface coat adhesion and weatherability. 2. Top Coat: Two-component, water-based, non-toxic, lead-free, zero emissions, high

temperature cured polyester coating of 2-3 mil thickness. 3. Colors: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

2.3 FABRICATION - GENERAL A. General: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs,

shapes, sizes, and details of construction. B. Allow for thermal movement resulting from a maximum ambient temperature change (range) of 100

deg F (38 deg C). Design, fabricate, and install sign assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and over-stressing of welds and fasteners.

C. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to the weather to exclude water penetration. D. Preassemble signs in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.

Disassemble signs only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation, in a location not exposed to view after final assembly.

E. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners to appear inconspicuous. F. Form panels to required size and shape. Comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,

finish, color, and details of construction. G. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods to produce message panels with closely fitting joints.

Align edges and surfaces with one another in the relationship indicated. H. Increase material thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners or backing materials as required to

produce surfaces without distortion, buckles, warp, or other surface deformations.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify installation conditions previously established under other

sections are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Scheduling of installation by Owner or its representative implies that substrate and conditions are

prepared and ready for product installation. Proceeding with installation implies installer’s acceptance of substrate and conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install product in accordance with supplier’s instructions. B. Install product in locations indicated using mounting methods recommended by sign manufacturer and

free from distortion, warp, or defect adversely affecting appearance. C. Install product level, plumb, and at heights indicated.



D. Install product at heights to conform to Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) and applicable local amendments and regulations.

E. Install signs within the following tolerances and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations: 1. Within 1 inch vertically and horizontally of intended location.

3.3 CLEANING, PROTECTION, AND REPAIR A. Repair scratches and other damage which might have occurred during installation. Replace

components where repairs were made but are still visible to the unaided eye from a distance of 10 feet. B. Remove temporary coverings and protection to adjacent work areas. Clean installed products in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to Owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris from project in accordance with provisions in Division 1.

3.4 SIGN SCHEDULE A. Schedule: Refer to signage schedule and Drawings for sizes, locations, and layout of signage types,

sign text copy, and graphics.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 10 21 13

SOLID PLASTIC TOILET PARTITIONS AND SCREENS

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 21 13 Page - 1 Toilet Partitions Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Plastic compartment work includes the following, where indicated: 1. Floor-mounted overhead braced compartments & screens

B. Furnish all labor and materials necessary for the completion of work in this section as

shown on the contract drawings and specified herein.

C. Work in this section shall include, but is not limited to: 1. Toilet compartments, compartment doors, urinal screens, privacy screens and

entry partitions. 2. Hardware for toilet compartments and plastic partitions. 3. Shop drawings and working drawings. 4. Manufacturer’s guarantee.

D. Related work specified elsewhere shall include accessories and anchorage/blocking for

attachment of partitions. 1.02 PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit six (6) sets of shop drawings and details for architect’s approval.

B. Colors: Black-EX Dimpled Finish

C. Color samples and hardware samples shall be submitted for approval by the architect upon request.


A. Fire Resistance: Partition materials shall comply with the following requirements, when tested in accordance with the ASTM E 84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials: 1. Smoke Developed Index: Not to exceed 450 2. Flame Spread Index: Not to exceed 75 3. Material Fire Ratings:

a. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Class B b. International Code Council (ICC): Class B


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in manufacture of products specified in this section, and whose products have been in satisfactory use under similar service conditions for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer’s Qualifications: A Company or Individual, regularly engaged in installation of

products specified in this Section, with a minimum of 5 years experience.


SECTION 10 21 13



1.05 WARRANTY

A. SCRANTON PRODUCTS (Santana/Comtec/Capitol), guarantees its plastic against breakage, corrosion, and delamination under normal conditions for 25 years from the date of receipt by the customer. If materials are found to be defective during that period for reasons listed above, the materials will be replaced free of charge. (Labor not included in warranty.)

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Toilet partitions and screens to be supplied by SCRANTON PRODUCTS (Santana/ Comtec/Capitol),Scranton, PA, or approved equal.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Doors, panels and pilasters shall be 1" thick constructed from High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) resins. Partitions shall be fabricated from polymer resins compounded under high pressure, forming a single component which is waterproof, nonabsorbent and has a self-lubricating surface that resists marks from pens, pencils, markers and other writing instruments. All plastic components shall be covered with a protective plastic masking. 1. HDPE resin must contain a minimum of 20% total recycled content to comply with TX-

CHPS Credit ME4.1 - Recycled Content

2.03 CONSTRUCTION

A. Doors, panels, and pilasters shall be 1" thick with all edges rounded to a radius.

B. Doors and dividing panels shall be 55" high and mounted at 14" above the finished floor. An aluminum heat sinc may be fastened to the bottom edges (optional).

C. Pilasters shall be 82" high (standard) and fastened into a 3" high pilaster shoe with a

stainless steel tamper resistant torx head sex bolt. 2.04 HARDWARE

A. Door hardware shall be as noted: All Heavy Duty Vandal Resistant 1. Continuous Hinges shall be ST/ST 54 1/2" Helix Hinge type and fabricated from heavy-

duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5alloy) with bright dip anodized finish with wrap-around flanges, through bolted to doors and pilasters with stainless steel, torx head sex bolts. Hinges are set for either 15 degree opening or set to close. Doors 30" or over require the doors to set to a closed position. Verify hinge settings with Architect prior to installation.

2. Door strike/keeper shall be 6" long and made of heavy-duty extruded aluminum(6436-

T5 alloy) with a bright dip anodized finish and secured to the pilasters with stainless steel tamper resistant torx head sex bolts. Bumper shall be made of extruded black vinyl.

3. Latch and housing shall be made of heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy).

The latch housing shall have a bright dip anodized finish, and the slide bolt and button shall have a black anodized finish.

4. Each door shall be supplied with one coat hook/bumper and door pull made of chrome plated zamak. Handicapped doors shall be supplied with a second door pull and out swing doors with one door stop made of chrome plated zamak.


SECTION 10 21 13



B. Pilaster shoes shall be 3" high and made of one-piece molded HDPE plastic available in the following colors: burgundy, mocha, black, parchment, white, charcoal grey, hunter, grey, fossil, linen, beige, blueberry, azure, cappuccino, sandcastle, sandstone and glacier grey. OR, pilaster shoes shall be 3" high (type 304, 20 gauge) stainless steel. Pilaster shoes shall be secured to the pilaster with a stainless steel tamper resistant torx head sex bolt.

C. Wall brackets shall be 54" long and made of extruded PVC plastic and are available

in the following colors: burgundy, mocha, black, parchment, white, charcoal grey, hunter, grey, fossil, linen, beige, blueberry, azure, cappuccino, sandcastle, sandstone and glacier grey. These plastic brackets are fastened to the pilaster with stainless steel tamper resistant torx head screws and fastened to the panels with stainless steel tamper resistant torx head sex bolts. OR, wall brackets shall be 1½" stirrup type made of heavy-duty aluminum (6463-T5 alloy) with a bright dip anodized finish. Stirrup brackets shall be fastened to pilasters and panels with stainless steel tamper resistant torx head sex bolts.

D. Headrail shall be made of heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy) with

anti-grip design and integrated curtain track. The headrail shall have a clear anodized finish and shall be fastened to the headrail bracket by a stainless steel tamper resistant torx head sex bolt, and fastened at the top of the pilaster with stainless steel tamper resistant torx head screws.

E. Headrail brackets shall be 20 gauge stainless steel with a satin finish and secured to

the wall with a stainless steel tamper resistant torx head screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Examine areas to receive toilet partitions, screens, and shower compartments for correct height and spacing of anchorage/blocking and plumbing fixtures that may affect installation of partitions. Report any discrepancies to the architect.

B. Take complete and accurate measurements of complete toilet compartment locations.

C. Start of work constitutes acceptance of job.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level manor, with plastic laid out as shown on shop drawings and manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. All doors and panels to be mounted at 14" above finished floor. C. Clearance at vertical edges of doors shall be uniform top to bottom and shall not

exceed 3/8". D. No evidence of cutting, drilling, and/or patching shall be visible on the finished work. E. Finished surfaces shall be cleaned after installation and be left free of all imperfections.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 10 21 23.13

CUBICLE CURTAINS

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 21 23.23 Page - 1 Cubicle Curtains Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Privacy Curtain 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Curtains 1.03 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements: Provide privacy curtains that conform to the following requirements of regulatory agencies and the quality control of Clickeze, InPro Corporation. 1. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide curtains that conform with NFPA 701, Fire

Tests for Flame and Resistant Textiles and Films. 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s printed product data for each type of privacy curtain specified. B. Fabric Samples: Swatch cards of fabric samples illustrating fabric color and weave. C. Manufacturer’s Care Instruction: Printed care instructions for each curtain.


A. Deliver materials in unopened factory packaging to the jobsite. B. Inspect materials at delivery to assure that specified products have been received. C. Store in original packaging in a climate controlled location away from direct sunlight.


A. Environmental Requirements: Products must be installed in an interior climate controlled environment.

1.08 WARRANTY A. Standard Clickeze Limited Warranty against material and manufacturing defects. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Acceptable Manufacturer : InPro Corporation, PO Box 406 Muskego, WI 53150 USA; Telephone: 800-222-5556, Fax: 888-715-8407, Internet address: http://www.inprocorp.com

B. Provide all privacy curtains from a single source. C. Substitutions: Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of

Section 01 25 00. 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Privacy Curtain 1. Fabric: Provide 100% polyester Simplicity curtains, 11.25 oz./in. yd. Fabric is to be

opaque, washable, flame retardant and closely woven. 2. Shield Fabric: Provide 100% polyester, impregnated and multi-coated with Aqueous

based microporous polymers. 3. Enviro GT Fabrics: Provide fabrics that are 100% Eco Polyester. Eco polyester fabrics

shall be free of chlorine and PBT's (persistent, bioaccumulative and/or toxic substances). 4. Open Mesh Cloth: Provide curtain heading of open weave nylon mesh material with 50#

1/2" (12.7mm) holes to permit air and steam circulation. Mesh is to be flame retardant, washable and dry-cleanable.

2.03 FINISH AND COLOR

A. Cubicle Privacy Fabric: Select solid or patterned fabric from manufacturer’s standard selection. B. Open Mesh Cloth: Provide curtain heading of mesh material in a color selected from

manufacturer’s standard selection.


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 21 23.23 Page - 2 Cubicle Curtains Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Privacy Curtain 1. Curtain Width: Manufacture curtains of one piece, sized to 10 percent wider than the track

length but no less than 1' (304.8mm) extra fullness. Width tolerance +/- 3”. 2. Curtain Height: Specify height. Bottom of privacy curtains hang 12"-15" (304.8-355.6mm)

above floor. Dressing room curtains hang 4"-6" (101.6m-152.4mm) above floor. Height tolerance +/- 1”.

3. Curtain Heading: Manufacture with or without heading of open mesh cloth, to the same width as the curtain fabric. Include 4-ounce (113.4g) nickel-plated grommets, 6" (152.4mm) on center for carriers.

4. Seams: Bottom hem shall be double-fold and 11/4" (31.75mm) wide. Curtains shall be seamless if possible or lock stitch seams in two rows. Turn seam edges and lock stitch. Sewing thread to be triple-ply twisted nylon.

5. Sewing Options a. Standard: Mesh bottom band sewn to fabric – exposed. b. Hidden Mesh: Mesh bottom band hidden under hem of fabric. c. Framing: Fabric sewing on sides of mesh and top of mesh banding (where

grommets are placed). Mesh is "framed". d. Banding: Fabric is on top of mesh banding (where grommets are placed). e. Snaps: Ivory plastic snaps placed on mesh bottom banding and/or on side hems. f. Snap Tape: continuous metal snap tape placed on mesh bottom and/or on side

hems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions in which the cubicle tracking systems will be installed. 1. Complete all finishing operations, including painting, before beginning installation of

cubicle tracking system materials. 2. Verify that surfaces and above ceiling supports are ready to receive work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. General: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris and loose particles. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the cubicle track as indicated on the approved detail drawing for the appropriate substrate and in compliance with the Clickeze installation instructions.

B. Installation of Cubicle Tracking Systems: 1. Install cubicle track, secure, rigid, and true to ceiling line. 2. Slide carriers onto the track. 3. Install end cap or stop device. 4. Secure or suspend track to ceiling system. Install with mechanical fasteners or Gridclips. 5. Install curtains on carriers ensuring smooth operation.

3.04 CLEANING

A. At completion of the installation, remove any debris and clean surfaces in accordance with the Clickeze clean-up and maintenance instructions.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 22 13 - 1 Wire Mesh Partitions Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 10 22 13

WIRE MESH PARTITIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The work includes the manufacturing of mesh partitions as indicated and as specified. The Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.

1.2 SUBMITTAL

1. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions.

2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection. Include plan view elevations and large scale details. Show necessary items. Provide templates as required.


A. Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified with minimum 5 years documented experience. 2. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience.

B. Field Measurements: Confirm field measurements before fabrication, where possible. Allow for adjustments and fittings where required.

C. Inserts and Anchorage’s: Furnish devices which must be set in concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate with other work.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store and protect products.

B. Deliver materials to jobsite in unopened containers bearing manufacturer’s name and content identification.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturer’s offering Products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following:

CALIFORNIA WIRE PRODUCTS, Corona, CA 92882 PH (800) 486-7730 (800) 486-7730 FAX (951) 735-1070 E-mail: [email protected] http://www.cawire.com




2.2 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS

A. Partitions Frame and Wire Mesh:

1. Wire: #10 W&M gauge steel wire 1-1/2" diamond mesh, clinched to channel frames.

2. Vertical Frames: 1-1/4" X 5/8" roll formed 12 gauge ‘C’ shaped channel, specially formed to prevent telescoping, and provided with holes for bolting to adjacent panel.

3. Horizontal Frames: 1" x 1/2" roll formed 12 gauge channel using mortise and tenon construction for extra strength.

4. Center Stiffeners: (2) 1" X 1/2" roll formed 12 gauge channels riveted and welded for greater strength and rigidity.

5. Top Capping Bar: 2-1/4" X 1" roll formed 12 gauge channel with 1/4" ‘U’ bolts 24" o.c.

6. Floor Shoes: Aluminum 2" high with set screw adjustment.

7. Corner Posts: 1-1/4" X 1-1/4" x 1/8" 90° angle.

8. All hardware and anchors are furnished for a complete installation.

B. Door and Frame:

1. Doors:

a. Sliding: Constructed of 1-1/2" x 3/4" x 12 gauge channel frame banded with 1/8" x 1- 1/2" flat bar top and sides. Door to have (2) four-wheel hangers with box track.

b. Hinged: Constructed of 1-1/4" x 1/2" x 12 gauge channel frame banded with 1/8" x 1- 1/4" flat bar top and sides. 1-1/2" pair butt hinges welded to door sides and jambs.

2. Floor Brace: 3-1/2" x 1-1/2" roll formed 12 gauge channel brace with base plate and mounting anchors.

3. Adjustable Panel: 1-1/2" diamond #9 expanded metal panel securely attached with 1/4" machine screws to 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" angle.

4. Service Windows: Installed in any standard panel or door. Openings are 24" wide x 21" high. 12" steel shelf and padlock attachments provided.

5. Locks: Doors are equipped with mortise type cylinder locks operated from outside with key, and from inside with recess knob. Padlock hasps also available.

C. Finish: An HVLP applied shop coat of machinery gray enamel. Standard options include gray, tan, safety yellow, black, blue, red prime, and hot dipped galvanized. Special colors are available upon request.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which mesh partition units are to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install Work under this Section in accordance with manufacturer’s printed recommendations.

B. Erect partitions plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Adjust opening and closing units to operate freely without bind.

C. Provide additional field bracing as necessary for rigid, secure installation.

D. Install all accessories required for a completed installation.

E. Touch up paint damaged finish after completion of installation using field-applied paint to match color of shop-applied finish

END OF SECTION



SECTION 10 26 00

STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARD

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 26 00 Page - 1 Corner Guards Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Flush mount corner guard system for wall protection 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Flush Mount Stainless Steel Corner Guard Systems 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for each type of corner guard specified. B. Detail drawings indicating mounting details with the appropriate fasteners for specific project substrates. C. Samples for verification purposes of stainless steel, of each type indicated. D. Cleaning and maintenance instructions for door and wall protection systems.


A. Deliver materials in unopened factory packaging to the jobsite and store in original packaging in a climate controlled location away from direct sunlight.


A. Products must be installed in an interior climate controlled environment. 1.06 WARRANTY

A. Standard IPC Limited Lifetime Warranty against material and manufacturing defects. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, InPro Corporation, PO Box 406 Muskego, WI 53150 USA Telephone: 800-222-5556, Fax: 888-715-8407 Internet address: http://www.inprocorp.com

B. Substitutions: See Division 1 C. Provide all stainless steel corner guard and wall protection from a single source.


A. Flush Mount Corner Guard 1. Flush Mount Stainless Steel Corner Guard Model, Size SSEW-FM, Custom – specify return length, stud width, drywall thickness. Corner radius – 1/8" Height – 4'-0" (3.05m)

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: Corner guard shall be manufactured from Type 430, 16 gauge Stainless Steel, options: Type 304 (meets NSF Standard 51), 16 gauge.

2.04 COMPONENTS

A. Attachment 1. Fasteners: Pre-drilled beveled holes and Phillips head screws.

2.05 LOCATIONS A. At Kitchen - All External corners (with heave duty adhesive appropriate for substrate - tile, gyp., etc.) B. Any/All exposed corners of gypsum wallboard construction.


Dallas ISD – Sunset 10 26 00 – Page 2 Corner Guards BP 36 12/30/2011

2.06 FINISHES

A. Stainless steel: No. 4 satin finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions in which the corner guard systems will be installed. 1. Complete all finishing operations, including painting, before beginning installation of corner guards.

B. Wall surface shall be dry and free from dirt, grease and loose paint. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. General: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris and loose particles. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the corner guard as indicated on the approved detail drawing for the appropriate substrate and in compliance with the IPC installation instructions. Install corner guard level and plumb at the height indicated on the drawings. B. Installation of Stainless Steel Corner Guard:

1. Surface must be dry, clean and properly sealed. 2. Screw on: Position the corner guard on the wall and attach it using the supplied screws. 3. Remove the protective plastic covering from the exposed surface of the corner guard.

3.04 CLEANING

A. At completion of the installation, clean surfaces in accordance with the IPC clean up and maintenance instructions.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 10 28 13

TOILET ACCESSORIES

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 28 13 Page - 1 Toilet Accessories Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Toilet accessories. 2. Framed mirrors. 3. Attachment hardware. 4. Electric Ceiling Lift 5. Special Needs Changing Table

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements. 2. Division 26 – Electrical

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A117.1 - Safety Standards for the Handicapped

B. ADA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities - July 23, 2004 – Provisions for Children

C. ASTM A123 /A123M-02 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

D. ASTM A167-99 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip

E. ASTM A269-02 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service

F. ASTM A794-97 Standard Specifications for Commercial Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled

G. ASTM B456-95 - Electro-deposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Project Data: Manufacturer’s brochures showing sizes, details of function, finishes, and attachment methods.

B. Samples: One of each accessory, if requested.


A. Conform to applicable accessibility code for locating accessories.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Mirrors: 1. Warranty period: 10 years. 2. Warrant against silver spoilage resulting from manufacturing defects.


SECTION 10 28 13

TOILET ACCESSORIES


1.6 MAINTENANCE

A. Label keys and forward directly to Owner. PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Contract Documents are based on products by GAMCO, Kimberly Clark, THE Medical, and Horizon


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: 1. Sheet ASTM A 480/A 480M or ASTM A 666; Type 304, rollable temper. 2. Tubing: ASTM A 269

B. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 366.

C. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q1.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Stainless steel where exposed, hot dip galvanized where concealed; type best suited to substrate conditions.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Use stainless steel for exposed surfaces; galvanized steel may be used in concealed locations.

B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free from joints, and flat without distortion.

C. Weld joints of fabricated components and grind smooth.

D. Fabricate grab bars of tubing, free of visible joints, return to wall with end attachment flanges. Peen grip surfaces.

E. Fabricate soap dispensers to operate with less than 5 pound force.

F. Provide hangers, adapters, anchor plates and accessories required for installation. this includes any necessary blocking for a proper and safe and secure installation with adjacent surface.

G. Key locks alike: furnish six keys.

H. Framed Mirrors: 1. Frame: One piece, roll formed stainless steel channel, ½ x ½ inch, with corners

mitered. 2. Mirror: Apply one coat of silver, one coat of electroplated copper, and one coat or

organic mirror backing compound to back surface of glass.


SECTION 10 28 13

TOILET ACCESSORIES


Backing: Galvanized steel sheet. 1. Isolate glass from frame and backing with resilient, waterproof padding.

I. Shop assemble units and package complete with anchors and fittings.

J. Finishes: 1. Stainless steel: No. 4 satin, 8 polished. 2. Galvanizing: ASTM A 123/A 123M to 1.25 ounces per square foot. 3. Chrome plating: ASTM B 456, Type SC 2, polished finish.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Set plumb, level, and rigidly anchored.

C. Connect hand dryer, ceiling lift and changing table to power supply as specified in Division 26.

3.2 SCHEDULE :

DESCRIPTION CATALOG NO.

Toilet Tissue Holder GAMCO SPH-2 Double Roll with Shelf

Men’s Adult RR: 118, 216B

Towel Dispenser 09073 Kimberly Clark D2 Hard Roll

Soap Dispenser 09070 Kimberly Clark D2 1000ml

Mirror A Series - 18” x 24” and 26” x 60”

Grab Bars GAMCO 36 inches and 42 inches


Adult RR: 153, 159A, 235A




Sanitary Napkin Disposal ND1



Women’s Adult RR: 216C, 100E, 117,





SECTION 10 28 13

TOILET ACCESSORIES



Sanitary Napkin Vendor NV-2-4F5


Toilet Tissue Holder Bobrick B-2892

Student RR: 120C







Behavioral Unit: 108; Work Room 119, 207A, Clinic 120, Art 146, Art Storage 146A,



Special Needs RR: 113A





Curtain Rod/w Vinyl Curtain B207 (Sized for opening)

Soap Dish B973 (One)

Robe Hook B-2116

Electric Ceiling Lift THE Medical Cirrus Ceiling Lift - Model 600 Changing Table Horizon Special Needs Model 050-0055 55" w/Adjustable Height.

RR: 103A, 104A, 105A, 108A,115A, 116A, 129A, 130A, 133A, 134A, 135A, 136A, 137A,


138A,






Group RR: 149, 150, 228, 229

Electric Hand Dryers As Specified in Section 10 28 13.13


SECTION 10 28 13

TOILET ACCESSORIES





Mop Holder B-223 X 36”

Custodian Closets to Receive: 109, 131B, 218, 153D

END OF SECTON



SECTION 10 28 13.13

ELECTRIC HAND DRYERS

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 28 13.13 Page - 1 Electric Hand Dryers Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Warm air, high speed, energy efficient self-contained electric hand dryers.


A. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Electrical supply, conduit, wiring, boxes, and wiring devices for hand dryers.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ICC/ANSI A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities; 1998.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Operating instructions and performance. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings showing dimensions, method of attachment, and required supports.

D. Electrical wiring diagrams for connection of hand dryers.

E. Warranty for review by Architect.

F. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing electric hand dryers with 10 years minimum experience.

B. Equipment certified by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc., with UL labels.

C. Comply with ICC/ANSI A117.1.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer's standard limited warranty for period specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer:

1. Saniflow Corp., 12800 N.W. 38 Ave., Miami FL 33054-4525; Tel: 1-877-222-9125

B. Substitutions: Not permitted.

C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with Division 1.


SECTION 10 28 13.13



2.2 ELECTRIC HAND DRYERS

A. Hand Dryer: Speedflow M06ACS-UL sensor operated - Satin Stainless Steel Cover - Warm air, rapid drying, energy efficient electric hand dryer; surface mounted; entire dryer internally grounded, conforms to ADAAG projection. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years; limited warranty. 2. Controls: Automatic, activated by infrared optical sensor. Operates while hands are

under blower. Shut-off within 2 seconds when hands removed 3. Cover: One piece, vandal resistant, stainless steel cover 1/16 inch thick.

a. Finish: Satin stainless steel finish. 4. Air Intake: Inlet openings on bottom of cover. 5. Air Outlet: Delivers focused air stream at average hand position of 4 inches below air

outlet. 6. Wall PlateThe back base shall be aluminium and with 4 holes Ø 5/16” for wall

mounting, including silent-blocks to damp mechanical vibrations 7. Nominal Size: 11-1/2 inches wide by 10-1/2 inches high by 4 inches deep. 8. Weight:

a. 7.9 pounds 9. Power Source: 110/120 volt, 9.5 amp, 60 Hz 10. High speed universal brush motor should be 1/3 HP, 3.800-8200 rpm, A class 11. Fire resistant plastic UL 94-V0 fan scroll 12. Waved wire NiCr heating element mounted on a mica frame that incorporates a self-

resettable thermal cut-off at 302 ºF which disconnect the whole appliance. 13. Automatic disconnection system after 60 seconds of continuous use 14. Air speed: 4,920-9,840 linear feet per minute 15. Air Temperature(at 4" distance / 70 deg): 106-111 degrees F measured at average

hand position of 4 inches below air outlet. 16. Drying time: 10-15 sec 17. Effective Airflow: 36-58 CFM 18. Free Airflow: 43-70 CFM 19. Air Heater Output: 900 watts. 20. All metal parts coated according to Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. requirements. 21. Mount dryers at heights indicated on Drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION



C. Coordinate requirements for blocking to ensure adequate means for support and installation of hand dryers.

D. Coordinate requirements for power supply, conduit, disconnect switches and wiring.

3.3 INSTALLATION



SECTION 10 28 13.13



B. Install dryers at specified heights.

C. Install dryers securely to supporting substrate so that fixtures are level and aligned with each other. Use type and length of fastener as recommended by manufacturer for type of substrate.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Inspect installation to verify secure and proper mounting. Test each dryer to verify operation, control functions, and performance. Correct deficiencies.

B. Protect installed driers until completion of project.

C. Replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 10 43 13

DEFIBRILLATOR CABINETS

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 43 13 Page - 1 Defribulator Cabinets Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Defibrillator cabinets, accessories and their installation.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA):

1. ANSI/NFPA 10 Portable Fire Extinguishers.

B. Underwriters’ Laboratories of Canada (ULC):

1. CAN/ULC S508 Standard for the Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers.

C. American Heart Association (AHA):

1. 2005 American Heart Association Guidelines for Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation and Emergency Cardiovascular Care.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Section Submittal Procedures 01 33 00

B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing exterior and interior dimensions, defibrillator mounting, corner sections, hinge arrangement and hardware.

C. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer’s SPEC-DATA® product sheet, for specified products.

1. Material safety data sheets.

D. Quality Assurance:

1. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.

2. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.

3. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

E. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Manufacturer’s field reports specified.

F. Closeout Submittals:

1. Warranty: Submit warranty documents specified.

2. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data for installed products in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals

a. Include: Manufacturer’s instructions covering maintenance requirements and parts catalog, giving complete list of repair and replacement parts with cuts and identifying numbers.


A. Qualifications:

1. Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project.

2. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer capable of providing field service representation during construction and approving application method.

B. Regulatory Requirements.

1. International Building Code (IBC)Building Code for the City of Dallas, State of Texas.

C. Preinstallation Meetings: Conduct preinstallation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer’s installation instructions and manufacturer’s warranty requirements. Comply with Section 01 31 19 - Project Meetings.




A. General: Comply with 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements

B. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.

C. Delivery:

1. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original packaging with identification labels intact.

D. Storage and Protection:

1. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer.

E. Waste Management and Disposal:

1. Separate waste materials And Recycling.

2. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.

1.06 PROJECT AMBIENT CONDITIONS

A. Installation Location: Assemble and erect components only when temperatures are above 40degrees F

B. Sequence With Other Work: Comply with defibrillator cabinet manufacturer’s written recommendations for sequencing construction operations.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.

C. Warranty: Commencing on date of acceptance by Owner.

1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Include complete maintenance on defibrillator cabinets for 12 months after date of acceptance by Owner. Regularly and systematically Monthly examine, clean, adjust cabinets.

B. Use only standard parts from product line of equipment manufacturer.

C. Perform work during regular trade working hours satisfactory to Owner.

D. Ensure that maintenance personnel register with designated building personnel at time of inspections and maintenance.

1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Ensure manufacturer has minimum 5 years experience in manufacturing components similar to or exceeding requirements of project.

2.02 PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS/SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturer: JL Industries, Inc.

1. Contact: 4450 W 78th St. Cir., Bloomington, MN 55435; Telephone: (800) 554-6077, (952) 835-6850; Fax: (952) 835-2218; E-mail: [email protected]; website: www.jlindustries.com

2.03 AUTOMATIC EXTERNAL DEFIBRILLATOR (AED) CABINETS

.

A. Style: Interior Recessed

B. Cabinet Material:

1. Steel with electrostatic White impact resistant powder coat finish.

C. Door Style: Full acrylic with Vandal resistant handle, Lock and concealed hinges.

D. Trim Style: Flat trim

E. Tub: Rolled edge stainless steel # 4 finish with impact resistant Red epoxy coating.



F. Acceptable Materials: JL Industries, Inc., Lifestart 1400 Series [With FIRE-FX].

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Vandal Resistant Handle: Cam style locking device.

1. Acceptable Material: JL Industries, Inc., SAF-T-LOK.

B. Cabinet Seal:

1. Acceptable Material: JL Industries, Inc., SAF-T-CLASP.

C. Alarm: Ensure 85 dB horn sounds [For 2 minutes minimum] when door is opened [And stops when door closes] [And with flashing strobe light].

1. Keyed Alarm: On/Off.

2. Horn Power: 9 Volt DC battery [With low power indicator].

3. Acceptable Material: JL Industries, Inc., model Siren Strobe Alarm.

2.05 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify defibrillator cabinets in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 10 using Silk screen print on inside of acrylic Decals

1. Acceptable Material: JL Industries, Inc., Defibrillator Cabinet Identification.

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Ensure defibrillator cabinet components and materials are from single manufacturer.

2.07 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01 25 13 - Product Substitution Procedures

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLERS

A. Provide experienced and qualified technicians to carry out erection, assembly and installation of defibrillator cabinets.

3.02 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, product carton installation instructions and JL Industries, Inc., SPEC-DATA sheets.

3.03 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions:

1. Verify that substrates previously installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to installation of defibrillator cabinets.

2. Inform Owner, Architect, and PM of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.

3. Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied.

3.04 PREPARATION

A. Ensure surfaces are clean and free of dirt and other foreign matter harmful to performance of defibrillator cabinet materials.

3.05 INSTALLATION

A. Install defibrillator cabinets as indicated.

B. Arrangement of Equipment: Arrange equipment so that removal for repairs or replacement does not require undue dismantling or removing of other equipment components.

C. Coordinate defibrillator cabinet work with work of other trades for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays.

3.06 ADJUSTMENT

A. Adjust defibrillator cabinet doors to achieve smooth operation.

3.07 FINAL CLEANING

A. Do cleanup in accordance with Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning and Waste Management.



B. Upon completion, remove surplus and excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.

3.08 DEMONSTRATION

A. Instruct the Districts designated maintenance personnel in care, adjustment and operation of defibrillator cabinets.

B. If required, provide competent instructor for not less than [1] 4-hour training session after completion and acceptance of work.

C. Forward statement to Owner countersigned by maintenance personnel confirming that these instructions have been provided.

3.09 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage during construction in accordance with Section 01 76 00 - Protecting Installed Construction.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 44 16 Page - 1 Fire Extinguishers & Cabinets Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 10 44 16

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS & CABINETS PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Fire extinguishers. 2. Cabinets.


1.2 REFERENCES

A. Carbon Dioxide Types UL 154 B. Dry Chemical Types UL 299 C. UL 92-Fire Extinguisher & Booster Hose D. UL 711 - Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers E. NFPA 2001, Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems

1. Portable fire extinguishers used to comply with this standard shall be listed and labeled and meet or exceed all the requirements of Fire Test Standards UL 711

F. IBC - International Building Code G. City of Dallas Building Code

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet locations and mounting heights.

B. Product Data: Include data on extinguishers and cabinets, cabinet dimensions, operational features, materials, finishes, and anchorage.

C. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill, or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.


A. Provide fire extinguishers complying with UL 711 and NFPA 10.

B. Cabinets in Fire Rated Partitions: Tested and approved by recognized independent testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM E 814 with fire resistance rating equivalent to adjacent construction.

C. Conform to applicable accessibility code for locating extinguishers.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Ansul Fire Protection.



2. JL Industries. 3. Kiddle Fire Extinguisher Co. 4. Larsen’s Mfg. Co. 5. Potter- Roemer. 6. Watrous.



A. Extinguishers: (Kitchen) Carbon Dioxide Surface Mounted on Manufacturers Suggested Brackets (No CFC’s). Located by Architect, must be in a 30-foot travel distance from each piece of equipment. Class ‘K’ to be used by equipment using any type of oil/fat.

B. Extinguishers: (All Areas Except Kitchen) Multi-purpose dry chemical type, UL 299 cast steel tank, Class 4A:60B:C, 10 pound nominal capacity.

C. Cabinets: 1. Formed steel sheet, 18 gage minimum. 2. Configuration: Based on Larsens R-2409- Surface Mount & Recessed (as

indicated), sized to accommodate extinguishers. 3. Trim type: Flat trim. 4. Door:

a) Break glass style, equipped with lock. Key locks alike; furnish six keys.

b) Hinge doors for 180 degrees opening with continuous piano hinge.

c) Glazing: Clear float glass tempered.

D. Finishes: 1. Cabinet exterior and door: Baked enamel, white color 2. Cabinet interior: Baked enamel, white color. 3. Extinguishers: Baked enamel, red color.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Mounting Hardware: Type best suited to application.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide: Fourteen (15) extinguishers and cabinets, locations will be directed by Architect.

B. Install cabinets in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Secure rigidly in place using fasteners best suited to substrate.

D. Place an extinguisher in each cabinet.

3.2 INSPECTION:



A. Verify all rough openings, dimensions and clearances are the correct size and in the correct location prior to installation.

B. Examine the areas and conditions of the work in this Section.

C. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work.

D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are correct.

E. Verify servicing, charging and tagging of all fire extinguishers.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Provide occupancy hazard protection with fire extinguishers suitable for such Class A, B, C, D, or K fire potentials as might be present and shown on the drawings and schedules.

B. On each floor level, install fire extinguishers in accordance with NFPA 10.

C. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.

D. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings in strict accordance with NFPA 10, the original design, the approved Shop Drawings and the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures as approved by the Architect and authorizing agencies, anchoring all components firmly into position for long life under hard use.

E. Secure rigidly in place.

F. Do not install extinguishers until Substantial Completion inspection date.

G. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets or on wall brackets.

H. Inspection tags shall be current as of the date of Substantial Completion and good for 1-year.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 10 51 13

METAL LOCKERS

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 51 13 Page - 1 Metal Lockers Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Lockers for Kitchen Employee Use 2. Accessories and hardware.


1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned layout, elevations, trim, closure, and accessories.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s descriptive data.

C. Samples: 6 x 6 inch paint samples showing available colors. PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Interior/Medart, Inc. 2. Lyon Metal Products, Inc. 3. Penco Products, Inc. 4. Republic Storage Systems Co., Inc.


2.2 FABRICATION

A. Lockers: Kitchen & Maintenance 1. Type: Standard louver. 2. Size and configuration:

a) 16 inches wide x 12 inches deep x 36 inches high, double tier. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Class: Conventional. 5. Construction:

a) Frame and door: Minimum 16 gage steel, welded joints.

b) Sides, Slope, tops, and back: Minimum 24 gage steel.

c) Ends and filler panels: Minimum 20 gage steel. 6. Latching device: Tamper proof automatic three point latch. 7. Locks: Padlock provisions. 8. Accessories:

a) For each Locker: Two double prong hooks, half shelf, metal number plate, and rubber bumper.

b) End and filler panels.


SECTION 10 51 13

METAL LOCKERS

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 51 13 Page - 2 Metal Lockers Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

9. Finish: Baked enamel, color to be selected from manufacturer’s standards. 10. Base: Concrete


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Set on concrete base.

C. Set plumb, level, and aligned.

D. Attach lockers to supporting construction with anchors best suited to substrate conditions.

E. Bolt adjacent locker units together to provide rigid installation.

F. Install end panels, filler panels, and sloped tops to complete installation.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and latches to operate correctly.

B. Touch up minor scratches and abrasions to match factory finish.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 10 56 13

METAL SHELVING

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 56 13 Page - 1 Metal Shelving Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011


A. Documents affecting work of this section include but are not limited to, General Conditions, special provisions and sections in Division I of these specifications.


A. The work required under this Section consists of furnishing and installing items, their accessories, and necessary mounting and installation and support hardware and reinforcing as indicated on the drawings as specified herein or as necessary for a for a complete, safe and finished product.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and manufacturer literature in accordance with requirements of Section 01 33 00, Submittals.

B. Shop drawings shall indicate the model number, type of material, gauges, or thickness of metal finishes, and details of construction and attachment. Including all sizing and locations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Shelving units shall be the products of Tri-Boro Shelving and Partition Corporation, Farmville, Virginia, their products are the basis for type, size, function, and quality required.

B. Equal products by: 1. Lyon Metal Products, Aurora, IL 2. Penco Products, Inc., Skippack, PA 3. Republic Storage Systems, LLC, Canton, Ohio 4. List Industries Inc, Deerfield Beach, FL 5. Other District and Architect pre-approved equals

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Floor Supported Closed Metal Shelving (MS): Provide metal shelving system as shown on the drawings. B. Wall Mounted Closed Metal Shelving (MSS): Provide metal shelving system as shown on the drawings. C. Shelves shall be industrial weight, class 2 reinforced 18-ga steel (min.) and capable of supporting 100

lbs/sq ft, and be adjustable. D. Shelves shall have triple bends on all four sides – Minimum 5 shelves per unit. E. Provide upright units including closed end and back panels, bracing, reinforcing, and hardware for all

components. F. Shelving unit finish - baked on enamel.

1. Architect shall select color of units from Manufacturers full range.

2.3 LOCATIONS A. Media Storage Room – 7’H Adjustable - Ref. Plans for Dim. B. A/V Storage Room – 7’H Adjustable - Ref. Plans for Dim. C. Receiving – 7’H Adjustable - Ref. Plans for Dim. D. Gymnasium - 7’H 7’H Adjustable - Ref. Plans for Dim.


SECTION 10 56 13

METAL SHELVING

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 56 13 Page - 2 Metal Shelving Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011


A. Install shelving units in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, drawings and specifications, and approved shop drawings. 1. Contractor to Provide all additional support or attachments as required for secure safe installation.

B. Contractor to Provide reinforcement of supports as required and coordinate work with other trades. C. Locate units where shown on drawings.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 10 56 26

MANUAL/MECHANICAL ASSIST MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 56 26 Page - 1 Mobile Storage Shelving Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: New mobile storage systems equipped with new metal, closed upright shelving,

freight, delivery to site, and all related installation labor for a complete, ready-for-use system. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm with not less than 10 years successful experience in

manufacturing mobile storage systems similar to those required for this project. B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Manufacturer Certified installer in the full time

employ of supplying vendor who has not less than 5 years of successful experience installing mobile storage systems similar in design and extent to mobile systems required for this project.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT

DATA, AND SAMPLES. Include drawings showing small-scale layouts of mobile storage system, and as necessary, large-scale details of anchorages, trim, closures, and special details.

B. Samples: Submit in accordance with Section 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Submit samples of finished metal panels, finished exposed wood, and available laminates.

1.04 WARRANTY A. Submit manufacturer's standard 5 year Parts and 1 year Labor warranty against defects in

materials and installation on entire system and Limited Lifetime Warranty on all shelving components, carriage structural frames, and system load/guide rails.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AVAILABLE MANUFACTURERS A. To insure compatibility and single point of accountability, shelving and mobile system components

are to be products from same manufacturer. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be

incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: The Spacesaver Group (800) 492-3434

2.02 MATERIALS A. General Description Mobile Storage System – To be equal to Spacesaver LSMA mechanical assist

system employing dual flange guidance. For compliance with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), operator handle must be 3-spoke ergonomic design for constant push/pull, up/down operation with effort less than 5#, system aisles minimum 36”W, and front approach entry ramp must not exceed 8% or 12:1 slope nor extend in front of carriages. All carriages to be equipped with visible status aisle locking mechanism to secure open system aisles and floor level automatic safety braking system to protect personnel and materials in closing system aisles.

1. Book Room 122 - Assembly Descriptions: a. One (1) stationary range 16’-3” long x 12” deep x 7’-4 1/4” high consisting of four (4)

sections single-faced 4-post metal shelving 48”W x 12”D x 7’-4 1/4”H each having six (6) storage openings with 2 laterally adjustable dividers, backstops, and canopy top. Exposed end of carriage fitted with ¾” high-pressure laminated 45# particle board face panel to enclose operating mechanism and for durability, appearance, and quiet operation.

b. Five (5) mobile carriages 16’-6 ¼” long x 24” deep x 7’- 5” high equipped with four (4)


SECTION 10 56 26



sections double-faced 4-post metal shelving 48”W x 24”D x 82 ¼”H each having six (6) storage openings per face with 2 laterally adjustable dividers, centerstop at mid-depth, and canopy top. Exposed end of carriage fitted with ¾” high-pressure laminated 45# particle board face panel to enclose operating mechanism and for durability, appearance, and quiet operation.

c. One (1) stationary range 28’-6” long x 12” deep x 7’-4 1/4” high consisting of eight (8) sections single-faced 4-post metal shelving (1 @ 48”W and 7 @ 42”W) x 12”D x 7’-4 1/4”H each having six (6) storage openings with 2 laterally adjustable dividers, backstops, and canopy top.

B. System Components:

1. Carriage: Fixture unit welded uniframe assemblies constructed of 12 ga. steel with main supporting structural sections 5-3/4" high with two reinforcing flanges running the full length of the carriage. Face sections shall provide 3/4" shelf mounting recess running full length of carriage for positive shelving alignment and attachment. Wheel support sections of 12 ga. steel welded between main support sections, one per rail assembly. Carriage capable of supporting load of 1,000 lbs. minimum per carriage length foot.

2. Face Panels: All exposed mechanical assemblies and adjoining stationary shelving mounted on platforms to be finished with laminated 3/4" 45 LB. density particle board. Edges to be black plastic "T" molding. Provide card holders and all necessary hardware for completed installation.

3. Rail: 1045 steel bar 5/8” x 5/8” interlocked and welded into 11 ga. powder-coat base channel 3-7/16”W x ¾”H with 2 ¾” return anti-tip flanges; maximum guidance gap 5/8”. Rail to have interlocking splice and leveling plates maximum 20” o.c. with leveling screw adjustability and anchored to floor. Rail splice joints must have interlocking braces and splice plates for permanent horizontal and vertical alignment. Rail assemblies fully grouted with non-shrink hydraulic cement grout 8,000# p.s.i. strength after curing.

4. Raised Floor: Provide 3/4" underlayment grade plywood (ready for application of VCT or carpet by floor finish contractor) to raise finished floor flush to top of track. Floor panels to fit tightly against guide/load track to eliminate guidance gaps that accumulate debris and can be trip hazards. Floor shall have integrated leveling screws minimum 16" on center. Floor materials unfinished – ready for application of scheduled final finish (carpet or VCT) by floor finish sub-contractor.

5. Entry Ramp: Provide ramp at front of system constructed of underlayment grade plywood with a 12ga. galvanized steel threshold plate. Ramp is not to extend past the front of the units into the main access aisle and must not exceed slope of 12:1 or 8%. Back-fill threshold plate with 8,000 psi grout for added support and to eliminate flex. Ramp unfinished – ready for application of scheduled final finish (carpet or VCT) by floor finish sub-contractor.

6. Wheels: Steel wheels to be hardened minimum 5" diameter with two (2) permanently lubricated ball bearing assemblies and spacers at both sides of wheel bearings to eliminate all friction between carriage and wheels.

7. Operation: Mechanical Assist operation utilizing 3-spoke ergonomic handle transferring power to direct drive mechanism with adjustable chain tensioner accessible from front of face panel. Operator handle to be equipped with visible status aisle locking mechanism for user safety. Minimum drive ratio 1:4,000#.

8. Floor level automatic braking system shall have a mechanical sweep running the length on both sides of the open aisle which will immediately engage a brake to stop carriage movement when depressed.

9. Shelving Systems: Wedge-lock type consisting of uprights, shelves, shelf supports, and designed to be assembled without fasteners or clips. Shelves shall not have any holes on exposed surfaces. Front and back flanges shall be flush with outside faces of posts. Design


SECTION 10 56 26



shall permit individual shelf adjustment and/or removal anywhere along the entire height of uprights.

a. Materials and Workmanship: Fabricate units from Class 1, cold-rolled steel sheet with all bends sharp and true and no exposed “knife” edges.

b. Shelving shall exhibit no dents, “oil canning”, buckling or other surface irregularities. c. Uprights: Formed from steel sheet welded to both sides of the two posts to form a closed

upright. Keyhole slots on inner wall only with a recess channel adjacent to the posts that conceals shelf supports and provides for a back stop in single-faced units and a recess channel at mid-depth for a center stop on double-faced units. Intermediate “tee” uprights between adjacent units.

d. Shelves: Form from sheet steel with flanges on all sides and return hem on front and back flanges. Ends shall be formed to clear inside of upright offset panels. Shelves shall be independently adjustable. Provide all shelves with slots for file dividers.

e. Canopy Tops: Same construction as shelf units. f. Shelf Supports: Form from heavy gauge steel sheet with four solid steel shoulder rivets,

two per ear, that interlock with inner wall of uprights. g. Nominal Shelf Dimensions: Standard Width: 30, 36, 42, or 48 inch sections used to meet

project requirements. 1. Shelf Edge Vertical Profile: 3/4 inch (19MM) maximum. 2. Vertical Adjustment Increment: 1-1/2 inches (38MM). 3. Width Of Intermediate Uprights: 2 inches (51MM). 4. Clearance Between Uprights: Nominal shelf section width minus 2 inches (51MM). 5. Levelness Of Completed Shelf Units: Maximum 1/8 inch (3.2MM) between bottom

shelf and canopy top, measured along the edge of any upright in any direction. 6. Load Carrying Capabilities: Provide shelf units capable of supporting 100 pounds

per lineal foot with maximum deflection of L/140. Shelves shall exhibit no permanent deflection under fully loaded conditions.

7. Accessories: Provide flat plate slotted file dividers per shelf as specified. h. Powder Coat Paint Finish - The painting process is an electrostatically applied powder

coating system using an epoxy-polyester hybrid powder paint. The film is applied to an average thickness of 1 to 1.5 mils. After curing, the paint finish is inert and no volatile emissions are present.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Do not use components less than sizes recommended by system manufacturer. B. Provide all bolts, hardware, and accessories for complete installation. C. Finishes: Laminates on face panels from Wilsonart standards. Carriages, platforms, and

shelving selection from 10 standard shop applied powder-coat finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Rail to be leveled to

tolerance not exceeding 1/32” over 10’ run using electronic instrumentation. Voids between rail and floor to be filled with 8,000psi grout to insure support of rail over entire length and for even distribution of load along carriage travel. Shims not acceptable.

3.02 CLEAN UP A. Leave installation in broom clean condition, complete and ready for installation of floor finish by

others.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 10 71 13

EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 71 13 - 1 Exterior Sun Control Devices Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide fixed Custom Sunshades as shown on the drawings, as specified, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. The drawings show the extent of the work, the dimensioned profile and depth of the

sunshade to be provided.

C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Metal Fabrication - 05500

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit specifications, data, and installation, instructions from the manufacturer of the

Sunshades. B. Submit shop drawings for the system. Show anchorage, details and connections for all the component

parts.

3. Drawings shall include elevations, sections and specific details for each unit, condition.

C. Samples: Submit one sample minimum 24" long of each material to be utilized at each Sunshade with appropriate finish.

D. Warranty: Provide written warranty to the owner that all screen products will be free of defective materials

or workmanship for a period of one year from date of installation. E. Quality Assurance:

1. Single subcontract responsibility: Subcontract the work to a single firm that has had

not less than six years experience in the design and manufacturing of work similar to that shown and required.

2. Performance requirements: Design sunshades to accommodate local requirements for snow and wind loading. **PROVIDE ENGINEERING CALCULATIONS TO SUPPORT DESIGN. Calculations to be by a registered engineer licensed in the state that the project is located. Analysis of Blade Deflection limited to L/120, ¾”, or as required by code.

3. Sunshade must me be mechanically assembled. Welded construction is not acceptable. Blades must be removable for repair or replacement.

4. For quality and delivery control, sunshades must be purchased from a single source. Sub contracting of shade assembly is not acceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS

Sunshades shall be Model 100-3 as manufactured by; Construction Specialties, Inc. located at 49 Meeker Avenue

Cranford, New Jersey 07016. Tel.1- 800-631-7379

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B211, Alloy 6063-T5.

B. Fasteners: Fasteners shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Provide types, gauges and lengths to suit unit installation conditions.


SECTION 10 71 13



C. Anchors and Inserts: Use non-Ferrous metal or hot dip galvanized anchors and inserts for installation and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use stainless steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drill-in place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. 2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Provide fixed Sunshades and accessories of design, material, sizes, depth, arrangement, and thickness as indicated or as required for optimal performance with respect to strength; durability; and uniform appearance.

B. Include supports, anchorage, and accessories required for complete assembly 2.04 SUNSHADE CONSTRUCTION

A. Components: All blades and outrigger components shall be 6063-T5 aluminum alloy.

1. Outriggers shall 1/4” custom profile flat aluminum plate members, 6” high. 2. Blades shall be 2” X 8” extruded aluminum tube design. Blades shall be factory assembled to

outriggers using stainless steel, type F, thread cutting screws through internal screw slots in blades. Welding is not acceptable. Blades to be mechanically secured to allow for replacement in case of damage. Fasteners to be hex head.

3. No Fascia.

4. Outriggers to be secured to steel “tabs” that are welded to the support steel tube. “Tabs” are to be

provided and installed by the steel tube supplier.

2.05 ALUMINUM FINISH

A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and application recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory after products assembly. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces prior to shipment. Remove scratches and blemishes from exposed surfaces, which will be visible after completing finishing process.

Provide color as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by architect from manufacturers standard Kynar 500 colors.

B. Fluorocarbon Coating: Inhibitive thermo-cured primer, 0.2 mil minimum dry film thickness, and thermo-cured fluorocarbon coating containing "Kynar 500" resin, 1.0 mil minimum dry film thickness.

Furnish manufacturers twenty (20) year limited warranty against failure of the Kynar 500 finish. . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine openings to receive the work. Do not proceed until any unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of the work. B. Verify dimensions of supporting structure at the site by accurate field measurements so that the work will be

accurately designed, fabricated and fitted to the structure.


SECTION 10 71 13



C. Anchor Sunscreen to building substructure as indicated on architectural drawings. D. Erection Tolerances:

1. Variation from level: +/- 1/8" maximum in any column to column space or 20'-0"

runs, non-cumulative. 2. Offsets in end-to-end or edge-to-edge alignment of consecutive members 1/32".

E. Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the approval of the manufacturer or fabricator, and in accordance with his recommendations. Restore finish completely. Remove and replace members where cutting and trimming has impaired the strength or appearance of the assembly as directed. F. Do not erect warped, bowed, deformed or otherwise damaged or defaced members. Remove and replace any members damaged in the erection process as directed. G. Set units level, plumb and true to line, with uniform joints

.

END OF SECTION 10700



SECTION 10 73 33

EXTERIOR MARQUEE SIGN

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 73 33 Page - 1 Exterior Marquee Sign Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 specification section, apply to work of this section.


A. Cabinet, face, and message area of exterior marquee sign specifications. B. Lighting C. Structural support

1.3 REFERENCES

A. IBC - International Building Code 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate sign styles, lettering font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall

dimensions of each sign and anchorage. 1. Anchorage shall include as a minimum an engineered foundation plans/details, structural components

and connections to each other, the sign cabinet, and the foundation. C. Colors: Colors shall be as selected by the Architect.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Design Work under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas.


A. Conform to IBC and ASCE-7. 1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warranty for 10-years against defects in workmanship and materials, warranty does not cover lamps or damage from gunshots.


A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site per manufactures requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cabinet Specifications 1. Double sided extruded aluminum and sized as indicated on plans 2. Heliarc welded at mitered at corners 3. Powder coated color finish: 3.0 to 4.0 mils thick electrostatically applied and permanently bonded

guaranteed non-fading.


SECTION 10 73 33

EXTERIOR MARQUEE SIGN

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 73 33 Page - 2 Exterior Marquee Sign Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

B. Cabinet Face Specifications 1. Provide vandal proof clear UV solar grade high impact resistant polycarbonate cover with stainless

steel hinges secured with dual compression tubular locks. 2. Powder coat covers to match cabinet.

C. Message Area Specifications

1. Provide a Marquee Inner Face System using 3M white translucent acrylic with a chemically bonded clear letter track or approved equal.

2. The Marquee will have the Name permanently listed as follows: a. 'Oran M. Roberts Elementary School' in 6" along top edge b. 15" tall logo left of message area c. 'Dallas Independent School District' in 8" along bottom edge, and the District logo.

3. Provide minimum 300 count self-spacing letters and numbers. a. Double silk screened on 1/8"injected molded substrate. b. Provide in a font as selected by Architect and District Design Coordinator. c. Provide letter storage case of durable material, i.e. impact resistant plastic. d. Provide all letters and numbers in black. e. To accommodate four (4) 6" lines for messages.

4. Provide extending pole for letter placement.

D. Lighting Specifications 1. All electrical components shall be UL listed and approved. 2. Lighting: High output instant start fluorescent tubes spaced to provide uniform night lighting over

entire face of the sign. 3. Install per current NEC edition - Electrical will be on a Photo-electric circuit or timer.

E. Support Structure Specifications

1. Design the support structure to withstand wind loads of as required by ASCE 7 & IBC. Minimum 1-1/2" square tubing, 26 gauge paint grade metal.

2. Legs: Cover on both sides if indicated on plans and anchor to foundation as indicated on engineered plans.

3. Side frames painted in color approved by the Architect and District Design Coordinator. 4. Provide signed and sealed (by Texas licensed PE) engineered shop drawings and structural

calculations for approval by District Building Department.

F. Provide 6” high numbers on the marquee, both sides if they are viewable from the street. Package to include 300 total.

G. Height to top of sign shall be 17' AFG PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install signs in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and IBC requirements. 3.2 CLEANING

A. After installation, thoroughly clean all exposed surfaces and restore all damaged material to its original condition or replaced with new material.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 75 00 Page - 1 Flagpoles Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 10 75 00

FLAGPOLES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Steel flagpole, ground set 2. Concrete Base.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 – Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements. 2. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealers

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) 611 – Voluntary Specification fo AASHTO M246/M246M - Standard Specification for steel sheet, metallic-coated and polymer pre-coated for corrugated steel pipes

B. ASTM A53/A53M Pipe - Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless

C. ASTM A123/A123M - Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

D. ASTM A790/A790M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferrite/Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe

E. ASTM A-36, Grade A Steel Pipe, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube

F. ASTM A607 Carbon Steel

G. CDA (Copper Development Association) - Handbook


A. Design Requirements: Design flagpole, base, and anchorage devices to withstand 100 MPH wind without flag and 80 MPH wind with flag, with 2.5 safety factor.

B. Pole Description: 1. Type: Ground set, vertical, fixed stainless steel cone. 2. Pole: Cone tapered. 3. Dimensions:

a. 40 feet Overall Height c. Top Diameter: 3 inches d. Butt Diameter: 4.5 inches

e. Top Diameter: 2.5 inches f. Wall thickness: 0.237 inch g. Ball diameter: 6 inches

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Include pole and base dimensions, materials, finishes, and accessories. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Wrap poles in heavy paper to prevent damage during shipping and handling.


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 10 75 00 Page - 2 Flagpoles Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACUTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. American Flagpole 2. Baartol Co., Inc. 3. Concorde Industries. 4. Pole Tech


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Pole: Steel 1. 35 feet Exposed Height or A.F.F.

B. Fittings and Accessories for 1 pole: - To hang two flags, one on top of the other. 1. Ball: Spun Aluminum. 2. Truck: Revolving, non fouling 3. Halyards: (2) 3/8 inch diameter with wire splicers 4. Cleats: Two 9 inch stainless steel cleats. 5. Collar: •1 - 14-1/2" cast stainless steel flash collar (4" - 6-5/8" butt diameter flag

pole) 20" fabricated stainless steel flash collar (8-5/8" and larger butt diameter flagpole).

6. Corrugated steel foundation tube. 7. Lighting ground rod: Copper, ¾ inch diameter 8. Lightning ground cable: Copper, No. 6 AWG, soft drawn.

C. Finish: 1. Painted; AAMA 611, to 0.0007 inch minimum thickness, clear. 2. Apply bituminous coating to that part of flagpole to be set in base, inside and out.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Grout: Cement based, non shrink B. Joint Sealer: Specified in Section 07 92 00


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install foundation sleeve in concrete footing in accordance with approved Shop Drawings

B. Center pole in sleeve using steel wedges; plumb with hardwood wedges. Fill sleeve with clean, dry sand; top off with grout.

C. Install collar to conceal sleeve

D. Apply joint sealer as specified in Section 07 92 00 around pole at top of grout and collar

E. Electrically ground flagpole installation.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 11 13 13

LOADING DOCK BUMPERS

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 11 13 13 Page - 1 Loading Dock Bumpers Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 specification section, apply to work of this section


A. Dock bumpers of reinforced rubber with attachment frame. 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittals Procedures B. Product Data: Indicate unit dimensions, method of anchorage, and details of construction. C. Manufacturer Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS

A. Bumpers: Fabric reinforced rubber pads, ozone resistant, laminated, and compressed in position with two galvanized steel rods with threaded ends, washers, and nuts; galvanized steel angle end plates. 1. Projection from wall: 6" 2. Vertical height: 10" 3. Length: 24"

B. Bumpers: Molded rubber, ozone resistant, nylon reinforced, minimum Shore A Durometer of 70, tensile strength of 950 to 1050 PSI: 1. Thickness from wall: 4" 2. Vertical height: 10" 3. Width: 6" 4. Profile: Semi-circular

C. Attachment Hardware: 3/4" diameter galvanized bolts and expansion shields; "L" shaped anchor rods for casting into concrete.

D. Touch-up Primer: Zinc rich type PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Verify that anchor placement is acceptable.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide integral anchors for concrete placement. 3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install dock bumpers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Set plumb and level. C. Secure angle end frames to concrete.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 11 16 16

SAFES

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 11 16 16 Page - 1 Floor Safes Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 specification section, apply to work of this section


A. Floor safe 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittals Procedures B. Product Data: Provide UL listing/rating, insurance ratings, dimensions, and anchorage/installation

instructions. C. Provide the manufacturer's warranty information.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS

A. Floor Safe meeting these minimum requirements: 1. Heavy Duty "B+" rated construction 2. Two sliding shelves, One sliding shelf. 3. 1-hour UL Fire Rating 4. UL RSC Burglary Rating 5. Exterior dimensions 12-3/4" H x 36" W x 16-3/4" D 6. Interior dimensions 12-1/4" H x 35" W x 14" D 7. Cubic Feet - 3.3 8. Outer door UL listed group II Changeable dial combination lock

B. The District will review request for approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing site conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install safe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in the location shown on plans. B. Provide all material, accessories, and labor to complete the installation

END OF SECTION



SECTION 11 31 13

RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 11 31 13 Page - 1 Residential Appliances Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011


A. Documents affecting work of this section include but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, special provisions and sections in Division 1 of these specifications. These appliances are for use in Administrative Areas, TWC's, Clinic, and Special Needs Areas as indicated on the drawings. This equipment is not for use in the Commercial Kitchen. Those requirements can be found under 11 40 00 Food Service Equipment.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The work required under this Section consists of furnishing and installing 1. Clothes Dryers 2. Clothes Washers 3. Dishwashers 4. Garbage disposals 5. Microwave ovens and Convection Ovens 6. Range/hood and cook top units 7. Refrigerators(w/ice makers) 8. Wall Hung Thermometers 9. Their accessories and necessary mechanical and electrical connections as shown on the plans

specified for a complete operating system. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. IBC - International Building Code 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and manufacturer literature in accordance with requirements of Section 01 33 00, and the model number, material, finishes, and details of construction and installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. General Electric 2. Hobart Food Equipment (Traulsen) 3. Hotpoint 4. Jet-Tech Inc 5. LG Electronics 6. Ventahood 7. Maytag 8. Sharp 9. Speed Queen 10. Whirlpool 11. Cooper-Atkins 12. Other Architect/Owner pre-approved equals

B. All products shall be ADA compliant and installed to meet code requirement. 2.2 MATERIALS

A. The use of Energy Star products is required over non-energy star product when available. B. Provide appliance in the number, location, and type shown on the plans from the list below of acceptable

standards.


SECTION 11 31 13

RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 11 31 13 Page - 2 Residential Appliances Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

C. Clothes Dryer: Minimum 7.0 cu ft front-load dryer with front controls - Location: Changing Rm. 113A D. Clothes Washer: Minimum 3.0 cu ft front-load washer with front controls - Location: Changing Rm. 113A E. Dishwasher:

1. Residential: Minimum 5-cycle quite motor under counter dishwasher - Location: Changing Rm. 113A F. Garbage Disposal: ½ horse power disposer with stainless steel swivel impellers G. Microwave Oven:

1. Commercial: Minimum 1000-watt microwave with stainless steel cabinet 2. Residential: Minimum 1000-watt microwave with 1.6 cu ft oven

H. Range 1. Cook-top: 30" electric with frontal controls 2. Drop-in: 30" electric range with minimum 3.7 cu ft oven and frontal controls

I. Range Hood: 36" hood with variable speed fan control J. Refrigerator

1. Compact: 6 cu ft refrigerator - Locations: Copy Rm. 100F 2. Standard: minimum 18 cu ft top-freezer refrigerator with ice maker - Locations: Specialized Needs

113, Work Rm. 119, Clinic 120 and Work Rm. 216 3. Provide refrigerator with a manufacturer installed lock for unit in Clinic 120 .

K. Wall Hung Thermometers 1. 12" Cooper-Atkins Thermometer model #212-158 HACCP or equal to be installed in Dry Storage 135E 2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide all accessories as required by each manufacturer to complete the install of each unit as shown on the drawings.

B. Coordinate electrical accessories required for complete installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify all dimensions, clearances, and utility connections prior to starting installation. 1. Coordinate work with other trades.

B. All appliances shall be set-in-place, all mechanical and electrical connections made, including venting and termination caps.

C. Install in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, drawings and specifications, and approved shop drawings.

D. Provide additional supports or attachments required for installation. E. Test all appliances for proper operation and good working order prior to final inspection. F. Thoroughly clean all appliances prior to final inspection.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD – Oram M. Roberts 11 40 00 Page - 1 Foodservice Equipment Elementary School – BP-74 12/30/11

SECTION 11 4000

FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED:

A. The work covered by this section of the specification includes the furnishing of all materials, accessories, and special services necessary to complete the Foodservice Equipment work as specified herein and where shown, scheduled, or reasonably inferred in the Contract Documents.

B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents for each and every item and/or component specified and/or scheduled in the Contract Documents to be complete with all necessary devices, accessories and/or components to properly function and perform in a manner equal to the manufacturer’s stipulations.

C. The applicable provisions of all Divisions of these Specifications are a part of this Section of the Specifications. The Contractor shall consult them in detail for instructions pertaining to this work, together with all other addenda, changes, instructions or interpretations relating hereto.

D. The work shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. The purchase and/or fabrication, delivery, unpacking and installation of all items in the correct locations.

2. Furnish Division 22 with the control valves, faucets, pressure reducing or regulating valves, drain fittings, water inlet fittings, blending valves, vacuum breakers and specialty fittings as hereinafter noted or shown on the Contract Documents.

3. Furnishing Division 26 with all controls for items requiring electrical connections except as hereinafter noted or shown on the Contract Documents to be installed or inter-wired.

4. Furnish all duct risers to 6” above the ceiling for connection under Division 23.

5. Furnish all refrigeration work as hereinafter noted or as shown on the Contract Documents.

6. Supervision of the mechanical and electrical connections, the installation of the kitchen equipment and testing of each piece of equipment for performance and the replacement of any piece of equipment, which fails to perform as claimed by the manufacturer.

7. Provide adequate training of the kitchen personal in the operation and maintenance of each piece of equipment.

1.2 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED:

A. All plumbing, electrical and mechanical work required in relation to the work specified herein, will be performed by other contractors under their respective Divisions unless otherwise specifically noted in these specifications. This work shall include the



furnishing of labor and materials necessary to provide rough-ins of all utilities and connections between rough-ins of all utilities and equipment.

B. Furnishing of all plumbing and electrical connections including all controls, Building Fire Suppression Systems, and portable Fire Extinguishers, with the exceptions of the cooking equipment, ventilation Fire Control System and refrigeration piping which shall be performed under this section of the work.

C. All traps, steam traps, grease traps, line strainers, tailpieces, valves, stops, shut offs and necessary fittings for the equipment specified shall be furnished and installed by the Mechanical Contractor unless otherwise specifically noted herein.

D. All line disconnect switches, safety cut offs and fittings, convenience outlets, outlet boxes, wiring, conduit, control panels, fuse boxes or other electrical control fittings and connections will be furnished and together with those fittings furnished loose with the Foodservice Equipment be installed, and connected to the utilities or interconnected with appliances by the Electrical Contractor unless otherwise specifically noted herein.

E. The furnishing of all necessary sleeves or conduits required for refrigeration piping, syrup lines, or CO2 lines will be furnished and installed by the General Contractor.

F. All connecting ducts between exhausted equipment at the ceiling connections, fans, or necessary components to provide a complete and working system shall be furnished and installed under the Mechanical Contract.

G. Tile or masonry bases, openings in walls or building structure for pass through fixtures, tile or masonry floors in walk-in cooler/freezer vaults, floor depressions, wall grounds to support equipment or any other specialty construction item necessary to the equipment specified herein shall be furnished by the General Contractor. The work will be carefully coordinated by the Kitchen Equipment Contractor.

H. Water inlets shall be located above the positive water level to prevent siphoning of liquids into the potable water system. Whenever conditions shall require submerged inlets, suitably approved type check valves and vacuum breakers shall be placed on the fixture by the Mechanical Contractor to prevent siphoning.

I. Mechanical Contractor is to see that all plumbing lines are flushed free of foreign matter before connecting to the Foodservice Equipment.

1.3 TRADE AGREEMENTS:

A. Jurisdictional trade agreements and restrictions include the work specified herein, shown or reasonably inferred as part of the Foodservice Equipment. Portions of the work may be subcontracted to those qualified to do such work as may be necessary because of jurisdictional trade agreements and restrictions.

1.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS:

A. Submit in writing a list of names and addresses for all Subcontractors proposed for any portion of the work to the Architect and or the Consultant for approval within a reasonable time period after award of a Contract.



B. The Owner, Architect or Consultant reserves the right to reject any subcontractor proposed for a reasonable objection without relieving the Prime Contractor for this section of the work of any obligation or responsibilities under this Contract.

C. The Contractor for this work shall be solely responsible for his subcontractors and they shall be bound by the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents applicable to their work. They will be discharged after due written notice for failure to perform their work in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications.

1.5 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS:

A. Terms used throughout the Contract Documents are defined as follows:

B. The “Architect” is that person/persons or entity who is identified as the Architect in the Contract Documents. The term “Architect” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine or neuter in gender and shall mean the Architect or his authorized representative.

C. The Consultant” relative to this section of the Specifications, shall mean Barnes Consulting. The term “Consultant” relative to any other Division of the Specifications or discipline shall mean the “Consultant” defined as that person/persons, corporation or entity who is responsible for that division of the work. The term is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine or neuter in gender and shall mean the Consultant or his authorized representative.

D. The “Kitchen Equipment Contractor” or “K.E.C.” shall mean that person or persons or organization who intends to/or will contract for the work as specified herein. In addition the term “Kitchen Equipment Contractor is collective in that it means the Primary Contractor for this section of the work and all of his Subcontractors and Suppliers. The term Kitchen Equipment Contractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine or neuter in gender and shall mean the Kitchen Equipment Contractor or his authorized representative.

E. The “Owner” is that person/persons or entity identified herein as that entity for whom the work is to be performed. The term Owner is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine or neuter in gender and shall mean the Owner or his authorized representative.

F. The “Purveyor” shall mean the merchant or supplier of a product who intends to or who will furnish, lend or otherwise provide to the Owner materials, services or equipment not included under the Contract Documents, which are necessary to the product he intends to provide. The term is used throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine or neuter in gender and means the Purveyor or his authorized representative.

G. The “General Contractor” is that person/persons or entity who intends to or who will contract for the furnishing of all materials and services defined in these specifications to be furnished by the Contractor and who shall be identified as such in a Owner-Contractor agreement. The term is used throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine or neuter in gender and means the General Contractor or his authorized representative.

H. The “Plumbing Contractor” or “P.C.” the “Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Contractor” or “HVAC”, shall mean that person/persons or entity who intends to or will contract for the work as specified under the Mechanical Division (Division 23) of the



Specifications and may be collectively known as the Mechanical Contractor. The terms are used throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine or neuter in gender and mean the Plumbing Contractor, Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning Contractor or their authorized representatives.

I. The “Electrical Contractor” or “E.C.” shall mean the person/persons or entity who intends to or who will contract for the work as specified under Electrical Division (Division 26) of the Specifications. The term is used throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine or neuter in gender and means the Electrical Contractor or his authorized representative.

J. The “Subcontractor” shall mean that person/persons who intends to or who will have a contract directly with the Contractor and/or Owner to perform any part of the work specified. The term is used throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine or neuter in gender and means the Subcontractor or his authorized representative.

K. References to publications, recommendations, trade associations, technical societies, governmental agencies, recognized authorities, and standards by abbreviations are as hereafter noted but not limited to the following definitions:

AGA American Gas Association

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials

FM Factory Mutual

FCSI Foodservice Consultants Society International

NEC National Electrical Code of NFPA

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

NFPA national Fire Protection Association

NSF National Sanitation Foundation

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

ADA Americans with Disabilities Act

TAS Texas Accessibilities Standards

1.6 SPECIAL NOTICE:

A. The Contractor bidding the work specified herein shall carefully examine all of the specifications, bidding requirements, the general conditions, all drawings, all applicable schedules, all addenda thereto, and interpretations, and submit his bid



subject to all obligations therein. Submitting a bid for this work shall constitute full evidence that the contractor has examined all documents applicable hereto and that he is fully cognizant of all conditions under which the work is to be conducted.

ALTERNATES:

A. Wherever materials, articles or pieces of equipment are identified in the drawings and specifications by reference to brand name and model number, it is so identified for the purpose of establishing a standard of quality. Any materials, article or piece of equipment of other manufacturers, which will perform adequately the function of the equipment specified, will be considered equally acceptable. Providing the material, article or piece of equipment is in the opinion of the Architect or Consultant equal in appearance and function to the item specified.

B. Warning! No alternates or substitutions will be considered in the base bid. The base bid for the work specified herein will be considered to be for the materials and labors as specified.

C. Bidders wishing to offer alternates to any materials, items or articles specified herein may do so without any pre-qualifications and/or in accordance with the General Provisions of these Specifications. The General Provisions, Conditions, any Special Instructions, and Division 1 shall be consulted for further or additional instructions pertaining to Alternates and Substitutions. Proposed Alternates may be submitted on the Bidder’s letterhead or form provided attached to his proposal form with each additive/deductive amount stipulated, along with catalog data and or manufacturer’s shop drawings indicating all modifications required to conform with the specified brands.

D. As a condition for acceptance of any Alternates or Substitutions offered by the Bidder. The Bidder shall include in the cost of any Alternate or Substitution the cost for providing all engineering services required to make adjustments in space, utilities or construction that may occur due to the requirements of the accepted Alternate or Substitute.

E. The Owner reserves the right to reject or accept any or all alternate proposals prior to execution of a Contract and to waive any formalities in negotiation for alternates with the successful Low-Bidder. No Alternates will be accepted after award of the Contract.

1.8 APPROVED KITCHEN EQUIPMENT CONTRACTORS: The following Kitchen Equipment Bidders are pre-approved to bid the work herein under section 11 4000.

A. ABC Lone Star Hotel and Restaurant Supply, 6500 North Lamar, Austin, TX 78752, Phone (512)467-6777.

B. Amundsen Food Equipment, 1740 W. Main St., Oklahoma City, OK 73106 , tel: (405) 236-5961 , fax: (405) 272-0530

C. Heath J. Simmons, BARING INDUSTRIES, A Division of Electrolux Professional, INC., 16415 Addison Rd, Ste 155, Addison, TX 75001, P: (972) 930-0644 EXT 201, F: (972) 930-0699, C: (940) 337-0565

D. Buckalew’s, P.O. Box 1840, 1715 Spring St., Shreveport, LA. 71101, 318/424-6673, FAX 318/424-6681, Mr. Henry Hunsicker.



E. Edward Don & Company, Mr. Gary Merriman, 3501 Plano Parkway, Lewisville, TX 75056, Phone (972)624-7455, Fax (972)624-7762.

F. Food Service Concepts, Mr. Al Berger, 2919 Merrell Road, Dallas, Texas 75229, 214/351-2100, FAX 214/351-6326, E-mail: [email protected]

G. KEFCO, Kitchen Equipment Fabricating Company, 7007 Stearns St, Houston, TX , 77021-4622, Phone: 713-747-3611, FAX: 713-747-1892

H. Kesco Supply Inc., Mr. Kevin L. Krolczyk, 1411 S. Texas Ave., Bryan, Texas 77805, (979) 779-6473, fax (979) 822-6473, e-mail [email protected].

I. Kirby Restaurant Supply, Mr. Billy Anderson, 809 Eastman Road, Longview Texas, 75602, 903/757-2723

J. Linda Piserelle, Kitchen Equipment Fabricators Company, 7007 Stearns, Houston, TX 77021, (713)747-3611.

K. Mission Restaurant Supply, 1126 S. St. Mary's, San Antonio, Texas 78210, Phone 210-354-0690, Fax 210-534-3853.

L. Oswalt Restaurant Supply, 1015 NW 68th Street, Oklahoma City, OK 73116 , tel: (405) 843-9000 , fax: (405) 840-4044

M. Pasco Brokerage, Inc., Mrs. Kasey Hollon, 2929 Custer Road, Suite 301, Plano, Texas 75075, 972/596-3350, FAX 972/596-2817

N. Texas Sheet Metal Company, 1431 Greenway, 8th Floor, Irving, TX 75038, Ph. (972)815-2323, Fax (972)815-2324.

O. Trinity Restaurant Equipment, Inc., Mr. Keith Graves, 1215 Harrison Avenue, Arlington, Texas 76011, 817/261-5887, FAX 817/861-1528, E-mail: [email protected]

1.9 FABRICATORS QUALIFICATIONS:

A. All fabricated items described in the specifications other than by catalog numbers shall be manufactured by a Foodservice Equipment Fabricator who has the plant, skilled personnel, and engineering facilities to properly design, detail and produce high quality foodservice equipment. All fabricated equipment shall be by one manufacturer and shall be of uniform design and finish.

B. The successful contractor shall upon request, submit a list of at least three (3) recent, comparable sized projects for which the intended fabricator has furnished and installed the foodservice equipment.

C. The following are pre-approved fabricators for the work contained in section 11 4000:

1. Food Service Concepts, Mr. Al Berger, 2919 Merrell Road, Dallas, Texas 75229, 214/351-2100, FAX 214/351-6326

2. Keas Stainless Steel Fabricators, Inc., Mr. Jack Keas, 420 N. Pennsylvania, Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73107, 405/232-0869, FAX 405/232-2898



3. Complete Restaurant Services, Dallas Texas.

4. Quality Custom Fabricators, Mr. D. L. West, 1041 Avenue M, Grand Prairie, Texas 75050, 972/641-9860, FAX 972/641-3960

5. Quality Kitchen Fabricators, Mr. Bob Reeves, 1215 Harrison Avenue, Arlington, Texas 76011, 817/469-7681, FAX 817/861-1528

6. LOW Temp Industries, P.O. BOX 795, Jonesboro, Georgia

1.10 REGULATIONS AND CODES:

A. Compliance with all municipal ordinances, State and Federal laws, statutes, building codes and regulations of public authorities having jurisdiction over construction, health and safety at the project location are a part of the requirements of these specifications. All such ordinances, laws, statutes, codes, and regulations shall be deemed a part of these specifications as though herein written out in full. Where the requirements of these drawings and specifications are in excess of those codes and regulations, the Contract Documents shall be strictly adhered to. No deviations will be accepted without written notice from the Owner and or his authorized agents. The cost of all materials, labors, or services required over and above the requirements included in these drawings and specifications necessary to comply with all applicable codes and regulations shall be deemed included in the base bid for the work specified herein. In addition the successful bidder for this work shall comply with the following:

1. National Sanitation Foundation (to bear label)

2. National Electric Code

3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

4. American Gas Association Laboratories

5. National Fire Protection Association

6. Occupational Safety and Health Act

7. Americans With Disabilities Act

8. Texas Accessibility Act

9. Uniform Building Code

10. Uniform Plumbing Code

11. Uniform Mechanical Code

12. 2009 Energy Code

PERMITS AND LICENSES:

A. The successful bidder for this work shall secure and pay for all permits, governmental fees and licenses necessary for the proper execution and completion of the work.



1.12 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit to the Consultant (through the Owner and/or his agent) for preliminary review, two (2) copies of brochures and (1) sepia/original and two (2) copies of shop drawings as outlined. Prints shall be completely legible and be blue line with white background. Upon return of one copy of the data, submit the required number of corrected copies to the Owner for processing. The preliminary submittal shall be within four (4) weeks after award of contract. Partial submittals will not be acceptable or be processed.

B. Brochures of regularly manufactured items shall be submitted in the following format:

1. Front and rear protective cover with labeled project name.

2. Front sheet indicating the name and address of the project, Architect, Foodservice Consultant, General Contractor and Foodservice Equipment Contractor.

3. The brochure is to contain a separate fly sheet for each component or item of equipment arranged by item number in ascending order. The fly sheets are to indicate the item number, description, quantity, manufacturer, optional equipment, modifications and utility connections for each item or component of equipment. Items containing more than one buy-out, sub-assembly or component shall have an individual fly sheet for each component and shall be listed as secondary items listed in parenthesis beside the primary item description.

4. Catalog specification sheets and/or manufacturer’s shop drawings. Xerox copies are acceptable providing they are completely legible and contain all necessary data shown on the original catalog sheets. All brochures submitted should be consistent in the use of original copies.

C. Rough-in drawings shall be a series of four (4) sheets drawn at ¼” scale on sheet sizes identical to the Contract Documents and shall not be traced from the Contract Documents. Equipment not included in the Contract but shown on the Bidding Documents shall be indicated on the rough-in drawings with utilities on the Contract Documents including those not connected to the foodservice equipment shall be fully dimensioned to the point of stub up/out (not to the connection on the fixture or equipment). Each sheet shall have a title block showing the project name, Contractor’s name and address, sheet number, scale and description of the data shown on that sheet.

1. Equipment layout or floor plan with itemized schedule giving item number, quantity, description, furnishing or installing contractor identification, detail number, detail sheet number, and index or list of data to be found on each sheet.

2. Electrical rough-in plans showing all equipment items specified with each rough-in fully dimensioned to the location, size, and elevation. Provide a complete description of each service connection, including the type of outlet, capacity, type of connection, item connected to and all accessories required to be furnished, switches, contactors, etc. Wiring diagrams for items requiring field wiring such as fire control systems, etc., shall be placed on the rough-in plan or a secondary sheet behind the rough-in sheet. Wiring diagrams are to fully describe the equipment operation and all materials and labor to be furnished.



3. Mechanical rough-in plans consisting of plumbing rough-in sheet/sheets and ventilation rough-in sheet/sheets with refrigeration systems schematic piping, indicating line sizes and all components specified herein. Plans shall have each rough-in fully dimensioned to the location and elevation. Each rough-in is to be completely described as to the type of rough-in, type of connection, appliance connected to the rough-in and capacities required. Items requiring inter-piping in the field shall be noted and shown on the plans with complete and descriptive piping diagram where necessary for clarity. Piping schematics shall completely describe the equipment operation and all materials and labor to be furnished.

4. Critical dimension plans, sizing and location the following:

a. Exhaust Vents.

b. Depressions or slab recess in finished floor.

c. Wall openings for pass-thru equipment.

d. Tile or masonry curbs and pads for equipment.

e. Wall grounds or special structural provisions for equipment supports

D. Fabricated equipment shop drawings shall be drawn at ¾” scale for plan views and elevations; 1” scale or larger for sections and construction details on sheet sizes identical to the contract drawings and shall indicate the following.

1. Item number, quantity and description in the title strip at each item.

2. All construction details, sections and elevations to reflect all requirements of the specifications and/or equipment.

3. Adjacent walls, columns and/or equipment.

4. The brand name and model number of all buy-out components of a fabricated fixture.

E. The Owner’s and/or Consultant’s approval of submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for deviations, errors, or omissions in such data.

1.13 TECHANICAL SERVICE MANUALS:

A. Submit three (3) copies of instruction/maintenance manuals assembled in the following format. Manuals to be available at the time of demonstration.

1. Bound in hardback three-ring binders. Single sheets to have reinforced punched openings.

2. Insert a front sheet indicating the name and address of the project, Architect, Foodservice Consultant, General Contractor and Foodservice Equipment Contractor.

3. A separate fly sheet for each component of item of equipment indication: Item Number, quantity, manufacturer, optional equipment, modifications, utility requirements, warranty period, name, address and telephone number of the authorized service agency. Items containing more than one (1) buy-out, sub-



assembly or component shall have a separate fly sheet for each component and shall be listed as secondary item in parenthesis beside the primary item description.

4. Catalog specification sheets and/or manufacturer’s shop drawings.

5. Manufacturer’s operation/maintenance data including replacement parts lists for each buy-out item of equipment or component.

6. Provide the name and address of personnel or authorized parts and service agency of each respective manufacturer to be contacted for spare or replacement parts or service after the guarantee period.

1.14 WARRANTY:

A. Provide a written guarantee for a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion or written acceptance of the work, including extended four (4) year replacement warranty on compressor bodies covering all items of equipment under these specifications against defect in materials and workmanship. Guarantee shall include labor and parts to repair and/or replace any item or component.

B. Not intended to be included within the scope of the guarantee are items or components of equipment which are subject to normal replacement prior to one (1) year’s use (such as steam cooker door gaskets) and those items which may fail due to improper or inadequate periodic maintenance by the Owner/Operator (such as an un-cleaned refrigeration system condenser).

C. Refrigeration systems/equipment shall have service available within four (4) hours of notification.

1.15 VERIFICATION AND COORDINATION OF DATA:

A. Refrigerated and dry storage areas: Verify and coordinate dimensions to accommodate modular shelf sections. Point out any variance between the contract documents and actual conditions.

B. Color/pattern selections: Submit selections of plastic laminate, paint finishes and vinyl coated surfaces of equipment for Owner verification.

C. Drawings and Specifications: Review for accuracy and completeness. Where inaccuracies occur between the drawings and the specifications. The most stringent shall apply. Where utilities for equipment are specified the drawings shall take precedence over the specifications. Field check the locations of all items related to the work specified herein. Cooperate and coordinate the work with all other Contractors.

D. Dimension responsibility: The Contractor for this work shall provide himself with field dimensions and be responsible for the proper fit of all fabricated and/or buy-out equipment. All dimensions given are approximate and are as accurate as can be determined at this time. Contractor shall after carefully checking dimensions at the jobsite, notify the Architect and/or Consultant of any deviation, which may seriously damage the intent of the design for any fabricated item or component.

E. If the contract for equipment is awarded after mechanical and electrical services have been roughed-in, this Contractor shall carefully measure the locations of all floor and



wall penetrations and existing conditions and indicate same and provide for them on his shop drawings and final rough-in drawings. If his inspection reveals that any of these existing conditions seriously interfere with the execution of his work as required under the contract, he is to notify the Architect for instructions prior to proceeding with that portion of the work.

F. Scheduling to fit openings: Should it become necessary to schedule construction so that all partitions be erected prior to delivery of equipment, equipment must be fabricated so that it can be handled through finished openings. Keep in close contact with the progress to be cognizant of all conditions. Carefully coordinate work with the General Contractor. Deliver and install all materials and equipment as may be necessary and at such time so as not to delay progress of the construction.

G. Kitchen Equipment Contractor will verify all size and weight information for self leveling equipment and products for dispensing equipment for proper labeling.

1.16 INSPECTION AND CONDEMNATION OF WORK:

A. The Contractor, upon written notice form the Owner’s agent (Architect and/or Consultant) of condemnation of a work, materials, equipment or components of equipment for failure to comply with the standards as set out in these specifications, shall remove that item and replace same immediately without cost to the Owner.

1.17 QUIETNESS OF OPERATION:

A. Quietness of operation of all Foodservice Equipment is a requirement and the Contractor under this section will be required to remove or repair any equipment producing objectionable noise.

1.18 MATERIALS:

A. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new and of the best quality without flaws delivered, installed and maintained without damage until fully accepted by the Owner.

1.19 PLUMBING COMPONENTS:

A. Faucets for sinks, kettles, tilting fry pans, etc., to be furnished as listed or as called for under the item specifications. All fittings are to comply with ANSI and NSF standards #61 requirements.

1. Type No. 1 – T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. Model No. B-0290-LL*B015, ¾”, splash mounted, high volume, faucet with street ells, lock nuts, and 12” swing spout.

2. Type No. 2 - T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. Model No. B-0231-EE*B015, 1/2”, splash mounted, faucet with street ells, lock nuts, aerator, and 12” swing spout.

3. Type No. 3 - T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. Model No. B-0221-EE*B015, 1/2”, deck mounted, faucet with inlet fittings, lock nuts, aerator, and 12” swing spout.



4. Type No. 4 - T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. Model No. B-0321-EE*B015, 1/2”, deck mounted, faucet with inlet fittings, lock nuts, aerator, and 12” swing spout.

B. Water Inlet Fittings:

1. Type No. 1 – Fisher Model No. 2905*B015.


C. Spray Rinse:

1. Type No. 1 – T & S Brass and Bronze Works Model No. B-0113-B*B015, with No. B-109*B015 wall bracket.

D. Hose Bibs: Where included to be mounted on Foodservice Equipment to be T & S Brass and Works Model No. B-0674-BSTR*B015, satin chrome finish.

E. Drain fittings with connected overflows for all sinks and waste sockets for all drain troughs, scupper drains, drainers, etc., shall be installed in a die-stamped embossed opening with washers and lock nut. Solder applied to the top of a fitting will not be acceptable as a sealer.

1. Type No. 1 – Component Hardware Model No. D50-7215,*B015 rotary waste with connected overflow and tailpiece. Provide a 14 gauge stainless steel bracket welded to sink bottom, drilled to receive waste handle for support.

2. Type No. 2 – Component Hardware Model No. D50-7215,*B015 rotary waste with connected overflow and tail piece. Install on drain stem of proper length one T & S Brass Model No. BL-4710-1*B015 remote control stem assembly with white blank button. Set control handle in A.P.W. Model No. APW-111 bowl with center bottom drilled and fitted with T & S Model No. BL-4740-2*B015 guide bushing. Install bowl in apron of fixture.



5. Type No. 5 – Fisher Model No. 6542*B015 with No. 6562*B015 stopper.

6. Type No. 6 – Component Hardware Model No. E40-4895*B015, basket drain with connected overflow and 4” tailpiece.

F. Vacuum breakers where required (atmospheric type of proper size) control valves and water pressure regulator, and all exposed piping and fittings to be chrome plated.

G. Extend indirect waste fittings to drains from cold pans, frost plates, refrigeration coils, milk carton or ice cream dispensers, water stations and beverage counter drain troughs as shown on rough-in drawings. Drain lines to be 1” minimum Type “K” copper with a 1” minimum air gap space at drain. Insulate all lines subject to condensation with ½” insulation, provide chrome sleeves where exposed.



H. Stainless steel strap piping brackets/supports under counter or dishtable tops where exposed and galvanized where not exposed studded to the counter top and/or interior framing.

I. 14 gauge stainless steel gusset shaped panels for control valves to be mounted on open base fixtures.

J. Shock absorbers of the proper size and capacities shall be supplied on all Foodservice Equipment with quick opening or solenoid operated water valves.

K. All fabricated gas heated equipment to be furnished with a suitable gas pressure regulator at each supply. All burners shall be thermostatically controlled with automatic pilot light and positive safety shut-off.

L. Field assembled equipment shall have plumbing components completely interconnected under this section of the specifications ready for final connections as indicated on the rough-in drawings.

M. Fabricated equipment containing components, fittings, and/or devices requiring connection to the utility services shall have each component fitting or group thereof pre-piped to a utility compartment for final connection.

1.20 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS:

A. Furnish cords and caps on all plug in equipment as indicated on the Utility Drawings. Cords and caps are to be grounding type angle connectors (integrally molded where possible) with strain relief appliance grip assembly and attached cable having 100% positive ground wire attached to the frame/body of the equipment. The entire assembly is to be U.L. Listed. Comply with National Electrical Code and sized to conduct a minimum of 100% of the connected load. Coordinate with receptacles furnished by the Electrical Contractor and adjust all cord lengths and cap angles to eliminate loose hanging excess of cords. Straight connectors may be used where angle connectors are not practical. Provide water tight assemblies where exposed to splash areas.

B. Each motor driven or electrically heated appliance shall be equipped with a suitable control switch or starter of proper type in accordance with the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and the National Electrical Code which shall provide low-voltage and overload protection. In addition, those items indicated to be directly connected to the building utility service which are not protected by a circuit breaker or fused terminal, shall have a disconnect switch.

C. All switches, controls, or starters mounted in or on a fabricated structure shall be mounted in an approved NEMA enclosure which shall be watertight on open base structures or in exposed splash areas and shall have stainless steel face plates. Receptacles to be three wire, polarized, grounded receptacles. Deck mounted receptacles in cast aluminum Component Hardware Model No. R58-1010*B015 or No. R58-1020*B015 pedestals having the bottom of the box flush against the counter top and sealed against moisture.

D. All motors up to and including ¾ H.P. shall be wired for 120 volt single phase operation unless otherwise noted and have manual tumbler type starter with thermal overload protection and interchangeable heating elements. All motors 1 H.P. and above to be wired for 208 or 230 volt single or three phase or as noted and have



magnetic starters with low voltage protection and one interchangeable overload relay per phase.

E. All electrically heated appliances shall have thermostatic controls and those having immersion heaters are to have a positive low water cut-off.

F. Fabricated equipment containing electrically operated components and/or fitting indicated on the utility connections drawings as being directly connected to the services, shall have each component, fitting, or group thereof, pre-wired to a junction box, suitable panel board, or terminal strip as called for located in a utility compartment for final connection. Refer to Utility Drawings for circuit loading.

G. Panel boards or Local Distribution Panels where specified or scheduled on the drawings as furnished by the Kitchen Equipment Contractor for pre-wired components of foodservice equipment, shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Square D, or Westinghouse. Panel boards shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with UL, NEMA, NFPA Pamphlet No. 96 and the National Electrical Code and shall be so labeled. Panel board fuses shall be copper sized in accordance with UL having bolted type connections. Each panel board shall be equipped with a main circuit breaker and single and double pole, bolt on, thermal magnetic type breakers of the proper ratings for the items or components as indicated on the utility drawings. Single pole breakers shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. In addition all circuits shall be so arranged to provide for balanced phase and line loads. Panel boards shall be securely fastened to the fixture or structure as detailed on the drawings. Where panel boards are installed within a fixture or enclosure they shall be so located as to provide full and complete access as required by codes. Where they are installed in or around areas which may be exposed to moisture they shall be suitably protected with an interior partition, removable or hinged access door in the fixture. Panel board cabinets installed on open base fixtures where they may be exposed to moisture shall be moisture proof and shall have a hinged door with latch and lock assembly. Within each panel board each circuit shall be labeled indicating the item served and the connected load.

H. Wire way Ducts where specified shall be UL Listed and approved general purpose wire way as manufactured by General Electric, Square D, or Westinghouse. Wire way shall have sealable removable covers and knock-outs for lay-in conductors.

I. Conduit or tubing (EMT) of the proper size may be used for all wiring of fixtures where wiring is concealed or protected by bodies of the fixtures or may be otherwise not subject to physical damage or exposure to moisture.

J. Rigid conduit of proper size shall be used in all exposed locations with threaded connectors and fittings. Where conduit, fittings and connectors are exposed to moisture they shall have a liquid tight outer jacket.

K. Flexible galvanized metal tubing with water tight outer jackets where exposed to moisture shall be used to make final connections to components of equipment or appliances to be directly connected to the utility system.

L. Conductors of the proper size shall be all copper with insulation rated for wet or dry areas and shall be of the type and size approved by the NEC for the intended application. All wiring shall be color coded in accordance with the wiring diagrams provided with equipment. Color coding for branch circuit wiring of pre-wired fabricated items shall conform the requirements of Division 26 of these specifications. Field assembled equipment shall have all electrical components completely interconnected under this section for final connection as indicated on the rough-in drawings.



M. All voltages should be verified and all final connections points on equipment shall be tagged, indicating: item number, name of device, total electrical load, voltage and phase.

N. Provide lamps in all Foodservice Equipment containing light fixtures.

1.21 DUCTS AND VENTS:

A. All exhaust hoods not installed tight against the ceiling shall be furnished with 16 gauge stainless steel seamless duct risers to 6” above the ceiling for final connection. The duct shall be trimmed at the ceiling with 16 gauge stainless steel angle having all corners mitered, welded ground and polished for a neat appearance. Ducts shall be fully welded to hoods.

B. All exhaust hoods installed flush with ceiling shall have a 2” high fully welded duct collar for final connection to the duct system.

C. Condensation ducts for appliances or devices equipped with vent cowls or extended duct risers shall have an 18 gauge stainless steel duct risers to 6” above the ceiling as herein before described in paragraph “a.” Ducts shall fit inside connection duct collars allowing condensation to drain back through the appliance and shall be secured and sealed in a neat manner.

1.22 REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS:

A. Foodservice equipment refrigeration systems indicated shall be furnished complete with all necessary controls and accessories such as expansion valves, hand shut-off valves, dryers, sight glasses, thermostats, solenoid valves, high and low pressure controls. Dials, heat exchangers, lines vibration eliminators, oil separators, time clocks, defrost heaters, tubing, refrigerant and oil to provide a complete and working system.

B. Equipment provided with self-contained or factory installed compressors shall be checked and adjusted to proper operation temperature.

C. Motor compressors for all low, medium, and high temperature fractional horsepower applications shall be Copeland single stage, air cooled, hermetic units. Motor compressors one horsepower and above for low, medium or high temperature applications are to be single stage, air cooled, semi-hermetic, accessible units as called for under the items specifications or scheduled on the drawings. Compressors sized to operate within the recommended suction and discharge range of economical operation and with the required capacity are to be installed. All units are to be new and factory assembled to operate with the proper refrigerant. High and low pressure controls shall be adjustable for range and differential. High pressure cut out shall be automatic reset type. All systems are to be equipped with fan cycle pressure switches. All terminal boxes, relays, capacitors, etc. shall be accessibly mounted.

D. Blower or fan coils of size and capacity to provide properly balanced systems with electrical defrost heaters and built-in heat exchangers are to be installed in fabricated equipment. Fan coils shall have coil drain lines extended to a condensate evaporator (located within the compressor compartment where possible.) Provide drain line heaters where exposed to freezing ambient temperatures on all drain lines, walk-in freezer or fabricated equipment.



E. All compressors exposed to weather conditions or low ambient temperatures shall be furnished with winter controls, crank case heaters, and suitable weather protection cover, which shall be easily removable for servicing. Fractional horse compressors specified to be installed within a fabricated enclosed body fixture shall be located in a partitioned compartment of adequate size and fitted with a louvered door (or panel) for proper ventilation. The compressor shall be mounted on 14 gauge galvanized steel channels welded to the fixture frame and fitted with spring loaded sound and vibration, absorbing, isolation pads. Pre-wire units through a switch in the fixture apron to a junction box located near the front of the enclosure and provide a cord and cap assembly. Units may be pre-wired to a load center as required under the item specification.

F. All refrigeration lines for remote systems (such as walk-in cooler/ freezers, etc.) shall be refrigerant grade A.C.R. or Type “L” hard copper tubing with fittings of wrought copper or brass designed for high temperature solder. Piping joints shall be made with silver solder (sil-fos). Piping shall be suspended from and anchored to the structure on adjustable bridge type trapeze hangers not to exceed 6’-0” O.C. The lines shall be isolated against vibration for the structure and shall be graded to prevent oil trapping. Where vertical line runs occur, creating a low area in the line a trap shall be installed in the line at the lowest point with a bleed off valve.

G. Install the following accessories for fractional horsepower compressors:

1. American Vibration Eliminator Company suction lines vibration eliminator.

2. Henery Packless shut-off valves at condensing unit inlet and outlet (Henry wing-cap gate velves for 7/8” O.C. and larger.)

3. Henery Packless shut-off valves at evaporator suction and liquid lines (Henery wing-cap gate valves for 7/8” O.C. and larger.)

4. Sporlan “catch-all” refrigerant filter/dehydrator at condensing unit outlet with “see-all” suction glass and cover.

5. Sporlan thermostatic expansion valve with external equalizer and Sporlan “catch-all” suction filter/dryer.

6. Oil separator in freezer systems only, piped to crankcase with shut-off valve in return line.

H. All refrigerant suction lines for remote or fabricated refrigerated equipment. Lines exterior to the building and extending through walls or roofs shall have Owens-Corning, metal jacketed, vapor sealed, molded, sectional pipe coverings, 1-1/2” thick minimum 4% density with fiberglass or field fabricated covers from segments of pipe covers at all fittings and valves. All piping and/or fitting covers to be joined together and sealed with insulation cement. All suction lines on the interior of the building envelope shall be insulated with the same material excluding the metal jackets but furnished with ASJ jackets. The material change shall occur inside the building envelope. Optionally, pipe insulation as manufactured by Dura-Cell, No. F/R in ½” wall thickness may be used for all suction lines on the interior and exterior of the building. Dura-Cell insulation one the exterior of the building shall have a water tight metal tape applied to prevent the absorption of water. Pipe insulation shall meet or exceed the flame spread ratings required by fire codes and UL flammability classifications.



I. All liquid and suction lines, coils and compressors shall by sized in accordance with ACRMA Standards and the best practice of the Food Service Industry. All refrigerants to comply with current CFC standards.

1.23 THERMOMETERS:

A. All refrigerated compartments, fabricated and standard shall be fitted with a thermometer. Fabricated assemblies to have a dial type thermometer with chrome plated flush bezels and shall be adjustable, for calibration after installation. Thermometers to be located in a convenient, visible location on or near the compartment.

1.24 FABRICATION MATERIALS:

A. Stainless steel shall be 18-8, Type 304, stainless steel polished to 180 grit No. 4 finish, having a standard analysis of 18% chrome and 8% nickel. All gauges specified herein shall be United States Standards.

1. Stainless steel joints and seams shall be Heli-Arc welded, free of pits and flaws, ground and polished to No. 4 finish.

2. Grain direction of horizontal stainless steel surfaces shall be longitudinal including splash backs. Right angle joints and seams shall have a mitered appearance.

B. Galvanized metal joints and seams shall be arc welded, free of pits and flaws and ground smooth.

1. Galvanized metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and spray painted with rust resistant gray hammertone enamel. Finish to be glossy and free of blemishes.

C. Plastic Laminates: Colors and patterns to be selected by the Architect.

1. Veneering with heat proof and waterproof Urea based cement or approved equal.

2. Material shall be 1/16” thickness for all horizontal and vertical exposed surfaces, faces and edges.

3. Materials may be 1/32” thickness or approved backing and balancing sheet material on unexposed surfaces.

4. Core to be closed grained Birch plywood or selected smooth sanded stock (particle board not acceptable.)

1.25 SHOP AND FIELD JOINTS:

A. Stainless steel surfaces requiring welded joints shall be arc welded, free of pits and flaws, penned to remove flux, ground and polished to original finish. Where grinding and polishing destroy the original grain, the weld shall be background and blended to restore grain to match the surrounding surface.

B. Joints in enclosed base bodies shall be draw-type with hairline seams and field welded.



C. Plastic laminate joints shall be doweled, glued and draw bolted with fasteners being careful to match patterns.

1.26 HIGHLIGHTING:

A. Thoroughly polish all vertical surfaces of table and counter top turn downs, rolled rims full radius, over shelves and serving shelf turn downs, pass through window and dish deposit window turn downs where exposed to public or customer view.

1.27 SOUND DEADENING:

A. All table and counter tops of fixtures, frame members, over shelves and under shelves shall have a Schnee Butyl Sealant ½” rope sound deadening installed between the top and the frame.

1.28 PAINTING:

A. All fixtures unless made of stainless steel, or otherwise specified, shall be finished in gray hammertone enamel, glossy and free of blemishes.

1.29 BOLTS RIVETS AND SCREWS:

A. Stainless steel bolts and screws shall be used in the fastening of any components.

B. Wherever threads of bolts or screws are exposed to visual or physical contact, they shall be capped with chrome or stainless steel cap nuts and lick washers.

C. Concealed bolts or fasteners shall be used to fasten trim to the body or top of equipment where trim is necessary to conform to structure irregularities.

D. Rivets used in the fastening of any components of equipment shall be stainless steel.

1.30 CASTERS:

A. Mobile fabricated equipment shall have 5” diameter heavy duty ball bearing casters with neoprene or polyurethane tires, rotating bumpers, two casters with vertilock brakes having a minimum capacity f 250 pounds per caster unless otherwise noted. All casters shall have a polished late finish and shall be N.S.F. approved.

B. All standard manufactured equipment shall be furnished with casters equal to the above with exception to normal wheel diameter.

1.31 FEET AND LEGS:

A. All fabricated equipment with open base understructures or tubing legs shall have tubing wall beveled at bottom and fitted with United Show Case stainless steel adjustable bullet foot Model No. BF-158*B015 or approved equal.

B. Cabinet base fabricated equipment shall be mounted on a two piece die stamped adjustable stainless steel bullet foot. Top shall be flared and welded to a mounting plate or top suitable for bolting to channel bracing in cabinet body with not less than three bolts. Leg shall be 8” high and have a minimum adjustment of 2”. Legs to be United Show Case No. LM-68B or equal.

1.32 HARDWARE:



A. All hardware shall be of heavy duty construction and of uniform design. Hardware shall be satin finish, chrome finished brass or polished stainless steel finish and shall have manufacturer’s name and model number affixed for ease of replacement.

1.33 LIGHT FIXTURES:

A. Light fixtures furnished as a part of a fabricated exhaust canopy shall be a recessed, flush mounting, incandescent type U.L. listed N.S.F. approved fixture having a stainless steel mounting flange. Fixtures are to be mounted through the interior of the hood with grease and vapor proof gaskets and concealed fasteners. Fixtures are to be equipped with tempered prismatic crystal lenses set in hinged access door equal to Component Hardware Model NSF-87-TG-2. Furnish 150 watt lamps in each fixture.

1.34 OVER SHELVES:

A. All over shelves to be 16 gauge stainless steel with all free edges turned down 1-1/2” with ½” tight hem at bottom and coved ¼” radius up 2” at abutting walls and adjoining fixtures. Cap all exposed ends and backs full height, edge and turn up, with outside exposed corners rounded on 1-1/2” radius and all free edges ground smooth.

B. Glass/cup rack over selves at dishtables to be 16 gauge stainless steel with 3” deep by 1-1/2” rolled edge having 3/16” weep holes on 6” centers at bottom. Shelf to slope up to wall at rear on 45 degree angle with sides and back turned up to match height of front roll. Double sided rack shelves to have 1-1/2” deep “V”, with weep holes, 1-1/2” rolled edge on both sides, flat bottom and 1-1/2” rolled edge on both sides, with 1-5/8” O.D. 16 gauge stainless steel tubing center rack support. End caps mitered up to support tubing. All internal intersections coved ¼” radius.

C. Wall mounted over shelves on 14 gauge stainless steel pan shaped brackets, 5” by 8” for 12” widths, set in 6” from ends and spaced 4’-0” O.C. maximum. Stud shelves to brackets

D. Table mounted over shelf on 1-1/4” O.D. 16 gauge stainless steel tubing legs, one in each corner and in center as needed. Upper end of legs welded to a 14 gauge stainless steel closed inverted hat channel studded to shelf. Lower ends of legs are to be attached to counter tops with concealed expansion anchors and sealed against moisture.

E. Cantilever mounted over shelves on 14 gauge stainless steel brackets fully welded to 1-1/4” O.D. 16 gauge stainless steel tubing supports. Tubing to extend through table splash and be securely fastened to under-framing, either over a stud welded to the frame with Allen set screw through tubing or into galvanized iron socket with Allen set screw, welded to the frame.

F. Over shelves exceeding 12” in width are to have 14 gauge, stainless steel closed inverted hat channel bracing studded to the underside full length of the shelf.

1.35 SERVING SHELVES:

A. Serving shelves over hot food or bread sections of serving counters are to be fabricated of 16 gauge stainless steel turned down flat on all sides with ½” tight hem at bottom and coved up 2” at all abutting walls or adjoining fixtures.



B. Mount shelves on Component Hardware Model No. J25*B015 series tilt-out brackets with ¼” thick polished plate safety glass sneeze guard having all exposed edges encased in stainless steel pocket trim secured to glass with clear adhesive sealant. Provide 1” air gap between counter top and bottom of the sneeze guard.

C. Where ends of serving shelves are exposed, provide a rear leg and plate glass end panels having all the exposed edges encased in stainless steel pocket trim.

1.36 DISPLAY SHELVES:

A. Display shelves are to be ¼” polished plate safety glass having all edges ground smooth set into 1” square stainless steel tubing frame of all welded construction. Frame to have legs at all corners and center legs not more than 4’-0” on center. Open ends or tops of tubing shall be integrally welded closed, ground and polished smooth. Front legs (customer’s side) to slope back 10 degrees matching serving shelves. Provide 1” square stainless steel tubing stringers at operator’s side and 5/8” square stainless steel angle rests welded to frame four sides with pop-in rubber cushions to support shelves flush with top of frame. The leg bottoms are to be welded to a 2-1/4” by 7/16” stainless steel square base plate drilled, tapped and secured through the counter top and under frame where possible with 5/16” bolt, washer and lock washer of non-corrosive material. All frame intersections are to be welded, ground and polished to the original finish. Provide ¼” thick polished plate safety glass sneeze guards at each shelf with all edges encased in stainless steel pocket trim and mounted on frame with Component Hardware No. J30 series adjustable brackets. All exposed ends are to be fully enclosed with ¼” thick polished plate safety glass panels inserted between legs. Provide where called for Component Hardware No. L75-3200 series or equal slim line fluorescent stainless steel light fixtures mounted under each shelf with lamp and safety shields. Pre-wire the fixtures through a switch in the fixture apron to the point of final connection and install a remote ballast in an accessible location.

1.37 OVERHEAD POT AND PAN OR UTILITY RACKS:

A. Cantilever or table mounted racks are to be fabricated of 1-5/8” O.D. 16 gauge stainless steel tubing having ends welded closed, ground and polished smooth with 2” by ¼” stainless steel bands welded in place and fitted with Component Hardware Model No. J79-4115*B015 or J77-4401*B015 removable stainless steel pot hooks on 6” centers as called for. Secure the racks to the table under-framing same as over shelves. Where supports are specified to pass through the table work surface, provide Component Hardware No. A16-0206*B015 stainless steel flanges welded to the table or counter tops and extend the supports to the under frame cross rails and secure with Titan rigitruss fittings. The supports may be coped, fully welded and finished at the cross rails where fixture knock down is not necessary for entry to the building.

1.38 TABLE TOPS:

A. All metal and/or counter tops are to be fabricated of 14 gauge stainless steel with all joints shop welded, ground and polished and all internal intersections of two or more planes coved a minimum of ¼”.

B. All tops for open base fixtures shall be braced on underside with 1” by 4” 12 gauge galvanized steel channels through center line of table top full length and cross channels at each pair of legs and as necessary to eliminate any noticeable deflection in the tip. All bracing to be secured to the top with ¼” studs welded to the underside of the top on 6” centers maximum. Provide each stud with chrome plated cap nuts,



washer and lock washer. Studs shall be of sufficient length to allow cap nuts to be made up tight eliminating any vibration. Tops shall overhang frames or bodies 1” on all free sides.

C. Work table and/or counter top shall have all free edges turned down flat 1-1/2” and hemmed tight ½” at bottom. Where turn downs intersect at free corners, they shall be radiused ¾”. All tops adjacent to walls or abutting fixtures shall cove up 10” and shall have a 45 degree sloped turn back of 1-1/2”, plus 1” where utilities occur. Splash ends are to be closed to bottom of turn down. Turn splash backs down 1” at walls into 14 gauge stainless steel 4” long “Z” clips anchored to wall on 12” centers. Exposed backs of splashes are to be capped with pan shaped fillers of same material as tops.

D. Where tops with marine edges are specified, they shall break up on 45 degree angle 3/8” high and turn down 2” with ½” tight hem at bottom. Turn down intersections to be radiused ¾” at all free corners.

E. Dishtable top shall have all free edges coved up 3” high and rolled over 220 degrees in ¾” radius with bull nose outside corners. Tops to have a built-in slope of 1/8” per foot minimum maintaining a level crown at the table edge. All internal intersections to be coved ¾” minimum. Raw edges of rolled rim are to be ground smooth and free of any sharp edges or burrs.

F. Where tops with rolled edges are specified, they shall be rolled over 180 degrees in ¾” radius, having rounded outside corners. All raw edges shall be ground smooth and free of any sharp edges or burrs.

G. Sink drainboards and/or work tables with drainers or sinks shall be sloped 1/8” per foot to the sink or drainer maintaining a level crown at the table edge.

H. Where siphon breakers are furnished as part or component of equipment specified, the back splash is to be boxed out and drilled to receive the siphon breaker and water lines.

1.39 SINKS:

A. All sinks are to be fabricated of 14 gauge stainless steel having the back, bottom and front formed of one continuous piece. Sink partitions and ends of same material are to be welded in with all internal intersection of two or more planes coved ¾” radius. Sink partitions are to be double wall 1-1/2” width with rounded tops same height as adjoining drainboards. Soldier will not be accepted for coving corners. Coved corners must be welded in and background for desired radius.

B. Free edges of sinks not adjoining drainboards shall have rolled rim edge same as for dishtables.

C. Where sink abuts high walls or adjacent fixtures, sides and/or backs shall extend up in a 10” high splash same as work tables and shall be from outside of roll to outside of roll. Drill 8” center faucet holes centered over each sink partition (or drain fitting on single compartments) 2-1/2” down for break in splash.

D. Sink bottoms are to be scored and sloped ½” to a die-stamped center mounted type #1 (unless otherwise noted) drain fitting. Overflows to be set 1” below drain boards on center line. Open base sinks shall be mounted on tubing legs with cross rails same as open base fixtures with the gussets fully welded to sink bottoms. Cross rails are to be omitted at the rear of sinks where plumbing occurs.



E. Sink depths indicated under item specifications are measured from drain board to tub bottom. Length and width are overall inside dimensions.

F. Sink inserts are to be deep drawn seamless construction of size and shape as called for. Material and gauge shall be the same as for fabricated sinks. Sinks shall be integrally welded into the counter top and shall appear as one piece with the top. Sinks to have a die stamped opening fitted with a type #2 drain fitting unless otherwise noted.

1.40 DRAIN TROUGHS:

A. Where drain troughs are specified in counter tops, provide a 5” wide by 2” deep by length as called for, integral trough having the bottom scored and sloped to a die stamped opening for a type #3 waste socket. Provide a 20 gauge stainless steel, slotted, splash proof, drain cover 1-3/4” high. Each end of the drain cover shall be solid with grommeted finger holes at each end. Drainer to be Component Hardware No. J80 series heavy duty stainless steel, non-splash drip plate or equal.

1.41 SCUPPER DRAINS:

A. Provide a full width of dishtable 4” wide by 2” deep integral drain trough. Score bottom and slope to a die-stamped opening fitted with a Fisher Model No. 6542-6570*B015 drain fitting and tailpiece. Fitted in the trough, provide a 16 gauge stainless steel perforated removable strainer basket to fit snugly in trough. The basket is to be braced with 3/8” stainless steel rods welded in place across the top center and both ends of the basket. The top perimeter edge of the basket is to be hemmed over tight and have all the corners welded closed. Mount the basket on ¼” high legs in each corner of 3/8” stainless steel rods with rounded bottoms.

1.42 PREWASH SINKS:

A. Pre-wash sinks are to be 21” wide by 21” long by 10” deep having all internal corners coved ¾”. Bottoms of sinks are to be scored and sloped ½” to a die-stamped opening and fitted with a type #6 drain fitting and tailpiece.

B. Provide a 16 gauge stainless steel perforated basket strainer full size of the sink having internal corners coved and top edge hemmed over ½”. Basket handles, formed by 4” long by 1-1/2” high grommeted slots are to be cut into the sides at the top.

C. Provide a rack guide assembly of 1” by 1” by 1/8” stainless steel angle framing full perimeter of the sink. Angles are to turn down into the sink at the entry and exit end of the sink. Angle frame to turn up at the front and rear of the sink and flare out 45 degrees at ends full width of the table bed. Frame to have two 1” by 1/8” stainless steel intermediate supports welded in place and running longitudinal with the table.

1.43 DISH TRAY DEPOSIT ASSEMBLIES:

A. Deposit assemblies are to be integrally formed with the table top, of size and shape as called for. Where deposit shelves extend through the building walls, provide a ¾” high by 45 degree marine edge with 2” turn down and ½” tight return to wall. Deposit shelf to slope back towards conveyor or dishtable. Table splash to extend trough opening, single thickness, and to be secured to opening frame at the sides.



B. Where window frames are called for, they shall be telescoping 16 gauge stainless steel, flanged out 2” at perimeter with ½” tight return to the wall on both sides of opening. All corners to be mitered, welded, ground and polished.

1.44 OPEN BASE FIXTURES:

A. All open base fixture under framing to be 1-5/8” O.D. 16 gauge stainless steel tubing legs and cross rails at each set of legs. Intersections between legs and cross rails shall be coped, welded 360 degrees, ground and polished.

B. Tops of legs are to be closely fitted into a stainless steel die-formed enclosed cylindrical sanitary gusset Component Hardware No A18-0206 or equal. Gussets are to be fully welded to the table top framing.

C. All tubular leg bottoms are to be swedged for appearance and close fit and have a stainless steel rounded adjustable bullet foot, United Show Case No. BF-158 or approved equal.

1.45 OPEN BASE FIXTURE UNDER SHELF:

A. Shelves fabricated of 18 gauge stainless steel having all open sides turned down 1-1/2” and hemmed ½” Edges near walls or abutting fixtures coved ¼” radius up 2” and hemmed over tight ½”. Notch shelves to fit tubular legs and weld from underside completely filing void, grind and polish for neat appearance. Provide a 1” by 4” by 14 gauge galvanized channel studded to the underside of the shelf running longitudinal at center line of shelf and at each intermediate pair of legs.

1.46 ENCLOSED BASE BODIES:

A. All enclosed base bodies are to be fabricated of 18 gauge stainless steel and shall be on integral channel frame design. Bodies are to be totally enclosed at sides, ends and backs as design requires.

B. Interior end walls to break out at ends and terminate in a 2” by 2” by ¾” box mullion and extend back past false back at rear of fixture. Exterior end panels are to be pan shaped turned in on all sides and form and integral channel at top. Panels to be welded together at top and front, and to leg channels at bottom. Exterior end panels may be omitted where fixture fits between building walls.

C. All interior walls are to be pan shaped forming integral cross channel framing at top and integral vertical mullions at front rear with sides flush at open or shelving sections where possible.

D. All exterior body panels shall be cut from sheet sizes as large as possible eliminating all unnecessary joints. Joints where necessary to be hairline butt joints welded full height of joint on back. Finish face welds and seal joints.

E. Additional framing at counter top of 1” by 4” by 14 gauge channels welded to tops of end and intermediate walls and cross channels 4”-0” O.C. maximum where walls do not occur.

F. Interior bottom shelves of 18 gauge stainless steel to be turned down at front 1-1/2” and back under channel leg frame. Backs of shelves are to cove up and terminate in an integral channel frame at top same as body walls. Shelf sides are to cove up, break past 90 degrees for tight hug at body walls. Fully welded corners, welded at



walls and seal. Interior intermediate shelves of 18 gauge stainless steel to turn down at front 1-1/2” and break ¾” forming integral channel. Sides and backs coved up and break past 90 degrees for tight hug at body walls with corners welded and finished. Shelves welded in place with rear support angle or channel and sealed at body walls.

G. Intermediate closed box mullions, horizontal channel stringers, body walls forming mullions and shelf turn downs to be integrally welded and finished.

H. Leg channels to be formed of 14 gauge galvanized steel 1-1/2” by 5” by 1-1/2”. Channels are to turn down and run longitudinal through the center of the fixture with cross channels at each pair of legs and as needed for bracing. Provide angle or channel stringers between leg channels at the perimeter of body. The entire assembly is to be fully welded together and concealed by the fixture body which shall be sufficiently welded to the channel frame to form a rigid integral structure.

I. Cut outs in counters for mobile or free standing equipment to be constructed the same as double wall body ends and to be completely skirted on all sides. Body ends at drawer housing and cut outs for built-in equipment may be single wall construction turning in and forming vertical body mullions at openings.

J. Provide additional angle or channel bracing as necessary and where built-in, drop-in, or counter top equipment occurs for structural integrity.

K. Tops as herein before described are to be securely fastened to the bodies with ¼” studs welded to tops through channels 6” O.C. Provide chrome platted cap nuts, washers and lock washers at each stud of such length as to allow cap nuts to be drawn tight eliminating and vibration.

1.47 SLIDING DOORS:

A. Sliding doors shall be double pan 18 gauge stainless steel or solid core ¾” thick mounted on Component Hardware or equal overhead door track with stainless steel door sheaves. Sheaves to have plate ball bearing rollers. Stainless steel spring loaded guide pins to be mortised into center of bottom shelf. Each door is to have pop-in rubber stops top and bottom, and formed flush pulls as detailed. Metal doors are to have all corners welded and finished. Solid core doors are to be laminated on all sides and edges.

1.48 HINGED DOORS:

A. Hinged doors constructed same as sliding doors are to be mounted on heavy duty chrome plated concealed pivot hinges with pop-in rubber cushions at door jambs top and bottom and Component Hardware No. M22-2430 friction catch.

1.49 UTILITY ENCLOSURES:

A. Where top arrangement or internal equipment components make it necessary for plumbing or supply piping to pass through the base of an enclosed fixture. The piping shall be contained in a suitable utility enclosure as in base for sink. Each such enclosure is to nave an adequate pan shaped flush access panel easily removable without the use of tools.

B. In detailing fixtures, the Kitchen Equipment Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining the proper location and size of such chases, slots or holes and



coordination of proper routing of final connection through the fixtures. In no instance shall piping penetrate bottom or intermediate shelves.

C. Where piping penetrates counter tops, provide a close fitting flared raised stainless steel sleeve welded to the top and finished. All penetrations to be properly sized, located and fully described on fabricator’s shop drawings and shall be installed in fabricator’s shop prior to delivery of the equipment.

1.50 COMPRESSOR ENCLOSURES:

A. Wherever refrigerated components occur in fixtures, compressors of size shown on the plans shall be installed in an adequate compartment having a flush fitting pan shaped easily removable access panel with die stamped louvers as close to the compartment as possible.

B. Compressor to be installed on frames formed of galvanized channels welded to front and rear body stringers or leg channels with sound and vibration, insulation, neoprene, dampening pads.

1.51 REFRIGERATED BASES:

A. Where refrigerated bases are called for. The exterior shall be constructed same as enclosed base fixtures. Exterior bottom and unexposed backs may be 18 gauge galvanized having panels joined in hairline butt type lap joints.

B. Insulated walls to be a total of 2” thick consisting of 1” urethane panels having all joints staggered and closely fitted eliminating any voids or cracks.

C. Interior liners to be 20 gauge stainless steel having all internal corners coved ¾” and all joints or seams above the liquid overflow level. Door sills to be flush with the bottom which shall slope from the rear to the door opening.

D. Provide 1/8” thick bake-lite breaker strips between interior liner and exterior body jambs and install low voltage door jamb heaters at each opening.

E. Doors shall be flush, in-fitting, double pan, 1-1/2” thick, insulated same as the body. Pans to be fully welded, all corners and seams having an 18 gauge stainless steel exterior pan and 20 gauge stainless steel interior pan. Mount doors on Kason No 1556 series extra heavy duty chrome plated power hinges or equal and provide vinyl latex magnetic door gaskets full perimeter. Install magnetic attraction strips behind the door jamb face concealed by the liner. Above each door install a chrome plated, roller grip catch equal to Kason Model No. 535-H*B015 with strike housing counter sunk into jamb. All doors shall be fitted with Kason No. 910-C pull handle with black insert.

F. Completely prime interiors of door pans, exterior and interior body panels with a permanent non-conductive adhesive sealing compound prior to installing the insulation. Doors, tops and bottoms must be completely sealed against moisture.

G. Provide a completely sealed non-conductive sleeve through the body walls where piping or other functional parts penetrate.

H. Each compartment is to be equipped with a dome type vapor proof light fixture having a gasketed lens and 40 watt lamp installed in a convenient location and wired through a door switch at each opening to a final connection point.



I. Wherever openings in tops of refrigerated bases occur, provide a raised beaded opening of the size called for with rounded corners. Turn the top down into the opening 1” and provide a bake-lite breaker strip between the turn down and the opening sleeve. All such openings shall have an 18 gauge stainless steel hinged removable cover with all corners welded and raw edges hemmed tight ½”.

1.52 FROST PLATES:

A. Where frost plates are called for, top shall be turned down 1” on 45 degree angle full perimeter into a flat frost plate having the bottom scored and sloped to a type #4 drain fitting. Frost plate and turn down to be one piece with top. Install a low wattage tape heater under top full perimeter at turn down.

B. Provide an 18 gauge galvanized lower pan studded to the underside of the top with 2” of insulation same as refrigerated base.

C. Refrigeration lines shall be coiled under the top on 1-1/2” centers beginning 2-1/4” minimum in from top turn down. Press lines for maximum contact and secure to underside with stainless steel straps studded to bottom of plate. Apply thermal mastic to underside of plate same thickness as refrigeration lines, filling all voids between lines and completely covering bottom of plate. Install a sheet of polyethylene vapor barrier material between insulation and mastic. Remaining void at perimeter of plate to be filled with insulation.

1.53 REFRIGERATED PANS:

A. Refrigerated pans are to have a raised beaded opening with rounded corners turned down 1” into a 4” deep pan. Provide bake-lite breaker strip between pan walls and seal. Remaining construction features to be same as frost plates.

1.54 ICE PANS:

A. Ice pans shall be constructed same as refrigerated pans with one exception. Omit the refrigeration lines and the thermal mastic.

B. Provide a 16 gauge perforated sectional stainless steel false bottom 1” high with stainless steel grommeted finger holes in ends of each section. False bottom is to have rounded outside corners and to fit snugly in the bottom of the pan.

ICE BINS:

A. Where ice bins are called for, bodies and liners shall be same as called for under refrigerated bases.

B. Provide a raised beaded opening with rounded outside corners turned down 1” into bin. Provide an 18 gauge stainless steel double pan in-fitting hinged removable lid with edges crimped down over beaded opening for a tight fit. Insulate between the pans with 1” of urethane and install stainless steel piano hinge between the leaves. Provide Component Hardware Model No. P46-1012*B015 pulls on each leaf.

1.56 HOT FOOD WARMERS:

A. Built-in food warmers where called for are to be American Permanent Ware #80 series or equal. Round warmers are to be American Permanent Ware #50 series. Size as called for.



B. Counter tops at food warmers to have a raised beaded opening with rounded corners turned down into the warmer. Provide an 18 gauge galvanized false bottom under each warmer or group or warmers.

1.57 DRAWERS:

A. Drawers to be Component Hardware No. S90-0020-C-N, with 20” by 20” by 5” deep stainless steel pans for all tool drawers and No. S90-0015-C-N with 15” by 20” by 5” deep stainless steel pans for cash drawers. All drawers to be master keyed.

B. Drawers secured to table under framing on open based fixtures.

1.58 REMOVABLE CUTTING BOARDS:

A. Removable cutting boards where called for to be John Boos Poly 1000 ¾” thick or approved equal. Size and shape to be as specified.

1.59 TRAY RAILS:

A. Open type tray rails shall be three bar 1” O.D. 16 gauge stainless steel tubing mounted on Component Hardware Model No. J19-4960*B015, stainless steel brackets or equal. Ends shall have United Show Case No. TS38*B015 return ends. Drill and tap all components and assemble with stainless steel counter sunk machine screws.

B. Brackets shall be mounted and secured through the counter face to the framing with concealed fasteners.

C. Solid tray slides to be Component Hardware or equal No. J12-1600*B015 series, 16 gauge stainless steel roll formed tray slide assemblies. Ends to be closed full height of turn down. Mount rails on 12 gauge channel brackets 4’-0” O.C. maximum, secured to counter frame in concealed manner.

D. Tray rails may be mounted as a top over an enclosed service raceway having 1-1/2” by 1-1/2” by 1/8” galvanized angle frame fully welded and secured to counter body. Pan shaped or solid core removable panels of equal length as called for below the tray rail to attach over frame with stainless steel “z” clips at the top and the bottom. Provide 2” wide hat shaped 14 gauge stainless steel vertical mullion spacers between panels, 4’-0” O.C. maximum, welded to frame on counter legs or masonry base as called for. Where frame is mounted on legs, provide removable kick plate secured with stainless steel spring clamps to legs, material as specified.

1.60 IDENTIFICATION PLATES:

A. Regularly manufactured equipment shall be fitted with name plates indicating manufacturer’s address and utility requirements.

B. Equipment suppliers, fabricators or contractors shall not attach company identification labels, tags or plates to any equipment provided.

C. All adhesive backed labels applied to the exterior surfaces except N.S.F. labels shall be removed prior to Owner’s acceptance.



D. Fabricated equipment switches, special duty control valves and similar devices shall be fitted with an identification plate indicating the function or purpose (i.e. “display lights”, “food warmers”, etc.)

E. Identification plates shall be phenolic plastic or 16 gauge stainless steel with etched relief letters. Labels shall be affixed to equipment with pop rivets or stainless steel screws. Submit samples for approval.

1.61 MODEL NUMBERS:

A. Each model number includes the code *B015 as a suffix. This code is known as the Specifier Identification System. It is not to be removed by the bidders. Its purpose is to identify the Specifier to the vendors providing equipment in the event it is necessary to communicate questions, clarifications and comments, from prior to bid award through the final purchase. It is to be used on all correspondence including fax and e-mail when communicating with manufacturer representatives and factories. For further information, contact NAFEM Headquarters by fax (312-527-6658) with your question.

PART 2 - EQUIPMENT –

Item No.: 01, Qty.: 1, Description: Air Curtain, UnHeated, Manufacturer: Berner. Model No.: ICA1048A*B015, furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. On/Off, roller type, door micro switch.

B. White powder coated finish.

Item No.: 02, Qty.: 1, Description: Work Table, Mobile, Manufacturer: Custom. Model No.: N/A, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Provide custom fabricated assembly, size and shape indicated on drawings, in accordance with the general specification, including

B. Provide 14 gauge stainless steel top with flat turned down edges on all sides, and radiused outside corners.

C. Provide one (1), stainless steel, self-closing tool drawers in enclosed housing as detailed.

D. Understructure to be open base construction with stainless steel under-shelf. Table mounted on four heavy duty, polyurethane casters, Two (2) swivel, and two(2) with brakes per general requirements.

Item No.: 03, Qty.: 1, Description: Scale, Manufacturer: Pelouse. Model No.: 4040, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Model No. ADPT2*B015 adapter for use with 120V power source.

Item No.: 04, Qty.: 1, Description: Washer, Domestic, Manufacturer: Kenmore. Model No.: 12502, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. 120 volt, single phase washer complete with water connection hose kit, cord and plug assembly.



Item No.: 05, Qty.: 1, Description: Dryer, Domestic, Manufacturer: Kenmore. Model No.: 82052, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. 208 volt, single phase dryer, complete with vent connection kit a, cord and plug assembly.

Item No.: 06, Qty.: 1, Description: Shelving 54" X 24", Manufacturer: Intermetro Industries. Model No.: METROSEAL 3TM, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. 86" high, five (5) shelves in tier, having No. 86PK3 uprights at all corners. Set shelves at heights directed by Owner.

B. Approved alternate shelving manufacturers are International Storage Systems, and Amco..

Item No.: 07, Qty.: 1, Description: Sink, Mop, Manufacturer: Advance Tabco. Model No.: 9-OP-48, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. 18 gauge stainless steel, wall flashing at the rear and left end of the sink. Flashing to be 24” high above the sink rim. Secured to the wall and sealed to the sink and the wall with silicone.

B. Alternate approved Manufacturer, Advance Tabco.

Item No.: 07.1, Qty.: 1, Description: Faucet, Service Sink, Manufacturer: T & S Brass. Model No.: B-0655-BSTP, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

Item No.: 07.2, Qty.: 1, Description: Shelf, Wall Mount, Manufacturer: Advance Tabco. Model No.: K-246, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Alternate approved Manufacturer, Advance Tabco.

Item No.: 08, Qty.: 4, Description: Cart, Utility, Manufacturer: Piper Products. Model No.: 6-UCM-3, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Polyurethane tired, non-marking casters, two fixed and two swivel with brakes.

B. Corner bumpers.

Item No.: 09, Qty.: 1, Description: Walk-in Cooler/freezer, Manufacturer: Thermo Kool. Model No.: N/A, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Special size sections if standard 4" thick sections will not assemble as indicated on Drawings 8'-6" high above finished floor. Assemble using standard cam fasteners and joint sealers. Seal interior and exterior seams with Schnee-Morehead seam sealer.

B. All walk-in Cooler/Freezer components and features are to comply with the 2009 Energy Code. Insulation R-value for all panels to be as follows; R-25 for cooler insulation walls , door and ceiling panels R-32 for Freezer insulation walls , doors and ceiling panels R-28 for insulated freezer and cooler floors



C. White enameled, .040" stucco aluminum exposed exterior and interior walls and white enameled smooth .032" aluminum ceiling. Unexposed exterior walls to be #26 gauge stucco galvanized finish. Interior and exterior of doors to be white enameled, .040" stucco aluminum with 36" high aluminum 1/8" treadplate kickplate on lower portion of both doors. Expose portion of exterior wall to have 36" high aluminum, 1/8" diamond, tread-plate, on lower portion of wall. Trim to walls and ceiling where required, with same material as exterior of vaults, using hidden fasteners. Furnish and install New Age Model 9787C aluminum coved baseboard on interior and exterior of vault with inside or outside corners where required. Secure to vault walls with concealed fasteners and seal with epoxy sealant.

D. Vault Manufacturer to furnish 12” high screed, same construction as walls, installed in pit perimeter and interior walls for walls to sit on. Screed to have stainless steel finish on interior and exterior of vault full perimeter. Vault Manufacturer to furnish insulation and vapor barrier film to General Contractor for installation into recess (see details). Two (2) 2" thick layers of rigid 2 lb. density urethane insulation. Installation to include sealing all joints and seams lapped with 4" wide cloth or duct tape. Second layer of urethane to be installed in like manner. Dupont polyurethane vapor barrier film (.910 to .950) lap and seal all joints. Finish floor and waterproofing by General Contractor.

E. Two (2) 36" x 78" high in-fitting doors with 120 volt defrosters around perimeters. Vaults to be provided less floors. Three (3) chrome plated steel, high torque spring loaded, cam lift adjustable hinges with dwell stop, steel pins and self-lubricating bearings on all doors. Door latches to have inside safety releases and provisions for pad locks Mounted above doors, provide Kason No. 1092, chrome plated, piston action door closer. Door hinges, latch assembly and closer to have heavy steel backing plates in interior of panels welded to frame to prevent racking. Each door to have a 14" by 14" heated, triple pane, tempered, safty glass vision panel in the door.

F. 120 volt Kason Model No. 1810L21248LB fixtures with lamps located in each compartment (see Electrical Plan for number). Lights to be pre-assembled with wiring and conduit insulated against air passage to Electrician for installation. Furnish pre-wired light switches including interior OSHA switches with pilot lights and stainless steel cover plates.

G. PVC plastic conduit between interior and exterior of vaults for wiring penetrations through pre-fabricated panels. At piping trim each end of penetration with a stainless steel escutcheon plate. Pre-wire door defrosters and light switches to top of cooler/freezer vaults for final connection by Electrician.

H. Vaults shall be installed by Vault Manufacturer or his authorized agent who shall also be responsible for the warranty.

I. Alternate approved vaults having same standards of performance, capacity, size, durability and appearance are: Norlake and Penn Refrigeration Industries.

J. K.E.C. furnish and install door stops at walk-in cooler/freezer doors

K. Pressure relief valve for freezer compartment to be installed between the freezer section and the cooler section. I.E. the valve is to vent into the cooler.

Item No.: 09.1, Qty.: 2, Description: Temperature Monitor/alarm, Manufacturer: Weiss. Model No.: 75LC*B015, furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;



A. Each Cooler/Freezer compartments to have audio, visual, digital temperature alarm, remote bulb, flush mounting Modularm Instruments model 75LC*B015. Each control to Have the following features

1. Hi/Low temperature alarms with delays. 2. Light management, Auto Off feature. 3. Door Open Alarm. 4. Panic Alarm. 5. Battery Backup. 6. Outboard buzzer in unified J-Box with alarm with flush stainless steel covers. 7. Dry contacts for connecting to Building Energy Management System by others.

Refer to the drawings for details. 8. Note the location on plan and mount at 4'-0" elevation. Extra length capillary shall

be provided run in aluminum conduit with bulb mounted in return air stream. Wall penetration shall have stainless steel escutcheon and stand-off bulb brackets.

Item No.: 09.2, Qty.: 2, Description: Air Curtain, Unheated, Manufacturer: Berner. Model No.: KZN1036A, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. On/Off, roller type, door micro switch.

B. White powder coated finish.

C. Electrical connections to be pre-wired thru cooler door panel as detailed on the drawings.

Item No.: 09.3, Qty.: 1, Description: Refrigeration System, Remote, Manufacturer: Refrigerated Designs of Texas, Model No.: ZS1-3*BO15, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed by: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Air cooled condensing unit assembly Model No. ZF15K4E, 208 volt, 3 phase, 5 H.P. motor to be connected to freezer coil and Model No. ZS13KAE, 208 volt, 1 phase, 1.8 H.P. motor to be connected to cooler coil. Model No. RST55C1E, 208 volt, 1 phase, .6 H.P. motor to be connected to TWO Display cases from Roof Top. Refrigeration system manufacturer to install one Bohn ADT-090 coil with 120 volt, one phase fan motors in cooler and one Bohn LET-090 coil with 208 volt, one phase defroster and fan motors in freezer.

B. Pre-wired controls and pre-piped refrigeration accessories. At each evaporator, provide electrical disconnect on interior of vaults. Provide tee fitting with cleanout plug and brass union fitting on each evaporator. Do not reduce fittings at drain pan connection. Compressors to have crankcase heaters, main power fused disconnects and winter controls, including fan cycling switches.

C. Size each circuit to balance condensing units and connect to condensing units and coils. Pressure stabilizing valve and by-pass manifold on each refrigeration circuit.

D. Paragon Chrono-Temp De-Frost-It defrost controls on freezer compressor. Walk-ins are to be running and adjusted a minimum of 24 hours prior to the loading of product. Freezer shall be cooled down in stages over 12 hour period. First stage to 32oF., then 6-hours to 0oF., finally 6-hours to -10oF.

E. Type K or Type L copper refrigerant lines with solder joint fittings as required by application. Run refrigerant lines from condensing units to coil penetrations in top of



vaults. All to be neat and of highest caliber workmanship. Seal all penetrations with Permagum or foamed urethane to seal air out.

F. Freon R-404a refrigerant charges for cooler and refrigerant R-404a for freezer.

G. Provide Armstrong Armaflex one inch insulation to prevent condensation on all refrigeration lines. All joints to be taped and glue sealed. No split tubing insulation is to be used or permitted.

H. The entire refrigeration system shall be installed by the Manufacturer or his authorized agent who shall also be responsible for the warranty. Provide a one year parts and labor warranty on all system components and an extended five year warranty on the compressors. Installing contractor shall consult the General Requirements of these Specifications for all refrigeration systems requirements and comply with all standards.

Item No.: 10, Qty.: N/A, Description: Spare Number, Manufacturer: N/A, Model No.: N/A.

Item No.: 11, Qty.: 18, Description: Shelving, Wire, Manufacturer: Intermetro Industries. Model No.: METROSEAL 3TM, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;


B. Confirm cooler and freezer sizes and conform within nearest increment (3" maximum tolerance) of length.

C. Approved alternate shelving manufacturers are International Storage Systems, and Amco..

Item No.: 12, Qty.: 1, Description: Ice Maker W/ Bin, Manufacturer: Manitowoc Ice. Model No.: SD-0422A /B-420, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Ice storage bin Model No. S-420*B015 with stainless steel adjustable legs.

B. Five year parts and labor on evaporator, three year parts and labor on compressor, and three year parts and labor on all other components.

Item No.: 13, Qty.: 2, Description: Shelving, Wire, Mobile, Manufacturer: Intermetro Industries. Model No.: Stainless Steel, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Four (4) each 63PS, stainless steel posts, Four (4) each 24” X 42” stainless steel wire shelves, two (2) 5MP casters, two (2) 5BMP casters and aluminum split sleeves.

B. K.E.C. set shelving heights per owner.

C. Approved alternate Manufacturer's are; Amco and International Storage Systems.

Item No.: 14, Qty.: 1, Description: Table, Baker's W/ Sink, Manufacturer: Custom. Model No.: N/A, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;




B. Provide 14 gauge stainless steel top with flat turn down edge on free sides, backsplash at rear and radiused outside corners.

C. In the left end of the counter top, provide an 20” by 20” by 10” deep, integral, coved corner sink with T&S No. B-0221-EE deck, mounted faucet and Component Hardware Model No. DNB-8000, rotary waste fitting and connected overflow.

D. Provide full length 12” deep, stainless steel cantilever mounted overshelf assembly and two bar utensil rack assembly as detailed.

E. Provide three (3), stainless steel, self-closing tool drawers in enclosed base housing as detailed.

F. Understructure to be open base construction with fixed stainless steel under-shelving.

Item No.: 15, Qty.: 1, Description: Stand, Mixer, Manufacturer: Piper Products. Model No.: MX-29-TSS, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Provide Model No. MX-52-R*B015 accessory rack.

Item No.: 16, Qty.: 1, Description: Mixer, Counter, Manufacturer: Hobart Us Foodservice. Model No.: HL200, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Deluxe accessory package that includes: 20 quart stainless steel bowl, 20 quart “B” beater, 20 quart “D” whip, bowl scraper and ingredient chute.

Item No.: 17, Qty.: 4, Description: Sink, Hand, Wall Mount, Manufacturer: Eagle Group/metal Masters. Model No.: HSA-10-FDPK, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Faucet and Knee valves, drain with tailpiece, soap dispenser, towel dispenser.



B. Confirm room sizes and conform within nearest increment (3" maximum tolerance) of length.

C. Approved alternate shelving manufacturers are International Storage Systems, and Amco.

Item No.: 19, Qty.: 2, Description: Rack, Can Storage, Manufacturer: Kelmax. Model No.: CSR-156/FIFO, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

Item No.: 20, Qty.: 3, Description: Ingredient Bins, Mobile, Manufacturer: Rubbermaid. Model No.: 3602, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Sliding hinged lid and N.S.F. casters.



Item No.: 21, Qty.: 1, Description: Scale, Manufacturer: Pelouse. Model No.: 4040, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Model No. ADPT2*B015 adapter for use with 120V power source.

Item No.: 22, Qty.: 1, Description: Table, Ingredient Control, Manufacturer: Custom. Model No.: N/A, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;



C. Understructure to be open base construction with front cross-rail omitted for the ingredient bins. Table mounted on four heavy duty, polyurethane casters, Two (2) swivel, and two (2) with brakes per general requirements.

Item No.: 23, Qty.: 1, Description: Table, Work, Manufacturer: Custom. Model No.: N/A, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;



C. Provide one (1), stainless steel, self-closing tool drawers in enclosed housing as detailed.

D. Understructure to be open base construction with stainless steel under-shelf. Table mounted on four heavy duty, polyurethane casters, Two (2) swivel, and two(2) with brakes per general requirements.

Item No.: 24, Qty.: 1, Description: Spare Number, Manufacturer: N/A, Furnished by: N/A, Installed By: N/A, including the following;

Item No.: 25, Qty.: 4, Description: Rack, Mobile Pan, Manufacturer: Kelmax. Model No.: APRU1218-5, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. N.S.F. approved neoprene tired 5" diameter swivel casters, two with brakes.

B. Vertical corner bumpers.

C. 5" vertical spacing.

D. Solid base.

Item No.: 26, Qty.: 2, Description: Can Opener, Manufacturer: Edlund. Model No.: S-11, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Install on counter tops as indicated on plan.



Item No.: 27, Qty.: 1, Description: Sinks, Vegetable Preparation, Manufacturer: Custom. Model No.: N/A, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;


B. Provide 14 gauge stainless steel top with marine edge on free sides, backsplash at rear and radiused outside corners.

C. Provide one full length by 12” deep, stainless steel, cantilever mounted over shelf.

D. Centered in counter top, provide two (2) 18” X 20” X 10” deep, integral, coved corner sinks with one (1) T&S Model No. B-0221-EE deck mounted faucet. Left sink compartments to have Component Hardware Model No. DNB-8000, rotary waste with connected overflow. Weld in sink adapter for Item No. 13, disposer in bottom of left sink compartment. Box splash behind sink compartment and install T&S #B-0456-04 vacuum breaker.

E. Understructure to be open base construction as called for in the general specification with fixed stainless steel under shelving at drain boards.

F. Install disposer switch on stainless steel gusset shaped bracket to left of sink.

G. Provide two (2) 18” X 24” X ¾” cutting boards on stainless steel slides under drain board.

H. Provide one (1) 20” X 20” X 5” deep, stainless steel, self-closing, tool drawer in 18 gauge stainless steel housing as detailed on the drawings.

Item No.: 28, Qty.: 1, Description: Disposer, Garbage, Manufacturer: Salvajor. Model No.: 75-SA-MRSS, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Sink mounting assembly, solenoid valve and flow control.

B. Time delay, start/stop magnetic starter switch mounted on stainless steel bracket.

C. Throat, water inlet connected to water as detailed on drawings.

D. Vacuum breaker to be T. & S. Brass and Bronze Works, Inc., B-0456-04*B015 (special) unit.

Item No.: 29, Qty.: 1, Description: Table, Work, Manufacturer: Cres Cor. Model No.: 278-PT-1818, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Locking casters and vertical strip bumpers.

B. Provide slicer supports and fit to slicer. Item No.: 30, Qty.: 1, Description: Slicer, Food, Manufacturer: Hobart Us Foodservice. Model No.: 2612-1, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Cord and plug.





B. Confirm room sizes and conform within nearest increment (3" maximum tolerance) of length.

C. Approved alternate shelving manufacturers are International Storage Systems, and Amco.

Item No.: 32, Qty.: 1, Description: Disposer, Garbage, Manufacturer: Salvajor. Model No.: 150-CA-ARSS, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Control switch mounted under counter top Item No. 43 with solenoid valve, flow control, T&S #B-0456-04 vacuum breaker and mounting bracket.

Item No.: 32.1, Qty.: 1, Description: Pre-Rinse Faucet, Deck Mount, Manufacturer: T & S Brass. Model No.: B-0113-B, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Provide #B0109 wall bracket.

Item No.: 33, Qty.: 1, Description: Sinks, Warewash, Manufacturer: Custom. Model No.: N/A, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Provide custom fabricated units, size and shape as per plan, elevation, sections, details, and general specifications, including:

B. 14 gauge stainless steel tops, all vertical and horizontal corners coved, 12" high splash at walls and, where shown, 3" high x 1-1/2" rolled rims having bull nosed exposed corners.

C. Three (3) 28” X 26”x 14” deep, 14 gauge stainless steel coved sinks with integral drain boards, 12" high splash on rear, and 1-1/2" rolled rim on front and ends.

D. Rotary drains, Component Hardware Model No. DNB-8000, with connected overflows and two (2) splash mounted T. & S. Brass and Bronze Works, Inc., Model No. B-0290LL faucets.

E. Understructure to be open based construction with stainless steel fixed under shelving where indicated on drawings.

F. Provide 2” x 1/4” stainless steel band constructed utensil rack supported on 1-5/8” O.D. stainless steel tubing formed as per detail. Fitted with Component Hardware stainless steel sliding pot hooks on approximately 8” centers. Brace to wall as required for rigidity. One (1) #18 gauge stainless steel 8” wide over shelf, with rear and ends coved up and capped, mounted to utensil rack support. Flat area to be provided on backsplash for sleeves of utensil rack supports.

G. Drain board to be prepared for Item No. 32, disposer assembly installed as per manufacturer's recommendation.

H. Pre-Rinse Faucet, Deck Mount, Manufacturer: T & S Brass, Model No.: B-0113-B*B015.

Item No.: 34, Qty.: 1, Description: Exhaust Hood, Manufacturer: Avtec. Model No.: AXWP, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;



A. Size and shape as per plan, elevations, sections and details. Construction to be in strict accordance with factory design and specifications. Type #304 stainless steel hood construction.

B. Connecting ductwork above ceiling to be by the Mechanical Contractor to connection collars of the stainless steel exhaust plenum and stainless steel supply air plenum built into ventilator. Final connection to ducts to be made in an approved manner by the HVAC Contractor. Ventilator to have adjustable make-up air damper which must remain accessible for adjustment.

C. Four (4) Component Hardware No. NSF-8230-RS-2, recessed fluorescent lights (with lamps) or an approved equal, pre-wired to final connection point (junction box) on top of hood. Fixtures to be equipped with T-8 ballasts and lamps. Electrician to furnish wall mounted switch and connect any exterior field wiring required. See electrical requirements plan for quantity of lights.

D. 1/2" diameter steel hanger rods at 4'-0" O.C. maximum to be by Kitchen Equipment Supplier, but they are to be anchored to supporting structure (or slab) by the General Contractor in the locations required by ventilator shop details.

E. Return air area to have anodized aluminum directional control with 40 degree angle permanent blade set and opposed blade damper. Designed to keep air discharge velocity at or below 450 FPM.

F. To be installed complete by Kitchen Equipment Supplier except for inter-wiring, which shall be done by Electrician. All exposed fire control piping to be chrome plated.

G. Manufacturer to check out system after installation to verify actual exhaust and supply air quantities and certify in writing that performance is as designed.

H. Alternate approved manufacturers are: Ventmaster and Caddy.

Item No.: 34.1, Qty.: 1, Description: Fire Suppression Cabinet, Manufacturer: Ansuel, Model No.: -*B015, furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. 304 stainless steel cabinet enclosure with doors built into end of Hood assembly as indicated.

B. Provide U.L. listed, automatic, wet chemical hood and duct fire suppression system for kitchen ventilator with one (1) year warranty on the cylinder and hardware. System to include hood, duct and surface protection in compliance with NFPA 96, State and Local codes, and to be completely installed by a factory authorized, licensed mechanic. The contractor shall furnish mechanical gas solenoid valve to the Plumbing Contractor for installation as required for fire fuel shut-off. In addition the system shall be equipped with an enunciator and electrical control head for inter-wiring with fire/fuel shut-off shunt trip breakers or contactors in the electrical supply for all equipment served by the suppression system.

C. All chemical piping shall be Schedule 40, standard weight hot dipped galvanized steel piping with standard weight galvanized malleable iron fittings and shall have welded collars where piping penetrates hood capture area, exhaust duct and plenum. In addition, all exposed piping shall have tight fitting, sealed, chrome plated sleeves or fittings where exposed. All cable where used shall be contained within electrical “EMT” or conduit. Further, all piping or conduit shall be installed within walls or above ceilings wherever possible.



D. The purveying contractor shall be responsible for providing a complete and working system having the appropriate quantity of full chemical cylinders for the system, surface mounting the systems on the wall where appropriate, properly testing the system, providing the proper certification to the State Board of Insurance and providing the Electrical Contractor with a complete wiring diagram.

Item No.: 35, Qty.: 2, Description: Oven, Convection, Gas, Manufacturer: Blodgett Oven. Model No.: DFG100XCEL DOUBL, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Electronic ignition. Painted steel back panel.

B. 120 volt, 1 phase, 2 speed blower fans.

C. Solid state manual timer.

D. Under canopy draft diverters. Dual pane thermal glass windows.

E. 6" high polyurethane, adjustable casters #33528, two (2) swivel, and two (2) with brakes.

F. Provide T&S Brass and Bronze Model No. HG-4D-60SK gas hose assembly for each oven deck.

Item No.: 36, Qty.: 1, Description: Tilt Skillet, Electric, Manufacturer: Groen. Model No.: BPM-30E, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Removable pour lip strainer.

B. Stainless steel open base. Pan holder for 12" x 20" pan. Double pantry faucet.

C. Anchor rear legs with flanged feet to floor using oval head stainless steel bolts and lead shields.

D. Provide T&S Brass and Bronze Model No. HW-4C-60*B-015 and CW-4C-60*B-015, Aqua-Flex water connectors for each connection.

Item No.: 37, Qty.: 1, Description: Floor Trough, Manufacturer: Custom. Model No.: N/A, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;


B. All grating to be manufactured in accordance with ADA and TAS requirement.

C. Provide two (2) sections each of Gates (or equal) Model No. ASFT-18-15*B015 grating.

D. Frames and coved corner pans of 14 gauge stainless steel channel construction with stainless steel anchor "J" bolts as per section detail. Deliver frame/pan and grate to General Contractor as required by job sequence for his installation into floor.

Item No.: 38, Qty.: 1, Description: Steamer, Boilerless, Gas, Manufacturer: Groen. Model No.: 2-SSB-5GF, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Doors hinged as per plan on steamer compartment.



B. Assembly to be mounted on 6" high stainless steel stand with adjustable legs.

C. Provide automatic water fill and drain connections.

Item No.: 39, Qty.: 1, Description: Dispenser, Hot Water, Manufacturer: Hatco. Model No.: AWD-12, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Nema No. L6-30P, cord and plug assembly.

B. Provide Everpure Model No. C3-TW water filter for installation in the water line.

Item No.: 40, Qty.: 1, Description: Stand, Hot Water Dispenser, Manufacturer: Custom. Model No.: N/A, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;


B. Provide 14 gauge stainless steel top with flat turndown edge on free sides, backsplash at rear and radiused outside corners.

C. Top to have 12” X 20” drainer with splash proof drainer cover as detailed on the drawings.

D. Understructure to be enclosed base construction as called for in the general specification with fixed stainless steel under shelving.

Item No.: 41, Qty.: 2, Description: Cabinet, Heated, Pass-thru, Manufacturer: Traulsen. Model No.: AHF132WP-HHS, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Half height doors hinged per plan with locking hardware.

B. Cord and plug assembly.

C. Delete legs and install on curb.

D. Provide stainless steel banking strip and wall opening trim at all openings.

E. Delete standard shelves and provide full compliment of universal tray slides on 4” centers.

F. One (1) year parts and labor warranty.

Item No.: 42, Qty.: 2, Description: Refrigerator, Pass-thru, Manufacturer: Traulsen. Model No.: AHT132WPUT-HHS, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Half height doors hinged per plan with locking hardware.

B. Cord and plug assembly.

C. Delete legs and install on curb.

D. Provide stainless steel banking strip and wall opening trim at all openings.



E. Delete standard shelves and provide full compliment of universal tray slides on 4” centers.

F. One (1) year parts and labor, 5 year compressor warranty.

Item No.: 43, Qty.: 1, Description: Cook's Table W/ Sink, Manufacturer: Custom. Model No.: N/A, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;


B. 14 gauge stainless steel top with flat turn down edge on free sides, backsplash at rear and radiused outside corners.

C. In the right end of the counter top, provide a 20” by 20” by 10” deep, integral, coved corner sink with T&S No. B-0221-EE deck, mounted faucet and Component Hardware Model No. DNB-8000, rotary waste fitting and connected overflow.

D. Provide full length 12” deep, stainless steel cantilever mounted overshelf assembly and two bar utensil rack assembly as detailed.

E. Provide one (1), stainless steel, self-closing tool drawers in enclosed housing as detailed.

F. Understructure to be open base construction with fixed stainless steel under-shelving. Delete under-shelf and front cross-rail at trash can

Item No.: 44, Qty.: 1, Description: Table, Cook's, Manufacturer: Custom. Model No.: N/A, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;


B. 14 gauge stainless steel top having flat turn down on all free edges, backsplash at wall and radiused outside corners.

C. 16 gauge stainless steel, 12” deep, cantilever mounted over-shelf full length of table.

D. Provide one stainless steel, self-closing, tool drawer mounted under top.

E. Understructure to be open base construction with fixed stainless steel under-shelving. Delete shelving and front cross-rail at owner’s trash can.

Item No.: 45, Qty.: 2, Description: Hot Food Unit, Manufacturer: Mod-U-Serve. Model No.: MCT-HF5, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Unit to have five built-in 12" by 20" hot food wells with controls mounted in apron. Hot food well equipped with drain, drain valve and hard copper drain line. On counter top provide a T&S #B-0208 fill valve.

B. Elite sneeze guards with heat lamps and lights per DISD standards.

C. Fold down, stainless steel work shelf at rear.



D. N.S.F. approved polyurethane casters, two swivel and two with brakes.

E. Delete tray slide. Top with 4” turndown on front to top of U. D. S. tray slide.

F. Stainless steel, finished front and end panels. Line-up locking devices.

G. Pre-wired electrical components to junction box in fixture with cord and plug. T&S Brass quick disconnect water hose 5’0” long.

Item No.: 46, Qty.: 2, Description: Drawer Warmer, Manufacturer: Alto Shaam. Model No.: 500-2D, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Built into base of Item No. 47.

Item No.: 47, Qty.: 2, Description: Flat Top Unit, Manufacturer: Mod-U-Serve. Model No.: MCT-FT2, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Unit to have cut out for built-in warmer drawers, Item No. 46, and heated shelf.

B. Elite sneeze guards with heat lamps and lights per DISD standards.

C. N.S.F. approved polyurethane casters, two swivel and two with brakes.

D. Delete tray slide. Top with 4” turndown on front to top of tray slide.

E. Stainless steel, finished front and end panels. Line-up locking devices.

F. Pre-wired electrical components to junction box in fixture with cord and plug.

Item No.: 48, Qty.: 2, Description: Heated Stone Shelves, Manufacturer: Hatco. Model No.: GRSSB-2418, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Install remote infinite switch in counter apron.

Item No.: 49, Qty.: 2, Description: Cold Food Counter, Mobile, Manufacturer: Mod-U-Serve. Model No.: MCT-FR3, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Elite sneeze guards with lights per DISD standards.

B. N.S.F. approved polyurethane casters, two swivel and two with brakes.

C. Delete tray slide. Top with 4” turndown on front to top of U. D. S. tray slide.

D. Stainless steel, finished front and end panels. Line-up locking devices.

E. Pre-wired electrical components to junction box in fixture with cord and plug.

Item No.: 50, Qty.: 2, Description: Milk Cooler, Manufacturer: Mod U Serve. Model No.: MCT-SM2, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Swivel N.S.F. approved casters, cord and plug. Rubber bumpers Component Hardware model #C60-1030*B015 provided on each corner.



B. Exterior stainless steel finish. Locking device with two (2) keys.

C. One (1) year free service, including parts and labor. Five (5) year compressor warranty on compressor and interior lining.

Item No.: 51, Qty.: 2, Description: Utensil Table, Mobile, Manufacturer: Custom. Model No.: N/A, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;


B. 14 gauge stainless steel tops, all vertical and horizontal corners coved, 4" high splash three sides and flat turn down tight to body.

C. Body to be 18 gauge Stainless steel enclosed base construction.

D. Mount on 5” dia., heavy duty, polyurethane tired casters, two swivel and two with brakes per general requirements..

Item No.: 52, Qty.: 2, Description: Flat Top Unit, Manufacturer: Mod-U-Serve. Model No.: MCT-FT3 MOD, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Counter modified units, 30” high to work surface, each.

B. Cut-out in counter top and install item No. 53

C. Delete tray slide. Top with 4” turndown on front to top of U. D. S tray slide.

Item No.: 53, Qty.: 2, Description: Refrigerator, Manufacturer: Structural Concepts. Model No.: D03637RR, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Remote refrigeration provided with Item # 09.3 from roof mounted condensing units.

B. ½” tempered glass shelves.

C. Locking security cover.

D. Powder coated exterior in color as selected.

E. Closure trim strips on top and sides to seal between both units.

F. Start-up and one (1) year free service, including parts and labor. Five (5) year compressor warranty.

Item No.: 54, Qty.: 2, Description: Flat Top Unit, Manufacturer: Mod-u-serve. Model No.: MCT-FT2 MOD, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Counter modified units, 30” high to work surface, each.

B. Cut-out in counter top and install item No. 53

C. Delete tray slide. Top with 4” turndown on front to top of U. D. S tray slide.



Item No.: 55, Qty.: 2, Description: Freezer, Counter Top, Manufacturer: True Food Service. Model No.: GDM-7F, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. 4” adjustable legs.

B. Doors hinged as per plan.

C. Black exterior, and novelty baskets.

D. One (1) year parts and labor, 5 year compressor warranty.

Item No.: 56, Qty.: 2, Description: Cashier Unit, Manufacturer: Mod-u-serve. Model No.: MCT-CRDG, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

A. Stainless steel construction with laminate front panels in color as selected by the Architect. Counter height to be 34” A.F.F., Tray slides to be 30” high A.F.F..

B. Dual locking cash drawers. Grommeted holes for electrical.

C. Stainless steel tray slides configuration per drawings.

D. 120 volt, duplex electrical outlets as indicated on the drawings.

E. Counter locking devices, cords and plugs.

Item No.: 57, Qty.: 2, Description: P.O.S., Manufacturer: N/A. Model No.: N/A, Furnished by: Owner, Installed By: Owner, including the following;

Item No.: 58, Qty.: 1, Description: Trash Deposit Counter, Manufacturer: Custom. Model No.: N/A, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;


B. 14 gauge stainless steel top having flat turn down on all free edges, backsplash at wall and radiused outside corners.

C. Body, to be fabricated Millwork as detailed on the Foodservice and Architectural drawings. K.E.C. to consult all related drawings and coordinate his work

D. K.E.C. to furnish and install 18 gauge stainless steel tray rest top laminated to top of fabricated as detailed.

Item No.: 59, Qty.: 1, Description: Dunnage Racks, Manufacturer: Kelmax. Model No.: DRH48248, Furnished by: K.E.C., Installed By: K.E.C., including the following;

ITEM NO. 60 TRAY SLID AND UDS SYSTEM, (2) REQUIRED: Provide Mod-U-Serve model #MCT-MUS-24.0-C*B015 modified units, each, including:

A. “T” shaped, size and lengths as per plan.

B. 10” wide, 14 gauge stainless steel tray slide, 30” A.F.F. mounted on top of utility distribution system wall.



C. Provide ½” thick birch plywood face panels with 3/8” thick cement board substrate for applying tile to face of counter as detailed on the drawings. Refer to Section “TILE BACKER BOARDS” of these Specifications for installation requirements of backer boards. Plywood to be sealed with Clear Penetrating Epoxy Sealer. Alternatively plywood may be sealed with a 1/32” plastic laminate covering on back, edges and face. Substrate to be securely fastened to the counter body thru 18 gauge galvanized, vertical framing channels on 16” centers with all joints staggered.

D. Recessed toe base to be 18 ga. Stainless steel.

E. Base on kitchen side with stainless steel panels.

F. Pre-wired electrical outlets entire leg of each unit to electrical panels as noted on plan. Electrical chase with interchangeable receptacle plates with point of use breakers. Separate data cable chase for immediate and future P. O. S. upgrades.

G. Bolt down entire system to floor and seal entire perimeter with clear silicone.

H. Utility distribution system wall to be installed by Manufacturer. Manufacturer to check finished work of Electrician, Plumber, and Refrigeration Installer, in particular any wall penetration and sealing of fixtures.

I. Flexible gas and water hoses to be T & S Brass having flexible elbows and quick disconnect fittings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP:

A. The entire procedure, including materials, workmanship, details, fabrication, and fastening methods, shall comply with all applicable codes and standards.

B. Workmanship and finishing shall be first class in every particular and in accordance with the best practices of the trade. Only skilled workman shall be employed in the fabrication and erection of the work in this section of the specifications. Work shall be provided complete in every detail, and the finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects.

3.2 FIELD JOINTS:

A. All field joints on table tops, sink drain boards, dishtables, counters or other equipment necessary for delivery and assembly are to be ground smooth and finished in such a manner as to have the same luster and finish as before the welding operation, and to be without dips and irregularities.

B. Where back splashes or dishtables or other fixtures require field joints that are inaccessible from the back, the field weld is to terminate on inch above the coved corner. The remaining height to the field joint is to be a hairline butt joint with offset draw angles behind the joint.

3.3 ERECTION:

A. Provide a competent foreman or supervisor who shall remain on the job site during the entire installation.



3.4 DELIVERY:

A. Coordinate with progress of construction.

B. Deliver all loose electrical, plumbing, and mechanical fittings and accessories with instructions for their proper installation.

C. When possible, deliver after masonry, plastering and painting is complete.

D. Loose items such as pans, covers, silver cylinders, shall not be delivered until the Owner is ready to receive and inventory such items.

3.5 INSTALLATION:

A. Assemble, square, level and make ready all items for final connections.

B. Cut neatly around obstructions to provide sanitary conditions.

C. Where gaps occur between equipment, apply General Electric Silicone construction sealant series SE - 1200 mastic or stainless steel trim molding of proper size shape with concealed attachment. All silicone used to seal fixtures in this section of the specifications is to be clear in color. Use epoxy cement and/or “Z” clips wherever possible to secure trim.

3.6 CLEAN UP:

A. Clean up and remove from the job site, all debris resulting from work under this section as the installation progresses.

B. Thoroughly clean and polish all Foodservice Equipment, in and out, ready for Owner’s use, prior to demonstration and final inspection.

3.7 EQUIPMENT START - UP/DEMONSTRATION:

A. Carefully test, adjust and regulate all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and certify in writing to the Owner or his authorized agent that the installation, adjustment, and performance is in full compliance.

B. Provide the Owner and/or operators with a thorough operational demonstration of all equipment and furnish instructions for general care and specific care and maintenance.

3.8 REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION:

A. Foodservice equipment refrigeration systems shall be completely installed, evacuated, charged, adjusted for proper temperature by a competent refrigeration mechanic and operated for a period of not less than thirty-six (36) hours prior to acceptance of the Owner.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 11 51 19

BOOK THEFT PROTECTION EQUIPMENT

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 11 51 19 Page - 1 Book Theft Protection Equipment Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provisions of Division 01 apply to this section.

B. Section Includes: Complete book theft detection system with alarm, detection targets/strips, and target detuners/deactivators as indicated on Drawings.

C. Related Sections: 1. Division 26: Electrical. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. Library book detection system, by means of exit antennas and radio signals, detects library

materials marked with pressure sensitive detection targets/strips. When items pass between the installed antenna system and have not been checked out correctly, the system emits an alarm signal notifying library personnel of an unauthorized removal of items.

2. An exit aisle shall be formed by a minimum of 2 sensing antennas, with exiting between the

antennas. Aisles shall be not greater than 6-feet wide. B. Installation Requirements: 1. Sensing antennas and peripherals shall be bolted directly to concrete floor with cement lag bolts

and anchors. 2. Power is provided to antennas by installer through conduit installed in floor as part of the Work of

Division 16. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate installation and interface with related Work, including details of assembly and

wiring diagrams. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to provide compliance with specified

requirements. C. Samples: Detection Target Strips. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installer: Work of this section shall be performed by installers trained by the equipment

manufacturer. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Entire system, including gates, shall be designed to be in compliance with ADA, CBC and ANSI

accessibility requirements and recommendations. 2. Systems shall be UL listed. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver specified components to the Project site in unopened cartons, crates or suitable packaging bearing

manufacturer's label.


SECTION 11 51 19



B. Store components in a location safe from weather and damage by construction operations. 1.06 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

A. Staff Instruction: Before Substantial Completion, provide Owner personnel a 4 hour instruction period. Representative of book detection system manufacturer shall instruct library staff members in operation and installation of detection targets/strips in library materials. Coordinate and arrange the time of staff instruction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. 3M or equal 2.02 BOOK DETECTION SYSTEM, GENERAL A. 3M Detection System Model 3802 Series Theft Detection Antenna System: 1. Overall dimensions: 70 inches high by 26 inches wide by 2.5 inches deep. 2. High-impact gray and white ABS thermoplastic. 3. Weight: 250 pounds. 4. Floor-mounted with at least 2 cement lag bolts per antenna, minimum 1/2 inch diameter. 5. Maximum distance between antennas: 72 inches (center to center). B. Operator Control Module: 1. Electric Power Requirement: Electronics in system shall be solid-state and operate from a

standard 120 volt, 50/60 Hz AC 3-wire grounded outlet. 2. Location Requirement: Must be within 10 feet of nearest sensing antenna. 3. Specifications: a. Housing: 9 inches long by 5.38 inches wide by 3.5 inches high. b. Weight: 6 pounds c. Key-controlled on/off switch. d. Power-on indicator light (DC). 2.03 DETECTION TARGET/STRIPS A. Radio Frequency Targets: 1. 3M Tattle-Tape™ Security Strips. 2. Quantity: Provide 20,000 targets. 2. Flexible programmed tag laminated on one side with paper stock pressure-sensitive adhesive

coating or reversed side with siliconized release paper. 3. Installed on/in library materials: a. Inside front or back covers.


SECTION 11 51 19



b. On any page. c. Under book jacket. d. Printed bookplate. e. Under bookplate. f. Inside book pocket. g. Under book pocket. h. Inside or in A/V materials or their containers or jackets. 2.04 BOOKCHECK UNIT A. 3M Model 943 1. Specifications a. Dimensions: 12.9 inches deep by 8.9 inches high by 16.4 inches long. b. Weight: 24 pounds c. Barcode Scanner, allowing ILS interface plus check-in/checkout and security strip

processing PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work will be performed to determine best location for sensing

unit, and to insure prerequisite Work has been installed, including: 1. Electrical convenience outlet (120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, AC 3-wire with ground) for connecting system

power supply box to be mounted on wall adjacent to outlet. 2. Conduit (3/4-inch) and pull-wire in floor from power-supply box to antenna locations. Stub up in

first antenna, then stub down and up to second antenna. 3. Electrical convenience outlet (120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, AC 3-wire with ground) for operator control

module to be installed within 10 feet of nearest radio frequency sensing antenna, usually located behind circulation desk.

B. Assure no metal is installed above the floor within 18 inches of antenna locations. C. Coordinate with related Work for drilling proper holes through charging desk for access to power outlet at

circulation desk for hook-up of sensing unit. Holes shall be concealed and shall not interfere with functioning of desk storage spaces and other equipment to be installed in desk.

3.03 DETECTION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Base Plate-Mounted Components: Install antennas on top of final finish flooring and anchor to concrete

base flooring. B. Install wiring and other components, make final connections and adjustments. C. Provide all means necessary to eliminate electrical and magnetic interference affecting operation of

detection system.


SECTION 11 51 19



D. Connect electronic devices to power source and place system in operating condition. 3.05 OPERATOR CONTROL MODULE INSTALLATION

A. Control Module: Install module within circulation desk as indicated on Drawings and/or as required for operation at the Circulation Desk.

B. Provide all means necessary to eliminate electrical and magnetic interference affecting operation of detection system.

C. Connect electronic devices to power source and place system in operating condition. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. B. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 11 52 13 Page - 1 Motorized Screen Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 11 52 13 MOTORIZED PROJECTION SCREENS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Roll-up, electrically operated projection screens. B. Related sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking for installation of projection

screens. 2. to contain recessed projection screens. 3. Section 09 51 00- Acoustical Ceilings: Suspended acoustical panel ceilings to adjoin

recessed projection screens [and ceiling panels to be adhered to closure panels of screen cases].

4. Section 26 05 33 - Electrical supply, conduit, and wiring for motorized projection

screens. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 - Submittal Procedures: 1. List of proposed products and product data. 2. Shop drawings showing dimensions, method of attachment, structural support,

[bracing,] and electrical wiring. 3. Samples of finishes [for selection by Architect]. 4. Manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source limitation: Obtain projection screens from single manufacturer as a complete unit

including necessary mounting hardware, motor, controls, limit switches, and accessories. B. Motorized projection screens shall be certified for use in the United States and Canada by

Underwriters Laboratory (UL), Inc. and shall bear UL label. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver projection screens until building is enclosed, other construction within spaces

where screens will be installed is substantially complete, and installation of screens is ready to begin.



B. Deliver products in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with labels intact.

PARTS 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Draper, Inc., 411 South Pearl Street, Spiceland, Indiana 47385-0425; 765-987-7999. B. Manufacturers of equivalent products submitted and approved in accordance with Section 01

25 00 - Product Substitution Procedures. 2.2 MOTORIZED PROJECTION SCREENS A. Type: Electrically operated projection screen for wall installation consisting of case, screen,

motor, controls, electric brake, limit switches, mounting accessories, and other components necessary for complete installation.

1. This Specification is based on the Silhouette Series V, by Draper, Inc. B. Method of installation: Ceiling Mounted C. Screen case: Constructed of aluminum with contoured, removable front cover with die-cast

end caps rounded to fit case. Finish to be white lightly textured paint. There shall be no exposed fasteners in installed case.

D. Roller: 2 inches diameter steel roller mounter on rubber vibration insulators. E. Viewing surface securely attached to roller at top and at bottom to weighted dowel. Top of

screen masked by 12” (30 cm) of black drop. Provide each side of viewing surface with black masking borders and tab-guide cable tensioning system to maintain even lateral tension and to hold surface flat.

2.3 VIEWING SURFACE A. Material: Matt white vinyl surface laminated on woven fiberglass base and surface is

washable, flame resistant, and mildew resistant; Fiberglass Matt White Surface. As manufactured by Draper, Inc.

B. Overall Surface: 120 inches high by 120 inches wide; (10x10). C. Joints: Viewing surface shall contain no seams. D. Edge treatment: 1-1/2 inches wide black masking borders as part of tab-guide cable tension

system]. 2.4 MOTOR A. Type: 110-120 VAC, 60 HZ, 3 wire, instantly reversible, lifetime lubricated, and equipped

with internal thermal overload protector, electric brake, and pre-set accessible limit switches. B. Mount inside screen roller. Roller to be mounted on vibration insulators.



2.5 CONTROLS A. Provide 1 control stations to lower, raise, stop, and reverse projection screen at any point. B. Single station control: 3 position rocker switch with cover plate, accepting 110 V current, and

operating by sustained contact. C. Provide controls with required boxes and brushed aluminum cover plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of projection screens with ceiling construction and related

components penetrating or above ceilings such as lighting fixtures, mechanical equipment, ductwork, and fire-suppression system.

B. Coordinate requirements for blocking, structural supports, and bracing to ensure adequate

means for installation of screens. C. Coordinate requirements for power supply conduit, and wiring required for projection screen

motors and controls. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install projection screens and controls at locations and heights indicated on Drawings. B. Comply with screen manufacturer's written instructions and shop drawings. C. Install screen housing and make electrical connections [prior to] [in conjunction with]

installation of suspended ceiling system. After interior construction is essentially complete, install viewing surface and drive assembly in housing.

D. Install screens securely to supporting substrate so that screens are level and back of case is

plumb. E. Provide required brackets, hanger rods, and fasteners. 3.3 TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION A. Test motorized projection screens to verify that screen, controls, limit switches, closure, and

other operating components are functional. Ensure that screen is level and viewing surface plumb when extended. Correct deficiencies.

B. Demonstrate operation of screen to Owner's designated representatives. 3.4 PROTECTING A. Protect projection screens after installation from damage from construction operations. If

damage occurs, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as required to provide units in their original, undamaged condition.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 11 61 53

STAGE CURTAINS

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 11 61 53 Page - 1 Stage Curtains Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 GOVERNING CLAUSE: For the sake of brevity these specifications shall omit phrases such as "Contractor shall furnish and install", "unless otherwise indicated or specified", etc., but these phrases are nevertheless implied. Mention of materials and operations requires the Contractor to furnish and install such materials and perform such operations completely to the satisfaction of the Owner.

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK: One company shall be responsible for the installation of all aspects of the stage equipment. Work under this section shall include the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, transportation services, supervision, etc., necessary to complete installation of new stage equipment as well as any other items as herein listed, all as described in these specifications, as illustrated on the accompanying drawings; or as directed by the Architect or his Representative.

1.4 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS: The Contractor shall be fully experienced in the fabrication and installation of the stage equipment as herein specified. The Contractor shall have been in business for five (5) full years preceding the date of this bid doing work similar to the type specified and under the same name. The Contractor shall employ only fully trained stage riggers and mechanics for the erection of the stage equipment. The stage riggers shall be completely familiar with the type of equipment to be installed. A competent Job Superintendent shall be on the job at all times when work is in progress. He shall represent the Contractor and all directions given by him shall be as binding as if given by the Contractor.

1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS: Specific fabric and items of equipment are specified by trade names. It has been determined by the Owner that these are the particular items desired by the owner and established a standard of quality, equipment function and/or process. It is not the purpose nor intent of these documents to eliminate competitive bids. In order to allow proper and fair comparison of pricing, each contractor is required to submit their base bid price on the specified equipment. A contractor may submit an alternate bid based on equipment different from that specified only if that Contractor has received prior approval in writing from the Owner at least 10 days prior to bid. Accompanying each request shall be a letter specifically detailing each substitution including catalog data, specifications, swatches, operative samples, technical information, drawings, performance and test data, and complete descriptive and functional information to assist in a fair evaluation. Failure to submit any substitution for prior approval or not providing sufficient data for evaluation shall require the exact item specified to be furnished. Owner's approval of a substitution for bid purposes will not relieve the contractor from the responsibility of meeting all specification criteria. If an approval of a substitution is granted, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for any and all changes such substitution shall require.

1.6 DEFECTIVE OR NON-APPROVED MATERIALS: Should any stage equipment be found defective, not meeting specifications, or that which has not been approved in writing by the Owner shall, upon discovery (including any time within the period of the guarantee), be replaced with the specified equipment or material at no additional cost.

1.7 GUARANTEE: The Contractor shall guarantee all of the work that is performed under this contract, including all materials, and workmanship, for a period of one (1) year from the date of full acceptance of the work. Lamps for lighting fixtures shall be guaranteed against failure for thirty (30) days. Nothing in this guarantee shall cause repair or replacement by the Contractor where negligence, neglect or improper operation by the Owner has caused the failure of any equipment installed under this contract.


SECTION 11 61 53

STAGE CURTAINS


1.8 DISCREPANCIES: All equipment shall be sized to fit properly. The exact measurements are the responsibility of the Contractor. If there are discrepancies in the specifications, the Contractor shall ask for a clarification from the Architect/Owner. If no clarification is requested, the Architect's judgment shall rule.

1.9 PRE-APPROVED STAGE EQUIPMENT CONTRACTORS

A. One company shall be responsible for the installation of all aspects of the stage equipment as specified in this section. This shall include but not be limited to all rigging, curtains, tracks, motors and control, stage lighting fixtures, and miscellaneous equipment.

B. In order to be considered as a Stage Equipment Contractor on this project, each Contractor requesting approval must submit to the Architect at least ten (10) days prior to the date of bid opening a letter expressing his intent to bid. This letter shall include a list of at least five (5) projects of similar size and scope completed by this firm within the last five (5) years. If motorized line-shaft rigging is required on this project, the letter shall indicate the number of line-shaft set provided and installed and the manufacturer of the equipment on each of the five projects. Inspection of one completed installation may be requested by the Architect/Architect's Representative prior to consideration of request to bid. Companies which have no experience in the installation and operation of line-shaft rigging will not be considered. The stage equipment contractor shall have been in business under the same name for five (5) full years preceding the date of this bid doing work similar to the type specified. The decision of the Architect as to the capability of the Bidder to successfully complete and maintain the system, based on this pre-qualification information shall be final.

C. Pre-Bid request letter shall include a statement that all major items of equipment shall be bid and supplied as specified, or shall contain details of all proposed substitute equipment for review by the Architect/Architect's Representative. Substitute equipment items to include specifications, parts numbers, and details of interconnection to proposed system. The decision of the Architect/Architect's Consultant as to the acceptability of substitute equipment shall be final.

D. The Stage Equipment Contractor shall employ only fully trained stage riggers and mechanics, for the erection of the stage equipment. The stage riggers shall be completely familiar with the type of equipment to be installed. A competent Job Superintendent shall be on the job at all times when work is in progress. He shall represent the Stage Equipment Contractor and all directions given by him shall be as binding as if given by the Stage Equipment Contractor. The use of common laborers shall be unacceptable.

1.10 ACCEPTABLE RIGGING EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS

A. For the purposes of establishing a standard of quality desired on this project, the rigging hardware products of H & H Specialties, Inc. of South El Monte, California are specified. Other stage equipment hardware with prior approval for bidding shall be any and all companies (not an individual) that are contributing members or sustaining members in good standing with United States Institute of Theatre Technology (USITT) at the time of the bid will be considered. Specific items of hardware by any approved manufacturer must still meet the criteria established in these specifications for those items. The rigging hardware products of other manufactures who are not members of USITT may not be used in the construction of this project.

B. Manufacturers whose equipment has prior approval to be used on this project include the following companies: 1. Texas Scenic Company, Inc. 2. H & H Specialties


SECTION 11 61 53

STAGE CURTAINS


1.11 DOCUMENTATION

A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Shop drawings and equipment data sheets shall be submitted to the Owner under general provisions within 45 days after award of the contract. Approval of submitted equipment shall be obtained prior to equipment purchasing or fabrication. If shop drawings are rejected, correct and resubmit in the manner as specified. All shop drawing information shall be submitted at the same time; no partial submittal will be accepted. Drawings shall indicate complete details, dimensions, product types and locations of all equipment, clearances required, guides, cables, sets, Contractor fabricated equipment, and all other details required to completely describe the work to be performed. Submittals drawings shall be presented at a scale of not less than 1/4" for equipment layouts and ½" = 1'-0" for mounting details. Each sheet to allow space for approval stamps and have the name of the project, the contractors and/or the supplier's name, address telephone number, and the date submitted. Submit the following items for Owner's approval, prior to fabrication: 1. Stage plan view 2. Stage side section view 3. Details of installation and erection, including adjoining conditions and necessary

clearances. 4. Indication by arrow and boxed caption of each variation from contract drawing

and specifications, except those indicated as acceptable in specifications or on drawings

B. FABRIC SAMPLES: Submit sample books of each fabric specified, containing standard colors available in the quality of the material specified for the Owner's selection of color and approval. More than one color may be selected. After selection, upon request, submit one square foot samples of each material in each color for final review.

C. RECORD DRAWINGS AND DATA: Submit in accordance with General Provisions. Also within 30 days of final test and completion of the installation, submit the following to the Owner: 1. Three (3) complete sets of "as built and approved" drawings showing systems

and elements as installed, including field modifications and adjustments. 2. Three (3) notarized Certificates of Flameproofing for each fabric used. 3. Three (3) Certificates of Guarantee

D. PERMITS: Obtain all permits necessary for the execution of any work pertaining to the installation, and conform in all trades with all applicable local codes and with the National Electric Code. Obtain all permits necessary for operation of any equipment by the Owner.

E. CLEAN UP: It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to remove all debris from the building or site caused by his operations to a common trash point or receptacle on the job site, as determined by the Owner.

2. EQUIPMENT

2.1 THEATRICAL RIGGING EQUIPMENT

A. GENERAL STANDARDS 1. Paint as required under this section shall be the manufacturer's standard finish

and color except as noted. 2. All equipment items shall be new and conform with applicable provisions of

Underwriters' Laboratories and American Standards Association. 3. Where acceptable equipment items are specified by catalog number only, device

shall meet all published manufacturer's specifications. Where quantities are not given, refer to drawings. Where two or more products are listed, contractor may use either, at his discretion. Equipment shall not be substituted without specific written approval by the Architect/Architect's Representative under the substitution paragraphs of these specifications.


SECTION 11 61 53

STAGE CURTAINS


B. GENERAL RIGGING STANDARDS 1. All turnbuckles, clips, tracks, chains and other items of incidental hardware shall

be furnished plated or painted. Wire rope shall be galvanized. Fasteners, chain, and other miscellaneous hardware shall be either cadmium or zinc plated.

2. All materials used in this project shall be new, unused and of the latest design. Refurbished materials are not permitted.

3. In order to establish minimum standards of safety, a minimum factor of 8 shall be used for all equipment and hardware used on this project.

2.2 RIGGING COMPONENTS

A. HANGING HARDWARE: 1. Hanging Support Chains and Fittings:

All hanging supports shall be 3/8” Proof Coil Chain secured with ¼” shackles or chain bolts at the structure and equipment ends. “S” hooks are NOT acceptable methods of attachment

2. Pipe Battens: Pipe battens shall be 1-1/2" in diameter schedule 40 pipe. All battens shall be painted black to prevent rusting. Where splicing is required, a pin, 18" long and the same diameter as the inside diameter as the pipe shall be used. This pin shall be held in place with no less than four (4) bolts (two each half, 6” O.C., @ 90 degrees).

2.3 STAGE CURTAINS

A. FABRICS 1. Front Curtain, and Valance: Provide 25 oz. Memorable Velour Chemically

Flame-proofed Cotton Velouras manufactured KM Fabrics, Greenville, South Carolina. Color to be selected by Owner/Architect.

2. Borders, Legs and Rear Curtain: Provide 16 oz Princess Velour Chemically Flame-proofed Cotten Velour as manufactured by KM Fabrics, Greenville, South Carolina. Color to be Black.

B. FLAMEPROOFING 1. Fabrics used in fabrication of draperies shall be Inherently Flame Resistant

Polyester, approved by the Bureau of Standards U.S. Department of Commerce, and finished fabric, and shall pass such tests as are required by the Fire Marshall of the local Fire Dept. and Owner.

2. A certificate for each type and color of cloth used shall be furnished to the Owner when request for final payment is made.

3. Certificate shall state name of Stage Equipment Contractor. 4. The information on certificate shall be notarized by a Notary Public in the State of

Texas. C. FABRICATION OF STANDARD STAGE DRAPERIES

1. Sew fabrics with box-pleats to 3-1/2" wide heavy-duty upholstery jute webbing, pleats spaced 12" on centers, unless otherwise specified. Use mercerized cotton thread, minimum weight #16, color to match cloth shall be full length and shall be without splices for entire length of the curtain.

2. Properly join panels smooth and free of puckering at seams, hems, and turnbacks.

3. Where completed curtains are to be operated on a traveler track, equip each pleat with a 2" plated harness snaphook mounted to curtain by means of a strap of web-belting to curtain by riveting with not less than 2 tubular rivets per snaphook. Web-belting straps shall pass over front and back sides of pleats, and rivets shall go completely through the web-belting, jute webbing, and all


SECTION 11 61 53

STAGE CURTAINS


thickness of curtain fabric. Canvas straps, leather straps, grommets and s-hooks, cotter key hooks, etc., shall not be acceptable.

4. Where completed curtains are to be tied to a pipe batten, each pleat shall be equipped with a 30" long #4 braided nylon tieline through a No. 2, or larger brass grommet, each to be on 12" centers located in the box pleats at the webbing.

5. Bottom hems of all curtains shall be 5" and shall be equipped with a separate canvas pocket sewn inside bottom hems in such manner as to have the bottom of the canvas pocket at least 1-1/2" above bottom of curtain hem. Load canvas pocket with #6 galvanized pump chain, secured to prevent bunching and shifting within the pocket.

6. Off-stage vertical hems and center-facing turnbacks of the front curtain shall be one-half width (27") of material faced back and no sewn hem shall be permitted within these hems. Vertical hems of all masking borders, travelers, and cyclorama curtains shall be 3".

7. Finish curtains properly in the best manner and method of the industry, and after hanging, thoroughly brush to remove dust, visible dirt, loose threads, loose fabric lint, etc. Wrinkles shall be allowed to fall our naturally.

8. Fullness desired for each panel of curtains is indicated by the number of widths specified for each item. Any number of widths less than the number specified will result in re-fabrication of curtains.

2.4 CURTAIN TRAVELER TRACKS

A. Tracks shall be by H&H Specialties of South El Monte, California. Manufacturer's recommendations on installation of all tracks and related hardware shall be followed. Automatic Devices Inc. of Allentown, PA shall be considered equal.

B. Track for the Front Curtain shall be H&H Model #100 Steel Track in two (2) 16' sections, complete with all necessary accessories including #101 single carriers, #102 master carriers, #103 double end pulley, #104 single end pulley, 1/8” rubber bumpers, rear fold guides and #308 floor pulley.

C. Track for the Rear Curtain shall be the same as the front curtain, in two (2) 14’ sections. D. Track for the Legs shall be H&H Model # 100 track in four (4) 10’ long sections complete

with #101 single carriers and 102 master carriers and necessary hardware. Curtains will be set up for walk-along operation.

2.5 STAGE CURTAIN SCHEDULE:

Curtain Fabric Size Widths Req'd. Installation Valance 25 oz Velour 1 panel

29´-0" w x4'-6" h 11 full widths

Tack on to 1” x 2” wood tack strip

Front Curtain

25 oz Velour 2 panels 16´-0" w x 11'-0" h

14 full widths (7 per panel)

On specified track

Border #1 16 oz Velour 23´w x 5'h 8 full widths

On Pipe Batten

Side Legs 16 oz Velour 4 panels 10’ w x 14'-6" h

14 full widths (3.5 per panel)

On specified track

Border #2 16 oz Velour 21´w x 5'h 7 full widths

On Pipe Batten

Rear Curtain

16 oz Velour 2 panels 14´-0" w x13'-0" h

10 widths (5 per panel)

On specified track


SECTION 11 61 53

STAGE CURTAINS


3. INSTALLATION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Verify that job conditions are ready to receive work of this section. Notify Architect of any existing condition which will adversely affect execution. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on shop drawings. C. Verify that mechanical, electrical, and other items affecting work of this section are in

place and ready to receive the work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install using skilled workmen in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations.

B. Install work in accordance highest industry standards. Handle materials to avoid dents and other damages.

C. Set and secure materials and components rigid, plumb, and square.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 11 66 00 Page - 1 Athletic Equipment Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 116600

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Basketball backstops and accessories. 2. Gymnasium Divider Curtains. 3. Wall Pads. 4. Volleyball Equipment. 5. Outdoor Volleyball

B. Related sections:

1. Division 5 - Structural steel framing to support basketball backstops. 1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

1. List of proposed products and product data. 2. Shop drawings showing layout, elevations, dimensions, fabrication details, method of

attachment, loads to be transmitted to building structural members, requirements for supplementary bracing or structural support members and electrical wiring diagrams.

3. Manufacturer must provide calculations and reports for tests preformed by an independent testing laboratory accredited by the American Association of Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA) that clearly demonstrate compliance with minimum safety factors included in product specifications.

4. Samples of fabric for selection by Architect. 5. Manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions.


A. Source limitation: All components including suspension system, frame assembly, backboards, goals, electric winches, and controls for backstops shell be of a single manufacturer.

B. All welding to be performed by personnel having passed Welder Qualification testing in accordance with American Welding Society (AWS) code D1.1 or higher. Manufacturer to provide certification and test results upon request.


A. Provide volleyball floor sleeves, covers and floor inserts in accordance with requirements of related trades that are responsible for installation. Do not deliver balance of athletic equipment until building is enclosed and other construction within gymnasium is substantially complete.

1.5 WARRANTY



A. All Basketball Backstop support structures including clamps, fittings and tube to have a minimum warranty of 25 years from date of substantial installation. Warranty for other items to be as indicated in product specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Outdoor Volleyball system by Jaypro. B. Sleeved Teatherball System by Online Sports C. All other equipment within the specification to be provided by:

Draper, Inc., 411 South Pearl Street, Spiceland, Indiana 47385-0425; 765-987-7999. D. Manufacturers of equivalent products submitted and approved in accordance with

Section 01630 - Product Substitution Procedures.

Must be approved by Architect prior to bidding.

2.2 BASKETBALL BACKSTOPS A. Main Courts (Two Required) 1. Type:

Basketball backstop shall be the DRAPER EZ FOLD Model TF-20, ceiling-suspended, forward folding by Draper, Inc. of Spiceland, IN. Backstop shall be a welded together main frame constructed from steel mechanical tubing to form a rigid tetrahedral "T" design of back-to-back right triangles. The main stem shall be 6" OD 11-ga. steel tubing, the top of the "T" shall be 4" OD 11-ga. steel tubing and the side braces shall be 2-1/4" OD 14-ga. steel tubing. Side braces shall join stem no higher than 4'6" above goal (18" above top of backboard). The main stem shall be long enough to allow ±6" height adjustment of either fan or rectangular banks. The folding front brace shall be jackknife type, fully adjustable, self-locking in the down position and constructed of 2-1/2" OD 13-ga. (outer) steel tubing and 2-1/4" OD 14-ga. (inner) steel tubing. Pivot or hinge joint for folding of backstop shall not exceed 15" from roof structure except when required by architectural conditions for coordination with other trades or equipment. Pivot or hinge point to be designed in a manner to provide a minimum structural capacity of 25,000 Lbs. and a safety factor of 55:1. The main backstop frame shall pivot on 1-1/4" minimum solid steel shaft secured in a milled bearing hole in 1/2" minimum steel plate hangers to insure accurate positioning of bank. Bank attached to the 6" OD main stem by heavy-duty bank hangers. Hangers constructed of 1" x 2" 11-ga. steel tubing and formed 1/4" steel plate with slotted holes for lateral adjustment. All banks shall have one upper bank hanger and include a goal brace, which attaches directly to the goal mounting plate and directly to the 6" main stem of the backstop to eliminate any strain on the bank and help prevent glass breakage. This direct mount feature shall conform to NCAA recommendation No. 5-F. Backstop shall be supported from 4" OD 11-ga. steel mechanical tubing anchored to roof structure by means of heavy steel support hangers. Attachment to building structure to be with clamps capable of supporting a minimum of 20,000 Lbs. each. Superstructure shall be designed with a minimum of four attachment clamps to produce a combined minimum attachment point safety factor of 75 to 1 and manufacture must be able to present



independent testing data to substantiate safety factor. Superstructure tubes shall be reinforced with bridging and/or bracing when truss centers exceed 10'0". Backstop shall be provided with choice of black or white powder coat finish.

2. Operation: Winch shall be DRAPER model 503085 electric winch by Draper, Inc., Spiceland, IN Electric winch shall be rated to deliver 1000 lbs [340 kgs.] of vertical lifting and 1500 lbs [510 kgs.] of horizontal line pull at a line speed of 12 feet [3.4 meters] per minute on the first layer. Unit shall have a stall line pull of 2100 lbs. Available cable travel shall be 25 feet [7.7 meters] on one layer. Cable drum shall be manufactured from hard aluminum alloy and shall be directly supported at the cable-winding diameter for maximum strength and rigidity. The drum shall be helically grooved for 1/4" 7 x 19 aircraft cable. Grooving shall provide proper spooling of the cable and ensure excellent repeatability of stop positions. Drum shall be equipped with a pressure roller, with torsion spring tensioning, to ensure that the cable tracks in the groove even under slack cable conditions. Winch shall employ a double worm reduction system. Use of composite materials shall result in superior strength and life. No oil lubrication shall be required. Uni-directional worm brake, together with inherently self-locking composite worm drive, shall assure positive dynamic braking and reliable holding of the cable drum. Readily adjustable upper and lower travel limit switches shall make the setting of stop positions simple. A 3:1 speed-increasing drive to the limit screw shall be used to increase the precision and repeatability of the settings. Winch shall be driven by 1 HP, instantly reversing, 110-120v, single-phase electric torque motor utilizing a 3-wire control system. Motor shall have an automatic reset overload protector, and shall draw 11.8 amps under full load. Motor shall be designed to stall at 14 amps with a 20-minute duty cycle on the motor thermal. All main frame components shall be powder-coated. All exposed sub-components shall be plated for maximum corrosion protection. Two cable exit ports shall be provided to allow greater freedom of mounting orientation and cable layout. Winch shall be covered by 5-year warranty. Unless indicated otherwise, the motor shall be controlled by an individual flush mounted, three-position, momentary contact tumbler-style key switch.

3. Bank: Backboard shall be the DRAPER Model 503136 rectangular glass backboard by Draper, Inc. of Spiceland, IN. Backboard shall be 3'6" x 6'0" to meet all NCAA, NFHSA and professional requirements. Backboard frame of a heavy, brushed aluminum extrusion for maximum durability. Extended frame section of high tensile aluminum (6063-T5). Ends of the frame extrusions mitered and fitted with a flush, plated steel gusset type mounting bracket on all four corners, incorporating keyhole slots for mounting the backboard to the support structure at standard mounting centers. Goal mounting structure of a heavy, formed steel assembly, secured to the lower horizontal frame member to minimize stress on the glass section. Special steel sleeves at the goal mounting hole locations to secure rear structure to front mounting plate, forming a unitized assembly to minimize shock to the glass. Entire frame including goal-mounting structure fitted with a shock absorbing neoprene material to cushion and protect the glass section. 1/2" thick, fully tempered glass section with uniform load and impact strength. Official white border and target area is permanently fired into front side of glass section so that it cannot wear away.



Goal mount structure provided with two holes (7/16") and two studs (3/8"-16) to secure backboard and goal to a direct mount "goal brace" feature which relieves all stress and shock on the backboard conforming to the latest NCAA Rules (BR-73, D-5). Goal mounting holes (4) to be standard 5" (horizontal) x 4" (vertical) mounting centers. Backboard shall be covered by a Lifetime Limited Warranty when installed on a Draper EZ Fold basketball backstop with Goal Brace or Direct Mount Height Adjuster.

4. Backboard Safety Padding: Backboard Edge Padding shall be the DRAPER Model 5032XX bolt-on backboard safety padding by Draper, Inc., Spiceland, IN. Molding process produces a super tough "skin" on the outside of the foam padding for long life. Pre-molded square corners for improved player safety. Molded-in steel track and bolt-on attachment system eliminate frustrating re-gluing or taping. Meets or exceeds all NCAA and High School Federation specifications. NCAA approved gray color. (Also available: Royal Blue, Scarlet, Navy, Columbia Blue, Kelly Green, Gold, Forest Green, Orange, Purple, Black, and Maroon.) 5-year warranty when installed indoors.

5. Goal: Goal shall be the DRAPER Model 503576 breakaway goal by Draper, Inc. of Spiceland, IN. Goal shall be designed to withstand shock loads due to a player slam dunking and/or hanging on the rim. The rim shall deflect down when a static load of 230 pounds is applied. The rim will return to the playing position once the load is removed. The function of the breakaway goal shall meet NCAA specifications, which state: "A movable basket ring shall have rebound characteristics identical to those of a non-moveable ring." Goal shall be set at factory for proper flex and rebound requirements. Rim shall be fabricated from a 5/8" diameter steel rod formed into an 18" inside diameter ring. Inside of ring shall be positioned 6" from the face of backboard by a heavy-duty mounting plate with mounting holes centered to match 5" x 5" or 5" x 4" backboard mounting holes. Goal will mount on standard glass, fiberglass, aluminum, steel, and wood backboards. Rim shall be rigidly braced by means of die cut steel braces formed and welded to underside of rim for maximum support. Goal shall be provided with twelve "no tie" net attachment clips, welded to rim for net attachment. Goal shall be painted in an official durable orange powder coat. Goal shall be furnished with zinc plated mounting hardware and high quality white nylon anti-whip net. The top half of the anti-whip net is made of durable fibers encased in tough 100% nylon, preventing the net from whipping up on the rim. The lower half is all nylon. Goal to have three-year limited warranty.

6. Controls: Group Control System shall be DRAPER Model SMART GYM Control System by Draper, Inc of Spiceland, IN Smart Gym Group Controller is to be able to control Basketball Backstops with Electric Winches, Electric Divider Curtains, Electric Height Adjusters, Wrestling Mat Lifters and other Auxiliary Devices from a centralized location. Group Control Systems to have 120V control processor that is fully programmable to operate gymnasium equipment and auxiliary devices provided by others. Group Control System must be capable of operating up to 1000 devices and can be programmed to operate single devices or groups of up to two devices simultaneously.



Devices are controlled via 120V relay panels that may be mounted at remote location(s.) Each relay panel includes 8 relays. Devices that operate in an up/down or in/out cycle require two relays; devices that operate in an on/off cycle require one relay. Communications between processor and the relay panel(s) is 24V. User interacts via a 24V flush mounted graphical color touch screen to be custom programmed to match the project conditions. Touch screen to require entry of four-digit security code prior to accessing control screens. Security code is to be fully programmable by the user. Touch screen should be mounted in full view of equipment being operated and a minimum of one touch screen should be each room with equipment being operated. Complete control system to include one pre-programmed Model 503024 control processor and power supply in 18" x 18" x 6" surface mounted enclosure, the required number of Model 503027 relay panels in surface mounted 15" x 8" x 2" surface mounted enclosure and the requested number of [Model 503025 Grayscale or Model 503026 color] graphical touch screen to be mounted in 4 ½" x 4 ½" x 2 ½" electrical box. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL: All conduits complete with wire from power source to control processor, from control processor to relay panels, from relay panels to devices and from control processor to touch screen and one 4 ½" x 4 ½" x 2 ½" electrical box for mounting touch screen.

7. Height Adjuster: 8' to 10' Height Adjuster shall be the DRAPER Model 503092/503094direct mount manual height adjuster by Draper, Inc., Spiceland, IN. 503092/503094 direct mount manual height adjuster is crank operated and actuated via a 3/4"-6 Acme threaded rod. The 503092/503094 height adjuster is built with a main frame-assembly constructed of 2" x 2-1/2" x 1/4" steel angle and 1/4" thick flat steel. Slip tubes consist of 2-5/8" O.D. outer tubes and 2-1/4" O.D. inner tubes. The 503092/503094 height adjuster frame assembly is jig welded and factory assembled to insure precise alignment and smooth operation. The 503092/503094 height adjuster's actuator rod assembly is bolted in place and easily removed for conversion to electric operation. Height adjuster includes a self-adhesive height scale that is graduated in 1" increments and labeled at 6" intervals. Height scale applied after installation to insure accuracy. Height adjuster covered by one-year limited warranty.

8. Safety Strap: Safety Strap shall be the DRAPER Model 503029 Posilok safety strap by Draper, Inc., Spiceland, IN. Posilok safety strap shall be directly speed sensitive to automatically lock a basketball backstop in position at any time whether in storage or during the raising/lowering cycle. In the event of an over-speed situation caused by a malfunction of the hoisting apparatus, such as winch, cable, pulley, support fitting problems etc., any increase in cycle speed or tension, whether sudden or gradual, immediately activates the locking device. The locking mechanism shall react to the actual speed of the reel and prevent it from exceeding a strap speed of 1.5 feet per second. The Posilok shall incorporate a 2" wide belt rated at 7,300 lbs., maximum breaking strength. The entire unit must be capable of withstanding a test using a 1750 lb falling weight, without strap failure or structural damage. The locking mechanism must be fail-safe, so that any sticking, jamming or breakage of any of the components of the arresting mechanism results in immediate, positive locking of the reel. The locking mechanism to be



self-checking and shall actively and positively confirm, six times per revolution, that the reel is traveling at a safe speed. The strap shall extend a maximum of 38 feet and shall have a safety alert patch stitched to the strap to indicate the maximum safe extension. The strap shall also incorporate a breakaway loop stitched into its lower end to indicate if the unit has been subjected to a heavy load. A bright colored warning label will be exposed if the loop stitching has been broken. The strap shall be automatically retracted and stored on a reel equipped with a special negator type constant force spring. The strap anchoring system must bear on the full width of the strap and be capable of taking the full breaking strength of the strap. The unit shall incorporate a fully automatic reset requiring no poles, ropes, levers or buttons to be used.The unit shall have an interlocking all-steel frame for strength and be powder coated for corrosion resistance and a modern, aesthetically pleasing appearance.

B. Side Courts (Four Required) 1. Type:

Basketball backstop shall be the DRAPER EZ FOLD Model TF-20, ceiling-suspended, forward folding by Draper, Inc. of Spiceland, IN. Backstop shall be a welded together main frame constructed from steel mechanical tubing to form a rigid tetrahedral "T" design of back-to-back right triangles. The main stem shall be 6" OD 11-ga. steel tubing, the top of the "T" shall be 4" OD 11-ga. steel tubing and the side braces shall be 2-1/4" OD 14-ga. steel tubing. Side braces shall join stem no higher than 4'6" above goal (18" above top of backboard). The main stem shall be long enough to allow ±6" height adjustment of either fan or rectangular banks. The folding front brace shall be jackknife type, fully adjustable, self-locking in the down position and constructed of 2-1/2" OD 13-ga. (outer) steel tubing and 2-1/4" OD 14-ga. (inner) steel tubing. Pivot or hinge joint for folding of backstop shall not exceed 15" from roof structure except when required by architectural conditions for coordination with other trades or equipment. Pivot or hinge point to be designed in a manner to provide a minimum structural capacity of 25,000 Lbs. and a safety factor of 55:1. The main backstop frame shall pivot on 1-1/4" minimum solid steel shaft secured in a milled bearing hole in 1/2" minimum steel plate hangers to insure accurate positioning of bank. Bank attached to the 6" OD main stem by heavy-duty bank hangers. Hangers constructed of 1" x 2" 11-ga. steel tubing and formed 1/4" steel plate with slotted holes for lateral adjustment. All banks shall have one upper bank hanger and include a goal brace, which attaches directly to the goal mounting plate and directly to the 6" main stem of the backstop to eliminate any strain on the bank and help prevent glass breakage. This direct mount feature shall conform to NCAA recommendation No. 5-F. Backstop shall be supported from 4" OD 11-ga. steel mechanical tubing anchored to roof structure by means of heavy steel support hangers. Attachment to building structure to be with clamps capable of supporting a minimum of 20,000 Lbs. each. Superstructure shall be designed with a minimum of four attachment clamps to produce a combined minimum attachment point safety factor of 75 to 1 and manufacture must be able to present independent testing data to substantiate safety factor. Superstructure tubes shall be reinforced with bridging and/or bracing when truss centers exceed 10'0". Backstop shall be provided with choice of black or white powder coat finish.



2. Operation: Winch shall be DRAPER model 503086 manual basketball backstop winch by Draper, Inc. of Spiceland, IN. Manual winch shall be rated to deliver 750 lbs of vertical lifting and 1000 lbs of horizontal line pull. Available cable travel shall be 25 feet [7.7 meters] on one layer. Cable drum shall be manufactured from hard aluminum alloy and shall be directly supported at the cable-winding diameter for maximum strength and rigidity. The drum shall be helically grooved for 1/4" 7 x 19 aircraft cable. Grooving shall provide proper spooling of the cable and ensure excellent repeatability of stop positions. Drum shall be equipped with a pressure roller, with torsion spring tensioning, to ensure that the cable tracks in the groove even under slack cable conditions. Winch shall employ a double worm reduction system. Use of composite materials shall result in superior strength and life. No oil lubrication shall be required. Uni-directional worm brake, together with inherently self-locking composite worm drive, shall assure positive dynamic braking and reliable holding of the cable drum. Operated by a removable hand crank. Winch shall be located so that backstops are in full view of the operator. Winch shall be covered by 5-year warranty.

3. Bank: Backboard shall be the DRAPER Model 503144 rectangular fiberglass by Draper, Inc. of Spiceland, IN. Backboard shall be official size 72" x 42" with permanently molded in orange perimeter (3" wide) and target (2" wide) area markings. Backboard shall be fabricated with two separate sections. Front and back shells shall be made with a glass craft spray-up system and provided with high gloss gel coated white finish at least 12 mils thick. Backboard core shall be impregnated honeycomb construction. Backboard shall be completely weatherproof for indoor or outdoor use in all climates. Goal attachment shall be made through solid plastic blocks built into honeycomb center. Backboard shall be supplied with inserts consisting of steel T-nuts set in plastic blocks for mounting. Factory drilled goal mounting holes (4) shall be standard 5" (horizontal) x 4" (vertical) mounting centers. Backboard shall be covered by a Limited Lifetime Warranty when installed on a Draper EZ Fold basketball backstop with Goal Brace or Direct Mount Height Adjuster.

4. Backboard Safety Padding: Backboard Edge Padding shall be the DRAPER Model 5032XX bolt-on backboard safety padding by Draper, Inc., Spiceland, IN. Molding process produces a super tough "skin" on the outside of the foam padding for long life. Pre-molded square corners for improved player safety. Molded-in steel track and bolt-on attachment system eliminate frustrating re-gluing or taping. Meets or exceeds all NCAA and High School Federation specifications. NCAA approved gray color. (Also available: Royal Blue, Scarlet, Navy, Columbia Blue, Kelly Green, Gold, Forest Green, Orange, Purple, Black, and Maroon.) 5-year warranty when installed indoors.

5. Goal: Goal shall be the DRAPER Model 503576 breakaway goal by Draper, Inc. of Spiceland, IN. Goal shall be designed to withstand shock loads due to a player slam dunking and/or hanging on the rim. The rim shall deflect down when a static load of 230 pounds is applied.



The rim will return to the playing position once the load is removed. The function of the breakaway goal shall meet NCAA specifications, which state: "A movable basket ring shall have rebound characteristics identical to those of a non-moveable ring." Goal shall be set at factory for proper flex and rebound requirements. Rim shall be fabricated from a 5/8" diameter steel rod formed into an 18" inside diameter ring. Inside of ring shall be positioned 6" from the face of backboard by a heavy-duty mounting plate with mounting holes centered to match 5" x 5" or 5" x 4" backboard mounting holes. Goal will mount on standard glass, fiberglass, aluminum, steel, and wood backboards. Rim shall be rigidly braced by means of die cut steel braces formed and welded to underside of rim for maximum support. Goal shall be provided with twelve "no tie" net attachment clips, welded to rim for net attachment. Goal shall be painted in an official durable orange powder coat. Goal shall be furnished with zinc plated mounting hardware and high quality white nylon anti-whip net. The top half of the anti-whip net is made of durable fibers encased in tough 100% nylon, preventing the net from whipping up on the rim. The lower half is all nylon. Goal to have three-year limited warranty.

6. Controls: Group Control System shall be DRAPER Model SMART GYM Control System by Draper, Inc of Spiceland, IN Smart Gym Group Controller is to be able to control Basketball Backstops with Electric Winches, Electric Divider Curtains, Electric Height Adjusters, Wrestling Mat Lifters and other Auxiliary Devices from a centralized location. Group Control Systems to have 120V control processor that is fully programmable to operate gymnasium equipment and auxiliary devices provided by others. Group Control System must be capable of operating up to 1000 devices and can be programmed to operate single devices or groups of up to two devices simultaneously. Devices are controlled via 120V relay panels that may be mounted at remote location(s.) Each relay panel includes 8 relays. Devices that operate in an up/down or in/out cycle require two relays; devices that operate in an on/off cycle require one relay. Communications between processor and the relay panel(s) is 24V. User interacts via a 24V flush mounted graphical color touch screen to be custom programmed to match the project conditions. Touch screen to require entry of four-digit security code prior to accessing control screens. Security code is to be fully programmable by the user. Touch screen should be mounted in full view of equipment being operated and a minimum of one touch screen should be each room with equipment being operated. Complete control system to include one pre-programmed Model 503024 control processor and power supply in 18" x 18" x 6" surface mounted enclosure, the required number of Model 503027 relay panels in surface mounted 15" x 8" x 2" surface mounted enclosure and the requested number of [Model 503025 Grayscale or Model 503026 color] graphical touch screen to be mounted in 4 ½" x 4 ½" x 2 ½" electrical box. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL: All conduits complete with wire from power source to control processor, from control processor to relay panels, from relay panels to devices and from control processor to touch screen and one 4 ½" x 4 ½" x 2 ½" electrical box for mounting touch screen.

7. Height Adjuster:



8' to 10' Height Adjuster shall be the DRAPER Model 503092/503094direct mount manual height adjuster by Draper, Inc., Spiceland, IN. 503092/503094 direct mount manual height adjuster is crank operated and actuated via a 3/4"-6 Acme threaded rod. The 503092/503094 height adjuster is built with a main frame-assembly constructed of 2" x 2-1/2" x 1/4" steel angle and 1/4" thick flat steel. Slip tubes consist of 2-5/8" O.D. outer tubes and 2-1/4" O.D. inner tubes. The 503092/503094 height adjuster frame assembly is jig welded and factory assembled to insure precise alignment and smooth operation. The 503092/503094 height adjuster's actuator rod assembly is bolted in place and easily removed for conversion to electric operation. Height adjuster includes a self-adhesive height scale that is graduated in 1" increments and labeled at 6" intervals. Height scale applied after installation to insure accuracy. Height adjuster covered by one-year limited warranty.

8. Safety Strap: Safety Strap shall be the DRAPER Model 503029 Posilok safety strap by Draper, Inc., Spiceland, IN. Posilok safety strap shall be directly speed sensitive to automatically lock a basketball backstop in position at any time whether in storage or during the raising/lowering cycle. In the event of an over-speed situation caused by a malfunction of the hoisting apparatus, such as winch, cable, pulley, support fitting problems etc., any increase in cycle speed or tension, whether sudden or gradual, immediately activates the locking device. The locking mechanism shall react to the actual speed of the reel and prevent it from exceeding a strap speed of 1.5 feet per second. The Posilok shall incorporate a 2" wide belt rated at 7,300 lbs., maximum breaking strength. The entire unit must be capable of withstanding a test using a 1750 lb falling weight, without strap failure or structural damage. The locking mechanism must be fail-safe, so that any sticking, jamming or breakage of any of the components of the arresting mechanism results in immediate, positive locking of the reel. The locking mechanism to be self-checking and shall actively and positively confirm, six times per revolution, that the reel is traveling at a safe speed. The strap shall extend a maximum of 38 feet and shall have a safety alert patch stitched to the strap to indicate the maximum safe extension. The strap shall also incorporate a breakaway loop stitched into its lower end to indicate if the unit has been subjected to a heavy load. A bright colored warning label will be exposed if the loop stitching has been broken. The strap shall be automatically retracted and stored on a reel equipped with a special negator type constant force spring. The strap anchoring system must bear on the full width of the strap and be capable of taking the full breaking strength of the strap. The unit shall incorporate a fully automatic reset requiring no poles, ropes, levers or buttons to be used.The unit shall have an interlocking all-steel frame for strength and be powder coated for corrosion resistance and a modern, aesthetically pleasing appearance.

C. OUTDOOR BASKETBALL BACKSTOPS 1.Type. Draper Model#506246 Outdoor Backstop. Locate as shown on plans. Outdoor units shall consist of 3-1/2” OD gooseneck galvanized pole, 4’-0” extension. Banks shall be fan aluminum powder coated in white with orange border and target. Rims shall be super goal type with premium chain net.



2.3 GYMNASIUM DIVIDER CURTAINS A. Main Gym 1. Top-Roll

A. Type: Electrically operated, Top-Roll gymnasium divider including motor, controls, clamps for attachment to building structure, and other components required for complete functional installation.

B. Operation: Curtain moves by rolling directly onto drive tube without the use of belts or

cables.

C. Configuration: Rectangular shape with straight bottom and extending across room as indicated on Drawings.

1. Maximum dimension of stored divider: 14 inches [355 mm] from bottom of

structural or supplemental support to bottom of stored curtain. 2. Minimum required clearance between vertical curtain edges and adjacent fixed

objects: 6 inches [152 mm]. 3. Provide 3 feet [1 m] space between curtain ends and walls or fixed objects to

allow passage space around divider.

D. Operating mechanism: Drive pipe winch powered with 3/4 HP, 115VAC, 60 cycle, single phase, reversible capacitor, C-Face motor with thermal overload protection. Entire winch assembly to be UL Listed and shall carry a five-year warranty. Provide with load holding worm gear reducer and integral limit switches to control curtain travel. Drive pipe shall rotate in pipe support assemblies spaced at approximately 10 feet [3 m].

E. Attachment: Attach to structural or supplemental support with beam clamps, hanger

brackets, and 1/2-inch [13 mm] diameter threaded rods. Attachment clamps to be designed to be capable of supporting minimum 5,000 Lbs. each and be of sufficient number to provide a combined minimum 45:1 attachment point safety factor.

F. Drive Pipe: 5-inch [127 mm] diameter steel pipe. Drive pipe shall roll in precision laser

cut and formed support assembly. Assemblies spaced at a maximum 10 feet [3 m] on center.

G. Divider bottom: 1-5/8 inch [41 mm] diameter steel pipe batten in 6 inches [152 mm] wide

curtain pocket

H. Curtain Material

1. Bottom 8 feet [2.4 m]: Opaque solid vinyl coated polyester fabric: a. Weight: 22 ounces per square yard. b. Resistant to rot, mildew, fungus and ultraviolet light. c. Flammability: Rated self-extinguishing in accordance with California

State Fire Code F-230. Class A Rated in accordance with requirements of NFPA-101.

d. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

2. Upper curtain section: Vinyl coated polyester mesh. a. Weight: 9 ounces per square yard. b. Resistant to rot, mildew, fungus and ultraviolet light. c. Flammability: Rated self-extinguishing in accordance with California

State Fire Code F-230. Class A Rated in accordance with requirements of NFPA-101.



d. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

3. VOC Emission: Divider Curtain Vinyl and Mesh to be low emitting and certified to meet all of the requirements of the GREENGUARD Children & Schools and GREENGUARD certification program. GREENGUARD Children & Schools requires emissions of total volatile organic compounds = 0.22 mg/m3, formaldehyde = 0.0135 ppm, total aldehydes = 0.043 ppm, individual volatile organic compounds = 1/1000 TLV and = ½ chronic REL and total phthalates = 0.01 mg/m3. Vinyl and Mesh must be evaluated to indoor air quality evaluation (IAQ) using a GREENGUARD product evaluation protocol following the requirements of The GREENGUARD Environmental Institutes (GEI) Product Certification Program, ASTM Standard D5116 and the United States Environmental Protection Agency and modeled based on GEI requirements for a standard gymnasium loading and ASHRAE 62.1 – 2004 ventilation conditions. Manufacturer to provide certificate and/or test results upon request.

4. Seams: Horizontal and electronically welded with 1 inch [25 mm] full contact weld.

5. Outer edge hems: Turned with welds. 6. Top Edge: 22 oz. Vinyl, cut square for attachment to roller tube and of sufficient

length to allow at least two complete wraps on roller tube at all times.

7. Bottom edge: Pocket to house bottom pipe batten.

2.4 WALL PADDING A. Main Gym

Wall padding shall be DRAPER Model FIRE RATED WALL PADS, by Draper, Inc. of Spiceland, IN. Wall pads to be standard sized 2' x 6' and custom sizes as indicated on project plans. Bidder is responsible for verification of job conditions and dimensions. Entire pad assembly has been tested and meets the requirements of NFPA-101Life Safety Code for Class A rating (flame spread 0-25 and smoke development 0-450) when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84 (Also published as NFPA-255, ANSI 2.5, UBC 8-1 (42-1) and UL 723). Entire pad assembly has also been tested in accordance with NFPA-286 (Standard method of fire tests for evaluating contribution of wall and ceiling interior finish to room growth) and found to meet the requirements of 2003 IBC Section 803.2.1. Wall pads shall be constructed using (2"/1½") thick polyurethane foam bonded to a 7/16" thick wafer board backer and covered with a 14 oz. vinyl covering. Vinyl cover shall be coated polyester fabric with leather grain embossed pattern. Vinyl to have average weight of 14 oz. per square yard, breaking strength of 350 PSI, tear resistance of 65 pounds and be rated as self extinguishing in accordance with California State Fire Code F-230 and Class A Rated in accordance with requirements of NFPA-101. Vinyl to be resistant to rot, mildew and ultraviolet light and is available in Red, Dark Blue, Marine Blue, Beige, Grey, Black, Forest Green, Kelly Green, Brown, Maroon, Orange, Yellow, White, Navy Blue and Purple. Panel front and edges shall be vinyl wrapped and securely stapled to the wood backer so that the backer is not exposed on front or four sides. Pads shall be supplied with 1" fabric wrapped mounting flanges at panel top and bottom.

2.5 VOLLEYBALL EQUIPMENT A. Main Gym 1. Power Volleyball System (1 required).



Volleyball System shall be DRAPER Model 500001 PVS-01 Power Volleyball System by Draper, Inc. of Spiceland, IN. The 500001 PVS-01 shall consist of one standard with power winch and one standard with adjustable cable anchor collar. Post shall be telescoping type to meet all FIVB, USVBA, NCAA and NFSHSA requirements for competition. Post shall adjust from 6'1" (1.854 m) to 8'4" (2.540 m) in 1" (2.540 cm) increments to meet all age group height settings from elementary school use to international competition for both men and women. The 6' (1.890 cm) bottom upright shall be 3½" OD (8.890 cm) schedule 80 aluminum tube, with a wall thickness of .300" (.7620 cm). The bottom upright is provided with a special rubber foot to protect finished floors and to provide precise net height adjustment. The upper telescoping adjustable tube shall be 2-7/8" OD (7.303 cm) schedule 80 aluminum tube, with a wall thickness of .276" (.7010 cm) with a 4" (10.16 cm) diameter pulley and oilite bushing. The tensioning winch shall incorporate a heavy-duty, self-locking worm gear mechanism. Winch shall be furnished with a heavy 2" (5 cm) wide high tensile nylon strap with heavy-duty snap hook to eliminate the possibility of hook breaking and guarantee safe connection to net top cable. The power winch is furnished complete with a folding handle for player safety. Systems shall come complete with DRAPER Model 500004 Power Volleyball Net by Draper, Inc. of Spiceland, IN. Net shall be 32' (9.75 M) long x 39-3/8" (1 M) high. Netting shall be high quality 4" square #36 black nylon cord with vinyl coated polyester hem double stitched around entire perimeter of net. Top hem of net shall be furnished with a 42'6" long x 1/8" diameter 2000 lb. minimum breaking strength galvanized aircraft cable with a nylon coating (3/16" OD) to protect against fraying. Ends of cable to have loops with heavy swaged type fittings for easy installation. Hems in end of net shall be furnished with a pocket for use with a 1/2" diameter fiberglass dowel rod. Ends of net shall have six 1" wide polypropylene tension straps with buckles for providing additional tightening of net. Bottom of net shall be furnished with a 1/4" diameter braided white nylon rope equipped with a spring loaded, pressure type rope tensioner. System also to include Draper Model 500005 Rope Tensioner and DRAPER Model 500016 Combination Antenna and Boundary Marker.

2. Floor Plate, Chrome-plated w/swivel cover (2 required).

Volleyball Cover Plate shall be DRAPER model 501001 Chrome Plated Cover Plate Assembly by Draper, Inc. of Spiceland, IN. Chrome plated cover plate assembly shall be provided for use in either synthetic or wood floors. Cover plate shall consist of cast aluminum recessed mounting flange, 5-3/16" in diameter, and a 5" diameter chrome plated cover. Cover shall be equipped with a swivel type retaining screw to prevent theft. A special key shall be provided for opening cover. Three #10 x 1-1/2" flat head wood screws shall be provided to securely mount cover plate assembly to floor.

3. Floor Sleeve (One per cover plate required).

Floor Sleeves shall be DRAPER Model 501006 3-1/2" I.D. Floor Sleeve by Draper, Inc. of Spiceland, IN. Floor sleeve shall be constructed of steel mechanical tubing with an inside diameter of 3-1/2", welded to a 4" x 4" bottom plate. Sleeve shall be 8-1/2" long and designed to be installed with the bottom at 9 ½" below the playing surface.



4. Protective Pads for Standards (1 required). Volleyball Post Padding shall be DRAPER Model 5011XX Official Padding for 3-1/2" O.D. Volleyball Systems by Draper, Inc. of Spiceland, IN. Pads shall be hinged at corners to fold neatly around posts and tensioning winch to provide maximum player protection. Pads shall be constructed of 11/2" thick polyethylene foam filler covered with polyester reinforced vinyl with three (3) hook and loop fastening straps for quick set-up and take-down, and shall be constructed to accommodate winch, or judges stand when used. Standard pads are Dark Blue in color unless otherwise specified. Last two digits indicate pad color. Colors available: 01 White; 02 Marine Blue; 03 Brown; 04 Red; 05 Beige; 06 Orange; 07 Yellow; 08 Grey; 09 Maroon; 10 Dark Blue (standard); 11 Black; 12 Purple; 13 Forest Green. Pads sold as pair unless otherwise specified.

2.5 OUTDOOR VOLLEYBALL SYSTEM

A. Volleyball Posts/Sleeves B. System shall consist of one winch upright and one anchor upright and supplied with a

tensioning winch and strap. 1. Uprights shall fit snugly into 3.57”-I.D. rigid aluminum, 36" deep floor sleeves. 2. Sleeves shall be Model # OCV-900G.

C. Uprights shall provide men’s and women’s net height settings by means of twin welded roller tabs on the winch upright and twin welded “D”-rings on the anchor end. 1. Construct uprights of 3½”-O.D. by .187” steel tubing.

D. Tensioning system shall consist of a ratchet type winch and include an attached 2" high strength nylon web-tensioning strap. 1. Uprights shall have attached rubber feet to protect finished floors during transport.

E. All hardware shall be zinc plated. F. System shall be Jaypro Sports Model # OCV-900 or approved equal.

2.6 SLEEVED TETHERBALL SYSTEM

A. Ground Posts/Sleeves - Post Constructed of 2-3/8" O.D. Heavy Gauge Galvanized Steel. Post is 12" Tall iwth 2' in ground. Sleeves included for removal when not in use.

B. Locking Cover to be included to prevent theft or tampering. C. Ball and Heavy Nylon Cord Included. D. 1 Year Limited Warranty. E. System shall be Online Sports Model #GAR-6812 or approved equal.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3. 1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate support of basketball backstops and gymnasium divider curtains with roof structure to ensure proper distribution of loads and adequacy of attachment points. Ensure that building structure has been designed for loads of specific gymnasium divider to be provided. Provide additional structural framing members as required in accordance with Division 5.

B. Coordinate configuration, size, and installation of basketball backstops and gymnasium divider curtains with height, slope, and type of building structure and lighting fixtures,



mechanical equipment, ductwork, fire-suppression system, bleachers, athletic equipment, and other potential obstructions.

C. Field-verify dimensions prior to fabrication. D. Coordinate electrical requirements for motorized operating mechanism to ensure proper

power source, conduit, wiring, and boxes for keyed switches. Prior to installation, verify type and location of power supply. See “Electrical Contractor Shall Provide and Install”

E. Coordinate delivery of Volleyball Floor Sleeves and Covers with sub-contractors responsible for installation.

F. For installations made after wood gymnasium flooring is installed, provide protection and exercise care not to damage flooring.

3. 2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and shop drawings. B. Install even, plumb and level. C. Install control switch such that operator has view of complete basketball backstop during

lowering and raising. D. Adjust limit switches of electric winch to ensure accurate position in both stored and

lowered positions. 3. 3 TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION

A. Operate basketball backstops to ensure proper lifting and lowering. Adjust as required to ensure smooth operation and accurate positioning.

B. Demonstrate to Owner's designated representatives complete operation and required maintenance.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 11 68 13

PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT (2-5)

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 11 68 13 Page - 1 Playground Equipment (2-5) Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. 3 1/2" O.D. uprights with a positive bolt-through fastening system utilizing stainless steel tabs.

1. The uprights shall be factory drilled to ensure accurate placement of components and ease of installation.

2. Field drilling and measuring are not required.

3. System must be a direct bolt system NOT a clamp system.

4. All uprights shall receive factory installed aluminum post caps and shall be shipped with a factory applied label indicating proper surfacing level.

5. All decks and components shall connect to support posts by means of a through-bolt connection for strong, durable connections.

a) Deck/Collar attachments shall not be acceptable.

6. All climbing attachments shall include a 15"" wide deck entry archway to control deck access to one child at a time and help prevent inadvertent falls.

1.2 References

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

A. B 241 Hardness H (ASTM D-3363)

B. Impact (ASTM D-2794- 69)

C. Wedge Bend (ASTM D-522-68)

D. Adhesion (Cross Hatch ASTM D-3359 & Knife Scratch ASTM D-2197)

E. Environmental (Stain Resistance ASTM D-1308, Humidity ASTM D-2247 - 87, Salt Spray ASTM B-117)

F. ASTM D4976-PE235

G. ASTM D1238 – 0.35 g/10 min Melt Index

H. ASTM D838 – 3,900 psi Tensile Strength, FDA Regulation 177.1520 Suitable for Food Packaging Warranty – 10 Years

I. Definition – Fall Zone & Fall Zone Requirements

1.3 Warranties and Guarantees

1. LIFETIME LIMITED WARRANTY ON SUPPORT POSTS (UPRIGHTS)


SECTION 11 68 13



2. 15 YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY ON PUNCHED STEEL DECKS, PIPES, RAILS, LOOPS AND RUNGS

3. 15 YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY ON ROTOMOLDED POLYETHYLENE COMPONENTS

4. LIFETIME LIMITED WARRANTY ON HARDWARE

5. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001/2000 and 14001:2004 Required

6. Manufacturer shall show IPEMA certification of compliance for each component that the product conforms with the requirements of ASTM F1487-07ae1.

7. Required to be certified that product and layout meets Consumer Product Safety Commission Publ. 325, 1997 Version to meet State of Texas Law.

8. Required that Manufacturer’s Representative/Distributor – Must have a National Playground Safety Institute (NPSI) Certified Playground Safety Inspector on staff and available to assist non-certified sales consultants if required.

1.4 VENDOR SERVICE PERFORMANCE STANDARDS

A. Authorized Vendor / Manufacturer Representative Must:

1. Provide local services for warranty and non-warranty part replacement. A dedicated warranty parts replacement staff contact is preferred in addition to local sales rep.

2. Local office must be within 60 miles of Dallas ISD Grounds. DISD Maint. Dept. 3701 South Lamar St., Dallas, TX 75215

3. Minimum 5-7 years of product and service experience with Dallas ISD.

4. Provide maintenance and playground supervisor training upon request at site determined by District.

5. Provide to the maintenance Service Center (not manufacturer standard maintenance kit) to include an assortment of manufacturer recommended hardware, tools, and equipment documents. Service center to be located at District Grounds Maintenance office 3701 S. Lamar St., Dallas, TX 75215

6. MUST inspect (not third party audit) equipment and verify in writing that it meets manufacturer’s specifications as installed.

7. MUST be available upon request to check in and verify shipments are correct upon delivery. A delivery checklist must be provided by manufacturer in addition to bill of lading.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Include pole and base dimensions, materials, finishes, and accessories.


SECTION 11 68 13




A. Wrap components in heavy materials to prevent damage during shipping and handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers


1. Gametime 2. Playworld B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.

2.2 MATERIALS/METHODS

A. ENTRY ARCHWAY

1. All entry archways shall be fabricated from 1-5/16" O.D. x .083" (14 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing with vertical members fabricated of 1-1/16" O.D. x .075" (15 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing and with 3/16" hot rolled steel formed mounting tabs.

2. The entrance archways shall be an all welded assembly and shall be coated with a custom formula of TGIC polyester powder, after fabrication in conformance with the specifications outlined herein

3. Plastics must contain a minimum of 90% total recycled content to comply with TX-CHPS Credit ME4.1 - Recycled Content.

B. HARDWARE

1. All nuts, bolts, screws, inserts, and lockwashers used in the assembly of all play equipment shall be stainless steel, yellow dichromate plated steel, blue-coat plated steel, mechanically galvanized or powder coated/yellow dichromate plated steel.

2. All primary fasteners shall be 304 alloy stainless steel. Fasteners with yellow dichromate treatment have an electro-deposited, 99.9% pure zinc substrate applied from a specially formulated solution sealed with a yellow dichromate top coat designed to work in conjunction with the zinc plating. Yellow dichromate has a 320% longer life to white corrosion and 275% longer to red corrosion than does hot-dip galvanizing.

3. All primary stainless steel fasteners shall be Button Head Socket Caps.

C. POWDER COAT FINISH

1. Shall be an electrostatically applied custom formula of TGIC polyester powder.

2. All components will be free of sharp edges and excess weld spatter and shall be cleaned in a six stage bath system with an iron phosphate wash, as a rust inhibitor,


SECTION 11 68 13



and a sealer to prevent flash rusting before coating. In addition, all welds shall be protectively coated with ZRP, a zinc rich primer that forms a rust-resistant barrier layer over each weld prior to application of the powder coating.

3. The powder coating shall have a super tough finish with maximum exterior durability and will have superior adhesion characteristics. Typical characteristics are: 3.0 - 5.0 mil thickness and oven cured between 375 to 425 degrees Fahrenheit. Pencil Hardness H (ASTM D-3363), Impact (ASTM D-2794- 69), Wedge Bend (ASTM D-522-68), Adhesion (Cross Hatch ASTM D-3359 & Knife Scratch ASTM D-2197), Environmental (Stain Resistance ASTM D-1308, Humidity ASTM D-2247 - 87, Salt Spray ASTM B-117 & Fadometer 300 hrs with no loss of gloss), Over-bake Stability 100% at 400 degrees Fahrenheit.

D. ROTATIONALLY MOLDED PRODUCTS

1. All polyethylene shall be linear low-density material with UV-stabilized color and an anti-static compound additive. All rotationally molded products shall meet or exceed the following specifications:

a) ASTM D-1248, type 2, class A and Federal specification LP-390C, type 1, class M, grade 2, category 3; Density (ASTM D- 1505); Brittleness Temperature (ASTM D-746); Tensile Values (ASTM D-638); Flexural Modulus (ASTM D-790);Heat Distortion (ASTM-648); Low Temperature Impact (ARM-STD).

E. BOLT-THROUGH CONNECTION

1. Each component is to be bolted directly into the upright post and designed to eliminate exposed hardware and protrusions.

2. Minimum tensile strength of the connection shall be 45,000 psi, minimum yield strength shall be 22,000 psi.

3. All necessary connectors shall be engineered, manufactured and factory installed as an integral part of the upright post.

4. For added protection against corrosion, cold galvanizing shall be applied to the edges of each drilled hole.

F. UPRIGHTS

1. All upright posts shall have a finished grade line marking to indicate the correct playground safety surface level.

2. All upright posts shall be coated with a custom formula TGIC polyester powder coating in conformance with the specifications outlined herein.

G. UPRIGHTS - ALUMINUM

1. Shall be 3.5" outside diameter tubing, 1/8" wall thickness, extruded from 6005-T5 aluminum alloy conforming to ASTM-B-221. Minimum yield strength shall be 35,000 psi and minimum tensile strength shall be 38,000 psi.


SECTION 11 68 13



2. All upright posts shall have a finished grade line marking to indicate the correct playground safety surface level. All upright posts shall be coated with a custom formula TGIC polyester powder coating in conformance with the specifications outlined herein.

H. UPRIGHTS - STEEL

1. Shall be 3.5" outside diameter, 13 gauge (.095") galvanized round tubing, manufactured to ASTM A-500 Section II tolerances from cold-formed steel conforming to ASTM A-569 Sheet Spec for Steel Coil.

2. Minimum yield strength shall be 50,000 psi and minimum tensile strength shall be 55,000 psi.

3. The exterior surface is hot dip galvanized, chromate conversion coated, and a clear high performance organic polymer is applied.

4. The inside diameter has 81% minimum zinc rich primer capable of providing excellent rust protection and fabrication characteristics.

5. All coatings are applied inside and out after welding for superior corrosion protection throughout. Exterior surface galvanizing zinc purity is 99% as per ASTM B-6 high grade and special high grade. Galvanizing coverage shall demonstrate the ability to exceed 1000 hours salt spray corrosion exposure in accordance with ASTM B-117. Internal surface zinc rich 81% minimum zinc dust content in organic resin, as per ASTM F-1234, Section 5.2.4, Type D.



I. UPRIGHT CAPS

1. The standard upright cap shall be an aluminum cap, cast from a 383 alloy, powder coated to match the upright.

2. Every upright cap shall be anodized for maximum protection.

3. All upright caps are permanently installed at the factory using aluminum self-sealing rivets.

2.3 MATERIALS/METHODS - PUNCHED STEEL & COATED COMPONENTS:

A. PUNCHED STEEL DECKS

1. Punched steel decks shall be fabricated from 12 gauge punched steel with a protective p&o finish and other punched steel products shall be fabricated from 11 gauge punched steel with a protective p&o finish.


SECTION 11 68 13



2. Coated products shall consist of a welded assembly with an oven cured matte finish polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coating with a minimum coating thickness of .080".

3. The PVC coating shall have a hardness of Shore A 83 +/-5 normal durometer range. This material is classed as "Self Extinguishing", meets or exceeds automotive specifications NVSS302, and contains ultraviolet inhibitors to help prolong the life of the coating.

4. The PVC coating shall contain pthalate levels in concentrations of 1/10 of 1% or lower. For ADA Ramp Accessible decks and ramps, the hole shall measure 1/4" diameter after coating.

5. For standard decks and ramps, the hole size shall measure 1-1/4" diameter after coating.

B. DECKS - SQUARE

1. Shall have a minimum surface area of 1,286 square inches, maintaining a full 36" center to center spacing on the upright posts.

2. The 36" square deck shall be fabricated from punched steel in conformance with the specifications outlined herein. The deck frame shall be fabricated from 3/16" x 2-1/2" hot rolled steel with corner supports fabricated from 1/4" x 2-1/2" hot rolled steel. Intermediate supports, fabricated from 1/8" x 1" hot rolled steel, shall be notched and welded at the intersections forming a support grid underneath the entire deck surface.

3. The deck shall be a one-piece welded assembly, coated after fabrication with an oven cured matte finish polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coating in accordance with the specifications herein.

4. Each square deck shall be directly bolted to the upright posts with four 3/8" diameter button head cap screws in accordance with the hardware specifications herein.

C. TRANSFER PLATFORM

1. Platform and step shall be made from punched steel in conformance with the specifications outlined herein.

2. Platform and step shall each be a one-piece welded assembly. Platform frame shall be made from 1/8" x 2-1/2" hot rolled steel with intermediate supports fabricated from 1/8" x 2" hot rolled flat steel. Step shall be made from 11 gauge (.120" thick) hot rolled steel and 1/8" x 2-1/2" hot rolled flat steel.

3. Platform handhold shall be fabricated from a single piece of 1-5/16" O.D. x 14 gauge (.083" thick) galvanized steel tubing. Handrails shall be fabricated from 1-1/16" O.D. x 15 gauge (.075" thick) galvanized steel tubing, 1-5/16" O.D. x 14 gauge (.083 thick) galvanized tubing and 3/16" formed hot rolled flat steel mounting tab.

4. Handrails shall be an all welded assembly.

5. After fabrication, handrails and handhold shall be coated with a custom formula TGIC polyester powder coating in conformance with the specifications outlined herein.


SECTION 11 68 13



D. STEP PLATFORM

1. The Steps shall be made from 11 gauge punched steel with a protective P&O finish in conformance with the specifications outlined herein.

2. The Steps shall each be a one-piece welded assembly finished with the matte PVC coating per the specifications herein. Handrails and attachment rails shall be fabricated from 1-5/16" O.D. x .083" (14 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing, with supports fabricated from 1-1/16" O.D. x 15 gauge (.075" thick) galvanized steel tubing and 2" square x 3/16" wall steel tubing.

3. Handholds and attachment rails shall be all-welded assemblies and shall be coated with a custom formula of TGIC polyester powder in conformance with the specifications outlined herein, after fabrication.

2.4 MATERIALS/METHODS – CLIMBERS:

A. CLOVER LEAF CLIMBER

1. Clover climber shall be fabricated from 1-5/8" O.D. x .083" (14 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing, and step rungs of 1-5/16" O.D. x .083" (14 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing and 3/16" formed steel mounting tab.

2. The Clover climber shall have a handhold of 1.029" x .083" (14 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing.

3. Clover climber shall be a one-piece welded assembly and shall be coated with a custom formula of TGIC polyester powder in conformance with the specifications outlined herein, after fabrication. Steel insert shall be fabricated from 11 gauge (.120") hot rolled steel.

4. Decorative designs shall be laser cut to produce accurate, burr-free cut-outs.

B. LOOP LADDER

1. The loop ladder side rails shall be fabricated from 1-5/16" O.D. x .083" (14 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing.

2. The loops shall be fabricated from 1-1/16" O.D. x .072" (15 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing. Handholds shall be fabricated from 1-1/16" x .072" (15 gauge) wall galvanized tubing with 3/16" formed hot rolled steel mounting tabs.

3. The ladder assembly shall be an all welded construction and shall be coated with a custom formula of TGIC polyester powder coating in conformance with the specifications outlined herein.

C. RUNG LADDER

A. Shall be fabricated from 1-5/16" O.D. x .083" (14 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing with horizontal members fabricated of 1-1/16" O.D. x .075" (15 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing.


SECTION 11 68 13



B. The ladder assembly shall be an all-welded construction and shall be coated with a custom formula of TGIC polyester powder coating in conformance with the specifications outlined herein, after fabrication.

2.5 MATERIALS/METHODS –BODY DEVELOPMENT COMPONENTS:

A CHINNING BAR

1. The chinning bars shall be fabricated from 1-5/16" O.D. x .083" (14 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing and shall be coated with a custom formula of TGIC polyester powder coating in conformance with the specifications outlined herein, after fabrication.

B. HORIZONTAL & INCLINED LOOP LADDERS

1. The horizontal loop ladder assembly shall be fabricated from 2-3/8" O.D. x .134" wall galvanized steel tubing. The loops shall be fabricated from 1-1/16" O.D. x .075" (15 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing.

2. The ladder assembly shall be an all welded construction which bolts directly into the uprights and shall be coated with a custom formula of TGIC polyester powder coating in conformance with the specifications outlined herein, after fabrication.

3. The end rails shall be fabricated of 1-7/8" O.D. x .095" (13 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing and 3/16" formed hot rolled steel mounting tabs. The end rails shall be an all welded assembly and shall be coated with a custom formula of TGIC polyester powder coating in conformance with the specifications outlined herein, after fabrication.

C. INTERACTIVE PANELS

1. The cap and game pieces shall be constructed from color impregnated rotationally molded linear low density polyethylene with the appropriate graphics rotationally molded into the material.

2. The nine game pieces shall include molded-in graphics on both sides. The rungs shall be fabricated of 1-1/16" O.D. x .075" (15 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing.

3. All rotationally molded polyethylene products shall conform to the rotationally molded specifications outlined herein. Enclosure frame shall be fabricated from 1-5/16" O.D. x .083"(14 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing and 3/16" formed hot rolled steel tabs. Enclosure frame shall be an all welded assembly and shall be coated with a custom formula of TGIC polyester powder coating in conformance with the specifications outlined herein, after fabrication.

D. ZIP SLIDES (SINGLE & DOUBLE BEDWAY, AND RUMBLE & ROLL)

1. Zip Slides and hoods shall be color impregnated linear low-density polyethylene and shall conform to the rotationally molded specifications outlined herein with double wall construction molded to a minimum .25" wall thickness.


SECTION 11 68 13



2. Single bedway Zip Slides shall have a minimum inside bed width of 17.5" while double bedway Zip Slides shall have a minimum inside bed width of 16.5" on each bedway.

3. Outside rails are at least 7" high when measured from the centerline of the bedway surface. The angle of descent shall be no greater than 50°. Each Zip Slide works in conjunction with a rotationally molded hood that has an integrated cross bar which force users to a seated position.

4. The exit section of the bedway shall have a minimum 40" radius for a smooth transition from the slide chute to the run-out area. The run-out shall be angled at a maximum of 4° with an integrated drain at 5° to reduce pooling of water. Zip Slides bolt directly to the deck and to the slide hood.

E. Equipment Color Selections:

1. Tan Post – Blue Deck – Green Plastic – DISD Color Scheme A.

2.6 MATERIALS/METHODS –BORDER TIMBERS AND WOOD FIBER PLAYGROUND SURFACING

A. Plastic Playground Border Timbers and Ramp

1. Dimensions: 53” L x 12” H x 4” W, 30” Galvanized Spike with rounded head, Color – Black, Weight – 11 Lbs. w/ stake.

2. Made with high density polyethylene hexane copolymer materials and is produced using an extrusion / blow molding process. Ledges are smooth and rounded.

3. The material contains UV stabilized additives and is suitable for out-door application.

4. Easily adjustable in the field and the material has excellent stiffness and stress cracking resistance.

5. Materials meet or exceed the following requirements:

a) ASTM D4976-PE235

b) ASTM D1238 – 0.35 g/10 min Melt Index

c) ASTM D838 – 3,900 psi Tensile Strength, FDA Regulation 177.1520 Suitable for Food Packaging Warranty – 10 Years

B. Engineered Wood Fiber Playground Surfacing

1. Minimum 12” depth after compaction

2. Must meet the following ASTM Standards, F1292, F1951, F2075 and F2223-04

3. Warranty – 15 Years from Date of Sale.

4. Products to be installed according to manufacturer’s installation specifications and applicable government regulations and guidelines.


SECTION 11 68 13



a) Damage to the product caused by improper installation, accident misuse (whether performed by a contractor, service company, or others) or abuse would not be covered by this warranty.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Explicit Installation instructions shall be provided, which will include a detailed top view and footing drawings plus written instructions to assure proper installation of the equipment.

1. Maintenance guidelines and inspection checklists shall also be provided. The provided installation instructions and maintenance instructions shall be “project specific containing component information that is part of the playground design.

2. Equipment and surfacing must be installed by manufacturer certified installation contractor.

B. Installer must have a NPSI certified crew leader or other staff.

C. Installation Company must provide all appropriate insurance certificates naming contractor as additional insured.

D. Verification of State of Texas workers compensation insurance specifically for playground equipment installation is required.

E. Installer must provide post installation letter of verification that equipment was installed to meet manufacturer’s specifications.

3.2 INSTALLATION – FALL ZONE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fall Zone Definition – A fall zone is the area around and under the equipment, climbing, sliding, hanging, or swinging equipment where the protective surfacing is required to prevent injury from falls.

1. The fall zone should be cleared of items that children may fall or run into.

2. Resilient/Protective Material (Engineered Wood Fiber Playground Surfacing) should extend a minimum of 6 feet beyond the stationary equipment as shown in the plans.

a) Surfacing in front of slide should extend 4’ plus the height of the slide. This distance should always be a minimum of 6’ and does not need to be larger than 14’.

b) Surfacing at swings and tot swings shall extend 2 times the length of the pivot point to the surface below, both in front of and behind (rear) of the swing. This distance should always be a minimum of 6’.

c) If Applicable: Tire Swings shall have resilient surfacing that extends a distance of 6 feet plus the measurement from the pivot point to the swing sear and 6 feet to the side of the support structure.

B. Fall Zone requirements should be verified in the field upon completion of the installation of the structure. Field Verify with Guidelines above and correct if necessary.


SECTION 11 68 13



END OF SECTION



SECTION 11 68 13.13


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 11 68 13.13 Page - 1 Playground Equipment (5-12) Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. 3 1/2" O.D. uprights with a positive bolt-through fastening system utilizing stainless steel tabs.

1. The uprights shall be factory drilled to ensure accurate placement of components and ease of installation.

2. Field drilling and measuring are not required.

3. System must be a direct bolt system NOT a clamp system.

4. All uprights shall receive factory installed aluminum post caps and shall be shipped with a factory applied label indicating proper surfacing level.

5. All decks and components shall connect to support posts by means of a through-bolt connection for strong, durable connections.

a) Deck/Collar attachments shall not be acceptable.

6. All climbing attachments shall include a 15"" wide deck entry archway to control deck access to one child at a time and help prevent inadvertent falls.

1.2 References

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

A. B 241 Hardness H (ASTM D-3363)

B. Impact (ASTM D-2794- 69)

C. Wedge Bend (ASTM D-522-68)

D. Adhesion (Cross Hatch ASTM D-3359 & Knife Scratch ASTM D-2197)

E. Environmental (Stain Resistance ASTM D-1308, Humidity ASTM D-2247 - 87, Salt Spray ASTM B-117)

F. ASTM D4976-PE235

G. ASTM D1238 – 0.35 g/10 min Melt Index

H. ASTM D838 – 3,900 psi Tensile Strength, FDA Regulation 177.1520 Suitable for Food Packaging Warranty – 10 Years

I. Definition – Fall Zone & Fall Zone Requirements

1.3 Warranties and Guarantees


SECTION 11 68 13.13



1. LIFETIME LIMITED WARRANTY ON SUPPORT POSTS (UPRIGHTS)

2. 15 YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY ON PUNCHED STEEL DECKS, PIPES, RAILS, LOOPS AND RUNGS

3. 15 YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY ON ROTOMOLDED POLYETHYLENE COMPONENTS

4. LIFETIME LIMITED WARRANTY ON HARDWARE

5. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001/2000 and 14001:2004 Required

6. Manufacturer shall show IPEMA certification of compliance for each component that the product conforms with the requirements of ASTM F1487-07ae1.

7. Required to be certified that product and layout meets Consumer Product Safety Commission Publ. 325, 1997 Version to meet State of Texas Law.

8. Required that Manufacturer’s Representative/Distributor – Must have a National Playground Safety Institute (NPSI) Certified Playground Safety Inspector on staff and available to assist non-certified sales consultants if required.

1.4 VENDOR SERVICE PERFORMANCE STANDARDS

A. Authorized Vendor / Manufacturer Representative Must:

1. Provide local services for warranty and non-warranty part replacement. A dedicated warranty parts replacement staff contact is preferred in addition to local sales rep.

2. Local office must be within 60 miles of Dallas ISD Grounds. DISD Maint. Dept. 3701 South Lamar St., Dallas, TX 75215

3. Minimum 5-7 years of product and service experience with Dallas ISD.

4. Provide maintenance and playground supervisor training upon request at site determined by District.

5. Provide to the maintenance Service Center (not manufacturer standard maintenance kit) to include an assortment of manufacturer recommended hardware, tools, and equipment documents. Service center to be located at District Grounds Maintenance office 3701 S. Lamar St., Dallas, TX 75215

6. MUST inspect (not third party audit) equipment and verify in writing that it meets manufacturer’s specifications as installed.

7. MUST be available upon request to check in and verify shipments are correct upon delivery. A delivery checklist must be provided by manufacturer in addition to bill of lading.


SECTION 11 68 13.13



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Include pole and base dimensions, materials, finishes, and accessories.


A. Wrap components in heavy materials to prevent damage during shipping and handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers


1. Gametime 2. Playworld B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.

2.2 MATERIALS/METHODS

A. ENTRY ARCHWAY

1. All entry archways shall be fabricated from 1-5/16" O.D. x .083" (14 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing with vertical members fabricated of 1-1/16" O.D. x .075" (15 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing and with 3/16" hot rolled steel formed mounting tabs.

2. The entrance archways shall be an all welded assembly and shall be coated with a custom formula of TGIC polyester powder, after fabrication in conformance with the specifications outlined herein

3. Plastics must contain a minimum of 90% total recycled content to comply with TX-CHPS Credit ME4.1 - Recycled Content

B. HARDWARE

1. All nuts, bolts, screws, inserts, and lockwashers used in the assembly of all play equipment shall be stainless steel, yellow dichromate plated steel, blue-coat plated steel, mechanically galvanized or powder coated/yellow dichromate plated steel.

2. All primary fasteners shall be 304 alloy stainless steel. Fasteners with yellow dichromate treatment have an electro-deposited, 99.9% pure zinc substrate applied from a specially formulated solution sealed with a yellow dichromate top coat designed to work in conjunction with the zinc plating. Yellow dichromate has a 320% longer life to white corrosion and 275% longer to red corrosion than does hot-dip galvanizing.


SECTION 11 68 13.13



3. All primary stainless steel fasteners shall be Button Head Socket Caps.

C. POWDER COAT FINISH

1. Shall be an electrostatically applied custom formula of TGIC polyester powder.

2. All components will be free of sharp edges and excess weld spatter and shall be cleaned in a six stage bath system with an iron phosphate wash, as a rust inhibitor, and a sealer to prevent flash rusting before coating. In addition, all welds shall be protectively coated with ZRP, a zinc rich primer that forms a rust-resistant barrier layer over each weld prior to application of the powder coating.

3. The powder coating shall have a super tough finish with maximum exterior durability and will have superior adhesion characteristics. Typical characteristics are: 3.0 - 5.0 mil thickness and oven cured between 375 to 425 degrees Fahrenheit. Pencil Hardness H (ASTM D-3363), Impact (ASTM D-2794- 69), Wedge Bend (ASTM D-522-68), Adhesion (Cross Hatch ASTM D-3359 & Knife Scratch ASTM D-2197), Environmental (Stain Resistance ASTM D-1308, Humidity ASTM D-2247 - 87, Salt Spray ASTM B-117 & Fadometer 300 hrs with no loss of gloss), Over-bake Stability 100% at 400 degrees Fahrenheit.

D. ROTATIONALLY MOLDED PRODUCTS

1. All polyethylene shall be linear low-density material with UV-stabilized color and an anti-static compound additive. All rotationally molded products shall meet or exceed the following specifications:

a) ASTM D-1248, type 2, class A and Federal specification LP-390C, type 1, class M, grade 2, category 3; Density (ASTM D- 1505); Brittleness Temperature (ASTM D-746); Tensile Values (ASTM D-638); Flexural Modulus (ASTM D-790);Heat Distortion (ASTM-648); Low Temperature Impact (ARM-STD).

E. BOLT-THROUGH CONNECTION

1. Each component is to be bolted directly into the upright post and designed to eliminate exposed hardware and protrusions.

2. Minimum tensile strength of the connection shall be 45,000 psi, minimum yield strength shall be 22,000 psi.

3. All necessary connectors shall be engineered, manufactured and factory installed as an integral part of the upright post.

4. For added protection against corrosion, cold galvanizing shall be applied to the edges of each drilled hole.

F. UPRIGHTS



SECTION 11 68 13.13




G. UPRIGHTS - ALUMINUM

1. Shall be 3.5" outside diameter tubing, 1/8" wall thickness, extruded from 6005-T5 aluminum alloy conforming to ASTM-B-221. Minimum yield strength shall be 35,000 psi and minimum tensile strength shall be 38,000 psi.

2. All upright posts shall have a finished grade line marking to indicate the correct playground safety surface level. All upright posts shall be coated with a custom formula TGIC polyester powder coating in conformance with the specifications outlined herein.

H. UPRIGHT CAPS

1. The standard upright cap shall be an aluminum cap, cast from a 383 alloy, powder coated to match the upright.

2. Every upright cap shall be anodized for maximum protection.

3. All upright caps are permanently installed at the factory using aluminum self-sealing rivets.

2.3 MATERIALS/METHODS - PUNCHED STEEL & COATED COMPONENTS:

A. PUNCHED STEEL DECKS

1. Punched steel decks shall be fabricated from 12 gauge punched steel with a protective p&o finish and other punched steel products shall be fabricated from 11 gauge punched steel with a protective p&o finish.

2. Coated products shall consist of a welded assembly with an oven cured matte finish polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coating with a minimum coating thickness of .080".

3. The PVC coating shall have a hardness of Shore A 83 +/-5 normal durometer range. This material is classed as "Self Extinguishing", meets or exceeds automotive specifications NVSS302, and contains ultraviolet inhibitors to help prolong the life of the coating.

4. The PVC coating shall contain pthalate levels in concentrations of 1/10 of 1% or lower. For ADA Ramp Accessible decks and ramps, the hole shall measure 1/4" diameter after coating.

5. For standard decks and ramps, the hole size shall measure 1-1/4" diameter after coating.

B. DECKS - RECTANGULAR


SECTION 11 68 13.13



1. Shall have a minimum surface area of 1,628 square inches, maintaining a standard 36" center to center spacing on the upright posts on two sides and 45.5" spacing on the remaining sides.

2. The deck shall be fabricated utilizing the same materials set forth in the deck specification.

3. Each rectangular deck shall be directly bolted to the upright posts with four 3/8" diameter button head cap screws in accordance with the hardware specifications herein.

C. TRANSFER PLATFORM

1. Platform and step shall be made from punched steel in conformance with the specifications outlined herein.

2. Platform and step shall each be a one-piece welded assembly. Platform frame shall be made from 1/8" x 2-1/2" hot rolled steel with intermediate supports fabricated from 1/8" x 2" hot rolled flat steel. Step shall be made from 11 gauge (.120" thick) hot rolled steel and 1/8" x 2-1/2" hot rolled flat steel.

3. Platform handhold shall be fabricated from a single piece of 1-5/16" O.D. x 14 gauge (.083" thick) galvanized steel tubing. Handrails shall be fabricated from 1-1/16" O.D. x 15 gauge (.075" thick) galvanized steel tubing, 1-5/16" O.D. x 14 gauge (.083 thick) galvanized tubing and 3/16" formed hot rolled flat steel mounting tab. Handrails shall be an all welded assembly.

4. After fabrication, handrails and handhold shall be coated with a custom formula TGIC

D. STEP PLATFORM

1. The Steps shall be made from 11 gauge punched steel with a protective P&O finish in conformance with the specifications outlined herein.

2. The Steps shall each be a one-piece welded assembly finished with the matte PVC coating per the specifications herein. Handrails and attachment rails shall be fabricated from 1-5/16" O.D. x .083" (14 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing, with supports fabricated from 1-1/16" O.D. x 15 gauge (.075" thick) galvanized steel tubing and 2" square x 3/16" wall steel tubing.

3. Handholds and attachment rails shall be all-welded assemblies and shall be coated with a custom formula of TGIC polyester powder in conformance with the specifications outlined herein, after fabrication.

2.4 MATERIALS/METHODS – BRIDGES & CLIMBERS:

A. FUNNEL BRIDGE

1. The bridge sections shall be fabricated from punched steel in conformance with the specifications outlined herein.


SECTION 11 68 13.13



2. Each bridge section shall be a one-piece welded assembly finished with the matte PVC coating per the specifications herein.

3. The bridge frame shall be fabricated from 3/16" x 2-1/2" hot rolled steel with the intermediate supports fabricated from 1/8" x 1" hot rolled steel. The funnel bridge protective barrier or guardrail shall be an all welded assembly of a formed 1-5/8" O.D. x 14 gauge (.083" thick) galvanized steel tubing and 1-1/16" O.D. x 15 gauge (.075" thick) galvanized steel tubing vertical rungs.

4. After fabrication, the protective barrier or guardrail assembly shall be coated with a custom formula of TGIC polyester powder coating in conformance with the specifications outlined herein.

B. DNA CLIMBER

1. The DNA climber shall be fabricated from 1-5/8" O.D. x .083" (14 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing with horizontal rails fabricated from 1-1/16" O.D. x .075" (15 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing.

2. The DNA climber assembly shall be an all welded assembly and shall be coated with a custom formula of TGIC polyester powder coating in conformance with the specifications outlined herein, after fabrication.

B. LOOP LADDER

1. The loop ladder side rails shall be fabricated from 1-5/16" O.D. x .083" (14 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing.

2. The loops shall be fabricated from 1-1/16" O.D. x .072" (15 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing. Handholds shall be fabricated from 1-1/16" x .072" (15 gauge) wall galvanized tubing with 3/16" formed hot rolled steel mounting tabs.

3. The ladder assembly shall be an all welded construction and shall be coated with a custom formula of TGIC polyester powder coating in conformance with the specifications outlined herein.

C. TWISTER CLIMBER

1. The twister climber inner and outer rails shall be fabricated from 1 5/8" O.D. x .083" (14 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing.

2. The rungs shall be fabricated from 1-1/16" O.D. x .075" (15 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing. The twister climber assembly shall be an all welded assembly and shall be coated with a custom formula of TGIC polyester powder coating in conformance with the specifications outlined herein, after fabrication.

3. Primetime twister climber shall include an entry archway in accordance with the specifications herein.


SECTION 11 68 13.13



D. INCLINE COSMIX

1. This one-piece climber shall be color impregnated linear low density polyethylene and shall conform to the rotationally molded specifications outlined herein.

2. The climber utilizes thru holes to allow the user to ascend and descend at their level of ability.

3. The enclosure shall be fabricated from 1-5/16" O.D. x .083" (14 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing with vertical members fabricated of 1-1/16" O.D. x .075" (15 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing.

4. The enclosure shall be coated with a custom formula of TGIC polyester powder, after fabrication in conformance with the specifications outlined herein.

E. GIANT WAVE CLIMBER

1. This patent pending one-piece climber shall be color impregnated linear low density polyethylene and shall conform to the rotationally molded specifications outlined herein.

2. The climber utilizes "waves" and "bumps" to allow the user to ascend and descend at their level of ability.

3. The mounting bracket shall be fabricated of 3/16" x 2" hot rolled steel. The mounting bracket, enclosure, and foot buck assemblies shall be coated with a custom formula of TGIC polyester powder, after fabrication in conformance with the specifications outlined herein

2.5 MATERIALS/METHODS –BODY DEVELOPMENT COMPONENTS:

A CRUNCH BAR

1. Shall be fabricated from 1-1/16" O.D. x .075"(15 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing and shall be coated with a custom formula of TGIC polyester powder coating in conformance with the specifications outlined herein, after fabrication.

B. OVERHEAD TREE CLIMBER

1. The overhead tree climber assembly shall be fabricated from 1-7/8" O.D. x .095" (13 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing top rail with rung loops fabricated from 1-5/16" O.D. x .083" (14 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing.

2. The end rails are fabricated from 2-3/8" O.D. x .095" (13 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing and 3/16" formed hot rolled steel mounting tabs.

3. The climber assembly shall be an all welded construction which bolts directly into the uprights and shall be coated with a custom formula of TGIC polyester powder coating in conformance with the specifications outlined herein, after fabrication.


SECTION 11 68 13.13



C. INTERACTIVE PANELS

1. The cap and game pieces shall be constructed from color impregnated rotationally molded linear low density polyethylene with the appropriate graphics rotationally molded into the material.

2. The nine game pieces shall include molded-in graphics on both sides. The rungs shall be fabricated of 1-1/16" O.D. x .075" (15 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing.

3. All rotationally molded polyethylene products shall conform to the rotationally molded specifications outlined herein. Enclosure frame shall be fabricated from 1-5/16" O.D. x .083"(14 gauge) wall galvanized steel tubing and 3/16" formed hot rolled steel tabs. Enclosure frame shall be an all welded assembly and shall be coated with a custom formula of TGIC polyester powder coating in conformance with the specifications outlined herein, after fabrication.

D. TRAIN WISTLE

1. The train whistle housing shall be an all welded assembly fabricated from aluminum 3 1/2" O.D. x 1/8" thick wall tubing, 1.315 O.D. aluminum pipe, and two 3/16" x 1 13/16" x 3 5/8" formed aluminum tabs.

2. The train whistle handle shall be fabricated from 1 5/16" O.D. x 14 gauge (.083" thick) galvanized steel tubing with two crimped-in threaded inserts.

3. The internal train whistle components consist of four 3/4" thick (solid) high density, UV-stabilized and color impregnated polyethylene and an injection molded purchased three tone train whistle.

4. An aluminum upright cap is permanently installed using aluminum self-sealing rivets. The train whistle housing, handle, and upright cap shall be coated after fabrication with a custom formula of TGIC polyester powder coating in conformance with the specifications outlined herein.

2.6 MATERIALS/METHODS –SLIDES

A. WILDSLIDE

1. This multi-sectional rotationally molded open-bedway slide shall be manufactured from color impregnated linear low density polyethylene and shall conform to the rotationally molded product specifications outlined herein. Entry to the slide incorporates a tunnel access.

2. The slide bedway shall have a 20" inside diameter on a 40° maximum slope so that each section will decrease in height by 12". The Double Entrance includes a triangular shaped platform filler that shall be fabricated from 11 gauge punched steel with a protective p&o finish in conformance with the specifications outlined herein.


SECTION 11 68 13.13



3. The platform filler shall be a one-piece assembly finished with the matte PVC coating per the specifications herein. The slides will be offered on 4', 5', 6', 7', and 8' deck heights.

4. Entrance, Double Entrance, 1'Exit, 2' Exit, Straight, Spiral, Left, and Right sections shall be molded so that they overlap externally at each junction and all hardware connections are located on the outside of the sections.

5. All sections shall be of double wall construction with a nominal wall thickness of 1/4". The exit sections features a molded-in pedestal. Slides of 5',6', 7', and 8' deck heights will use 3' or 4' slide supports.

2.7 Equipment Color Selections:

1. Tan Post – Blue Deck – Green Plastic – DISD Color Scheme A.

2.8 MATERIALS/METHODS –BORDER TIMBERS AND WOOD FIBER PLAYGROUND SURFACING

A. Plastic Playground Border Timbers and Ramp

1. Dimensions: 53” L x 12” H x 4” W, 30” Galvanized Spike with rounded head, Color – Black, Weight – 11 Lbs. w/ stake.

2. Made with high density polyethylene hexane copolymer materials and is produced using an extrusion / blow molding process. Ledges are smooth and rounded.

3. The material contains UV stabilized additives and is suitable for out-door application.

4. Easily adjustable in the field and the material has excellent stiffness and stress cracking resistance.

5. Materials meet or exceed the following requirements:

a) ASTM D4976-PE235

b) ASTM D1238 – 0.35 g/10 min Melt Index

c) ASTM D838 – 3,900 psi Tensile Strength, FDA Regulation 177.1520 Suitable for Food Packaging Warranty – 10 Years

B. Engineered Wood Fiber Playground Surfacing

1. Minimum 12” depth after compaction

2. Must meet the following ASTM Standards, F1292, F1951, F2075 and F2223-04

3. Warranty – 15 Years from Date of Sale.

4. Products to be installed according to manufacturer’s installation specifications and applicable government regulations and guidelines.


SECTION 11 68 13.13



a) Damage to the product caused by improper installation, accident misuse (whether performed by a contractor, service company, or others) or abuse would not be covered by this warranty.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Explicit Installation instructions shall be provided, which will include a detailed top view and footing drawings plus written instructions to assure proper installation of the equipment.

1. Maintenance guidelines and inspection checklists shall also be provided. The provided installation instructions and maintenance instructions shall be “project specific containing component information that is part of the playground design.

2. Equipment and surfacing must be installed by manufacturer certified installation contractor.

B. Installer must have a NPSI certified crew leader or other staff.

C. Installation Company must provide all appropriate insurance certificates naming contractor as additional insured.

D. Verification of State of Texas workers compensation insurance specifically for playground equipment installation is required.

E. Installer must provide post installation letter of verification that equipment was installed to meet manufacturer’s specifications.

3.2 INSTALLATION – FALL ZONE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fall Zone Definition – A fall zone is the area around and under the equipment, climbing, sliding, hanging, or swinging equipment where the protective surfacing is required to prevent injury from falls.

1. The fall zone should be cleared of items that children may fall or run into.

2. Resilient/Protective Material (Engineered Wood Fiber Playground Surfacing) should extend a minimum of 6 feet beyond the stationary equipment as shown in the plans.

a) Surfacing in front of slide should extend 4’ plus the height of the slide. This distance should always be a minimum of 6’ and does not need to be larger than 14’.

b) Surfacing at swings and tot swings shall extend 2 times the length of the pivot point to the surface below, both in front of and behind (rear) of the swing. This distance should always be a minimum of 6’.


SECTION 11 68 13.13



c) If Applicable: Tire Swings shall have resilient surfacing that extends a distance of 6 feet plus the measurement from the pivot point to the swing sear and 6 feet to the side of the support structure.

B. Fall Zone requirements should be verified in the field upon completion of the installation of the structure. Field Verify with Guidelines above and correct if necessary.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 11 95 05

KILN

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 11 95 05 Page - 1 Kiln Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to work in this section.


A. Use experienced skilled personnel thoroughly trained in Kiln installation and familiar with the requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work this section.

B. Conform to NEC and NFPA requirements for Electric and Gas Kiln Units. C. Provide Electric Kiln Units and Accessories by single manufacturer.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's brochure, specifications, and other data needed to prove compliance with the

specified requirements. 2. Dimensioned drawings as needed to depict the space required for these items, and their interface

with the work of other trades. 3. Manufacturer recommended installation procedures which will become the basis for accepting or

rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRIC KILN

A. Provide an automatic, top loading electric kiln as manufactured by: 1. Paragon Industries, SnF-24-3

B. Substitutions: Per Division1. 2.2 ELECTRIC KILN ACCESSORIES

A. Supply the Kiln furniture by the same manufacturer as the kiln unit and include. a. 8 – half shelves b. 1-1/2" Wide Square Posts, Of each of the following lengths:

8 – 1" square post 8 – 2" square post 8 – 3" square post 8 – 4" square post 8 – 5" square post 8 – 6" square post

c. 1 lb kiln wash PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Thoroughly examine the installation site for unsatisfactory conditions that may inhibit the installation of the kiln.

B. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are correct.


SECTION 11 95 05

KILN

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 11 95 05 Page - 2 Kiln Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.

B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop Drawings and the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures as approved by the Architect and authorizing agencies.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 12 21 13 Page - 1 Louver Blinds Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 12 21 13

HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Horizontal slat louver blinds. 2. Operating hardware.


1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's descriptive literature indicating materials, finishes, construction and installation instructions.

B. Manufacturer's certification that product meets requirements specified.

C. Manufacturer's recommendation for the maintenance and cleaning.

D. Sample: One full size unit of each type specified furnished complete with required components, mounting and associated hardware, instructions, and warranty.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 701-99: Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films

B. CPSC - U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission

C. WCSC – Window Covering Safety Council


A. Verify actual dimensions at site prior to fabrication of blinds.

B. Include for all glazed openings in exterior walls.

C. Do not install blinds until painting and finishing work is complete.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Blind units shall include a lifetime warranty.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS



2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hunter Douglas. 2. Graber Window Treatments. 3. Levolor Corp. 4. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc. 5. Bali Window Treatments.


2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Louver Slats: 1 inch wide, prefinished spring tempered aluminum horizontal slats with radiused or eased corners and manufacturers burrs removed

B. Slat Support: Braided ladders of 100% polyester yarn color compatible with slats and spacing of ladder no more than 22 mm.

C. Head Rail: U-shaped profile with rolled edges, measuring 1” x 1-1/2” x .024” constructed of corrosion steel internally fit with components required for specified performance and designed for smooth, quiet, trouble free operation.

D. Cord: Braided nylon or polypropylene, continuous loop.

E. Control Wand: Clear, hollow extruded plastic, non-removable, height of window opening less 12 inches.

F. Support Brackets: Suitable for wall or soffit mounting, formed metal to match head rail, allowing removal of head rail for maintenance without removing bracket.

G. Operation: Provide full range lift locking.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate blinds to fit openings with uniform edge clearance of ½ inch.

B. At openings requiring multiple blind units, provide separate blind assemblies with space of ¼ inch between assemblies, occurring at window mullion centers.

C. Finishes: 1. Slats, and head rails, and brackets: Baked enamel, color to be selected from

manufacturer’s standards. 2. Ladders and cords: Dyed to closely match slats.


3.1 WINDOWS TO RECEIVE HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS

A. At all exterior windows excluding stairwells, gymnasiums, and auditorium unless otherwise noted. 1. Installation Location Schedule must be provided with Shop Drawings Submittal



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install on in completely enclosed and dry building.

B. Install only when interior temperature is between 60° - 90°F, and maintained at that temperature.

C. Wet work shall be complete and dry.

D. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, specifications, standards and procedures.

E. Secure in place with concealed fasteners.

F. Place intermediate head support at 48 inches on center.

G. Installation Tolerances: 1. Maximum gap at window opening perimeter: ¼ inch. 2. Maximum offset from level: 1/8 inch.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Test and adjust blinds for proper operation.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 12 24 00

MOTORIZED SHADES

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 12 24 00 Page - 1 Motorized Shades Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Electrically operated room-darkening shades.

B. Local group and master control system for shade operation.


A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories.

B. Section 09 26 00 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Coordination with gypsum board assemblies for installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories.

C. Section 09 51 00 - Acoustical Ceilings: Coordination with acoustical ceiling systems for installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories.

D. Division 26 - Electrical: Electric service for motor controls.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

B. NFPA 701-99 - Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 25 00 - Submittal Procedures

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Styles, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles,

features, finishes and operating instructions. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Mounting details and installation methods. 5. Typical wiring diagrams including integration of motor controllers with building

management system, audiovisual and lighting control systems as applicable.

C. Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, product details, installation details, operational clearances, wiring diagrams and relationship to adjacent work. 1. Prepare shop drawings on Autocad format using base sheets provided

electronically by the Architect.

D. Window Treatment Schedule: For all roller shades. Use same room designations as indicated on the Drawings and include opening sizes and key to typical mounting details.


SECTION 12 24 00

MOTORIZED SHADES


E. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, one set of shade cloth options and aluminum finish color samples representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

F. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, one complete set of shade

components, unassembled, demonstrating compliance with specified requirements. Shadecloth sample and aluminum finish sample as selected. Mark face of material to indicate interior faces.

G. Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining roller shades, precautions regarding cleaning materials and methods, instructions for operating hardware and controls.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty years experience in manufacturing products comparable to those specified in this section.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a

minimum of ten years experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701-99 small and large-scale vertical burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use.

D. Electrical Components: NFPA Article 100 listed and labeled by either UL or ETL or other testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, marked for intended use, and tested as a system. Individual testing of components will not be acceptable in lieu of system testing.

E. Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642, ATCC 9644, ATCC9645.


A. Deliver shades in factory-labeled packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings and in the Window Treatment Schedule.


A. Environmental Limitations: Install roller shades after finish work including painting is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Roller Shade Motors and Motor Control Systems: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating five-year warranty.

B. Roller Shade Installation: One year from date of Substantial Completion, not including scaffolding, lifts or other means to reach inaccessible areas.


SECTION 12 24 00

MOTORIZED SHADES



A. Acceptable Manufacturer: MechoShade Systems, Inc.; 42-03 35th Street, Long Island City, NY 11101. ASD. Tel: (718) 729-2020. Fax: (718) 729-2941. Email: [email protected], www.mechoshade.com.

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of

Section 01 25 00

C. Alternates: The following products and manufacturers may be bid as an alternate product in accordance with Section 01030. Any pricing for alternate products shall be listed separately from the base bid specified product. Any alternate pricing must include line-by-line compliance or non-compliance with the specifications. If the alternate product is acceptable to the Architect, the specified manufacturer will be given the opportunity to provide an equivalent proposal. 1. Suburban/2 Shade System by MechoShade Systems, Inc.

2.2 APPLICATIONS/SCOPE

A. Roller Shade Schedule: 1. Shade Type 1 & 2 : Motorized interior room darkening roller shades with

blackout fabric in all exterior windows of rooms and spaces shown on Drawings, and related motor control systems.

2.3 SHADE CLOTH

A. Visually Transparent Single-Fabric Shadecloth: MechoShade Systems, Inc., EcoVeil 1% Open group. 100% Thermoplastic Olefin (TPO) 1. Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

2.4 SHADE BAND A. Shade Bands: Construction of shade band includes the fabric, the hem weight,

hem-pocket, shade roller tube, and the attachment of the shade band to the roller tube. Sewn hems and open hem pockets are not acceptable. 1. Hem Pockets and Hem Weights: Fabric hem pocket with RF-welded seams

(including welded ends) and concealed hem weights. Hem weights shall be of appropriate size and weight for shade band. Hem weight shall be continuous inside a sealed hem pocket. Hem pocket construction and hem weights shall be similar, for all shades within one room.

2. Shade band and Shade Roller Attachment: a. Use extruded aluminum shade roller tube of a diameter and wall

thickness required to support shade fabric without excessive deflection. Roller tubes less than 1.55 inch (39.37 mm) in diameter for manual shades, and less than 2.55 inches (64.77 mm) for motorize shades are not acceptable.

b. Provide for positive mechanical engagement with drive / brake mechanism.

c. Provide for positive mechanical attachment of shade band to roller tube; shade band shall be made removable / replaceable with a "snap-


SECTION 12 24 00

MOTORIZED SHADES


on" snap-off" spline mounting, without having to remove shade roller from shade brackets.

d. Mounting spline shall not require use of adhesives, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets.

e. Any method of attaching shade band to roller tube that requires the use of: adhesive, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets are not acceptable.

2.5 SHADE FABRICATION A. Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb-to-

jamb, unless specifically indicated otherwise.

B. Fabricate shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate with heat-sealed trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. Fabricate unguided shadecloth to roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) in either direction per 8 feet (2438 mm) of shade height due to warp distortion or weave design. Fabricate hem as follows: 1. Exposed blackout hembar with light seal.

C. Provide battens in standard shades as required to assure proper tracking and uniform rolling of the shadebands. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring the width-to-height (W:H) ratios shall not exceed manufacturer's standards or, in absence of such standards, shall be responsible for establishing appropriate standards to assure proper tracking and rolling of the shadecloth within specified standards. Battens shall be roll-formed stainless steel or tempered steel, as required.

2.6 COMPONENTS A. Access and Material Requirements:

1. Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from brackets without removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center supports to be removed.

2. Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade bands without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets.

3. Use only Delrin engineered plastics by DuPont for all plastic components of shade hardware. Styrene based plastics, and /or polyester, or reinforced polyester will not be acceptable.

B. Motorized Shade Hardware and Shade Brackets:

1. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) thick plated steel, or heavier, thicker, as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade.

2. Provide shade hardware system that allows for field adjustment of motor or replacement of any operable hardware component without requiring removal of brackets, regardless of mounting position (inside, or outside mount).

3. Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands offset by a maximum of 8-45 degrees from the motor axis between shade bands (4-22.5 degrees) on each side of the radial line, by a single shade motor (multi-banded shade, subject to manufacturer’s design criteria).

2.7 SHADE MOTOR DRIVE SYSTEM


SECTION 12 24 00

MOTORIZED SHADES


A. Shade Motors:

1. Tubular, asynchronous (non-synchronous) motors, with built-in reversible capacitor operating at 110v AC (60hz), single phase, temperature Class A, thermally protected, totally enclosed, maintenance free with line voltage power supply equipped with locking disconnect plug assembly furnished with each motor.

2. Conceal motors inside shade roller tube. 3. Maximum current draw for each shade motor of 2.3 amps. 4. Use motors rated at the same nominal speed for all shades in the same room.

B. Total hanging weight of shade band shall not exceed 80 percent of the rated lifting

capacity of the shade motor and tube assembly.

2.8 MOTOR CONTROL SYSTEMS

1. Wall Switches: a. Three-button architectural flush mounted switches with metal cover

plate and no exposed fasteners. b. Connect local wall switches to control system components via low

voltage (12V DC) 4-conductor modular cable equipped with RJ-11 type connectors supplied, installed and certified under Division 26 - Electrical.

c. Connect master wall switches to control system components via low voltage (12V DC) 6-conductor modular cable equipped with RJ-12 type connectors supplied, installed and certified under Division 26 - Electrical.

2.9 ACCESSORIES A. Roller Shade Pocket for recessed mounting in acoustical tile, or drywall ceilings as

indicated on the Drawings (for Shade Type 1). 1. Provide extruded aluminum shade pocket, sized to accommodate roller

shades, with exposed extruded aluminum closure mount, tile support and removable closure panel to provide access to shades.

B. Fascia (for Shade Type 2): 1. Continuous removable extruded aluminum fascia that attaches to shade

mounting brackets without the use of adhesives, magnetic strips, or exposed fasteners.

2. Fascia shall be able to be installed across two or more shade bands in one piece.

3. Fascia shall fully conceal brackets, shade roller and fabric on the tube. 4. Provide bracket / fascia end caps where mounting conditions expose outside

of roller shade brackets. a. Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION


SECTION 12 24 00

MOTORIZED SHADES


A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches (50 mm) to interior face of glass. Allow proper clearances for window operation hardware.

B. Turn-Key Single-Source Responsibility for Motorized Interior Roller Shades: To control the

responsibility for performance of motorized roller shade systems, assign the design, engineering, and installation of motorized roller shade systems, motors, controls, and low voltage electrical control wiring specified in this Section to a single manufacturer and their authorized installer/dealer. The Architect will not produce a set of electrical drawings for the installation of control wiring for the motors, or motor controllers of the motorized roller shades. Power wiring (line voltage), shall be provided by the roller shade installer/dealer, in accordance with the requirements provided by the manufacturer. Coordinate the following with the roller shade installer/dealer: 1. Main Contractor shall provide power panels and circuits of sufficient size to

accommodate roller shade manufacturer’s requirements, as indicated on the mechanical and electrical drawings.

2. Main Contractor shall coordinate with requirements of roller shade installer/dealer, before inaccessible areas are constructed.

3. Roller shade installer/dealer shall run line voltage as dedicated home runs (of sufficient quantity, in sufficient capacity as required) terminating in junction boxes in locations designated by roller shade dealer.

4. Roller shade installer/dealer shall provide and run all line voltage (from the terminating points) to the motor controllers, wire all roller shade motors to the motor controllers, and provide and run low voltage control wiring from motor controllers to switch/ control locations designated by the Architect. All above-ceiling and concealed wiring shall be plenum-rated, or installed in conduit, as required by the electrical code having jurisdiction.

5. Main Contractor shall provide conduit with pull wire in all areas, which might not be accessible to roller shade contractor due to building design, equipment location or schedule.

C. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or

malfunction throughout entire operational range.

D. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Engage Installer to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain roller shade systems.


SECTION 12 24 00

MOTORIZED SHADES


3.4 PROTECTION


B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION



Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 12 56 51 Page - 1 Library Furniture Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 12 56 51

LIBRARY FURNITURE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 GENERAL

A. It is the intent of these specifications to establish a minimum standard for materials, construction, workmanship and finished product for the work to be performed under this section. Substitutions must be accompanied by a detailed submittal outlining all deviations from specifications in order for a proposal to be considered. Guideline specifications are based on library furniture as manufactured by Tesco Products Company of Bellville, Texas. Acceptable companies shall be Tesco, Worden, Brodart or Library Bureau products modified to meet these specifications

.

1.03 WORK SPECIFIED

A. All materials, transportation, equipment and services necessary to furnish and install all library furniture and accessories as shown in the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

1.04 BIDDER QUALIFICATION INFORMATION

A. Bidder must supply the following information with their bid to be considered:

1. Detailed specifications of all items being bid if different from these specifications.

2. GreenguardR Certification 3. Specific steps, materials and procedures used in the wood finishing

process. 4. Five references with district name, project name(s), contact person(s),

address, and phone number(s) where the furniture being proposed is in use.

At least one of these references must be for a project where this furniture has been in use for over five years.

5. The following check list.

CHECK LIST for LIBRARY EQUIPMENT

Is all exposed wood solid Northern Grown Red Oak? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain



Are all veneers of sliced Northern Grown Red Oak of no less than 1/28" thick after

sanding?

Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Are all oak veneers applied to oak plywood? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Are all materials used in unexposed structural parts of solid oak? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Are all wood parts dipped in Nelsonite 15B02 wood stabilizer? Yes No____ If not, explain ___________________________________________________________ Are all wood parts roll coated with U.V. stain and then oven cured? Yes No____ If not, explain ____________________________________________________________ Are all wood parts roll coated with U.V. sealer and then oven cured? Yes No____ If not, explain __________________________________________________________ Are all wood parts roll coated with U.V. clear top coat and then oven cured? Yes No____ If not, explain ____________________________________________________________ Does the finish used pass the NKCA tests required? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Is the wood finish GreenguardR certified to meet CHPS and/or LEEDS requirements for credit? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Is a complete detail of your wood finishing process included? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Are wood stain and plastic laminate patterns as specified? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Are all exposed edges finished with a 1-1/4" solid oak external bullnose edge band? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain



Is all lumber core material of hardwood with a Modulus of Rupture of 8600 lb./p.s.i. or more? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Do all plastic laminated surfaces have a .050 HPL top with a .030 Phenolic backing sheet? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Are all shelving uprights, end and middle, a minimum of 1" thick solid Northern Grown Red Oak? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Are all shelves a minimum of 3/4" thick solid Northern Grown Red Oak? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Do all sizes of shelving units have the quantity of fixed and adjustable shelves shown in the specifications? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Are shelves of the “picture book” type provided with six slots and four solid oak divider uprights? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Are shelves finished on front and back so they can be reversed? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Do all shelving units 60" high and under have continuous top with external oak bullnose edging? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Are adjustable shelves of the pin hole type? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Are shelves routed underneath to receive support pins? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain



Are all shelving backs of 1/4" thick oak plywood? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Are backs inserted into grooves on all sides including the bottom? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Do circulation desk and computer station tops have a hardwood lumber core with external 1-1/4" oak bullnose edging? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Are computer stations of full frame panel construction? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Do computer station side panels slope from 36” at the back to 32” at the front where specified? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Are all computer station panels of 1” thick 7 ply oak plywood with solid oak edge band? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Do computer stations have a 6” deep center wire chase where specified? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Do computer stations have 18” x 18” lockable access doors? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Do computer stations have adjustable work surfaces where specified? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Do computer station work surfaces tops have a hardwood lumber core? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Are computer station work surfaces finished with a 1-1/4" solid oak external bullnose edge band? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain



Is all exterior material in circulation units of 3/4" five ply oak core with solid oak edging? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Are circulation desk units of "full frame" solid oak construction? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Are circulation desk units 30" deep overall? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Is the circulation desk top continuous with an oak bullnose edging? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Is the front exterior design of the circulation desk as shown in Illustration CS-3 of the Construction Specifications? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain and include diagram of your front exterior design Has the Qualification Information required been submitted? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Are the references given using the same furniture that you proposed? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Is one of the references included for an installation at least five years old? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain Does furniture proposed have a written twenty (20) year manufacturer's warranty? Yes ____ No ____ If not, explain On a separate page, list in detail any deviations from specifications not already covered by the check list. If no deviations are listed, the owner will assume and will require that the bidder supply the furniture and accessories exactly as specified. 1.05 SAMPLES

A. If bidder does not have existing library furniture of the exact type specified already in the school district, bidder may be required to submit a sample section of shelving showing the construction of the furniture exactly as it will be furnished. Failure to submit such samples if requested shall be grounds for rejection of proposal.



1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall be required to submit shop drawings for all work under this section. These drawings shall show size, arrangement and type of materials, and connections and relationships to adjacent work. The contractor is responsible for verifying all dimensions prior to fabrication.

B. LEED and/or CHPS credit responses. Submit manufacture’s verification of compliance to LEED and/or CHPS program credits. Required responses must include: 1. EQ 4.1 Manufacturers must provide documentation that gives evidence that

adhesives or sealants will not be used at the building site. 2. EQ 4.2 Manufacturers must provide evidence the coatings used on their

products supplied meets the standards of the GREENGUARD for Children and Schools program.

3. EQ 4.3 Provide evidence that the composite woods contain no added urea

formaldehyde resins and that laminating adhesives shall also contain no added urea formaldehyde resins or provide evidence of GREENGUARD for Children and Schools certification.

4. EQ 4.4 Provide evidence that the furniture provided meets the standards

required to earn this credit by furnishing the GREENGUARDR for Children and Schools certification or the alternative programs as described in this section of LEED.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Library Furniture shall be warranted by the manufacturer for twenty (20) years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION

A. All wood used in the construction of furniture and cabinets shall be of Northern Grown Red Oak and shall be selected from seasoned, kiln-dried materials free from structural imperfections. The moisture content at time of fabrication shall range from 5% to 7%. All woods shall be selected for uniformity of grain and color. Wood used for internal parts shall be selected as structurally sound.

B. All plywood used shall be of quality as specified by the American Plywood

Association. All facing materials shall be no less than 1/28" thickness after

sanding. All core material shall be of oak plywood.

C. All table, office furniture, circulation desk, and computer station tops shall be of hardwood lumber core no less than 5/8” thick with a Modulus of Rupture of 8600 lb./psi or more.

D. All high pressure plastic laminate shall meet N.E.M.A.-LD 3-1985 specifications.

Vertical surfaces are laminated with .030" thick laminate on each side. Horizontal surfaces as unit tops are laminated with .050" thick laminate and a .030" thick Phenolic backer sheet is applied on the reverse side of all horizontal surfaces. All exposed horizontal edges shall be banded with 1-1/4" external oak bullnose edging.



CS-1 Bull Nose Edging

E. Drawer and door pulls shall be provided in satin nickel finish.

F. All joints shall be those used in standard woodworking practice including dovetail,

spline, rabbet, mortise and tenon. G. All exposed wood shall be finished as follows. After parts are dipped in

Nelsonite 15B02 wood stabilizer, they are to be passed through a five head wide belt sander which has 100, 120, 150, 180 and 220 grit sand paper. Parts shall then be inspected, filled and hand sanded as necessary until thoroughly cleaned. Then parts are to be roll coated with 100% solid U.V. (Ultra Violet) stain, wiped, and oven cured. Subsequent to curing, parts shall pass through a deburring station. Next the parts are roll coated with a 100% solid U.V. sealer, oven cured, and then passed again through a deburring station. Last, all parts are roll coated with a final 100% solid U.V. clear top coat and then oven cured. All sealers and finishes must be U.V. and applied by a roll coat system to insure a uniform and environmentally safe finish.

H. All framing shall be of kiln-dried hardwood selected for structural soundness and shall be a minimum of 3/4" thick.

I. Products will be finished in a manner that meets the minimum standards of emissions for the GREENGUARDR Children and Schools program.

2.02 FINISHES

A. Plastic laminate shall be any Wilson Art wood grain with wood finish to match. Circulation desk inserts shall be in any Wilson Art pattern.

2.03 SHELVING

A. All vertical uprights of library shelving shall be a minimum of 1" thick, kiln-dried solid oak

, glued up in strips no less than 1-1/2" and no more than 4", and free of all imperfections. Veneered plywood or particle board of any type and/or uprights of less than 1" thickness will not be acceptable.

B. Canopy cornice shall be constructed of oak plywood top with solid oak fascia strips, which are machine applied to front and back edges. Bolting cleats are attached by means of wood screws and glued construction. Continuous top shelving shall have a 2-1/4" deep dovetailed top frame provided with countersunk holes for screwing down a top made of solid core with 1-1/4" oak bullnose matching edge bands on exposed edges. Bases shall be of solid hardwood 3-1/2" in height and dovetail joints.



C. Shelving units shall be standard with back panels on single faced shelving and

divider panels on double faced units. Backs shall be 1/4" thick oak plywood and finished on one side for single faced units and both sides for double faced units. Backs shall be inserted into grooves on all sides including the bottom. End panels shall be joined to cornice and base by means of metal ferrules embedded in the end panels with 5/16" hex head bolts passing through the cleats on the cornice and the sides of the base and engaging the ferrules.

D. Shelves shall be a minimum of 3/4" thick, edge glued, solid oak

strips no less than 1-1/2" wide nor more than 4" wide. Veneered plywood or particle board of any type will not be acceptable. The underside of all shelves shall be neatly routed to receive the metal supporting pins. Adjustable shelves shall be of the pin hole type construction with adjustments of 1-1/4". Shelves shall be interchangeable to fit in any standard width shelving unit in the library and shall be finished on both the back and front edges to make them reversible. Shelves without routing for the pin supports or offset holes and/or offset routing of shelf underside will not be acceptable. Metal stripping adjustment for shelving will not be acceptable.

E. Additional shelving units shall be joined by means of 5/16" hex head bolts passing through both bases and the intermediate upright and both cleats on the cornices and the intermediate upright and then secured with washers and nuts.

F. All shelving 60" high and under will have a continuous top with high pressure

plastic laminate surface. All shelving 72" and higher will have a canopy top wood veneer to match shelving unit. All continuous tops shall have a 1-1/4" external solid oak bullnose edge.

G. All shelves shall be of the “picture book” type and shall be provided with six grooves to receive four solid oak divider uprights. Picture book dividers shall be of solid oak. Wire or sheet metal dividers will not be acceptable.

H. Standard shelf arrangements per side shall be as follows: Height Fixed Adjustable 30" - 36" 1 1 2

Total

42" 1 2 3 48" 1 2 3 60" 1 3 4 72” 1 4 5

I. Magazine shelving shall have one flat shelf beneath each sloped shelf for

storage.

2.04 COMPUTER STATIONS A. Fixed height computer stations shall be full panel with panel of 1” thick 7 ply oak plywood with 1” x 1/2” thick solid oak edge band. Side panels shall slope from 36” at the rear to 32” at the front. Work surface shall be of solid lumber core with a .050 HPL top and .030 phenolic backer and shall have a 1-1/4" solid oak bullnose edge (Illustration CS-1). Tops shall have two 3” wire grommets. Units shall be equipped with a 6” x 6” x 70” long solid oak wire chase with a 3” access grommet in each interior end panel and two 3” access grommets in the bottom of the chase. Access to the wire chase shall be by a door in the top, which opens on piano hinges. Units shall be equipped with 1- 3/4” adjustable glides.



B. Adjustable height computer stations shall be full panel with panels of 1" thick 7 ply oak veneer with 1" x 1/2" thick solid oak edge band. Side panels shall slope from 36” at the rear to 32” at the front. Work surface shall be of solid lumber core top and .030 phenolic backer and shall have a 1-1/4" solid oak external bullnose edge (IllustrationCS-1). Units must be adjustable in heights as shown in the design specifications and shall be equipped with 1- 3/4" adjustable glides. Units shall be equipped with wire managers, grommets, and access sleeves as shown in the design specifications. Units shall be equipped with 1- 3/4” adjustable glides. 2.05 CIRCULATION DESK AND COMPONENTS

A. Circulation Desks shall be designed using a modular concept with a continuous top. Modules shall be 36" high x 30” deep unless otherwise noted in Design Specifications. Sizes shall be as shown in Design Specifications.

B. Facing materials shall be 3/4" thick, five ply oak plywood with oak veneer facing

and solid oak edges. The individual modules shall be as shown in the Design Specifications. All components shall be manufactured using oak plywood with matching solid oak "full frame" construction. All framing materials shall be of kiln dried oak selected for structural soundness and shall be a minimum of 3/4" thick. All exterior materials used shall be 3/4" thick, five ply oak plywood with face veneers 1/28" thick, matched for color and grain uniformity and with a solid oak edge.

C. Tops shall be of a continuous design and be fabricated in as large of sections as

possible and shall be joined together by a draw bolt method. The top shall be 1-1/4" thick with a surface of .050" thick high pressure plastic laminate over a solid hardwood lumber core with a .030" thick balancer sheet on the underside. Tops shall have 1-1/4" external oak bullnose edging.

D. Drawer fronts shall be made of 3/4" thick northern oak lumber, edge glued

forming a continuous solid wood drawer front. Drawer sides and parts shall be 5/8" thick solid oak with dovetail joints and a 1/4" bottom recessed on all four sides. Drawers shall be equipped with side mounted full extension drawer slides. Drawer pulls shall be in satin nickel finish.

E. All doors and end panels shall be 3/4" thick five ply oak with face veneer of 1/28"

thick matched for color and grain with a solid oak edge to match. All doors shall be hung with two Blum commercial grade, concealed, self closing hinges. Units, which include shelves, shall be drilled with pinholes to provide support for the shelves. KV strips shall not be acceptable.

F. The depressible book truck shall be constructed of 3/4" thick oak plywood sides

and bottom with matching oak edge banding. The truck shall be provided with four 3" diameter casters (two swivel and two fixed). Unit shall have a floating shelf surface which shall be covered in a neutral colored high pressure plastic laminate and shall be supported by a spring action depressing mechanism that lowers with the weight of the books.


A. Library Furniture shall not be delivered until the building areas are sufficiently dry so that furniture will not be damaged by excessive changes in atmospheric



conditions. Installation shall be by the manufacturer's authorized representative and shall conform to the manufacturer's standard procedure. Installation shall include provision of connecting hardware, closure panels and trim required for complete and finished installation. Furniture shall be plumbed and securely set in place with permanent attachment where required. Installation shall include electrical hook ups. All debris resulting from installation shall be cleaned up and all furniture interiors and exteriors shall be cleaned at the completion of the installation.



PART 4 - PRODUCT DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS Item

: 1, 2, 3 & 4

Item Description

: Single Faced Picture Book Shelving

1. 36"W x 72”H x 12”D Starter 2. 36"W x 72”H x 12”D Adder 3. As required to finish run wide x 72”H x 12”D Adder 4. Corner Unit 4 solid oak dividers and six slots per shelf If bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid.




: 1PB, 2PB & 3PB

Item Description


1PB. 36"W x 72”H x 12”D Starter 2PB. 36"W x 72”H x 12”D Adder 3PB. As required to finish run wide x 72”H x 12”D Adder 4 solid oak dividers and six slots per shelf If bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid.




: 1M & 2M

Item Description

: Double Faced Magazine Shelving

1M. 36”W x 72”H x 24”D Magazine Shelving, Starter 2M. 36”W x 72”H x 24”D Magazine Shelving, Adder Flat storage shelf under each display shelf If bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid.




: 5, 6 & 6A

Item Description


5. 36"W x 12"D x 48"H Starter 6. 36"W x 12"D x 48"H Adder 6A. As required to finish run wide x 12"D x 48"H Adder Continuous top with oak bullnose edging 4 solid oak dividers and six slots per shelf If bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid.




: 7 & 8

Item Description

: Cubby Shelving

7. 12”W x 48”H x 12”D Starter 8. Continuous Curved top to cover shelving cubby units and back wall; 16” deep x approximately 14’-10” long Continuous top with oak bullnose edging

If bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid.




: 9 & 10

Item Description

: Double Faced Picture Book Shelving

9. 36"W x 48"H x 24"D Starter 10. 36"W x 48"H x 24"D Adder Continuous top with oak bullnose edging 4 solid oak dividers and six slots per shelf If Bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid.




: 9PB

Item Description


36"W x 48"H x 12"D Starter 4 solid oak dividers and six slots per shelf Continuous top with oak bullnose edging If bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid.




: 11A & 11B

Item Description

: Cubby Shelving

11A. 12"W x 72”H x 12”D Starter 11B. 12”W x 72”H x 12”D Adder Four Adjustable Shelves If bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid.




: 12

Item Description

: Single Faced Computer Station

72"W x 36"H at rear sloping to 32”H at front x 36"D overall - Starter 27” H work surface with oak bullnose edge band 6” wide x 36”H x 72”L rear wire chase Two 3" surface wire grommets in vertical rise above work surface Two 18” x 18” access doors with locks One 6 outlet power strip with surge protector mounted inside wire chaise 3” wide x 18” high access opening in interior end panels If bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid.




: 12A

Item Description

: Single Faced Computer Station

36"W x 36"H at rear sloping to 32”H at front x 36"D overall - Adder Adjustable at 27”, 29”, and 31” (one to be set at 31” high for ADA access) 6” wide x 36”H x 34”L rear wire chase 3" surface wire grommet in vertical rise above work surface 18” x 18” access doors with locks One 6 outlet power strip with surge protector mounted inside wire chaise 3” wide x 18” high access opening in interior end panels If bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid.




: 13

Item Description

: Cubby Shelving

24”W x 72”H x 12”D Starter




PART 4 - PRODUCT DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS Item:

14, 14A & 15

Item Description

: Circulation Desk Component: Computer Desk Unit

14. 30”H Finished End Panel 14A. 36”H Finished End Panel 15. 36" W x 30" D x 30" High One 6 outlet power strip with surge protector mounted underneath counter top Two 3" wire grommets Under counter wire manager Oak bullnose edging If bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid.




16

Item Description

: Circulation Desk Component: Charge Unit

36" Wide x 30" Deep x 30" High Two drawers, one with lock; locking drawer to be fitted with money holder insert Pull-out center shelf on rollers; to be set at 18” clear from drawer bottoms Base shelf to be removable and have two 3” access grommets at rear Oak bullnose edging 3-1/2" Access sleeve in interior side panels If bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid.




17

Item Description

: Circulation Desk Component: Computer Desk Unit

60" W x 30" D x 36" High overall with 29" High work surface Pedestal with one box and one file drawer on right One 6 outlet power strip with surge protector mounted underneath counter top 3”x3” WF9 “U” shaped under counter wire manager Fully articulating 11-1/2”D x 30”W keyboard/mouse tray unit Oak bullnose edging If bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid.




: 18

Item Description

: Circulation Desk Component: Corner Unit

90 degree, 30" x 30" x 36" H Radius front Oak bullnose edging If bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact item bid.




: 19

Item Description

: Circulation Desk Component: Book Drop Unit

36" Wide x 30" Deep x 36" High Book drop slot Must accommodate depressible book truck Oak bullnose edging If bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid.




: 20

Item Description

: Circulation Desk Component: Depressible Book Truck

26" Wide x 22" Deep x 29" High overall If bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid.




: 21

Item Description

: Single Faced Shelving/Bench Unit

As required to fit under window wide x 18”H x 12”D Continuous top with oak bullnose edging


End of Section


SECTION 12 93 13

BICYCLE RACKS

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 12 93 13 Page - 1 Bike Racks Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

Part 1 General 1.01 Summary

A. Section Includes: 1. Bike racks with Capacity to hold 8 bikes.

1.02 Submittals A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Product data:

1. Manufacturer’s standard product literature. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Installation instructions. 4. Maintenance instructions.

C. Submit powdercoat finish samples for approval. 1.03 Quality Assurance

A. Manufacturer Qualifications 1. Minimum 10 years experience in the manufacture of site furnishings and amenities. 2. Provide reference list of at least ten major transportation authorities, municipalities, universities, or

other high-use public environments currently using site furnishings and amenities fabricated by the manufacturer.

1.04 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Handle products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Store products in manufacturer’s original packaging until ready for installation. C. Protect products from impacts and abrasion during storage.

1.05 Warranty A. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty.

1. Warranty terms: one year from date of invoice against defects in materials and workmanship. Part 2 Products 2.01 Manufacturer

A. Basis-of-design product: provide bike racks based on the product named. 1. Madrax Uptown-8 Bike Rack 2. Manufacturer Contact:

Madrax 1080 Uniek Drive Waunakee, WI 53597 phone: 800.448.7931 email: [email protected] website: www.madrax.com

B. Bike Racks 1. Materials

a. Body: 3" Tube Steel, 2" C Channel and 1/2" and 3/4" Diameter Steel Rod 2. Finishes

a. Body: polyester powdercoat - Architect to select color from Wheel. 3. Dimensions

a. 60" long x 32" wide x 32" high. 4. Mounting: Surface mount. Provide stainless steel hardware.


SECTION 12 93 13

BICYCLE RACKS

Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 12 93 13 Page - 2 Bike Racks Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

Part 3 Execution 3.01 Examination

A. Verify that substrates are stable and capable of supporting the weight of items covered under this section. B. Verify that substrates have been adequately prepared to securely anchor those items that will be surface

mounted. 3.02 Installation

A. Install according to the manufacturer’s installation instructions. B. Install in conformance to applicable ADA guidelines and End User’s established Accessibility policies.

END OF SECTION


Dallas ISD - Oran M. Roberts 14 20 00 Page - 1 Hydraulic Elevators Elementary School - BP 74 12/30/2011

SECTION 14 20 00

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies hydraulic elevators.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section and are performed by other trades.

1. Section 01 50 00 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: protection of floor openings and

personnel barriers; temporary power and lighting. 2. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: elevator pit, elevator motor and pump foundation, and

grouting thresholds. 3. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: masonry hoistway enclosure, building-in and grouting hoistway

door frames, grouting thresholds. 4. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: pit ladder, divider beams, support for entrances and rails,

hoisting beam at top of hoistway. 5. Section 07145 - Cementitious Waterproofing: waterproofing of elevator pit. 6. Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning: ventilation and temperature control of

elevator equipment room. 7. Division 26 - Electrical: electrical service to main disconnect in elevator machine room; electrical

power for elevator installation and testing; electrical-disconnecting device to elevator equipment prior to activation of sprinkler system; electrical service for machine room; machine room and pit receptacles with ground-fault current protection; lighting in machine room and pit; wiring for telephone service to machine room, emergency generator for elevator operation.

8. Section 28 31 10 - Fire Alarm Systems: fire and smoke detectors and interconnecting devices; fire alarm signal lines to contacts in the machine room.

9. Division 27 - Communications: ADAAG-required emergency communications equipment. 10. Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork: excavation for cylinder well casing.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Comply with applicable building codes and elevator codes at the project site, including but not limited to the following:

1. ANSI A117.1, Buildings and Facilities, Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People.

2. ADAAG, Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines. 3. ANSI/NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. 4. ANSI/NFPA 80, Fire Doors and Windows. 5. ASME/ANSI A17.1, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. 6. ANSI/UL 10B, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 7. CAN/CSA C22.1, Canadian Electrical Code. 8. CAN/CSA-B44, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. 9. Model Building Codes. 10. All other local applicable codes.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: Elevator Arrangement

A. Performance Requirements for Elevators:

1. Quantity & Elevator Numbers: #1

2. Type: #1 Twin direct acting hydraulic cylinder without well holes.

3. Number of Stops: #1: 2 stops

4. Number of Openings: #1: 2 at Front;



5. Rise: #1: 15’-0” 6. Rated Capacity/Speed: #1: 2000 pounds, 100

7. Minimum Car Inside: Front Opening 2000# 5’ 8” wide x 4’ 3” deep

8. Inside Cab Height: 8’0”

Height Under Ceiling: 7’ 4 1/2”(2223mm)

9. Entrance Width & Type: 2000# Single-Slide Door 3’ 0” x 7’ 0” or 8’ 0”

10. Main Power Supply: 480, Volts + or - 5% of normal, 3 Phase, with a separate equipment grounding conductor.

11. Lighting Power Supply: 120 Volts, 1 Phase, 15 Amp, 60 Hz.

12. Stopping Accuracy: ±1/4" (6.4 mm) under any loading condition or direction of travel.

13. Door Opening Time for 7ft. painted hoistway and car doors: 2000# 3.5 seconds – Single Slide 36” door.

B. Simplex Collective Operation: Using a microprocessor-based controller, operation shall be automatic by means of the car and hall buttons. If all calls in the system have been answered, the car shall park at the last landing served.

C. Provide microprocessor-based control system with utilizes on-board diagnostics for servicing, trouble-

shooting, and adjusting without requiring the use of an outside service tool. If an on-board diagnostic system is not provided, a handheld service tool (or laptop), owner’s license, operation manual, and tool instructions must be provided in addition to the control system.

D. Car Operating Features

1. Full Collective Operation. 2. Single Speed Fan. 3. On/Off Light Switch.

4. Solid State Starting 5. Remote elevator monitoring REM ready. 6. Car-Stall Protection. 7. Firefighters' Service Phase I and Phase II 8. Top of Car Inspection.

9. Provision for Card Reader in Car (Card Reader Provided and Installed by Others).

E. Door Control Features:

1. Closed Loop Door Operator is a closed loop, microprocessor based door operator system. The door

operator will facilitate smooth operation under varying environmental influences such as, temperature, wind, friction, and component variation. The processor will monitor the door’s actual position and velocity compared to its desired position and velocity. If variations are detected in the profile the



command will be automatically corrected. The Closed Loop Door Operator control system shall not require machine room door control equipment.

2. Door noise not to exceed 58dBA. 3. Door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at a landing in response to a normal hall or

car call. 4. Door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at a landing in response to a normal hall or

car call.

Elevator doors shall be provided with a reopening device that will stop and reopen the car door(s) and hoistway door(s) automatically should the door(s) become obstructed by an object or person. Primary door protection shall consist of a two dimensional, multi-beam array projecting across the car door opening. Under normal operation and for any door position, the system shall detect as a blockage an opaque object that is equal to or greater than 1.3 inches (33 mm) in diameter when inserted between the car doors at vertical positions from within 1 inch (25 mm) above the sill to 71 inches (1800 mm) above the sill. Under degraded conditions (one or more blocked or failed beams), the primary protection shall detect opaque objects that are equal to or greater than 4” (100 mm) in diameter for the same vertical coverage. If the system performance is degraded to the point that the 4” object cannot be detected, the system shall maintain the doors open or permit closing only under nudging force conditions. The door reopening device shall also include a secondary, three dimensional, triangular infrared multi-beam array projecting across the door opening and extending into the hoistway door zone. The door opening device will cause the doors to reopen when it detects a person(s) or object(s) entering or exiting the car in the area between the hoistway doors or the entryway area adjacent to the hoistway doors. The size of the secondary protection zone shall vary as the door positions vary during opening and closing. The width of the zone shall be approximately one-third the size of the separation between the doors (or door and strike plate for single-slide doors) and shall be approximately centered in the door separation. In order to minimize detection of hallway passers-by who are not entering the elevator, the maximum zone penetration into the entryway shall not exceed 20” for any door separation. Normal penetration depth into the entryway from the car doors shall be ~14” for a door separation of 42”. The penetration shall reduce proportionally as the doors close. At door separations of 18” or less the secondary protection system may cease its normal operation since the depth of the zone recedes to where it is inside the hoistway doors. The vertical coverage of the secondary protection shall be ~19” (480 mm) above the sill to ~55” (1400 mm)above the sill (mid-thigh to shoulder of a typical adult). The secondary protection shall have an anti-nuisance feature which will ignore detection in the secondary zone after continual detection occurs for a significant time period in the secondary zone without corresponding detection in the primary protection zone; i.e. a person/object is in the entryway but does not enter. Normal secondary protection shall be re-enabled whenever a detection occurs in the primary zone. The reaction time of the door detector sub-system shall not exceed 60 milliseconds when both primary and secondary protection capabilities are active; nor 40 milliseconds when the secondary protection is disabled.

5. Door nudging operation to occur if doors are prevented from closing for an adjustable period of time.

F. Provide equipment according to Seismic zone: 1

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each system proposed for use. Include the following: 1. Signal and operating fixtures, operating panels and indicators. 2. Cab design, dimensions and layout. 3. Hoistway-door and frame details. 4. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 5. Expected heat dissipation of elevator equipment in machine room (BTU).



B. Shop Drawings: Submit approval layout drawings. Include the following:

1. Car, guide rails, buffers and other components in hoistway. 2. Maximum rail bracket spacing. 3. Maximum loads imposed on guide rails requiring load transfer to building structure. 4. Loads on hoisting beams. 5. Clearances and travel of car. 6. Clear inside hoistway and pit dimensions. 7. Location and sizes of access doors, hoistway entrances and frames.

C. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturer's standard operations and maintenance

manual. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer: Provide elevators manufactured by a firm with a minimum of 10 years experience in fabrication of elevators equivalent to those specified. Elevator manufacturer shall be ISO9002 certified.

B. Installer: Elevators shall be installed by the manufacturer.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Elevator system design and installation shall comply with the latest versions of

ASME A17.1

1. Elevator shall be designed in response to Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).

D. Permits and Inspections: Provide licenses and permits and perform required inspections and tests. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Should the building or the site not be prepared to receive the elevator equipment at the agreed upon date, the General Contractor will be responsible to provide a proper and suitable storage area on or off the premises.

Should the storage area be off-site and the equipment not yet delivered, then the elevator contractor, upon notification from the General Contractor, will divert the elevator equipment to the storage area. If the equipment has already been delivered to the site, then the General Contractor shall transport the elevator equipment to the storage area. The cost of elevator equipment taken to storage by either party, storage, and redeliver to the job site shall not be at the expense of the elevator contractor.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. The elevator contractor’s acceptance is conditional on the understanding that their warranty covers defective material and workmanship. The guarantee period shall not extend longer than one (1) year from the date of completion or acceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever is earlier, of each elevator. The guarantee excludes ordinary wear and tear or improper use, vandalism, abuse, misuse, or neglect or any other causes beyond the control of the elevator contractor and this express warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.

1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance service consisting of regular examinations, adjustments and lubrication of the elevator equipment shall be provided by the elevator contractor for a period of twelve (12) months after the elevator has been turned over for the customer’s use. This service shall not be subcontracted but shall be performed by the elevator contractor. All work shall be performed by competent employees during regular working hours of regular working days and shall include emergency 24-hour callback service. This service shall not cover adjustments, repairs or replacement of parts due to negligence, misuse, abuse or accidents caused by persons other than the elevator contractor. Only genuine parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of the original equipment shall be provided.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

A. Provide hydraulic elevators by Otis Elevator Company or approved equal. 2.02 EQUIPMENT: MACHINE ROOM COMPONENTS

A. The hydraulic system shall be of compact design suitable for operation under the required pressure. The power component shall be mounted in the hydraulic-fluid storage tank. The control valve shall control flow for up and down directions hydraulically and shall include an integral check valve. A control section including control solenoids shall direct the main valve and control: up and down starting, acceleration, transition from full speed to leveling speed, up and down stops, pressure relief and manual lowering. All of these functions shall be fully adjustable for maximum smoothness and to meet contract conditions. System to be provided with a muffler, low-pressure switch and a shut-off valve.

B. A microprocessor-based controller shall be provided, including necessary starting switches together with all

relays, switches, solid-state components and hardware required for operation, including door operation, as described herein. A three (3) phase overload device shall be provided to protect the motor against overloading.

C. A manual lowering feature shall permit lowering the elevator at slow speed in the event of power failure or for

adjusting purposes.

D. Pressure Switch #1 only 2.03 EQUIPMENT: HOISTWAY COMPONENTS

A. Plunger(s) and Cylinder(s): Each cylinder shall be constructed of steel pipe of sufficient thickness and suitable for the operating pressure. The top of each cylinder shall be equipped with a cylinder head with a drip ring to collect any oil seepage as well as an internal guide ring and self-adjusting packing. Each plunger shall be constructed of selected steel tubing or pipe of proper diameter machined true and smooth with a fine polished finish. Each plunger shall be provided with a stop ring electrically welded to it to prevent the plunger from leaving the cylinder. Each plunger and cylinder shall be installed plumb and shall operate freely with minimum friction.

A sealed PVC cylinder protection system shall be installed. The system shall provide a means to monitor the space between the PVC sleeve and cylinder wall and evacuate unwanted fluids, so as to prevent such fluids from remaining in contact with the cylinder.

B. Car Guide Rails: Tee-section steel rails with brackets and fasteners.

C. Spring Buffer: Helical coil spring type.

D. Wiring: Wiring for hoistway electrical devices included in scope of the elevator system, hall panels, pit emergency stop switch, and the traveling cable for the elevator car.

H. Hoistway Entrances

1. Frames: Entrance frames shall be of bolted construction for complete one-piece unit assembly. All

frames shall be securely fastened to fixing angles mounted in the hoistway and shall be UL fire rated steel. Sills shall be extruded aluminum

2. Doors: Entrance doors shall be of metal construction with vertical channel reinforcements.

3. Fire Rating: Entrance and doors shall be UL fire rated for 1-1/2 hour.

4. Entrance Finish: satin stainless steel



5. Entrance Markings: Entrance jambs shall be marked with 4” x 4” (102 mm x 102 mm) plates having raised floor markings with Braille adjacent. Markings shall be provided on both sides of the entrance.

6. Sight Guards: Black sight guards will be furnished with any metal finish door. Powder paint

matching sight guards will be furnished with powder paint doors. 2.04 EQUIPMENT: CAR COMPONENTS

A. Car Frame: A suitable car frame shall be provided with adequate bracing to support the platform and car enclosure. The buffer striking plate on the underside of the car-frame platform assembly must fully compress the spring buffer mounted in the pit before the plunger reaches its lower limit of travel.

B. Platform, Heavy Loading Type: The car platform shall be arranged to accommodate one-piece loads

weighing up to 25% of the rated capacity, such as wheeled food carts, stretchers, x-ray equipment, etc. The platform shall be recessed 5/16” for flooring by others.

C. Vertical Light-Weight [Series 1] Cab walls to have attached vertical non-removable panels, laminated front

and back with plastic laminate to be selected from Wilsonart standard chain. D. Car Front Finish: Select finish: satin stainless steel

D1. Car Door Finish: finish: satin stainless steel

E. Car top to be of wood material clad on both sides with a natural finish aluminum panel.

F. Ceiling Type:

Lexan [DC22L Ceiling] suspended ceiling shall consist of white translucent polycarbonate diffusers set in frame of extruded aluminum with fluorescent lighting fixtures.

G. Emergency Car Lighting: An emergency power unit employing a 6 volt, sealed rechargeable battery and

totally static circuits shall be provided to illuminate the elevator car and provide current to the emergency siren in the event of building power failure.

H. Emergency Pulsating Siren: Siren mounted on top of the car that is activated when the Alarm button in the

car operating panel is engaged. Siren shall have a rated sound pressure level of 80 dba at a distance of 3.0 m from the device. Siren shall respond with a delay of not more than 1 second after the switch or push button has been pressed

I. Exhaust Fan: An exhaust fan shall be mounted on the car top.

J. Utility Outlet: A 125V 15 amperes utility outlet with ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection shall be

furnished on top of the cab.

K. Handrail:

Rectangular Tubular Metal Bar [DH50 Handrails] 1/2” (13 mm) x 1-1/2” satin finish stainless steel provided on the rear of the car enclosure.

L. Threshold: aluminum

N. An electrical contact shall be provided on the car-top exit.

2.05 EQUIPMENT: SIGNAL DEVICES AND FIXTURES

A. Car Operating Panel: A car operating panel shall be provided which contains all push buttons, key switches, and message indicators for elevator operation. The car operating panel shall have a satin stainless steelfinish.



1. Flat, applied car operating panel shall be furnished. It shall contain a bank of round metal mechanical

illuminated buttons. Flush mounted to the panel and marked to correspond to the landings served, an emergency call button, door open and door close buttons, and switches for lights, inspection and the exhaust fan. Pan shaped design is not acceptable. Car operating panel shall not contain plastic housing components. The emergency call button shall be connected to a bell that serves as an emergency signal. All buttons to have raised numerals and Braille markings. Red LED halo illumination with Flat Flush Target finishes: satin stainless steel

The car operating panel shall be equipped with the following features: Standard: 1) Raised markings and Braille shall be provided to the left hand side of each push-button. 2) Car Position Indicator at the top of and integral to the car operating panel. 3) Door open and door close buttons. 4) Light key-switch. 5) Fan key-switch. 6) Inspection key-switch. 7) Elevator Data Plate marked with elevator capacity and car number. 8) Illuminated alarm button with raised markings. 10) In car stop switch 11) Firefighter’s hat 12) Firefighter’s Phase II Key-switch 13) Call Cancel Button Optional 1) Help Button – The help button shall initiate two-way communication between the car and a location inside the building, switching over to another location if the call is unanswered, where personnel are available who can take the appropriate action. Visual indicators are provided for call initiation and call acknowledgement. 2) Firefighter’s Phase II emergency in-car operating instructions, worded according to A17.1 2000, Article 2.27.7.2. 3) Landing Passing Signal: A chime bell shall sound in the car to signal that the car is either stopping at or passing a floor served by the elevator.

B. Car Position Indicator: A 16-segment, digital, vacuum fluorescent car position indicator shall be integral to

the car operating panel. C. Hall Fixtures: Hall fixtures shall be provided with necessary push buttons and key switches for elevator

operation. Hall fixtures shall have a 1. Hall fixtures shall feature round metal mechanical buttons marked to correspond to the landings, in raised fixture housings. Buttons shall be flat flush in vertically mounted fixture. Hall Lanterns and Position indicators shall be illuminated by means of LED. Fixture shall be satin stainless steel

D. Car Lantern and Chime: A directional lantern visible from the corridor shall be provided in the car entrance.

When the car stops and the doors are opening, the lantern shall indicate the direction in which the car is to travel and a chime will sound.

E. Key-switch Operation in addition to hall buttons at all landings.

F. Access key-switch at top floor in entrance jamb.

G. Include in bid Card reader provisions if District requests, 4 twisted shielded pairs in traveling cable.




A. Take field dimensions and examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions under which this

work is to be performed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Installation of all elevator components except as specifically provided for elsewhere by others. 3.03 DEMONSTRATION

A. The elevator contractor shall make a final check of each elevator operation with the Owner or Owner’s representative present prior to turning each elevator over for use. The elevator contractor shall determine that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly.

END OF SECTION
